Final Report (May 2013

Transcription

Kwanza Environmental Development Office
Study of Environmental Impact of Laúca Dam Construction Project
FINAL REPORT
MAY 2013
I-1
Credits:
Title:
Client:
Kwanza Environmental Development Office (Gabinete de Aproveitamento do Médio Kwanza –
GAMEK).
Rua do Massangano, s/n, Luanda.
Telephone: +244-222-445072 / 222-675801; Fax: +244-222-447973
http://www.gamek.com
Consultants:
Holísticos, Lda. – Serviços, Estudos & Consultoria.
Rua 60, Casa 559, Urbanização Harmonia, Benfica, Luanda.
Telephone: 222 006938; Fax: 222 006435
Email: [email protected]
www.holisticos.co.ao
Intertechne Consultores, S.A. Av. João Gualberto, 1259, 16º andar – Alto da Glória. CEP 80030001 Curitiba – Paraná – Brazil
Telephone: +55(41)3219-7200; Fax: +55(41)3219-7848
Date:
May 2013.
I-2
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
I-3
CONTENTS
1. FOREWARD................................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1. BACKGROUND ........................................................................................................................................ 7
1.2. INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 8
1.3. JUSTIFICATION FOR THE EIA .............................................................................................................. 9
1.4. OBJECTIVES........................................................................................................................................... 15
1.5. SCOPE OF THE STUDY......................................................................................................................... 16
1.6. METHODOLOGY ................................................................................................................................... 17
1.7. EIA TEAM ............................................................................................................................................... 21
1.8. LOCATION .............................................................................................................................................. 22
1.9. DETERMINATION OF AREA OF INFLUENCE .................................................................................. 28
1.9.1. DIRECT PROJECT AFFECTED AREA .............................................................................................. 28
1.9.2. AREA OF DIRECT INFLUENCE........................................................................................................ 29
1.9.3. AREA OF INDIRECT INFLUENCE ................................................................................................... 29
1.9.4. REGIONAL COVERAGE AREA ........................................................................................................ 29
1.10. PUBLIC CONSULTATION PROCESS ................................................................................................ 31
1.10.1. PCDP Objectives ................................................................................................................................. 31
1.10.2. PCDP Scope ........................................................................................................................................ 32
Abbreviations
List of Figures
FIGURE 1.1: GEOGRAPHIC LOCATION OF THE LAÚCA DAM (GENERAL)
FIGURE 1.2: LOCATION AND ACCESS TO LAÚCA DAM
FIGURE 1.3: SOCIAL SENSITIVITY MAP. LAÚCA DAM CONSTRUCTION PROJECT AREAS OF
INFLUENCE
List of Tables
TABLE 1.1: MIDDLE KWANZA RIVER BASIN – COMPARISON OF HYDROELECTRIC
POTENTIAL STUDIES
TABLE 1.2: ELECTRIC POWER CONSUMPTION IN ANGOLA IN GWH BY SUPPLY SYSTEM
(1990/2007)
TABLE 1.3: INSTALLED AND FORECAST CAPACITY FOR ANGOLA’S NORTH, CENTRAL, AND
SOUTH SYSTEMS (MW)
I-4
TABLE 1.4: HYDROELECTRIC ENERGY SYSTEM SUPPLY IN 2007
TABLE 1.5: HYDROELECTRIC POTENTIAL WITH THE DAMS GREATER THAN 50 MW
TABLE 1.6: CONTACT INFORMATION FOR PROJECT ENTERPRISE (GAMEK
TABLE 1.7: CONTACTINFORMATION FOR PROJECT CONSTRUCTION FIRM (ODEBRECHT)
TABLE 1.8: CONTACT INFORMATION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING FIRM
(HOLÍSTICOS)
TABLE 1.9: CONTACT INFORMATION FOR CONSULTING FIRM (INTERTECHNE)
TABLE 1.10: INFRASTRUCTURE WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE EIA
TABLE 1.11: AUTHORITIES INTERVIEWED FOR PRELIMINARY SURVEYS (2007-2009)
TABLE 1.12: AUTHORITIES INTERVIEWED FOR THE RIVER DIVERSION EIA (2012)
TABLE 1.13: VILLAGES INTERVIEWED IN 2013 FOR SOCIAL SURVEY
TABLE 1.14: LISTOF GAMEK TECHNICAL EXPERTS
TABLE 1.15: LIST OF EXPERTS INVOLVED IN THE EIA
TABLE 1.16: PROJECT AREA OF DIRECT INFLUENCE
Appendices
Appendix I – Certificate of Registry of Holísticos at the Ministry of Environment
Appendix II – Community Meeting Attendance List
Appendix III – Project Information Brochure
Appendix IV – Comment Form
Appendix V – Odebrecht Waste Management Plan
Appendix VI – Avifauna Identified in Field Survey
I-5
Abbreviations
AAR
Area of Regional Scope
ADA
Project Affected Area
AICD
Africa Infrastructures Country Diagnostic
AID
Area of Direct Influence
AII
Area of Indirect Influence
AH
Hydroelectric Unit
BCC
Compacted Cement Cylinders
EIA
Environmental Impact Assessment
ENE
Angolan National Energy Company
GAMEK
Kwanza Environmental Development Office
GWh
Giga Watts hour
IFC
International Finance Corporation
KV
Kilo Volts
KWh
Kilo Watts hour
MW
Mega Watts
PCDP
Public Consultation and Dissemination Plan
SONEFE
National Society for Ultramarine Enterprise Studies and Financing
I-6
1. FOREWARD
This chapter examines relevant aspects of the background to the Laúca Dam Construction Project.
The objectives of the environmental impact assessment are set forth, in addition to the project
justification, within the local and regional context. The pages below also indicate the technical
experts engaged in preparing the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). Additionally, the
precise location of the project is described, as are the scope of the Environmental Impact
Assessment and the project areas of influence.
1.1. BACKGROUND
In the colonial period, initial feasibility studies were conducted on hydroelectric power generation
in the Middle Kwanza River Basin, at which time a potential annual generating capacity of 6,510
MW was identified through the implementation of nine (9) hydroelectric units.
From 1950 through 1970, companies from different countries performed studies based on differing
approaches and with varying levels of detail. The first studies were conducted by an American firm,
Hydrotechnic Corporation, in 1955, with funds from the Marshal Plan. In the 1950s, the Angolan
Government agency with primary responsibility for the energy sector, the Bengo and Lucala
Kwanza Studies Brigade, supplemented the initial work.
The parameters evaluated in the studies centered on the physical characteristics of the hydrographic
basin in the Middle Kwanza River Basin, specifically: local hydrological characteristics, through
assessment of the respective water fall ratios for purposes of the implementation of future
hydroelectric plants, water flow, and local climate conditions.
The studies were conducted on the basis of field studies in conjunction with photogrammetric over
flights and aero-photogrammetric restitutions, referenced to the official first order network and to
the average sea level as measured at the Luanda tide gauge. Another point taken into consideration
in this stage was whether the units could be built independently from each other and whether
implementation projects could make maximum use of the natural fall of the respective rivers,
producing energy with sufficient power to meet local demand.
In the 1960s, the National Society for Ultramarine Enterprise Studies and Financing (Sociedade
Nacional de Estudo e Financiamento de Empreendimentos Ultramarinos – SONEFE) undertook a
new series of studies, in an effort to collect additional data and update existing information.
As a result of the preliminary studies, in 1962 the Cambambe Hydroelectric Unit (AH) entered into
operation, located in the vicinity of the city of Dondo, through two implementation phases. The
first, a facility completed in the early 1960s with a total installed power of 260 MW, divided into
four (4) 65 MW units, operated under reduced flow conditions without regulation of upstream
reservoir discharge flows (effective power of 180 MW). The dam was designed to add a total of 80
MW (20 MW X 4 turbines) through Plant 1 (denominated the Cambambe Elevation) and 700 MW
(175 MW x 4 turbines) through Plant 2 (designated Cambambe 2) to the National Electric Power
System. The Cambambe dam refurbishment and elevation work was initiated in 2011.
The sequence of SONEFE studies, the General Middle Kwanza River Plan – Preliminary Study and
Determination of the 2nd Echelon (Plano Geral do Médio Kwanza – Estudo Prévio e Definição do
2° Escalão) (1966) and the respective amendment (1972) set forth supplementary and more detailed
I-7
data on the Middle Kwanza River Basin with information corresponding to the preliminary
inventory.
In the early 1980s, the Angola Energy Resources Survey identified the energy potential of Angola’s
hydrographic units, the most notable of which, in terms of hydroelectric generating potential, was
the Kwanza River, a finding that served to confirm the SONEFE studies. Based on the results
obtained, a decision was taken within the scope of Angola’s infrastructure restructuring process to
invest in the hydroelectric potential of the Middle Kwanza River Basin through construction of the
Capanda Dam, which entered into operation in 2004 with an installed capacity of 520 MW.
The following year, EngeHidro reevaluated the alternatives put forward by SONEFE and
Energoprojekt, the results of which are provided in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Comparison of hydroelectric potential studies.
Studies
Energoprojekt
EngeHidro
GWh
Mwave
GWh
Mwmed
Capanda
1,000
114
1,937
221
Nhangue
1,300
148
2,241
256
Laúca
4,700
537
5,043
576
Caculo Cabaça
7,500
856
8,032
917
Cambambe
4,100
468
4,259
486
Source: Intertechne Consultores S.A., Review of Water Flow in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Based on the studies above and Angola’s growing energy needs, steps were taken to boost the
country’s existing energy potential, beginning with construction of a dam on the Kwanza River for
the Laúca hydroelectric facility.
1.2. INTRODUCTION
The Laúca Dam is located at kilometer 307.5 of the Kwanza River in a narrow U-shaped valley
marked by a succession of concentrated rapids and falls stretching approximately 30 meters, with an
incline of 4 m/km.
Implementation of the Hydroelectric Unit will require a series of projects, including:
• Construction of basic infrastructure: temporary and permanent access points, administrative
and industrial sites, technical energy supply, water, sewage, and other systems;
• Construction of two river diversion tunnels;
• Construction of a spillway measuring 35 m high with 466.170 m3 of landfill volume.
• Construction of a Compacted Cement Cylinder (CCC) dam measuring 132 m high and 625
m wide;
• Construction of a water intake and ecological water intake system;
• Construction of a landfill for solid waste generated at the project site;
• Implementation of a main station with six 334 MW turbine units;
• Filling of a reservoir through flooding of an area covering 185 km2.
I-8
1.3. JUSTIFICATION FOR THE EIA
Angola’s long conflict and the severe economic and social impact on the country stemming from
the conflict generated acute imbalances in the delivery of various basic public services, including in
the energy sector. The Angolan Government made reconstruction of infrastructure damaged during
the conflict a priority. According to a 2011 diagnostic analysis of infrastructure in African countries
(Africa Infrastructures Country Diagnostic – AICD), the end of Angola’s conflict coincided with a
rise in oil prices, serving to generate revenues for the national reconstruction effort.
Following a meeting to review the status of the domestic and global economy, the Angolan National
Bank’s Committee on Monetary Policy (Comité de Política Monetária do Banco Nacional de
Angola – CPM) concluded that the most recent estimate by the Angolan Executive is for real GDP
growth on the order of 8.8%. The expansion in non-oil related economic activities has been driven
by the farming, construction, commercial, and manufacturing sectors. All of these demand large
quantities of energy, as does the country’s growing urban population, which today faces frequent
supply interruptions.
From 2002-2008, Angola expanded its energy production capacity from 830 MW to 1,200 MW.
Data provided by the National Electric Energy Company (Empresa Nacional de Electricidade –
ENE) indicates growth in electric power distribution in the province of Launda in the third quarter,
reaching a daily average of 366 MW at the end of September 2012.
However supply continues to lag behind demand. By way of example, the maximum initial forecast
demand for 2009 in the North System was approximately 520 MW, while peak consumption in
Luanda at 5:23 p.m. in April 2009 was 678 MW, of which only 520 MW was fully supplied, with
another 158 MW met only partially through a rotating distribution system.
Approximately 90% of the companies operating in Angola operate an in-house generators to meet
their energy demand and address the frequent supply disruptions.
According to a report by the Ministry of Industry (2005), expansion of the sector is contingent on
boosting the supply of electric power, an objective tied to other strategic improvement and
implementation plans.
Data of the National Electric Energy Company (Empresa Nacional de Electricidade – ENE), set out
in Table 1.2, indicates the growth in electric power consumption in Angola, which accelerated even
further over the past decade.
Table 1.2: Electric power consumption in Angola in GWh by Supply System (1990/2007).
Year
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
Electric Power Consumption (GWh)
North
Central
South
Isolated
System
System
System
Systems
582.20
102.40
60.30
32.90
696.20
111.50
67.10
29.90
714.80
127.20
65.30
37.40
677.80
97.10
62.60
36.30
756.80
95.70
63.70
20.90
I-9
Total
777.80
904.70
944.70
873.80
937.10
Electric Power Consumption (GWh)
North
Central
South
Isolated
Year
System
System
System
Systems
820,70
101,40
76,30
29,20
1995
808,80
96,50
80,70
60,50
1996
904,80
87,50
76,80
76,10
1997
1.054,30
87,30
97,30
69,30
1998
1.064,80
99,60
83,10
88,40
1999
1.145,80
93,00
89,70
97,50
2000
1.264,30
146,10
125,00
99,00
2001
1.400,80
156,00
120,40
105,10
2002
1.559,10
149,00
131,50
155,40
2003
1.814,17
117,76
131,68
179,81
2004
2.137,32
136,23
160,90
202,74
2005
2.414,35
166,72
159,75
241,99
2006
3.137,43
481,22
162,18
500,17
2007*
*2007 data represent estimates.
Total
1.027,60
1.046,50
1.145,20
1.308,20
1.335,90
1.426,00
1.634,40
1.782,30
1.995,00
2.243,42
2.637,19
2.982,81
4.281,00
Source: National Electric Power Company (ENE). Energy Sector Development Program 20082013.
Angola’s energy grid is centered primarily on hydroelectric generation, although thermoelectric
generation has a strong presence as well, accounting for nearly 40% of the country’s electric power
supply. With a total installed capacity of 1,010 MW in 2007, the system is not only costly but
registers high pollution levels as well. An additional challenge lies in transporting generated energy,
resulting in effective consumption of only 81% of the total, as only 55.3% of the country’s 2,231
km of transmission lines are currently available and operational.
Table 1.3 offers a summary of the forecast installed capacity for the North, Central, and South
Systems, based on thermoelectric and hydro generation for each survey year.
Table 1.3: Installed and forecast capacity for Angola’s North, Central, and South Systems (MW)
Region/Year
2009
2010
2011
2018
North
187
389
389
1,229
Central
90
126
126
126
South
42
42
42
100
Total
319
557
557
1,455
Source: Catholic University of Angola, Angola Energy Report 2011 (Relatório Energia de Angola
2011).
Configuration of Angola’s currently electric power supply system is organized around four (4)
separate systems, classified according to the geographic location in which each is implemented, as
shown in Table 1.4, indicating the provinces served by the respective systems and the installed and
available capacity of each.
I-10
Table 1.4: Hydroelectric Energy Supply Systems in 2007
System
Norte
Central
South
Lunda
North
(isolated
systems)
Provinces Served
Hydroelectric
Facility
Power
Installed
(MW)
Available
(MW)
Capanda
520
520
Cambambe
180
135
Mabubas
17.8
0
Benguela
Lomaum
Biópio
35
14.4
0
7.2
13%
Huíla and Namibe
Matala
40.8
27.2
6%
Luachimo
8.4
4.2
7%
Total
816.4
693.6
100%
Luanda, Bengo,
Kwanza Sul,
Kwanza Norte and
Malanje
Cabinda, Huambo,
Bié, Zaire
Kuando Kubango,
Cunene
Moxico, Lunda Norte,
Lunda Sul, and Uíge
Share
(%)
74%
Source: Catholic University of Angola, Angola Energy (2007).
A review of the data in Table 1.4 reveals that the North System has the largest installed and
available capacity, corresponding to 74% of the country’s energy. This situation is explained by the
presence of Angola’s most important urban centers in the region, including the capital city of
Luanda, with the largest population and, by extension, most dynamic economy.
It is also important to note that Angola’s estimated hydroelectric potential exceeds 18,000 MW, a
total identified in only six (6) of the country’s 48 river basins. In other words, in addition to tapping
only 3.86% of its total known energy potential, the generating potential of 87.5% of the country’s
river systems has yet to be mapped.
Table 1.5: Hydroelectric potential with Dams greater than 50 MW
River Basin
Hydroelectric Facility
Installable Power (MW)
Lucala River
7
980
Kwanza River
10
5,730
Longa River
7
1,190
Queve River
8
3,020
Catumbela River
15
1,679
Cunene River
14
2,045
Total
61
14,644
Source: Catholic University of Angola, Angola Energy (2007).
I-11
Of Angola’s 48 river basins, the Kwanza River Basin has the largest energy generating capacity;
currently, 700 MW of energy are generated at the two hydroelectric plants that supply the North
System, the Cambambe Hydroelectric Unit, with an installed capacity of 180 MW, and the Capanda
Hydroelectric Unit, with 520 MW of installed capacity. However, the total estimated capacity of the
river basin is 6,780 MW, with guaranteed energy generation of 26,200 GWh. In this context,
feasibility studies have been performed for the construction of an additional seven (7) hydroelectric
facilities downstream from the Capanda Dam.
Roll-out of the Capanda Hydroelectric Unit paved the way for doubling the country’s energy
capacity and the construction of new downstream plants, in addition to expanding steady energy
supplies from the Cambambe Dam, due to the benefits, on the order of 350 m3/s every year, arising
from the control of water flows on the Kwanza River by the Capanda Dam. The Government
developed guidelines and programs for the Angolan energy and water sectors for the period 20092012, including plans for the implementation of measures to align energy balance in terms of supply
and demand, with a view to preventing energy waste and future shortages from emerging as a drag
on the national development efforts.
One of the objectives of the Angola Long-Term Development Strategy 2025 (Estratégia de
Desenvolvimento a Longo Prazo, Angola 2025) 1 is to ensure that all energy sources encompassed
in Angola’s energy grid provide an efficient and integrated contribution to the country’s
development, promoting the increased use of renewable energy sources and energy self-sufficiency
in Angola.
The electric power and water sector investment programs set out a series of goals to be met by the
Ministry of Energy and Water through 2016:
• Increased per capita consumption: The primary target to be met by 2016 involves the
implementation of 7,000 MW of production capacity, or 95,000 GWh, derived primarily
from renewable resources, with a view to ensuring a per capita consumption level of 4,000
KWh;
• Increase in the number of household connections and accesses, estimated at 2 million;
• Interconnection of all isolated systems and the creation of the National Energy Transport
Network (Rede Nacional de Transporte de Energia);
• Increased contribution, up to 1.5% of the total, by new and renewable energy sources (wind
and solar) throughout the energy grid.
The program also provides a schedule of ongoing and planned projects for energy production,
transportation and distribution, for which the following outcomes are expected:
• Implementation of 7,000 MW of production capacity, representing a six-fold increase over
existing capacity;
• Implementation of a 2,607 km energy transport network at 400 kV and a 2010 km
transportation network at 220 kV;
• Construction of 46 small hydroelectric units with a total installed capacity of approximately
180 MW;
1
Electric power and water sector investment program 2016 (Ministry of Energy and Water – MINEA).
I-12
• Implementation of a 2,350 km distribution line and construction of 37 new substations,
1,300 converters, primarily in the area of Luanda.
The Angolan Government proposed a set of strategic recommendations for energy generation to
promote sustainable development (Presidential Decree 256/11):
• Reduced biomass use in Angola’s energy grid;
• Reduced “carbon footprint (CO2)” through the development of an electric energy production
park founded primarily on hydro infrastructure.
Given the characteristics, location, and scope of the project, a number of potential environmental
and social impacts are expected, both in the construction phase and operational phase of the Laúca
Dam. Pursuant to the Law of Environmental Bases (Lei de Bases do Ambiente – No. 5/98, dated
June 19) and other applicable statutes, implementation of a project of this scope must be preceded
by an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) consisting of the following:
• The Environmental Impact Assessment, which must address, but not be limited to, the
following:
o
o
o
o
Description of the project;
All technology and location options for the project and an analysis of potential nonexecution of the project;
Systematic identification and assessment of the environmental impacts generated during
construction of the energy generation dam;
Determination of the geographic limits of all directly and indirectly project affected
areas by impacts, designated as the project area of direct influence and project area of
indirect influence, for which purpose all human populations and other living beings and
the river basin within which the project is located should be taken into account.
• Non-Technical Summary of the Study, for purposes of public consultation and
dissemination of information (including, at least, the objectives, scope, criteria, summary of
the process, description of the environment, proposed mitigation measures, conclusions, and
recommendations);
• Any other information deemed pertinent by virtue of the specific features and characteristics
of the project, including its relevance to the economy and development of the Middle
Kwanza River Basin region and surrounding areas.
The EIA was prepared pursuant to the applicable laws governing Environmental Impact
Assessments and is based on the Terms of Reference approved by the Ministry of Environment, in
accordance with Executive Decree No. 92/12, dated March 1.
For purposes of preparing the Environmental Impact Assessment on the project in question,
Odebrecht Angola, on behalf of and under the coordination of the Kwanza Environmental
Development Office (Gabinete de Aproveitamento do Médio Kwanza – GAMEK), contracted
Holísticos – Serviços, Estudos e Consultoria, Lda. – which prepared this document in partnership
with Intertechne S.A., following field data collection surveys, meetings with stakeholders, and
reviews of the project’s technical documentation and corresponding bibliography.
I-13
The Construtora Norberto Odebrecht S.A., the lead firm of the Odebrecht business group’s
Engineering and Construction unit, was contracted, through its subsidiary, Odebrecht Angola –
Projectos e Serviços Lda., a private sector construction company with over 28 years of experiences
in the Angolan construction segment, to execute construction of the Laúca Dam.
GAMEK is a component body of the Ministry of Energy and Water, with an independent legal and
administrative and financial structure. Its primary objective is to undertake studies, preparatory
analyses, and projects for rational water resource use in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
GAMEK’s scope of responsibility is the territorial space under the direct influence of the Middle
Kwanza River Basing region.
Table 1.6: Contact Information for Project Enterprise (GAMEK)
Name
Address
Telephone
Legal Representative
Name
Position
Taxpayer Registry
No.
Telephone
Email
Enterprise
Gabinete de Aproveitamento do Médio Kwanza
Rua do Massangano S/N, Bairro Operário, Sambizanga
– Luanda
(244) 222 445072 / 222675801
Eurico José Martins Mandslay
General Director
7403010230
925141480
[email protected]
Table 1.7: Contact Information for Construction Company (Odebrecht)
Name
Commercial Registry No.
Address
Telephone
Facsimile
Name
Position
Taxpayer Registry No.
Telephone
Email
Enterprise
Consortium Constituted by Construtora Norberto
Odebrecht S.A. - Sucursal Angola and Odebrecht
Angola
Construção e Projectos de Energia Lda.
2008.731 and 1926-11, respectively
Av. Talatona s/n; Belas Business Park II, Torre Cabinda
- 8° Andar, Luanda Sul – Luanda
244 26 75000
244 26 75000
Marcus Fábio Souza Azevedo
Contract Director
270 878 898 18
924744019
[email protected]
Holísticos is an Angolan environmental consulting firm based in Luanda and registered with the
Ministry of Environment (see Registration Certificate in Appendix I), established in 2006. It is
staffed by a team of dynamic multidisciplinary experts with extensive experience in the
environmental field (see contact information in Table 1.8).
I-14
Table 1.8: Contact Information for Environmental Consulting Firm (Holísticos)
Enterprise
Holísticos, Lda. – Serviços, Estudos & Consultoria
Name
42639
Commercial Registry No.
5401156421
Environmental Consultant Registry No. - Ministry of Environment:
001
Urbanização Harmonia, Rua 60, Casa 559,
Address
Benfica, Luanda
+244 222 006938
Telephone
+244 222 006435
Facsimile
Miguel Morais, Managing Partner
Name
Rua 60, Casa 559, Urbanização Harmonia
Address
923410186
Telephone
2426, Apartado IV
Post Office Box
[email protected]
Email
Intertechne is a Brazilian consulting and engineering firm in the dam, hydroelectric, hydraulic, and
infrastructure project segment with vast experience in the development of feasibility studies, basic
project designs, executive projects, and construction management operations (see Table 1.9).
Table 1.9: Contact Information for Consulting Firm (Intertechne)
Name
Address
Telephone
Facsimile
Name
Address
Telephone
Email
Enterprise
INTERTECHNE CONSULTORES S.A.
80.378.052/0001-35 (Brazilian Corporate Tax Registry
No.)
Av. João Gualberto, 1259, 16º andar - Alto da Glória
CEP 80030-001 - Curitiba, PR – Brazil
+55(41)3219-7200
+55(41)3219-7848
Lourenço Justiniano Naotake Babá
Avenida João Gualberto 1259, 18º andar – Alto da Glória
– Curitiba – Paraná – Brazil – 80.030-001
55 41 3219-7200
[email protected]
1.4. OBJECTIVES
The fundamental purpose of an Environmental Impact Assessment consists in analyzing how the
proposed project will impact, whether adversely or positively, on the quality of the environment and
its ecosystems, including the quality of life of individuals and communities in surrounding areas of
the project site. In this light, a study of this nature is expected to play a lead role in minimizing,
managing, and continuously monitoring the impacts identified in this document.
I-15
Preparation of this Environmental Impact Assessment serves to provide substance to the applicable
Angolan environmental laws. The assessment had the following objectives:
• To describe the project, report on the Laúca Dam construction project work, and implement
the respective equipment and to analyze the environmental and social benefits inherent to
implementation of the project;
• To provide information on alternatives for preventing, mitigating, or reducing potential
adverse environmental impacts in ecologically sensitive areas, comparing the benefits and
disadvantages of each option and setting forth the reasons justifying selection of the
recommended option;
• To prepare a socioeconomic description of the project area (with particular emphasis on
resident communities located in close proximity to the dam construction site and the
corresponding reservoir) and a description of the specific environment susceptible to impact
by project activities;
• To hold consultations with populations potentially affected by dam construction work and
operation, with a view to identifying the needs, expectations, and demands of the population
and keeping the public updated on the status of the project. To this end, a Public
Consultation and Dissemination Plan (Plano de Consulta e Divulgação Pública – PCDP)
will be developed;
• To propose mitigation measures to reduce pollution, environmental disruptions, and other
potential adverse impacts generated during the Laúca Dam construction and operational
phases.
1.5. SCOPE OF THE STUDY
Given the existing deficiencies in meeting current energy demand, a proposal was developed to
build a new dam downstream from Capanda.
The Laúca Dam will add 2,070 MW to the national energy system, a total which does not meet
current demand. The dam under study represents a more cost effective alternative for boosting
energy supply, with greater assurance of regular energy provisions to meet Angola’s development
needs.
In the context of this study and based on the respective objectives, the items below were selected for
purposes of constituting the project scope. The infrastructure for the project is provided in Table
1.10.
• Identify the significant environmental issues and effects caused by specific activities
inherent to equipment installation, dam construction, support infrastructure and operation, in
addition to construction of project access points;
• Identify significant effects on populations in the surrounding area and project workers
caused by projected environmental impacts;
I-16
• Facilitate and consider the contacts with and information provided to project affected
populations, understand their values as individuals and communities in regard to
environmental quality;
• Evaluate the concerns expressed by the population in regard to the possible effects of the
project and determine how to proceed;
• Define the limits and scope of a more detailed time and resource optimization analysis and
assessment;
• Determine the scope of the assessment in connection with the respective analytical methods
and consultation procedures, with a view to enhancing the efficiency of the environmental
impact assessment process;
• Organize, focus, and communicate the potential impacts and concerns to support more
detailed analysis and informed decision-making.
Table 1.10: Infrastructure within the scope of the EIA
Infrastructure within the Scope of the EIA
Damming of River
Filling of Reservoir
Deposits
Construction of Sewage Landfill at Work Site
Construction of Laúca Dam
Construction of Power Station
Construction of Water Intake
Infrastructure outside the Scope
of the EIA
Diversion of River
Construction of coffer-dams
Principal Work Site
1.6. METHODOLOGY
The Environmental Impact Study for the Laúca Dam construction project in the Middle Kwanza
River Basin was based on a variety of methodologies applied to analysis of the pertinent
environmental and social issues.
The report is the product of preliminary surveys conduct in the period November 2007-August 2009
for the Study of the Laúca-Caculo Cabaça Dams. A technical update was performed from October
to December 2012, limiting the study area to Laúca, i.e. the proposed area for construction of two
river diversion tunnels, followed by the Environmental Impact Assessment 2 on the project.
As part of the work on the future dam, the EIA included a research a methodological and
bibliographic survey, contacts with authorities, and field studies, as set forth below:
2
EIA submitted January 21, 2013.
I-17
• The research work and bibliographic survey includes a detailed analysis of the
documentation on construction of the dam in the Middle Kwanza River Basin region and
other documents, with an emphasis on studies, reports, and documents in connection with
the Capanda and Cambambe hydroelectric projects (also located on the Kwanza River), the
EIA on the Kwanza River Diversion project in Laúca, as well as the energy and water
sector’s development strategy;
• Secondary data was also collected and analyzed when deemed important to the study and
relevant for planning and collecting primary data and providing a detailed description of the
national and regional context to justify the project. Primary information sources included
published reports and data on the Angolan Government’s portal, academic research
(Agostinho Neto University and Catholic University of Angola), in addition to documents
prepared by SONEFE, GAMEK, and the Ministry of Energy and Water;
• The social component study was based on new field visits to potentially affected localities,
areas visited previously in the study’s initial phase (2007-2009) as part of the “Laúca –
Caculo Cabaça” study. In this period, visits were conduct to the provinces of Kwanza Sul,
Kwanza Norte, and Malanje, as well as sanzalas and small communities in the target
localities;
• The social component methodology used from 2007 to 2009 included the use of guides for
the individual interviews conducted with Municipal and Community Administrators and
community focus groups. Visits were conducted to the following municipalities in the
study’s first phase:
o
o
o
o
Libolo (Kwanza Sul), where the Municipal and Community Administrators of
Kissongo and Cabuta were interviewed;
Mussende (Kwanza Sul), where the communities of Kissaquina Sul and
Bangwagwa (on the left bank of the Kwanza River) and locations potentially
affected by the reservoir were studied and the Municipal Administrator
interviewed;
Cacuso (Malanje), where, in addition to interviews with Municipal and
Community Administrators in Pungo Andongo, eight (8) communities located
on the Capanda – Dondo highway were surveyed, given their location in areas of
high water tables in relation to the Kwanza River;
Nhangue ya Pepe and Ndala Ngola, villages located near the project
implementation area.
• The social surveys conducted in 2012 for the river diversion EIA included studies in villages
located near the project area and downstream from the project site within a 15 kilometer
radius, to the extent the study encompasses construction of the two (2) Kwanza River
diversion tunnels only, not construction of the Laúca Dam. The visits involved direct
contacts with municipal and community administrators, as well as local and traditional
authorities and the general population. The collection and preparation of the pertinent social
and economic data centered on aspects related to household information, demographic
statistics, and other data on capital assets in connection with human, natural, economic,
cultural, and physical subsistence means in communities subject to potential adverse and
positive impacts alike. However, broad environmental and social information produced for
I-18
previous studies was used where deemed necessary for understanding the region, identifying
the respective impacts, and determining the appropriate mitigation measures;
• Additionally, the EIA for the Laúca River diversion project included consultations in the
following villages: Nhangue ya Pepe, Ndala Ngola, Dumbo Ya Pepe, and Kibenda, given
their location downstream from the project, while communities located upstream from the
project are not expected to be affected by construction of the river diversion tunnels.
However, since there will be demand for job opportunities, the Laúca EIA examined the
villages of Muta, Kirinje, Cassula, Yang Ya Colo, Kiangulungo and Kissaquina, located on
the main road connecting the project site to Capanda.
• Field studies were conducted for the environmental component in the proposed project area
and surrounding areas, with an emphasis on the principal environmental features described
for the project as set out in the respective reference situation. To this end, experts in various
fields and specific methodologies for each selected descriptor were deployed. The primary
descriptors were divided into the physical environment (data on soil, geomorphology,
geology, hydrology, climate, and air quality) and biotic environment (description of the land
and aquatic vegetation and wildlife and cartography). In the study’s second phase, visits
were conducted to update the information and verify potential new species in the location.
The studies provided the basis for the EIA field surveys of April and May 2013. More
detailed data on the methodology employed to describe the reference situation is provided in
Chapter 4. The data includes technical and scientific information on the social and
environmental surveys of both the biotic and physical environment;
• The contacts with local and traditional authorities were accomplished during execution of
the area data surveys. The list of interview subjects in the preliminary study (2007-2009)
and river diversion (2012) phase of the social survey are shown in Table 1.11 and Table
1.12, respectively.
Table 1.11: Authorities interviewed during preliminary surveys (2007-2009).
Province
Municipality
Position
Administrator of the
Municipality of Libolo
Deputy Administrator
of the Municipality of
Libolo
Individual
Luis Mariano Lopes
Carneiro
Correia Victorino
Libolo
Deputy Community
Administrator of
Kissongo
Kwanza Sul
Community
Administrator of
Cabuta
I-19
Jeremias António
Manuel Pedro
Province
Municipality
Mussende
Malanje
Position
Individual
Administrator of
Mussende
Eduardo João Caetano
Head of the Village
Secretariat of Kienha
Victor Lucas
Administrator of
Pungo
Andongo
António Manuel Ebo
Cacuso
Table 1.12: Authorities Interviewed for the River Diversion EIA (2012).
Province
Municipality
Kwanza Norte
Cambambe
Malanje
Cacuso
Position
Soba
Soba
Village
Dumbo Ya Pepe
Kibenda
Soba
Nhangue Ya Pepe
Soba
Ndala Ngola
Individual
Gabriel Tomas
Francisco Domingos
Correia António
Fonseca
António Mateus André
The villages visited in 2013 during the dam construction phase EIA field survey and consultation
phase are set forth in Table 1.13. In addition to the villages, authorities of the Municipal
Administrations of Cacuso and Mussende were consulted as well. The meeting attendance lists are
provided in Appendix II.
Table 1.13: Villages interviewed in 2013 for the social survey
Province
Municipality
Kwanza Norte
Cambambe
Malanje
Cacuso
District
São Pedro da
Kilemba
Pungo Andongo
Date
04/11/2013
04/09/2013
04/11/2013
04/08/2013
04/08/2013
09/04/2013
04/09/2013
04/12/2013
04/10/2013
04/10/2013
Kwanza Sul
Mussende
Kenha
05/08/2013
05/08/2013
05/08/2013
More detailed data on the public consultation process is provided in Chapter 4.
I-20
Village
Dumbo Ya Pepe
Nhangue Ya Pepe
Ndala Ngola
Kibenda
Kirinje
Cassula
Muta
Kiangulungo
Kissaquina
Dala Kiosa
(Dombo)
Bangwangwa
Kissaquina Sul
Calombe
Preparation of this report also took into account the study on implementation of the hydroelectric
unit in the Middle Kwanza River Basin conducted by Holísticos and Intertechne between November
2007 and August 2009. The study was of broader in scope, addressing aspects relating to the Laúca
and Caculo-Cabaça Dams.
1.7. EIA TEAM
For execution of the Environmental Impact Assessment, Holísticos organized a multidisciplinary
team, which performed a series of activities in connection with the EIA, specifically in connection
with the respective field studies, biotic sample analyses, and preparation and drafting of the report.
The various experts and the corresponding areas of intervention are described in Table 1.15. In
addition to the technicians indicated above, the teams were supported and accompanies by the
GAMEK officials listed in Table 1.14.
Table 1.14: List of GAMEK Technicians
Name of Technician
Sónia Isaac
Maria Manuela Meireles Soares
Emanuel Adriano Cortez Gaspar
Manuel Borges Major de Almeida
Jorge Elias de Carvalho
António João Ferreira
Francisco António Pereira Neto
Rafael Miguel Neto
Field of Expertise
Biologist
Human Resources Management
Agronomy Engineer
Sociologist
Civil Engineer
Agricultural Technician
Geophysicist
Biochemical Technician
Table 1.15: List of experts involved in the EIA
Name
Vladimir Russo
Company
Academic Training
Holísticos
Master in
Environmental
Education
Miguel Morais
Holísticos
Paula Roque
Holísticos
Roberta Macedo
Holísticos
Pedro Vaz Pinto
Holísticos
Biologist,
Master in Ocean and
Coastal Sciences
Economist
Environmental
Sanitation Engineer,
Master in
Environmental
Technologies
Forest Engineer
I-21
Function in THE EIA
Project Director:
Legislation;
Project Description Analysis;
Environmental Management Plan;
Social Base
Project Coordinator:
Environmental Impacts;
Mitigation Measures;
Environmental Base
Project Management
Environmental Specialist:
Project Description, Environmental
Impacts, and Mitigation Measures
Analysis
Environmental Expert:
Wildlife Description
Name
Company
Academic Training
Sendi Baptista
Holísticos
Biologist
Santinho Figueira
Consultoria
Holísticos
Sociologist
Eduardo
Ferdinand
Holísticos
Natural Resources
and Environmental
Expert
Function in THE EIA
Environmental Expert:
Project Description;
Environmental and Social Base
Social Consultant
Environmental and Social Expert;
Analysis of Socioeconomic
Conditions
1.8. LOCATION
The area subject to this study is located in the North System region, Angola’s largest river basin,
with available potential for the implementation of new hydroelectric units. The dam will be built
within the territorial limits of the Malanje, Kwanza Norte, and Kwanza Sul provinces in the Middle
Kwanza River Basin (Km 307.5), approximately 47 km downstream from the Capanda Dam and
near the locality of Nhangue Ya Pepe (Figure 1.2).
Access to the project site is accomplished through National Highway 230, which runs from Luanda
to Viana, and, ultimately, the city of Dondo, seat of the Cambambe municipal government, in the
province of Kwanza Norte, 90 Km from Laúca. The access road stretches approximately 7 Km from
the main highway.
The Laúca Dam project is located 47 km from the Capanda Hydroelectric Unit, using as a reference,
for this purpose, the Capanda-Dondo Highway, access to which is available via a paved road with
appropriate signage, located near the locality of Nhangue Ya Pepe, situated approximately 57 km
from the city of Dondo.
I-22
Figure 1.1: Geographic location of the Laúca Dam (general).
I-23
Legend:
Mar Mediterrâneo = Mediterranean Sea
Trópico de Câncer = Tropic of Cancer
Oceáno Índico = Indian Ocean
Equador = Equator
Oceáno Atlântico = Atlantic Ocean
Trópico de Capricórnio = Tropic of Capricorn
MAPA DE LOCALIZAÇÃO – CONTINENTE AFRICANO = LOCATION MAP –
AFRICAN CONTINENT
Cabo Ledo = Cape Ledo
Cabo de São Braz = Cape São Braz
Porto Amboim = Port Amboim
OCEÁNO ATLÂNTICO = ATLANTIC OCEAN
MAPA DE LOCALIZAÇÃO – REGIONAL = LOCATION MAP - REGIONAL
CAPITAL NACIONAL = NATIONAL CAPITAL
CAPITAL PROVINCIAL = PROVINCIAL CAPITAL
CIDADES – VILAS = CITIES – VILLAGES
AEROPORTO = AIRPORT
LIMITE PROVINCIAL = PROVINCIAL BOUNDARY
ESTRADAS = HIGHWAY
CAMINHOS = ROAD
FERROVIAS = RAIL LINE
BACIA HIDRGRÁFICA DO MÉDIO KWANZA = MIDDLE KWANZA RIVER BASIN
BACIA HIDRGRÁFICA DO RIO KWANZA = KWANZA RIVER BASIN
ÁREAS DOS ESTUDOS = STUDY AREAS
ESCALA GRÁFICA – SCALE BAR
descrição = description
REVISÕES = REVISIONS
prep. = prepared
aprov. = approved
data = date
elaborado = prepared by
verificado = verified by
supervisor = supervisor
aprovado = approved
data = date
gerente de projeto = project manager
responsável técnico = lead engineer
título = title
APROVEITAMENTOS HIDROELÉTRICOS NO MÉDIO KWANZA
↓
HYDROELECTRIC UNITS IN THE MIDDLE KWANZA RIVER BASIN
I-24
GERAL = GENERAL
MAPA DE LOCALIZAÇÃO E VIAS DE ACESSO = LOCATION MAPS AND ACCESS
ROADS
escala = scale
folha = sheet
Código do Documento = Document Code
Revisão = Review
I-25
Figure 1.2: Location and access roads to the Laúca Dam
I-26
Legend:
AH LAÚCA = LAÚCA HYDROELECTRIC UNIT
Entrada Km 35 = Entrance Km 35
Acesso AH Laúca = Access to Laúca Hydroelectric Unit
Entrada Britador Km 19 = Entrance for Crusher Km 19
Linígrafo = Linigraph
MAPA DE LOCALIZAÇÃO = LOCATION MAP
MAPA DE LOCALIZAÇÃO – CONTINENTE AFRICANO = LOCATION MAP –
AFRICAN CONTINENT
AH LAÚCA = LAÚCA HYDROELECTRIC UNIT
Porto Amboim = Port Amboim
OCEÁNO ATLÂNTICO = ATLANTIC OCEAN
MAPA DE LOCALIZAÇÃO – REGIONAL = LOCATION MAP - REGIONAL
SEM ESCALA = NO SCALE
NOTAS = NOTES
1- DISTÂNCIA APROXIMADA PRO ESTRADA DE DONDO A UHE LAÚCA ~90km
↓
1 – ESTIMATED DISTANCE ON DONDO – LAÚCA HYDROELECTRIC UNIT ROAD ~90km
2 – BASE CARTOGRÁFICA ELABORADA A PARTIR DE CARTAS TOPOGRÁFICAS EM
ESCALA 1:500,000 do IGCA 9INSTITUTO DE GEODSIA E CARTOGRAFIA DE ANGOLA)
↓
2 – CARTOGRAPHIC BASIS PREPARED FROM TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS WITH A SCALE
1:500,000 OF THE IGCA (ANGOLAN INSTITUTE OF GEODESY AND CARTOGRAPHY)
ACESSOS LEVANTADOS EM CAMPO COM GPS, COMPLEMENTADOS COM CARTA
TOPOGRÁFICA. O SISTEMA DE REFERÊNCIA UTILIZADO FOI O WGS84.
↓
3 – ACCESS ROADS SURVEYED IN THE FIELD WITH GPS, SUPPLEMENT WITH
TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS. REFERENCE SYSTEM: WGS84
LEGENDA = LEGEND
CAPITAL NACIONAL = NATIONAL CAPITAL
CAPITAL PROVINCIAL = PROVINCIAL CAPITAL
CIDADES – VILAS = CITIES – VILLAGES
AEROPORTO = AIRPORT
LIMITE INTERNACIONAL = INTERNATIONAL BORDER
LIMITE PROVINCIAL = PROVINCIAL BOUNDARY
ESTRADAS = HIGHWAY
CAMINHOS = ROAD
FERROVIAS = RAIL LINE
ÁREA DO EMPREENDIMENTO = PROJECT AREA
I-27
1.9. DETERMINATION OF AREA OF INFLUENCE 3
The primary objective of any Environmental Impact Assessment is to determine the effects a
proposed project will have on the locations and region in which it is executed. Based on a detailed
analysis of the local environmental characteristics and potential impacts of the project, it is possible
to ascertain whether the environment provides appropriate conditions for implementation of the
project.
Determination of the areas of influence of the proposed projects is one of the initial steps of an
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) through which the geographic limits of the areas subject
to both direct and indirect positive and adverse changes are established and guidelines for assessing
the potential environmental impacts determined.
For purposes of the hydroelectric unit dam construction project, the areas of influence subject to
modification, encompassing the physical, biotic, and human environments, due to planning,
construction, and operation of the project are delimited.
To determine the areas of influence of the physical and biotic environments, physiographic aspects,
including the river basin used to feed the reservoir, are considered. The human environment
(socioeconomic studies) focuses on changes in the quality of life of the local populations in direct
and indirect project affected areas, in addition to the respective administrative divisions, such as
directly or indirectly affected provinces, municipalities, and districts. For this study, the information
provided in the databases of official Angolan institutions was used, as well as other relevant
impartial sources.
It is worth noting that evaluation of the potential impacts is specific to each environment, with the
respective study areas (Areas of Influence) determined on the basis of this specificity. In the case of
the Laúca Dam environmental study area, the physical and biotic environments encompassed the
following areas of influence (see Figure 1.3). 4
•
•
•
•
Direct Project Affected Area (Área Directamente Afectada – ADA);
Area of Direct Influence (Área de Influência Directa – AID);
Area of Indirect Influence (Área de Influência Indirecta – AII);
Regional Coverage Area (Área de Abrangência Regional – AAR).
1.9.1. DIRECT PROJECT AFFECTED AREA
The Direct Project Affected Area (ADA) of the biotic and physical environments corresponds to
the surface area where the dam will be built and the reservoir filled, as well as those areas occupied
by project infrastructure and other project structures. The human environment encompasses a
portion of the village of Kissaquina, located in the district of Pungo Andongo. The local population
will be affected by the Laúca reservoir and require removal and resettlement.
3
This section may be revised based on the survey conducted on the left bank of the River.
The areas of influence are in conformity with the recommendations in Executive Decree No. 92/12,
governing the Terms of Reference for Environmental Impact Assessments.
4
I-28
1.9.2. AREA OF DIRECT INFLUENCE
The Area of Direct Influence (AID) corresponds to those areas subject to potential direct positive
and adverse impacts. The physical and biotic environments encompass the dam implementation
area, reservoir, area reserved for project infrastructure, plus a 5 km zone around the construction
site. For purposes of the social environment, the areas set out in Table 1.16 were identified, all of
which will be impacted by the Laúca Dam. These districts encompass small population centers
(villages).
Table 1.16: Project Area of Direct Influence
Province
Municipality
Kwanza Norte
Cambambe
Malanje
Cacuso
District
São Pedro da
Kilemba
Pungo Andongo
Village
Dumbo Ya Pepe
Nhangue Ya Pepe
Ndala Ngola
Kibenda
Kirinje
Cassula
Muta
Kiangulungo
Kissaquina
Dala Kiosa
(Dombo)
1.9.3. AREA OF INDIRECT INFLUENCE
The Area of Indirect Influence (AII) considered for assessment of the physical and biotic
environments consisted of the project affected area of the Kwanza River Drainage Basin, plus
downstream and upstream segments, covering an area of 4,390 km².
In regard to the human environment, the municipalities located in the provinces set forth in the
AAR that will in some way be affected by implementation of the project, whether through the
recruitment of workers or the socioeconomic stimulus fostered by the project, were included,
specifically Cambambe, Kwanza Norte, Libolo and Mussende, Kwanza Sul, and Cacuso, Malanje.
1.9.4. REGIONAL COVERAGE AREA
The Regional Coverage Area (AAR) corresponds to those areas potentially subject to indirect
project impacts. For the physical and biotic environments, the Middle Kwanza River Drainage
Basin was considered, encompassing a total area of 54,564.71 km². This cross-section provides an
overview of the processes impacting ecological systems in the region, which can only be
understood and analyzed through an assessment of a relatively broad area.
Assessment of the human environment looked at the administrative unit of the provinces of Kwanza
Norte, Kwanza Sul, and Malanje, taking into consideration factors characterizing the project’s
potential scope with respect to its effects on regional economic development.
I-29
Figure 1.3: Social sensitivity map in the Laúca Dam construction project areas of influence
I-30
Legend:
Mapa de Sensibilidade Socialp Construção da Barragem de Laúca
↓
Laúca Dam Construction Social Sensitivity Map
Fazenda Zé Boy = Zé Boy Farm
Cemitério Kassaquina Sul = Kassaquina Sul Cemetery
RIO KWANZA = KWANZA RIVER
Kassaquina Sul Ponte = Kassaquina Sul Bridge
Rio Luinga = Luinga River
Aldeia (habitantes) = Village (inhabitants)
Fazenda = Farm
Cemitério = Cemetery
AH Laúca = Laúca Hydroelectric Unit
AH Capanda = Capanda Hydroelectric Unit
Rio Kwanza = Kwanza River
Sistema de Coordenadas = Coordinates
DATA: MAIO – 2013 = DATE: MAY 2013
1.10. PUBLIC CONSULTATION PROCESS
It is important to note that one of the objectives of the environmental impact assessment process is
to hold consultations with and provide information to stakeholders, in particular those directly
affected by potential project impacts on the quality of life of local populations.
The process is intended to ensure transparent and continuous of information, in order to safeguard
both the environment as well as the quality of life of local populations and, in this way, facilitate the
participation of stakeholders throughout the development of the Environmental Impact Assessment.
To this end, a Public Consultation and Dissemination Plan (Plano de Consulta e Divulgação Pública
– PCDP) was prepared, pursuant to the guidelines of the International Financing Corporation (IFC)
and the applicable Angolan laws.
The Public Consultation and Dissemination Plan is a document prepared to determine the
procedures for disseminating the project, particularly in the dam construction phase. The PCDP is
an integral part of the project’s Environmental Impact Assessment development process. The
principal objective of the document is to provide guidance to the organization of consultations and
dissemination of the corresponding results and outcomes and those of the project.
For purposes of this process, the local stakeholders subject to direct or indirect positive or adverse
impacts arising from project actions and pressures will be engaged.
1.10.1. PCDP Objectives
The principal objective of the PCDP is to ensure a consistent, solid, and coordinated public
consultation process for the purpose of fostering effective participation of stakeholders and affected
populations and achieving the following goals:
I-31
• To ensure that all stakeholders are included in the consultation and dissemination process;
• To guarantee that dissemination of the initial information on the project is adequate and
understandable to stakeholders and other affected interested parties without technical
expertise as well as local and surrounding populations;
• To assure that adequate information is provided to project affected populations and other
stakeholders;
• To guarantee that all stakeholders have the opportunity to express their opinions and
concerns regarding the project;
• To ensure that these opinions and concerns have an influence on project decisions;
• To guarantee regular “feedback” to stakeholders and other parties affected by the project;
• To ensure effective communication is maintained during the construction and operational
phases of the proposed project.
1.10.2. PCDP Scope
Development and implementation of the PCDP is aimed at providing a reference document for the
purpose of identifying the expectations of stakeholders and other parties affected by the project. The
document is an integral component of the detailed plan illustrating the proposed phases and
consultation periods.
The PCDP identifies the appropriate level of public participation, as well as the discussion stages
for the final report, and submission of the project’s Non-Technical Summary. The PCDP’s scope
consists of the following three stages.
• Stage 1 – Field Survey: in this stage, stakeholders and direct and indirect project affected
populations were consulted (communities in the surrounding area, fishermen, local
authorities), in addition to local government institutions (municipal and district). This stage
also included an exhaustive survey of the relevant socioeconomic data.
• Stage 2 – Community Information: based on the field survey, the focus of the project was
reported to local stakeholders, who, for their part, offered their contributions. Emphasis was
given to downstream communities and those affected by the reservoir, as encompassed in
the direct project affected areas and project area ADA of direct influence. An information
brochure was prepared for local communities (See Appendix III), which was distributed
during the field visits. Comments and suggestions were collected through a suggestion form
(Appendix IV).
• Stage 3 – Public Consultation: this stage will be organized by the Ministry of the
Environment, pursuant to the applicable environmental laws, and serve for purposes of
conducting a detailed assessment of the principal positive and adverse environmental
impacts arising from the project. In this stage, the respective mitigation measures identified
to address the most severe potential adverse impacts will be specified. The location and
method of the public consultation will be determined by the Ministry of the Environment,
following conclusion of the study’s preliminary assessment process by the pertinent project
activity (energy and water) and environmental oversight entities.
I-32
CHAPTER 02
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
II-1
Environmental Impact Study of the Laúca Dam Construction Project
CONTENTS
2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................... 6
2.1. ANALYSIS OF THE PROJECT ALTERNATIVES ................................................................................. 6
2.1.1. LOCALIZATION ALTERNATIVES ..................................................................................................... 6
2.1.2. TECHNOLOGIC ALTERNATIVES .................................................................................................... 26
2.2. JUSTIFICATION OF THE GENERATION TECHNOLOGY CHOICE ............................................... 53
2.3. JUSTIFICATION FOR THE CHOICE OF THE LOCATION ............................................................... 54
2.4. PRESENTATION OF THE PROJECT .................................................................................................... 57
2.4.1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT ............................................................................................................. 60
2.4.2. RESERVOIR ......................................................................................................................................... 68
2.4.3. ACCESSES ........................................................................................................................................... 71
2.4.4. AREAS FOR SOIL EXTRACTION AND WASTE DISPOSAL ........................................................ 72
2.4.5. SUPPORT INFRASTRUCTURES AND LABOR ............................................................................... 79
2.4.6. MINE HUNTING ................................................................................................................................ 102
2.4.7. DEFORESTING, UPROOTING AND CLEANING .......................................................................... 105
2.5. SAFETY, OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT ....................................................... 107
2.5.1. INTEGRATED SUSTAINABILITY PROGRAM ............................................................................. 107
2.5.2. HEALTH ............................................................................................................................................. 108
2.5.3. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY .............................................................................................................. 109
2.5.4. ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................................ 110
2.6. COSTS AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .................................................................................... 123
II-2
Abbreviations
List of Figures
Figure 2.1: Schematic Longitudinal Profile of the Division of Falls – Alternative 1
Figure 2.6: Comparison of alternatives.
Figure 2.7: Schematic profile of a hydroelectric power plant
Figure 2.8: Schematic profile of the power production process using petroleum
Figure 2.9: Schematic profile of a nuclear plant
Figure 2.10: Schematic profile of the electric power production process from mineral coal.
Figure 2.11: Overall layout of the Laúca dam construction works.
Figure 2.12: General arrangement of Laúca AH.
Figure 2.13: General arrangement of the BCC dam.
Figure 2.14: General arrangement of the main generation circuit.
Figure 2.15: General arrangement of the main plant.
Figure 2.16: General arrangement of the ecologic plant generation circuit.
Figure 2.17: Map of the Laúca dam reservoir
Figure 2.18: Map of accesses to Laúca dam.
Figure 2.19: Identification and localization of mines and disposal areas of Laúca AH.
Figure 2.20: Disposal area and access zone to the mouth of the deviation tunnels.
Figure 2.21: Localization of the waste disposal areas for the river deviation works.
Figure 2.22: Disposal and storage areas (disposal and mines)
Figure 2.23: Layout of the administrative quarters
Figure 2.24: Fuel Station
Figure 2.25: Lubrication and Tire Repair Station
Figure 2.26: Vehicle Washing Station and Mechanical Workshop
Figure 2.27: Decantation Tank
Figure 2.28: Water/Oil Separation Tank
Figure 2.29: Advanced/Industrial Work Quarters
Figure 2.30: Sanitary Landfill (plan view and sections)
Figure 2.31: Sanitary Landfill (details, plan view and sections) for the river deviation
Figure 2.32: Explosives Warehouse
Figure 2.33: Crushing center
Figure 2.34: Concrete Center and Ice Center
Figure 2.35: Areas to be mine-hunted for the Laúca dam Project
Figure 2.36: Deforesting
Figure 2.37: Water treatment station
Figure 2.38: Drinking water tank
Figure 2.39: Raw water tank
Figure 2.40: Effluent treatment station
Figure 2.41: Scheme of the ETE treatment system
Figure 2.42: Detail of the ETE’s preliminary treatment5
Figure 2.43: Sections of the ETE’s preliminary treatment, equalization tank and pump well1
Figure 2.44: Plant beds
Figure 2.45: Summarized schedule of the activities of the Laúca AH works
II-3
List of Frame
Frame 2.1: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of hydroelectric power generation in Angola.
Frame 2.2: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of thermoelectric power generation in Angola.
Frame 2.3: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of wind energy generation.
Frame 2.4: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of solar energy.
Frame 2.5: Summary of the advantages and disadvantages of energy generation by means of biogas.
Frame 2.6: Summary of the advantages and disadvantages of generation by means of natural gas.
Frame 2.7: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of nuclear energy generation.
Frame 2.8: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of energy generation using mineral coal.
List of Tables
Table 2.1: Revision of the Fall Division in the Section’s Hydroelectric Power Plant.
Table 2.2: Revision of the Fall Divisions in the Hydroelectric Power Plant of River Kwanza’s Medium
Section – Alternative 1.
Table 2.3: Revision of the Division of Falls for the Power Plant in the Medium Section of the
Kwanza River – Alternative 2.
Table 2.4: Revision in the Division of Falls for the Power Plants in the Medium Section of the
Table 2.6: Revision in the Division of Falls for the Power Plants in the Medium Section of the Kwanza
River – Alternative 5.
Table 2.7: Revision in the Division of Falls for the Power Plants in the Medium Section of the Kwanza
River – Comparison and Selection of Alternatives.
Table 2.8: Summary of the study of Division of Falls for the plants in the Medium Section of the Kwanza
River – Alternatives for the Division of Falls.
Table 2.9: Main characteristics of the Laúca hydroelectric plant.
Table 2.10: Types of solid residues produced by the works.
Table 2.11: Important dates and events of the Laúca dam construction
II-4
Abbreviations
BAS
BCC
CCR
CGR
EFB
EIA
EPI
ENE
ETA
ETE
GAMEK
GNL
GNLA
IAN
IAND
PI
PRAD
PN
PVC
PP
UASB
Submerged Aerated Biofilter
Concrete Compacted with Cylinder
Concrete Compacted with Roll
Waste Management Center
Concrete Surface
Environmental Impact Study
Personal Protection Equipment
National Power Company
Water Treatment Station
Effluent Treatment Station
Medium Kwanza Project Cabinet
Liquefied Natural Gas
Angolan Liquefied Natural Gas
Negative Environmental Impact
Distributed Negative Environmental Impact
Integrated Sustainability Plan
Recovery Plan for Degraded Areas
Nominal Pressure
Polyvinyl chloride
Polypropylene
Upflow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket
II-5
2. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
This section of the EIA Report presents a series of aspects related to the justification for
choosing the location for the implementation of the enterprise and the alternatives for electric
power production in Angola, as well as a general description of the proposed project and the
company’s environmental management programs.
2.1. ANALYSIS OF THE PROJECT ALTERNATIVES
2.1.1. LOCALIZATION ALTERNATIVES
For the definition of the best localization alternative for the hydroelectric power plant within the
medium section of the Kwanza basin, a study was developed in 2008 by Intertechne Consultores
S.A, seeking the division of falls. Such study has considered the alternatives selected during the
works carried out in the past decades, requested by the government from private companies.
The study has analyzed the technological advance that took place in hydroelectric power plants
along these years, and has assessed five (5) alternatives from a total of nine (9) different
enterprises, as shown in Table 2.1. The parameters established for this assessment stage were
the following:
•
The proposal of upstream projects for each alternative, thus allowing the
implementation of discharge regularization reservoirs;
•
The association of these with other projects, thus allowing the full use of the available
gross fall;
•
The minimization of environmental impacts; and
•
The lack of possibilities with multiple projects and the assessment of a solution
considering a single project.
II-6
Table 2.1: Revision of the Fall Division in the Section’s Hydroelectric Power Plant.
Alternative
Hydroelectric
Power Plant
water level of the
reservoir (m)*
Downstream
water level
Gross fall
Nhangue
850
760
90
Laúca
760
630
130
Caculo Cabaça
630
415
215
Dunga
850
630
220
Caculo Cabaça
630
415
215
Laúca Alto
850
630
330
Muta
850
415
435
Laúca
760
630
130
Caculo 1
630
555
75
Caculo 2
555
512
43
Caculo 3
512
415
97
1
2
3
Maximum normal
4
5
* Maximum normal water level of the reservoir in meters.
2.1.1.1. Alternative 1
This alternative was present in the SONEFE (Angolan Society of Enterprises for the Supply of
Electric Power) study and mentioned in the Energoprojekt report, and considers three
enterprises: Nhangue, Laúca and Caculo-Cabaça, which characteristics are presented in Table
2.2.
Table 2.2: Revision of the Fall Divisions in the Hydroelectric Power Plant of River Kwanza’s
Medium Section – Alternative 1.
Hydroelectr
ic Power
Plant
Nhangue
Laúca
Basin
(km2)
109,00
0
112,61
Reservoir
Water level (m)
Upstrea
m
Downstrea
m
850.00
760.00
760.00
630.00
Volume
(hm3)
Tota Usef
l
ul
5,48
4,120
2
22
-
II-7
Gros
s fall
(m)
Norm
al flow
(m3/s)
Availab
le
power
(MW)
Installe
d
power
(MW)
90
449.9
295
780
130
449.9
502
1,116
Caculo
Cabaça
Total
7
112,66
3
630.00
415.00
41
II-8
-
215
449.9
822
1,826
435
-
1,619
3,722
Nhangue AH (Hydroelectric Power Plant)
The implementation place of the Nhangue AH is located approximately 40 km
downstream of Capanda AH, in a region with optimum conditions for the formation of a
reservoir for the regularization of the incoming flow.
The shape of the main valley and of the Buiza River, a left bank tributary, favor the
accumulation of water in the reservoir, reaching 5,400 hm³ in an area of approximately
190 km². In this section, the Kwanza River flows in a more flat pattern that alternates
with rapids and small water falls, ending up with an average gradient of 2.4 m/km.
The river valley has the shape of a closed Canyon with steep banks. Above the banks a
smooth pattern prevail, with small undulation and covered by layers of sandy soil and
altered rock. On the top of the banks there is a very hard and silicon-rich sandstone
(meta- sandstone) layer with reddish color.
In the base of the lower portion of the banks, an accumulation of “talus”-shaped blocks
can be observed, laid on their natural repose angle, which covers the contact between
the gneiss of the base and the meta-sandstone of the banks. The river bed presents
rapids and rock outcrops, and the major part of the surface is marked by fractures,
having gneiss and very hard and compact migmatites as foundation rock.
In this place, in a section of approximately 2 km, two alternative axes were identified
spaced 700 m between each other. The first upstream axis was selected in the studies of
SONEFE (1966) and the Hidroprojekt Institute, being the later used for the development
of an ante-project for the Nhangue AH, ordered by GAMEK in 1992.
The general arrangement of this study had considered an alternative with a concrete
dam compacted with roll (CCR), a river deviation through a tunnel built in the right
bank and the water intake structures, penstocks, power house and spillway in the river
bed, associated to the CCR dam structure. In the second axis, three alternate
II-9
arrangements were studied and modeled in three dimensions (3D) for assessment as
shown below:
•
CCR dam and the structures of the deviation tunnels, water intakes, penstocks,
power house and spillway on the right bank;
•
Dam built with rocks and concrete surface (EFB), deviation tunnels and spillway
implemented on the left bank and the hydraulic generation circuit on the right bank;
and
•
Dam built with rocks and concrete surface (EFB), deviation tunnels and spillway
implemented on the right bank.
This later arrangement that considers all the structures on the right bank, proved to be
the most advantageous, both because of the access facility and because of the work
volume and construction costs. The project so defined is composed by the followings
structures:
• 1st phase cofferdams (transverse and longitudinal) on the river’s right bank;
• Three deviation tunnels on the right shoulder;
• Dam built with rocks and concrete surface (EFB) with a maximum height of 100
m;
• Transverse cofferdams, upstream and downstream, for the 2nd phase deviation;
• Hydraulic generation circuit composed by the water supply channel, 4 water
intake blocks, penstocks, power house equipped with 4 units of the vertical axis
Francis and outlet channel; and
• Sloped spillway with Creager profile discharging on the deviation tunnels
recovery channel.
Laúca AH
II-10
The Laúca AH is located on km 307 of the Kwanza river, at approximately 8 km
downstream from the Nhangue AH, in a section where the river follows a narrow gorge
with “U” shape, presenting a succession of rapids and concentrated falls totaling
approximately 30 m and with a gradient of 4 m/km. Downstream from the place
foreseen for the dam axis, the Kwanza river presents a natural fall, with steps and
rapids, in the order of 100 m along a little bit more than 1,500 m of the river length.
In the place foreseen by SONEFE (1966) to be the dam location, the river bed has a
width in the order of 200 m and the water level is in the 730.00 m elevation. The valley
presents vertical banks reaching the elevation of 830.00 m with a distance between the
banks of 450 m. On the top, with smoother shoulders, the elevation of 850.00 m is
reached, with a distance between the banks in the order of 750 m.
The axis location is strongly embedded, with the rocky river-bed in gneiss and the
scarped side walls in sandstone. The river bed is irregular and eroded with foundation
on the firm remaining rock. The rock is highly fractured locally, in fracture zones.
Between the river bed and the side walls there is a layer of “talus” formed by blocks of
metric sizes with thicknesses up to tens of meters, covering the contact between the
gneiss in the base and the sandstone in the side walls.
In the side walls, the sandstone is partially fractured with sub-vertical and inclined
fractures forming locally unstable “wedges”.
Having in mind the geomorphologic and local geologic characteristics, with a natural
fall in the order of 100 m in a section of approximately 2 km, and with the river path
forming a sinuosity in the shape of “S”, the general arrangement studied has considered
a project solution of the derivation type. It is composed by a concrete dam compacted
with roll (CCR) in the beginning of the falls, on an attached valley, associated to the
II-11
spillway structure equipped with gates for the 2nd phase river deviation, with the
underground hydraulic circuit excavated on the right shoulder.
The first phase deviation is carried out with transverse and longitudinal cofferdams
necessary for the partial restriction of the river bed, in order to allow the construction of
the water intake, spillway and mouths of the penstocks on the right shoulder.
II-12
The second phase of the deviation is composed by the transverse cofferdams regarding
the river, upstream and downstream, with the river passing through the deviation gates,
thus allowing the dam construction on the river bed.
The dam is a small one, with maximum height in the order of 40 m, and the hydraulic
generation circuit is foreseen to be composed by 3 penstocks, underground power house
with three vertical-axis Francis-type turbines, intake chamber and two outlet tunnels 1.6
km long.
Caculo-Cabaça AH
The scheme of the Caculo-Cabaça project is characterized by the high natural fall
available on a long section of the Kwanza River. It is only possible to be explored by a
plant of the derivation type. The section under study develops in the shape of an
inverted “V”, counterclockwise, between the km 296 of the river, upstream (place of the
dam and spillway), and the km 276, downstream (recovery of the flows past the
turbines), representing a total of 20 km of extension and a natural fall of 183 m.
On the Caculo-Cabaça dam location, the valley is wide with smooth banks and the
predominance of gneiss as foundation. The cover of soil and altered rock on the wall is
in the order of 3 to 5 meters. On the bottom of the valley, the cover of soil and altered
rock is in the order of 2 to 3 meters. The river flows locally on a narrow gorge around
30 meters wide, where a high speed flow is observed. The estimated depth of the deeper
river bed is in the order of 10 a 15 meters. In the river banks there are continuous gneiss
outcrops with sub-vertical spreading, very fractured locally and covered by loose gneiss
blocks of several sizes including metric.
The general arrangement proposed for Caculo-Cabaça AH is composed by a concrete
dam compacted with roll (CCR) with maximum height in the order of 50 m on the
deepest river bed, complemented by the spillway located on the right bank and a section
of the closing dam on the right shoulder.
II-13
The deviation of the river is foreseen to be carried out in 2 phases, being the first one composed
by transverse cofferdams, upstream and downstream, united by a cofferdam longitudinal to the
river path, built on the right bank to allow the excavation and pouring of concrete of the
spillway. The second phase of the deviation will be carried out through the spillway gaps along
the lowered crest, with the closing of the river gorge through transverse cofferdams, upstream
and downstream. The spillway, with Creager-type sill, is controlled by three sector gates.
The hydraulic generation circuit is foreseen to be built on the left shoulder and to be composed
by the open air water intake, penstocks, underground power house equipped with 4 vertical-axis
Francis-type units, intake chamber and two long outlet tunnels (9.7 km) that recover the flows
past the turbines on the (EL) 415.00 m elevation, downstream of the Caculo-Cabaça falls, end
of the section under study. Figure 2.1 represents the division of falls of Alternative 1.
II-14
Legend of Figure 2.1:
Elevação = Elevation
Derivação = Derivation
Distância da Foz = Distance to the river mouth
II-15
2.1.1.2. ALTERNATIVE 2
The initial scheme for the division of falls in this alternative is characterized by the
displacement to 3.5 km downstream of the Nhangue AH dam axis, on km 312 of the
river, intended for the implementation of a single project, associated to the upstream
regularization reservoir, resulting in the unification of the Nhangue and Laúca AHs,
complemented by the Caculo-Cabaça AH.
SONEFE mentions this study, regarding the upstream power plant, under the
denomination of Dunga AH in the change report, dismissing it because it means a
higher elevation dam with longer outlet tunnels (12 km), disadvantages in the
possibilities for planning partial investments and in the overpowering of the plant.
The revision of the division of falls in 2007, by Intertechne, generated new topographic
data of the region with the use of the aerial survey technique with laser profiling. The
higher level of detail made possible the development of new studies that confirmed the
possibility of considering this alternative with the characteristics shown in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3: Revision of the Division of Falls for the Power Plant in the Medium Section
of the Kwanza River – Alternative 2.
Reservoir
Hydroelectr
ic Power
Plant
Dunga
Caculo
Cabaça
Total
Basin
(km2)
112,53
6
112,66
3
Water level (m)
Upstrea
m
Downstrea
m
850.00
630.00
630.00
415.00
Volume
(hm3)
Tota Usef
l
ul
5,48
4,120
2
41
-
Gros
s
Fall
(m)
220
215
435
Reg.
flow
(m3/s
)
449.
9
449.
9
Availabl
e power
(MW)
Installe
d
power
(MW)
786
1,869
822
1,826
1,608
3,695
Dunga AH
For the selection of the best axis and the proposal of an adequate general arrangement
for this project, a section of the Kwanza River with approximately 4 km of extension
was studied and some solutions assessed seeking a comparison between work volumes
II-16
and construction facilities. From this comparison resulted the selection of an axis
located 4.5 km downstream of the Nhangue AH axis and with an arrangement of
deviation works, dam and spillway similar to the one adopted for that project, located
on the right shoulder. Therefore, a dam built with rocks and concrete surface (EFC),
will have e maximum height in the order of 109 m, nine meters more than the Nhangue
AH.
The hydraulic generation circuit will be composed by a supply channel, open air water
intake, penstocks, underground power house equipped with four (4) units of the
vertical-axis “Francis”-type , intake chamber and two (2) outlet tunnels with an
extension of 5,370 m each, thus recovering the flows past the turbines at the same
position as the Laúca AH.
Caculo-Cabaça AH
The Caculo-Cabaça AH of the alternative 2 here presented is identical to the one
described in Alternative 1. Figure 2.2 represents the division of falls of Alternative 2.
II-17
II-18
As mentioned in Alternative 1, the Laúca AH is located on km 307, approximately 8 km
downstream of the Nhangue AH, in a section where the Kwanza River follows a narrow
gorge in the shape of “U”, with a succession of rapids and concentrated falls totaling
approximately 30 m with a gradient of 4 m/km. Downstream from the place foreseen for
the dam axis, the Kwanza River presents a natural fall, composed of steps and rapids, in
the order of 100 m within a little more than 1,500 m of extension.
This arrangement known by the name of Laúca Alto AH, foresees the closing of the
valley up to an elevation of 850.00 m the situation most downstream possible, this
means in the place indicated by Alternative 1 as the Laúca AH. Such configuration
combines the storage capacity of the Nhangue AH reservoir with the total utilization of
the fall available in the section under study.
Considering this situation for the dam axis, it was possible to significantly reduce the
total length of the hydraulic generation circuit. The unification of two AHs into only
one resulted in a significant saving in the work costs and the increase of the flooded area
in this arrangement is small in comparison with the area that would be flooded in the
AHs of Nhangue and Laúca. The characteristics of this alternative are presented in
Table 2.4.
Table 2.4: Revision in the Division of Falls for the Power Plants in the Medium Section
Reservoir
Hydroelectr
ic Power
Plant
Laúca Alto
Caculo
Cabaça
Total
Basin
(km2)
112,61
7
112,66
3
Water level (m)
Upstrea
m
Downstrea
m
850.00
630.00
630.00
415.00
Volume
(hm3)
Tota Usef
l
ul
5,48
4,120
2
41
-
Gros
s
Fall
(m)
220
215
435
II-19
Reg.
flow
(m3/s
)
449.
9
449.
9
Availabl
e power
(MW)
Installe
d
power
(MW)
794
1,888
822
1,826
1,616
3,714
II-20
Laúca Alto AH
The place of the Laúca Alto AH axis is strongly embedded, with the rocky river-bed in
gneiss and the scarped side walls in sandstone. The river bed is irregular due to the
effects of erosion in the foundation rock caused by the lines of failures and fractures
present. Between the river bed and the side walls there is a layer of “talus” formed by
blocks of metric sizes with thicknesses up to tens of meters, covering the contact
between the gneiss in the base and the sandstone in the walls. Medium fractured
sandstone can be found in the side walls with sub-vertical and inclined fractures
forming locally unstable “wedges”.
The general arrangement proposed foresee the closing of the valley, from the upper
level of the left shoulder until the right shoulder, with a dam built with concrete
compacted by roll (CCR) associated to the deviation structure by gates on the river bed
and to the spillway in the upper part of the dam, in the same alignment of the gates.
Following the later there is the water intake structure, the transition block and the rock
dam with vertical clay core.
The deviation of first phase is carried out with transverse and longitudinal cofferdams
necessary for the partial restriction of the river bed, in order to ensure the construction
of the deviation gates. The second phase of the deviation will make use of cofferdams
transverse to the river, upstream and downstream, with the river passing through the
deviation gates, thus allowing the construction of the dam on the river bed.
O hydraulic generation circuit is foreseen to the be composed by a supply channel,
water intake, four penstocks, underground power house with four vertical-axis Francistype turbines, intake chamber and two outlet tunnels with 1.6 km of extension.
Caculo-Cabaça AH
The Caculo-Cabaça AH that composes alternative 3 is the same already described for
alternative 1.
II-21
II-22
Figure 2.3 represents the division of falls for Alternative 3.
This alternative represents the project scheme associated to the total utilization of the
natural fall available in the section under study of the Kwanza River into a single
project.
This scheme called Muta AH considers the location of the dam in the place of
Laúca/Laúca Alto, with the maximum normal water level of the reservoir in the 850.00
m elevation (such as Laúca Alto AH) and the recovery of the flows past the turbines
II-23
downstream of the Caculo-Cabaça falls, in the end of the section under study, at the
elevation of 410.00 m, according to the data presented in Table 2.5.
II-24
Table 2.5: Revision in the Division of Falls for the Power Plants in the Medium Section
Hydroelectr
ic Power
Plant
Muta
Basin
(km2)
112,61
0
Reservoir
Water level (m)
Upstrea
m
850.00
Downstrea
m
415.00
Volume
(hm3)
Tota Usef
l
ul
5,48 4,120
2
Total
Gros
s
Fall
(m)
Reg.
flow
(m3/s
)
435
449.
9
435
Availabl
e power
(MW)
Installe
d
power
(MW)
1,598
3,672
1,598
3,672
Muta AH
The general arrangement of the Muta AH works is identical to the one of Laúca Alto
AH. The fundamental difference is in the hydraulic generation circuit, for which the
sizing carried out has indicated a power unit count of 14 units, with vertical-axis
Francis-type turbines with characteristics that suit the limit of the worldwide
experience.
The scheme defined for the project has considered an intake feed with one penstock for
every two machines, a bifurcation tunnel close to the power house, one power house
with approximately 250 m of extension, intake chamber with large dimensions and two
outlet tunnels with extension in the order of 20 km.
The preliminary calculations for checking the hydraulic transients have conducted to a
steep lowering of the power house and the large dimension chambers, as well as high
pressure losses in the hydraulic circuit, in the magnitude of 9 to 10%.
Figure 2.4 below represents the division of falls of Alternative 4.
II-25
This alternative associates the AHs of Nhangue and Laúca, described in Alternative 1, with a
subdivision scheme of the Caculo-Cabaça AH fall in three sections, with the characteristics
presented in Table 2.6.
Hydroelectr
ic Power
Plant
Nhangue
Laúca
Caculo 1
Basin
(km2)
109,00
0
112,61
7
112,66
3
Reservoir
Water level (m)
Upstrea
m
850.00
Downstrea
m
760.00
760.00
630.00
630.00
555.00
Volume
(hm3)
Tota Usef
l
ul
5,48 4,120
2
22
-
II-26
-
Gros
s
Fall
(m)
Reg.
flow
(m3/s
)
Availabl
e power
(MW)
Installe
d
power
(MW)
90
449.
9
449.
9
449.
9
295
780
502
1,116
290
644
130
75
Caculo 2
Caculo 3
112,66
3
112,66
3
555.00
512.00
-
-
43
512.00
415.00
-
-
97
Total
435
449.
9
449.
9
166
369
378
841
1,616
3,714
Caculo 1 AH
The Caculo 1 AH is located in the same axis of the Caculo-Cabaça AH of Alternative 1,
and Takes advantage of a natural fall formed by rapids in the river, between km 296 and
292, through a hydraulic generation circuit implemented on the left shoulder, with 3.8
km of extension.
The gross fall of 75 m is formed by the dam with a reservoir in the 630.00 m elevation
and a recovery in the beginning of a much embedded straight section of the river, into
what seems to be a failure or fracture on the river bed, being the downstream water level
in the elevation of 555.00.
Caculo 2 AH
The Caculo 2 AH has its dam implemented on km 290 and a derivation is foreseen
through a tunnel and a channel between adjacent valleys in the section where the
Kwanza River has the shape of an inverted “V”. The tunnel, with approximately 2 km
of extension, carries the flows past the turbines (in an underground power house) up to a
channel with the connection to the reservoir downstream of Caculo 3 AH, located on the
elevation of 512.00, with an estimated length of 1.2 km.
Caculo 3 AH
II-27
The Caculo 3 AH is formed by a dam associated to a spillway on km 279 of the Kwanza
River, creating a reservoir on the elevation of 512.00 m, with water intake and hydraulic
generation circuit located on the left shoulder and an underground power house on the
left bank, being the flows past the turbines recovered on the elevation of 415.00 m
downstream of the Caculo-Cabaça falls.
The small reservoir is located on a step between two sequences of rapids more
concentrated in the region and is complemented by a dam in a valley on the left bank.
Figure 2.5 represents the division of falls of Alternative 5.
II-28
2.1.1.6. CHOSEN ALTERNATIVE
At the end of the assessment studies for the five alternatives, an option was made for the
Laúca Alto power plants, hereinafter simply called Laúca, described in alternative 3 of
this section (Reference drawing AHL-DE2-00B01-0010 of Intertechne).
This alternative has shown the lowest cost/benefit index (Table 2.7) and the second
lowest distributed negative environmental impact index – IAND, calculated based on
the relevance of the flooded use typologies in the reproduction of the balance of the
land, aquatic and social-economic ecosystems.
For the obtainment of the IAND1, it was first carried out an assessment of the
environmental impacts based on the methodology recommended in the Manual of
Hydroelectric Inventory of Eleterbrás, of 1997. Such assessment for the medium
Kwanza River basin has considered the direct impacts caused by the reservoirs and the
environmental fragility of the several structuring elements of the natural and anthropic
environment. Such elements, called synthesis components, represent the environmental system
and make possible an integrated analysis among the several environmental and social elements.
______________________
II-29
1
The methodology applied and the calculations for each alternative are presented in the
document 0704-MK-RT-100- 00-010-RD(1) of Intertechne.
II-30
Based on the social-environmental diagnosis carried out for the Kwanza basin, a
division of such basin in sub-units was carried out for analysis, per synthesis
component, called sub-areas. The identification of the sub-areas was based on the
premise that such units should have similar characteristics and particular relationships
and internal processes, which could be distinguished from the other basin spaces. To
make it possible to distinguish these subareas from each other, their hierarchical
classification was carried out based on their characteristics and importance, through the
attribution of values to each one of them within the range from 0 to 1.
Additionally, to express the relative importance among the impacting processes of each
synthesis component on the environmental system, different weights were attributed to
each one of them, in order to highlight the participation of each one of the elements
analyzed in the regional processes, serving as weighting element in the assessment of
impacts. The weighting of the synthesis components among each other also considered
scores in the range from 0 to 1, with the sum resulting in 1, representing the
environment of the contribution basin of the Kwanza River section under study.
Therefore, the environmental analysis of each sub-area was considered and the
obtainment of an index that could reflect its vulnerability regarding the implementation
of hydroelectric enterprises was carried out. Therefore, by weighting the scores
attributed to the sub-areas, herein called “fragility score” and its weights, an index
referred to the sub-area environmental assessment was obtained.
The fragility scores and the environmental assessment indexes were multiplied by the
respective quantities of surfaces suppressed by the implementation of each one of the
enterprise alternatives proposed, and these products were added among each other per
synthesis component and later divided by the total area affected, thus resulting on the
negative environmental impact index.
II-31
In order to improve this indicator (IAN), the identification of the degree of impact of each one
of the reservoirs was sought for the same territorial unit, therefore, signaling the seriousness of
the interferences introduced in the environment of the medium Kwanza River basin. By means
of this analysis, a new indicator was obtained, called the Distributed Negative Environmental
Impact (IAND), which gave more emphasis to the results obtained per reservoir.
In order to choose the alternative, the parameters described below were also used:
Cost-Benefit Index for the Energy produced by the Power Plant (ICBi)
The energy benefit of each project in one alternative was measured based on the increase of
available energy in the reference system provided by the addition of the power plant,
considering all other Power Plants in the alternative as already built. The cost-benefit index for
the energy produced by each project was defined as the rate between its total cost, annualized by
means of a given discount rate, and its energy benefit.
Calculated by the following expression:
ICBi = CTi / (Efi x 8760)
where:
ICBi : Cost-benefit index of the dam energy, in US$/MWh
CTi : Total cost of the plant annualized by means of a given discount rate, expressed in
US$/year
ΔEfi : Increase in the available energy provided by the addition of the “i” plant in average MW,
considering all other Power Plants in the alternative as already built.
Cost-benefit index for the energy in the alternative (ICBa)
The cost-benefit index for the energy of each alternative, which will be the parameter with
which it will be assessed, is given by:
II-32
ICBa = CTa / (8760 x ΔEfa)
where:
ICBa : Cost-benefit index of the energy of alternative a, in US$/MWh
ΔEfa : Gain of available energy provided by alternative a, in average MW
CTa : Total annual energy cost of alternative a, in US$ / year.
The economic parameters used in the calculation of the cost-benefit indexes the following:
• Service life: 50 years
• Discount rate: 10%
• Annual cost of operation and maintenance: given by the formula suggested in the Inventory
Manual, adapted to the Angolan conditions:
COM = a x (P)−b
where:
COM = operation and maintenance cost in US$/KW/year
P = Installed power in the plant, in MW
a = 153.17
b = 0.3716
The analysis carried out in the studies have yielded the data shown in Table 2.7 and in Figure
2.6, where, for each alternative, the cost-benefit index (ICBa, US$/MWh) is compared to the
corresponding distributed negative environmental impact index (IAND). In Figure 2.6, the
distributed negative environmental impact index (IAND) is plotted in the abscissa axis and the
cost-benefit index (ICBa, in US$/MWh) in the ordinate axis.
II-33
Kwanza River – Comparison and Selection of Alternatives.
Cost-benefit index
(US$/MWh)
67.36
60.55
59.85
71.18
87.91
Alternative
1
2
3
4
5
Distributed negative
environmental index - IAND
0.0038
0.0028
0.0027
0.0015
0.0066
Figure 2.6: Comparison of alternatives.
Cost-benefit index (US$/Mwh)
Distributed negative environmental index (IAN/km2)
Alternativa = Alternative
For the selection of the chosen alternative, the pairs of Cost-Benefit Index for the
energy (ICB) and the Distributed Negative Environmental Index determined for each
combination of studied alternative was compared. According to the methodology used
in the studies, the alternatives represented by points close to the lower left region of the
chart shall be chosen, which corresponds to the simultaneous minimization of the two
indexes, as shown in Figure 2.6.
II-34
For the selection of the recommended alternative, the followings aspects were
additionally considered:
• Reduction in the undergrounds works and the consequent reduction of the risk
associated to this kind of work;
• Design of the generation equipment within technologic conditions that suit the
current experience;
• Flexibility under the logistic point of view, given the proximity between the
power plants that compose the alternative.
• From the environmental point of view, the higher index regarding the one
presented by alternative 4 did not represent a restriction to the implementation of
the alternative 3 power plants, because the later is the one that presents the lower
Distributed Negative Environmental Impact after alternative 4.
Additionally, Alternative 3 represents an important advance of the Angolan energy
matrix, dominated by the use of fossil fuels. The energy offered will present better
quality, less pollution and will be cheaper than the present sources, thus favoring the
country’s social and economic development.
2.1.2. TECHNOLOGIC ALTERNATIVES
Considering the period of high economic growth that is now taking place in Angola, the
demand for energy is every time higher. Due to the possibility of using different
technologic modalities available for the production of energy, among them the
hydroelectric modality, we describe below, together with a brief discussion, the possible
electric power generation alternatives.
II-35
2.1.2.1. RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
Hydraulic Energy
The hydraulic energy is generated by directing the water flow into a power plant, for which the
civil works that involve both the construction of the dam and the deviation of the river and a
formation of the reservoir are carried out. The set of works and equipment for this kind of power
generation can be called a hydroelectric power plant.
The power plant structure is composed basically by the dam, the system for water collection and
delivery, the power house and the spillway, which work together in an integrated manner. The
dam interrupts the normal flow of the river to allow the formation of the reservoir. The reservoir
allows the formation of the necessary level difference that will define the hydraulic energy, the
collection of water in an adequate volume and the regularization of the river flow in periods of
rain or drought.
The collection and delivery systems are formed by tunnels, channels or ducts that have the
purpose of carrying the water up to the power house. This later installation houses the turbines,
formed by a series of blades attached to an axis connected to the generator. During the rotary
movement, the turbines convert the kinetic energy (from the water movement) into electric
energy by means of the generators that will produce electricity. After passing through the
turbine, the water is conducted back to the natural river bed by the outlet channel.
The spillway has the purpose of allowing the outflow of water whenever the reservoir levels
exceed the design limits. The spillway is opened when there is an excess of flow or rain, or also
when there is water in more quantity than it is necessary for storage or power generation. In
rainy periods, the process of opening the spillways is intended to avoid floods in the areas of
influence.
II-36
Figure 2.7: Schematic profile of a hydroelectric power plant.
Source: ANEEL, 2008.
Reservatório = Reservoir
Duto = Duct
Casa de força = Power house
Generator = Generator
Turbina = Turbine
Rio = River
Fluxo de água = Water flow
Linhas de transmissão de energia = Power transmission lines
The generation of energy by means of hydroelectric power plants has the advantage of
the utilization of a renewable and low operation cost source when compared to
thermoelectric power plants.
On the other side, as hydroelectric enterprises are implemented in places where it is
possible to use the fall and flow of water courses, the turbines for such enterprises are
specifically designed for each location. Therefore, detailed technical studies are
necessary for the adequate implementation of this type of enterprise, thus requiring time
and financial resources.
A summary of advantages and disadvantages of energy generation by means of
hydroelectric power plants is given in Frame 2.1.
II-37
Frame 2.1: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of hydroelectric power generation in
Angola.
Advantages
•
Renewable energy;
•
Lower generation costs considering the investment on the power plant implementation,
operation and maintenance;
•
Lower operation and maintenance costs;
•
Undetermined service life (above 50 years);
•
Lower investment on the implementation of the generation plant;
•
High economical impact in its implementation (generation of employments and
income);
•
Possibility of using the reservoir for others purposes (irrigation and water supply);
•
High flexibility in power generation, in accordance with the hourly demand of the
electric system. (The power demand varies around 50%);
Disadvantages
•
Higher initial investment for the construction;
•
May cause the displacement of the local population and the flooding of land (depending,
obviously, on the type of relief and the region where the enterprise is located);
•
Its construction requires the formation of large water reservoirs that may bring
significant changes in the ecosystems;
•
Need for investment in power transmission;
•
Higher localized environmental impact.
Biomass
Biomass is one of the sources for energy production with the higher growth potential in its
utilization in the years to come, being considered as one of the best alternatives for the
diversification of the energy matrix in many countries.
Any organic matter that can be transformed into mechanical, thermal or electric energy is
classified as biomass. According to its origin, it can be classified as: forestry (mainly wood),
agricultural (soybean, rice and sugar cane, among others) and urban and industrial waste (solid
or liquid, as garbage). The byproducts obtained depend both on the raw-material used (where
the energy potential varies from type to type) and on the processing technology for the
obtainment of the energetic matter.
II-38
II-39
There are many techniques for the production of energy from biomass, each one produces a
certain byproduct and has a different level on the technological point of view. There is, for
example, the direct combustion that produces heat, the pyrolysis or carbonization, the
gasification, the anaerobic digestion and the trans-esterification, for example.
The processes for the production of this type of energy are characterized by having low
efficiency or the need for large volumes of raw-material for the production of small quantities.
An exception to this rule is the utilization of forestry biomass in industrial cogeneration
processes. For example, in the processing of wood in the process for the extraction of Cellulose,
it is possible to extract black lye (or black liquor) used as fuel in cogeneration units in the
cellulose industry itself.
According to a study from the International Energy Agency (2006), around 80% of the Angolan
population uses biomass for cooking and heating, whereas in the rural area and in the urban
perimeter zone, wood and charcoal are, respectively, the more used fuels.
The high number of biomass users, whether of wood or charcoal, causes the destruction of large
extensions of forests and damages to health. The search for new technological alternatives is
one of the most effective measures that will guarantee the sustainable use of biomass resources.
Even with the use of legal wood, exclusively planted for such use, the quantity of pollutants
launched to the atmosphere, as it happens with any thermoelectric technology, is high.
A summary of advantages and disadvantages of energy generation by means of thermoelectric
plants is indicated in Frame 2.2.
II-40
Frame 2.2: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of thermoelectric power generation in
Angola.
Advantages
•
Lower investment on the implementation of the generation plant;
•
Reutilization of previously discarded waste for power generation and utilization in the
same place;
•
Availability of natural gas;
Disadvantages
•
Higher generation cost considering the investment on the implementation of the plant,
operation, maintenance and fuel;
•
Need for the implementation of a complex infrastructure for the processing and
transport of the natural gas, a natural resource available in Angola;
•
Viability conditioned to the availability of gas (gas ducts) and proximity to the energy
consumption center;
•
Low economic impact in the implementation (generation of employment and income);
•
Low flexibility for power generation in following the hourly demand of the electric
system (the power demand varies around 50%);
•
Larger regional influence of the environmental impact related to the burning of fuel.
Wind Energy
Wind energy is, basically, the energy obtained from the kinetic energy (movement energy)
generated by the migration of air masses caused by the temperature differences that exist on the
planet’s surface.
Wind energy generation is a result of the contact of the wind on the propeller blades, elements
that belong to the plant. When the blades rotate they produce the mechanical energy that drives
the rotor of the aero-generator that produces the electricity. The quantity of mechanical energy
transferred – and, therefore, the potential of electric energy to be produced – is directly related
to the air density, the area covered by the rotation of the blades and the wind speed.
II-41
As it happens with hydraulic energy, the generation based on wind energy also depends
on the existence of specific and favorable natural conditions. The assessment of such
conditions or of the wind potential of a certain region requires a systematic work of
collection and analysis of data about wind speed and regime.
The summary of the advantages and disadvantages of energy generation using the wind
is presented in Frame2.3.
Frame 2.3: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of wind energy generation.
Advantages
• It’s an inexhaustible source of energy;
• It does not emit polluting gases and does not generate waste;
• It reduces the emission of greenhouse gases;
• Wind parks are compatible with other land uses, as farming and cattle-raising.
Disadvantages
• Intermittence, this means that the wind does not always blow when electricity is needed,
making difficult the integration of its production to the exploration program;
• Strong visual impact;
• Impact on the local birds: mainly through collision with the blades and unknown effects on
the modifications on the behavior of their of migration habits;
• Sound impact: the sound of the wind hitting the blades produces a constant noise
(43dB(A)).
• Neighboring houses must keep a minimum distance of 200m from the park.
Solar Energy
Solar energy reaches the Earth in the forms of thermal and luminous energy. This
radiation, however, does not reach the entire Earth’s surface in a uniform manner; it
depends on latitude, the season of the year and on atmospheric conditions. It is possible
to capture the light that passes through the Earth’s atmosphere and transform it into
another form of energy usable by men, as thermal and electric energy. The equipment
used in this capture will determine which type of energy will be obtained.
II-42
If a dark surface is used for capturing, the solar energy will be transformed into heat. If
photovoltaic cells are used (photovoltaic panels), the result will be electricity. The
equipment necessary for the production of heat is called collectors and concentrators,
because, besides collecting, sometimes it is necessary to concentrate the radiation on a
single point. This is the principle of many water solar heaters. Two systems can be used
in the production of electric energy: the heliothermic and the photovoltaic.
In the heliothermic system, the solar radiation is converted into heat that is used in
thermo-electric plants for the production of electricity. The complete process comprises
five phases: collection of the radiation, conversion into heat, transport and storage and,
finally, conversion into electricity. For a heliothermic power plant it is necessary a place
with high incidence of direct solar radiation, which means low cloud intensity and low
rainfall indexes.
In the photovoltaic system, the transformation of solar radiation into electricity is direct.
Therefore, it is necessary to adapt a semiconducting material (typically silicon) so, when
it is stimulated by the radiation, it allows the electronic flow (positive and negative
particles).
The solar energy plant is an alternative that can be considered for the supply of energy,
mainly in rural communities. Solar energy plants using photovoltaic units were already
implemented in some urban locations in an experimental manner, in social equipment as
schools, clinics and community centers around the world.
The use of solar energy in replacement of the use of biomass, for example, would be a
feasible alternative for a rural community, thus contributing for the reduction deforested
areas and the improvement of the quality of life of the affected population. However, for
the generation of energy for a larger population it would be necessary large areas for the
implementation of the solar panel park, which have high acquisition costs.
II-43
The summary of the advantages and disadvantages of energy generation using the solar
energy is presented in Frame 2.4.
Frame 2.4: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of solar energy.
Advantages
• It’s an inexhaustible source of energy;
• It does not emit polluting gases and does not generate waste;
• It reduces the emission of greenhouse gases;
• The plants need only minimum maintenance;
• Solar energy is excellent in remote places or places with difficult access, because
its installation in low scale does not require large investments in transmission
lines.
Disadvantages
• There is variation in the quantities produced according to the climate situation
(rain, snow);
• As no production takes place at night, it is mandatory the existence of storage
means for the energy produced during the day in places where the solar panels
are not connected to the power transmission network;
• The forms of solar energy storage are less efficient when compared for example
to fossil fuels;
• Solar panels have little efficiency.
Biogas
Its application allows the reduction of the greenhouse effect gases and contributes with
the fight against the pollution of the soil and of water tables. Biogas is obtained from the
biomass contained in waste (urban, industrial and from farming) and in the sewage. This
biomass passes naturally from the solid state to the gaseous one through the action of
microorganisms that decompose organic matter in an anaerobic (without air)
environment.
In this case, the biogas is also launched to the atmosphere and, therefore, also
contributes to the global warming, since it is composed by methane (CH4), carbon
II-44
dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), hydrogen (H2), oxygen (O2) and hydrosulphuric gas
(H2S). The utilization of garbage for the production of energy allows the piping and
utilization of this gas and the reduction of the volume of solid waste.
Actually, there are three technological routes for the utilization of garbage as an energy source.
One of them, the simplest and more used is the direct combustion of solid waste. Another is the
gasification by thermochemical means (production of heat by means of chemical reactions).
Finally, the third (more used for the production of biogas) is the artificial reproduction of the
natural process, where the action of microorganisms in an anaerobic environment produces the
decomposition of organic matter and, as a result, the emission of biogas.
The summary of the advantages and disadvantages of energy generation by the utilization of
biogas is presented in Frame 2.5
Frame 2.5: Summary of the advantages and disadvantages of energy generation by means of
biogas.
Advantages
•
The adapted equipment has shown a reasonable performance;
•
It disperses quickly in the atmosphere in case of leaks;
•
It is not necessary to be purified only the removal of the condensed liquids is necessary
along the collection and distribution ducts;
•
The combustion is clean, with reduced emission of pollutants and good thermal
efficiency.
Disadvantages
•
The quantity of energy generated by the biogas is not constant, it varies along the
production period;
•
Long period for the recovery of the investment;
•
It presents risks of asphyxia, fire and explosion.
II-45
2.1.2.2. NON-RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES
Natural Gas
Natural gas is a hydrocarbon resulting from the decomposition of organic matter during millions
of years. It is found underground, in porous rocks isolated from the environment by an
impermeable layer. In its first decomposition stages, this organic matter of animal origin
produces petroleum and in its last degradation stages, natural gas.
That is why it is common the discovery of natural gas both associated to petroleum and in
isolated fields (not associated natural gas).
The application of natural gas in the production of electric energy can be divided into two
modalities. One of them is the exclusive generation of electricity, the other is cogeneration,
from which it is also extracted heat and steam used in industrial processes.
The use of natural gas as a supply source for power generation plants is only viable when the
thermoelectric plant is implemented where this resource is available. In Angola, the offer of gas
is limited only to the provinces of Cabinda and Zaire, therefore, the use of this type of power
plant becomes very limited and without conditions to compete with other sources.
The utilization foreseen for the natural gas was considered in the project for the exportation of
Liquefied Natural Gas of Angola (GNLA), a study disclosed at the end of the 90’s and approved
in 2001 by the Council of Ministers. In order to make viable the utilization of this resource, the
construction of a collection network was foreseen for the gas produced in some blocks (0, 2, 14,
15,17, 18, 32 and 33), including a gas pipeline to transport the gas to Soyo, a new gas
liquefaction center, installations for gas separation and piers. The production of LNG is initially
intended for exportation. However, the Government of Angola and Sonangol have requested a
market study with respect to the exploration of the domestic market. Therefore, the use of the
gas still depends on large investments, mainly on the implementation of infrastructure not
compatible with the urgency claimed by the country. The main investment in this area is that of
the Angola LNG Factory in the municipality of Soyo.
II-46
The summary of the advantages and disadvantages of energy generation by the utilization of
natural gas is presented in Frame 2.6.
Frame 2.6: Summary of the advantages and disadvantages of generation by means of natural
gas.
Advantages
•
Lower costs in the construction of the plant if compared to the hydroelectric plant;
•
The plants can be built close to the gas sources, therefore, reducing losses;
•
For being lighter than air, the gas dissipates quickly in the atmosphere in case of leak;
•
Low requirements for treating the combustion gases;
•
Does not require storage, thus eliminating the risks of fuel storage.
Disadvantages
•
For being a fossil fuel, it is classified as non-renewable energy;
•
Emission of greenhouse effect gases when burned (depending on the characteristics of
the natural gas burned and on the combustion reaction conditions).
Petroleum Byproducts
O petroleum is flammable oil, formed from the decomposition of organic matter as plants,
marine animals and the vegetation typical of temporarily flooded regions, and is found only in
sedimentary terrain. The base of its composition is hydrocarbon, a substance composed by
carbon and hydrogen, to which atoms of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur can be attached, in
addition to metallic ions, mainly of nickel and vanadium.
Crude petroleum has no direct application. Its utilization requires a refining process from which
the byproducts are obtained and then distributed to a pulverized and diversified consumer
market. So, in addition to the extraction, the production chain comprises another three stages:
crude oil transport (normally in oil pipelines or ships), refining and distribution (delivery of
byproducts to the end consumer, usually in tank trucks).
II-47
The electric power production process is similar in all plants using fossil fuels as rawmaterial in either solid or liquid state, which includes the majority of the petroleum
byproducts (see Figure 2.8). In a very simplified description, this material is transported
up to the plant, stored, and later burned in a combustion chamber. The heat obtained in
this process is used to heat and increase the pressure of the water that will be
transformed into steam. This steam drives the turbines that transform the thermal energy
into mechanical energy. The generator then transforms the mechanical energy into
electric energy.
After moving the turbines, the steam is directed to the condenser where it will return to
the liquid state. The water that circulates inside the coils connected to the equipment is
the cooling fluid. This liquid, by its turn, is directed again to the boiler by a pump
system, where it will repeat the production process of the thermal energy that will be
transformed into mechanical energy that will drive the turbines.
The combustion and cooling stages (which also implies in the removal of noncondensable gases from the steam) are those where the polluting gases are released to
the atmosphere. The volume and type of the emitted gas will vary according to the
composition of the fuel to be burned, the burning process or post-combustion removal
and also to the pollutant dispersion conditions (chimney height, land shape and
meteorology).
II-48
Figure 2.8: Schematic profile of the power production process using petroleum
Chaminé = Chimney
Pré-aquecedor de ar = Air pre-heater
Aquecedor de água = Water heater
Turbina = Turbine
Gerador = Generator
Transformadores = Transformers
Caldeira = Boiler
Ventilador de entrada = Intake fan
Ventilador de saída = Outlet fan
Bomba de água …. = Boiler water supply pump
Bomba de condensado = Condensate pump
Condensador = Condenser
Bomba de circulação = Circulation pump
Água de resfriamento = Cooling water
Disjuntores = Circuit breakers
A utilization of liquid fuels as diesel oil or fuel oil to supply the power generation plants
depends on the availability of these supplies. The Integrated Planning study of the Electric
Sector of the Ministry of Energy and Water has concluded that power generation by means of a
thermoelectric plant, with the use of oil fuel and steam generation plants is not viable because it
is a more expensive option than the natural gas. About this option, it must be considered that:
•
This type of arrangement will be gradually replaced by natural gas generation which,
when available, will become a more economically attractive alternative;
•
It is a very complex system that requires a higher installation time.
Nuclear Energy
The raw-material used in nuclear energy production is the uranium ore, a metal a little less hard
than steel, found in natural state in rocks in the earth’s crust. Uranium atoms are extracted from
this mineral to be used in nuclear generation.
II-49
In a very simplified description, in this case the nucleus of the atom is submitted to a fission
process (division) to generate energy. If the energy is slowly released, it will turn into heat. If it
is released quickly, it will turn into light. In thermonuclear plants it is released slowly and heats
the water placed inside the reactors to produce the steam that will drive the turbines.
The thermonuclear plants (see Figure 2.9) are equipped with a structure called pressure vessel
that contains the water that will cool the reactor nucleus (where the nuclear fuel is placed). This
water, which is highly radioactive, circulates after being heated through a steam generator in
closed circuit, which is called the primary circuit. This primary circuit heats the water in
another circuit that passes through the generator (secondary circuit) and transforms into steam,
then driving the turbine that will generate electric power. Both circuits have no communication
between each other.
Figure 2.9: Schematic profile of a nuclear plant
Vaso de contenção = Containment vessel
Reator = Reactor
Pressurizador = Pressurizer
Vapor = Steam
Vapor de pressão = Steam under pressure
Barras de controle = Control bars
Elemento combustível = Fuel element
Gerador de steam = Steam generator
Água = Water
Bomba principal de …. = Main reactor cooling pump
Bomba = Pump
Torre de transmission = Transmission tower
Turbina = Turbine
Gerador = Generator
Tanque de água de alimentação = Water supply tank
II-50
Circuito primário = Primary circuit
Circuito secundário = Secondary circuit
Sistema de água de refrigeração = Cooling water system
In addition to the complex uranium preparation process, also called nuclear fuel cycle, there is
also the problem of disposing the material used. There are two basic cycles: one open and one
closed. The first one involves the final disposal of the fuel used. In the second, the remaining
uranium and the plutonium produced are used again for power generation as a mixed oxide
(MOx).
The summary of the advantages and disadvantages of nuclear energy generation is presented in
Frame 2.7.
Frame 2.7: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of nuclear energy generation.
Advantages
•
Does not contribute to the greenhouse effect;
•
Does not pollute the air with gases of sulfur, nitrogen, particulates, etc.;
•
Does not use large land areas: the plant requires small installation spaces;
•
Does not depend on climate seasons (neither rain nor wind);
•
Little or almost no impact on the biosphere;
•
Is a more concentrated source for power generation;
•
The quantity of radioactive waste generated is extremely small and compact;
•
The process technology is well known;
•
The fuel transport risk is significantly lower when compared to the gas and oil of the
thermoelectric plants;
Disadvantages
•
Need to store the nuclear waste in isolated and protected places;
•
Need to isolate the plant after it is shut down;
•
It has higher costs when compared to the other energy sources;
•
The waste produced emit radioactivity during many years;
•
Difficulties in storing the waste, consisting mainly of localization and safety problems;
•
Can interfere with ecosystems;
•
Risk of accidents in the nuclear plant.
Mineral Coal
In a brief description, the coal is extracted from the soil, fragmented and stored in silos, to be
later transported to the plant, where it will be stored again.
II-51
After this, it is transformed into dust, which will allow a better thermal efficiency when placed
in boilers for burning.
The heat released by this burning is transformed in steam when it is transferred to the water that
circulates in the pipes placed around the burner. The thermal energy (or heat) contained in the
steam is transformed into mechanical (or kinetic) energy that will drive the turbine attached to
the electric power generator (see Figure 2.9). This movement will produce the electric energy.
In the case of cogeneration, the process is similar, but the steam, besides generating electric
energy, is also extracted to be used in industrial processes.
Figure 2.10: Schematic profile of the electric power production process from mineral coal.
Carvão mineral = Mineral coal
Esteira = Conveyor
Vapor = Steam
Turbina = Turbine
Gerador = Generator
Transformador = Transformer
Rio/Reservatório = River/Reservoir
Água para resfrigeração = Cooling water
Caldeira = Boiler
The main restriction to the use of coal is the strong social-environmental impact present in all
the production process stages and also in the consumption. The extraction, for example, causes
the degradation das mining areas. The combustion is responsible for carbon dioxide gas
emissions (CO2).
The summary of the advantages and disadvantages of energy generation using mineral coal is
presented in Frame 2.8.
II-52
Frame 2.8: Summary of advantages and disadvantages of energy generation using mineral coal.
Advantages
•
When compared to hydroelectric power plants, they are quicker to build, and can,
therefore, satisfy energy demands in a quicker way;
•
They can be installed in places close to the consumption regions, thus reducing the cost
with towers and transmission lines;
Disadvantages
•
The final cost of this type of energy is higher than the one generated in hydroelectric
plants, due to the price of fossil fuels;
•
Finite source;
•
Emission of greenhouse effect gases.
2.2. JUSTIFICATION OF THE GENERATION TECHNOLOGY CHOICE
Among the generation sources studied, the hydroelectric plants have the best cost/benefit index
in the economic point of view, and also in environment aspects, being considered one of the
cleanest generation sources with the best capacity to meet in large scale the increase in the
electricity offer.
Economically, the thermoelectric plants are less competitive than the hydroelectric plants, as the
later presents generation costs around US$ 55,00/MWh while the thermoelectric plants are
placed in the range between US$ 60,25/MWh for natural gas (provided the infrastructure is
already installed) and US$108,08 MWh for diesel (Sondotécnica/Odebrecht, 2003).
Regarding pollution, although there are efficient technologies for the reduction of the emission
of the pollutants generated by the process of burning such fuels (diesel and coal), high levels of
control imply in also high costs for the acquisition of equipment and the adequacy of processes,
which will reduce even more the competitiveness of the these fuels in the production of electric
energy.
As thermoelectric plants burning natural gas are considered the cleanest among the
thermoelectric sources using non-nuclear fuel, since its effects are less harmful than those of
other fuels (diesel and coal). However, that produces impacts that must be considered, as the use
of a non-renewable energy source and the emission of pollutants specially CO2 and NOx in
high proportions, which have effects on the population health, the vegetation and the associated
II-53
fauna. The economic disadvantages regarding the hydroelectric sources are associated to the
higher generation cost. Among the higher investment costs there is the implementation of
infrastructure, as the construction of complex transport systems (gas pipelines).
Solar energy, although being one of the cleanest energy generation sources, still presents high
generation costs, having as main disadvantage the restricted technology and the implementation
costs. Among the advantages attributed to the photovoltaic systems there is the maintenance
facility; the possibility storing the generated electricity in batteries and the relatively low
environmental impacts, mainly in the operation phase.
Other disadvantages are due to:
•
The low power of the generated energy, which limits the uses;
•
Insufficient maintenance also leading to the abandonment of the systems;
•
The need to find viable solutions for the acquisition and disposal of batteries.
Considering the data mentioned, the implementation of hydroelectric power plants turns out to
be the best alternative, because it is a cheap energy source for the development of the country
both in the medium and long terms, thus making possible the integration of the energy supply
systems, based on the high Angolan hydroelectric potential and on the low operation cost.
Regarding the environmental aspects, it must be emphasized that it is a renewable source and
that the generation of impacts can be mitigated and/or compensated, in addition to being in line
with the energy and economical aspects.
2.3. JUSTIFICATION FOR THE CHOICE OF THE LOCATION
In order to choose the implementation place of this project, the high energy potential of the
Medium Kwanza was taken in consideration, as well as the existence of two dams in the region,
the dams of Capanda (upstream of the project) and Cambambe (upstream of the project).
For the definition of the best alternative for the projects in the medium section of the Kwanza
basin, a study of the division of falls was developed in 2008 by Intertechne Consultores S.A.
This study has considered the alternatives highlighted by the works of previous decades and the
advance of the technology that took place in projects of hydroelectric plants along these years,
and has assessed five alternatives and a total of nine different enterprises. The alternatives
described in section 2.1.1 (Localization alternatives) are summarized in the Table. The
parameters established for this assessment stage were the following:
II-54
•
The proposal of upstream projects, for each alternative, allowing the implementation of
discharge regularization reservoirs;
•
The association of these with others projects, allowing the total use of the gross fall
available;
•
The minimization of the environmental impacts;
•
The exhaustion of possibilities with multiple plants and the assessment of a solution
with a single plant.
Table 2.8: Summary of the study of Division of Falls for the plants in the Medium Section of
the Kwanza River – Alternatives for the Division of Falls.
Alternative
Plant
1
Nhangue
Laúca
Caculo Cabaça
Maximum
normal reservoir
W.L.* (m)
850
760
630
II-55
Downstream
W.L.*
Gross fall (m)
760
630
415
90
130
215
Alternative
Plant
2
Dunga
Caculo Cabaça
3
Laúca Alto
Caculo Cabaça
4
Muta
Nhangue
Laúca
Caculo 1
5
Caculo 2
Caculo 3
*W.L.: water level.
Maximum
normal reservoir
W.L.* (m)
850
630
850
630
850
850
760
630
555
512
Downstream
W.L.*
Gross fall (m)
630
415
630
415
415
760
630
555
512
415
220
215
330
215
435
90
130
75
43
97
At the end of the assessment studies for the five alternatives, an option was made for the Laúca
Alto plants that presented the lowest cost/benefit index and the second lowest distributed
negative environmental impact index – IAND, calculated based on the relevance of the use
flooded use typologies in the reproduction of the balance of the land, aquatic and socialeconomic ecosystems. The chosen alternative is described in item 2.1.1.6 of this chapter.
It is worth pointing out that the construction of the Laúca dam is in compliance with the
Angolan government planning to increase the country’s electric energy production capacity
until 20162.
This is also in accordance with the National Strategic Policy for Energy Safety (Presidential
Decree no. 256/12), which provides the consolidation of the increase in the Angolan energy
capacity by 4.5 times until the year of 2025 (to a total of 9GW). The conclusion of the works
will boost the Angolan economic and commercial activity, as well as improve the population’s
quality of life.
_______________________
2
Investment program on the Electric and Water Sectors until 2016 – MINEA (2012).
II-56
2.4. PRESENTATION OF THE PROJECT
Odebrecht Angola was contracted by GAMEK to carry out the civil works of the Laúca dam
construction. Therefore, the works were separated in two phases, the first one is already in
progress, and covers the construction of the river deviation by means of two tunnels. The second
phase covers the construction of the dam and the supporting infrastructure for the conclusion of
the power generation plant.
The Laúca hydroelectric plant will have a total installed power of 2,070 MW and shall be
connected to the interconnected Angolan system using the voltage of 400 kV. The plant
operation start-up is foreseen for 2017. Table 2.10 presents the main characteristics of the
proposed enterprise.
Table 2.9: Main characteristics of the Laúca hydroelectric plant.
Characteristics
Installed Power
2,070MW
Turbines
6 units
Turbine Type
Francis
Max. Normal W.L.
850.00 m
Min. Normal W.L.
800.00 m
Gross Fall
219.00 m
Net Fall
200.00 m
Total Volume
5,482 x 106 m³
Useful Volume
4,120 x 106 m³
Average Power
987 MW
Average Generation 8,643,229 MWh/year
Cost of Energy
US$ 1,791/ kW
Cost of Installation
US$ 3,701,600,000.00
II-57
Characteristics
Reservoir (flooded area)
188.10 km²
Total volume of the reservoir
5,482 x 106 m3
Source: Intertechne Consultores S.A3.
The overall layout of the Laúca dam construction works can be seen in Figure 2.11.
The next sections will describe the respective methodologies adopted for the main dam
construction activities.
___________________________
3
Document 1208-LA-4-GE-G00-00G-00RT-0001_B_Emissivel page 205/205.
II-58
Figure 2.11: Overall layout of the Laúca dam construction works.
ESCRITÓRIO DE CAMPO = FIELD OFFICE
REFEITÓRIO AVANÇADO = ADVANCED CANTEEN
SANITÁRIO COLETIVO = COLLECTIVE TOILETS
CENTRAL DE GERADORES = GENERATOR STATION
CENTRAL DE BRITAGEM = CRUSHING STATION
CENTRAL DE GELO = ICE STATION
LABORATÓRIO DE CONCRETO = CONCRETE LABORATORY
CENTRAL DE CONCRETO = CONCRETE STATION
CENTRAL PREMOLDADOS = PRECAST STATION
CENTRAL CARPINTARIA E ARMAÇÃO = FRAMEWORK BUILDING AND ERECTION
STATION
CENTRAL DE AR COMPRIMIDO = COMPRESSED AIR STATION
CAIXA SEPARADORA DE ÁGUA E ÓLEO = WATER/OIL SEPARATION BOX
TANQUE DE DECANTAÇÃO = SEDIMENTATION TANK
PLATAFORMA DE LAVAGEM DE VEÍCULOS = VEHICLE WASHING PAD
ESTALEIRO = WORKSHOP
ATERRO SANITÁRIO = SANITARY LANDFILL
PAIOL DE EXPLOSIVOS = EXPLOSIVE STORAGE
LAYOUT GERAL = GENERAL LAYOUT
ESTALEIRO AVANÇADO = ADVANCED WORK SITE
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
II-59
2.4.1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
For the Laúca dam, the general arrangement comprises open air and underground works, in a
project of the deviation type, which shall be implemented on a section of the Kwanza River
Valley that has an extremely embedded path following the shape of a “Z”, configuring a natural
fall in the order of 100 m distributed along an extension of two (2) Km. Figure 2.12 presents the
general arrangement of the works.
O arrangement of the works includes the closing of the valley with a concrete dam compacted
with cylinder (BCC) 132 m-high and with a crest extension of approximately 1,100 m, which
shall be built with the protection of cofferdams transversal to the river bed (see Figure 2.13).
The deviation and river control during the construction is being carried out by means of (2)
tunnels excavated on the right shoulder, with diameter of 14.0 m. The tunnels will be equipped
with a concrete control structure with the sill on the 715.00 elevation and with closing devices
with three (3) gates each. The tunnels are already in the construction process and an EIA was
carried out and submitted to the Environment Ministry in January 2013.
In order to control floods, the construction of a spillway over the river bed was considered, of
the high sill type with “Creager” profile, with a control structure equipped with three (3)
segment gates 15.00 m-wide and 20.95 m-high, associated to a deflecting trough. The structure
was designed for the passage of a 10,020 m³/s flow, thus exceeding the recurrence time of
10,000 years.
The Generation Circuit (Figure 2.14) includes the following hydraulic structures:
•
Supply channel integrated to the reservoir, allowing an adequate flow up to the water
intake sized for a depletion of 50.0 m. It is entirely excavated in rock, as shown in
Figure 2.12. After the supply channel, the main plant is supplied by six independent
circuits, one for each turbine (see Figure 2.15);
II-60
• Six (6) water intakes of the gravity type, in island arrangement, with crest in the 855.00 m
elevation and 75.0m-high, built with 43.0m-long independent blocks in the stream direction
and 13.0 m-wide, away from the supply channel excavations for the connection to the supply
tunnels, in the well section, on the level of the supply channel floor. The access from the
right bank will be made by a landfill structure and a reinforced concrete bridge, connected to
the closest intake. The intake towers will be interconnected by bridge sections in reinforced
concrete 18.0 m-long, thus providing continuity to the portal crane rails;
• Six (6) penstocks to the power house with the followings characteristics:
o A first section in well arrangement with circular section, excavated in rock (sandstone),
around 80.0m-high in the average, coated with concrete with inside diameter of 7.0m,
associated to the inclined tunnel with rectangular arch section with 9.0 m by 12.2 m.
Average length of around 1,900,0m, having in the last 45m a transition to a rectangular
arch section coated with concrete with 9.0m, followed by a 25.0 m-long shielded
section with diameter of 5.2 m;
• Underground power house equipped with six (6) sets of Francis-type turbines, with vertical
axis generator, with unit power of 334 MW – 2.004 MW of installed power, and an
approximate length of 267m, including the service area;
• Six outlet tunnels with rectangular arch section with 11.0m by 14.0 m of diameter and
average length of 40m each;
• Structure of the outlet tunnel gates.
The general arrangement of the hydraulic circuit underground works is complemented by the
tunnels for access to the main plant, the auxiliary construction tunnels, the tunnels for
ventilation wells and exit of the shielded buses, that compose the connection from the main
plant up to the outside, on the top of the right shoulder, where the ventilation system and the
substation will be implemented.
Considering the need to meet the established downstream flows for the operation of the
Cambambe AH, under extreme conditions of the reservoir depletion and with the Laúca AH out
of operation, and also the maintenance of flows with ecologic purposes during the filling of the
reservoir, the project foresees the construction of um bottom discharge device for this purpose.
The works include a control structure equipped with a segment gate in a hydraulic circuit inside
the gallery on the dam body, with a total extension of approximately 118.0 m and a discharge
capacity in excess of 800 m³/s.
II-61
In order to meet the need of flows with ecologic purposes, under any operation conditions of the
enterprise in the derivation section with an extension of 2 km, a hydroelectric plant (Ecologic
Plant) was designed downstream of the dam for the use of such flows (Figure 2.16).
The Ecologic Plant, in open air, is located on the left shoulder downstream of the dam, with an
installed power of 65.5 MW (1 turbine-generator unit), and shall be supplied by a system
composed of:
• Water intake, built as a cantilever structure, supported on the face upstream of the dam’s left
bank, where a fixed grating and a wagon-type gate are installed to protect the turbines, in
addition of a servomotor for the assembly and maintenance of the gate. The intake operation
floor will be the dam crest itself located on the 855.00 m- elevation.
• A penstock with a 4.00 m-inside diameter circular section and length of 93.4 m;
• Plant with a unit block width of 36.00 m and total length of 41,00 m;
• Outlet channel;
II-62
Figure 2.12: General arrangement of Laúca AH.
II-63
Figure 2.13: General arrangement of the BCC dam.
II-64
Figure 2.14: General arrangement of the main generation circuit.
II-65
Figure 2.15: General arrangement of the main plant.
II-66
Figure 2.16: General arrangement of the ecologic plant generation circuit.
II-67
2.4.2. RESERVOIR
The Laúca AH reservoir shall operate with depletion for flow regularization and shall have the
following main characteristics:
•
Total area: 188 km²;
•
Total volume: 5,482 Hm³;
•
Maximum of maximums WL: EL. 852.00 m;
•
Maximum WL: EL. 850.00 m;
•
Minimum WL: EL. 800.00 m;
•
Maximum depletion: 50.00 m;
•
Useful volume: 4,120 Hm³;
•
Average flow: 614 m³/s;
•
Minimum ecologic flow: 60 m³/s.
The Laúca AH reservoir has a maximum extension in the order of 36 km and a maximum width
of 15 km, presenting a rounded shape in its larger portion and ending in a 9 km-long embedded
section in the form of “canyon”. The sedimentation studies have determined a reservoir service
life in excess of 300 years.
The Laúca AH shall operate with a maximum normal level in the 850 elevation, flooding an
area with around 188 km². The total stored volume at this elevation is of 5,651.2 Hm³. The
elevation x area and elevation x volume curves of the reservoir are presented in Figure 2.17.
According to the filling studies carried out, it is estimated that the reservoir water level will
reach the 830 elevation within a time of 124 days with 50% of probability for an average
incoming flow of 350 m3/s. The Laúca AH reservoir can be considered small when compared to
the design flows of the spillway. Therefore, the lamination of floods was not considered. The
design flow can be drained by the structure with 2.00 m over-elevation in the reservoir.
The spillway design was also checked for two exceptional conditions:
• The incoming flow of 14,000 m³/s, corresponding to the maximum probable flood of
Capanda AH, must be drained by the joint operation of the spillway, the bottom discharger,
the ecologic plant and four machines of the main plant with a water level less than or equal
to 856.2 m.
II-68
• For the condition where one gate is out of operation (n-1), the ten-millionth flood of 8,239
m³/s must be drained by the joint operation of the spillway and the bottom discharger with a
water level less than or equal to 855.00 m.
II-69
Figure 2.17: Map of the Laúca dam reservoir
II-70
2.4.3. ACCESSES
The access to the areas where the Laúca AH will be built is carried out through the right bank of
river Kwanza, following the local road that connects the city of Dondo to Capanda AH. The
Laúca AH enterprise will be implemented on km 307.5 of the Kwanza River, downstream of
Capanda AH. Starting in the road from Dondo to Capanda AH there are two alternatives to
reach the enterprise area. The first alternative is from the Nhangue Ya Pepe village, riding 10
km on a trail. The second alternative is from the Muta village, also riding for 10 km on a trail
until the dam axis area (see Figure 2.18).
Figure 2.18: Map of accesses to Laúca dam.
II-71
2.4.4. AREAS FOR SOIL EXTRACTION AND WASTE DISPOSAL
The soil extraction areas correspond to the places where the excavation of inert materials to be
used in the construction of the dam’s auxiliary structure will take place. The cuts will be carried
out with prevision for the adequate utilization or rejection of the extracted materials.
Therefore, only the materials that, following the classification and characterization carried out in
the soil laboratory and confirmed in the cuts, as being compatible with those specified for the
execution of the necessary services, will be transported for utilization.
For the river deviation works, three (3) clay mines and two (2) disposal areas (areas for disposal
of unwanted material) were foreseen4 (see Figure 2.19 and Figure 2.20). Disposal area 1 with an
area of 1,916.21 m2, installed in the access to the tunnel mouths, will be used as work platform
for the river deviation teams. It was built as a strategy for the enlargement of the access to the
mouths, in order to provide more safety to the workers. Disposal area 2, with an area of
4,014.81 m2, installed upstream of the future dam with material originated from the open air
excavations of the intake steps on elevation 800.00, will be incorporated to the main works
cofferdam. Therefore, both areas for the disposal of the excavated material, in this phase of the
works, will be incorporated to the plant’s permanent structures, thus avoiding changes on plots
of land external to the plant. The identification of the mentioned disposal areas and their
localization are given below.
________________________
4
According to Reference Drawings LAU-DR-DE-420-91-002; LAU-DR-DE-360-36-001 and
LAU-DR-DE-420-91-004.
II-72
Figure 2.19: Identification and localization of mines and disposal areas of Laúca AH.
II-73
Figure 2.20: Disposal area and access zone to the mouth of the deviation tunnels.
II-74
Figure 2.21: Localization of the waste disposal areas for the river deviation works.
Legend
Bota fora = Waste disposal area
DESEMBOQUE PARTE SUPERIOR = UPPER DISCHARGE AREA
DESEMBOQUE = DISCHARGE
II-75
For the dam construction, two (2) potential gneiss rock and sandstone mines, which will be used
in the crushing system, were identified (together with the respective quarries), and two (2)
disposal areas, being one on the left bank, where the material will be used in the cofferdam, and
the other on the right bank, which will be used as an extension in the crushing system.
The disposal areas correspond to the places where the discharge of inert, unwanted and waste
materials will take place. The implementation of these areas will take place in places where it is
possible the construction of uniform and regular slopes. The discarded material shall be placed
in continuous and thick layers, thus its compacting can be made with the help of machines used
for the transport and spreading. The minimum slope of such places shall be of 2% in order to
allow the adequate draining of the place. For the construction of the Laúca hydroelectric power
plant, areas upstream of the dam were identified.
The mines (areas for the extraction of rock and clay) as well as the disposal areas will not
exceed the projected elevations for the minimum reservoir level. Figure 2.2 presents the
localization of the inert material mines and disposal areas and their relationship with the Laúca
dam localization.
II-76
Figure 2.22: Disposal and storage areas (disposal and mines)
II-77
Legend
CASA DE FORÇA = POWER HOUSE
SUBESTAÇÃO = SUBSTATION
ESTOQUE ROCHA ARENITO = SANDSTONE STORAGE
ESTOQUE ROCHA GNAISSE = GNEISS ROCK STORAGE
BOTA FORA = DISPOSAL AREA
TOMADA D’ÁGUA = WATER INTAKE
BALSA = FERRYBOAT
ESTALEIRO = WORK QUARTERS
TRECHO ASFALTADO = PAVED SECTION
2.4.4.1. IMPLEMENTATION OF THE STORAGE AND DISPOSAL AREAS
For the implementation of the excavated material disposal and storage areas, the preparation of
the area to be used was considered as follows:
•
Marking of the area.
•
Cleaning of vegetation.
•
Scraping of the vegetation soil (between 20 cm and 30 cm), considering that this soil
will be left around the disposal and storage area.
•
After the usage time of the disposal and storage areas, these areas will be covered. Should there
exist disposal areas located in regions subject to flooding, they shall not receive the vegetation
soil recovering.
For the recovering of the areas used as storage and disposal areas, vegetation soil from other
regions can be used, including from outside the construction site.
2.4.4.2. UTILIZATION OF THE STORAGE AND DISPOSAL AREAS
The areas for the storage of excavated materials will be separated in sectors according to the
type of excavated material, regarding its utilization. The materials obtained from the
underground excavation of tunnels (gneiss) will be directed to storage places separated from
those excavated from rocks in open air (sandstone). The excavated volumes will be handled in
the following way:
The material obtained from the excavation of the right bank shoulder of the dam (open air
excavation), composed by meta-sedimentary rocks, with levels of silicon-rich sandstone in the
upper portion and siltite and sandstone penetrations in the lower portion inferior, will be
II-78
mapped, excavated and separated to be directed to the storage and disposal area on the river’s
right bank. According to its characterization, they will be allocated for future use.
The open air excavations on the dam’s left bank shoulder will generate materials with the same
properties of those in the right bank. They will be selected, so the silicon-rich sandstone and the
siltites will compose part of the cofferdam rock filling. The materials obtained from the
underground excavation of the pressure tunnel (gneiss) will be directed to the right bank
storage, for later crushing.
The underground excavation of the power house (gneiss) will generate materials for the right
bank storage until the implementation of the crusher. After this date, the materials will be
directly taken for crushing, preferably.
Regarding the material removed from the tunnel and the outlet channel, resulting from
underground excavation in gneiss, after the crusher installation, will be directed preferably to
the crusher, without passing through the storage.
The slope area of the Power House (external) will require treatment. The material removed from
the common excavation will be directed to the disposal area on the right bank. On the other side,
the material obtained from rock excavation in open air, will be directed to a storage specific for
this material, also located on the right bank.
Materials obtained from the common excavation of the right bank accesses will be directed to
the disposal area on the same bank, while those removed from the left bank accesses will be
taken to the left bank disposal area. If necessary and viable, in both cases they will be selected:
silicon-rich sandstone will be directed to the storage on the corresponding bank for later
utilization.
In all rock removal cases where there is a preference for direct transport to the crusher, and the
same is not able to absorb the conveyed quantities, they will be directed to the storage, because
the priority is the removal of the exploded materials the and cleaning of the work front.
2.4.5. SUPPORT INFRASTRUCTURES AND LABOR
Offices, worker lodging and support structures belonging to the construction site are being
implemented at approximately 6 km from the Dondo road to the Capanda AH, as well as the
industrial installations, on the flat areas on the river’s right bank. The approximate number of
II-79
workers during the so-called “peak work period” will be of approximately 3,700 people, totaling
around 5,800 workers, including direct and indirect services (support, administrative,
laboratory, etc.). The peak period shall take place between the second and third years of
construction, close to the month of October 2015.
The structures are being built and expanded with temporary buildings, being such execution in
progress, and the expansions will take place as established in the construction work schedule.
The dam construction work quarters is presented in Figure 2.23. In order to check the general
location of the workshop within the context of the works, please refer to Figure 2.18 that
presents the general site layout according to the accesses. The mentioned work quarters is
subdivided in:
•
Administrative quarters, composed by the centralized structures of offices, lodging,
leisure areas, warehouses, mechanical workshops and others, close to the entrance gate;
•
Advanced quarters, composed by field offices, laboratories and advanced canteens,
among others;
•
Industrial workshop, composed by industrial concrete manufacturing centers, crushing,
framework, carpentry, among others.
2.4.5.1. ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY
For the supply of electric power to the administrative structures of the work quarters, a diesel
generation center is being used, composed by 2 generators with 62 KVA each. Generators
located close to the work fronts supply the localized loads and are mobilized and allocated as to
fulfill the needs.
In order to provide power with higher reliability, safety and quality, due to the high power
demands, a 30 kV transmission network will be implemented, connecting the Capanda
substation up to the Laúca AH, in order to supply the power needs in replacement to the
utilization of diesel generators.
At the Laúca AH, a 30/ 15kV lowering substation will receive power and lower its voltage to
allow the distribution to the work fronts.
II-80
As a complement to the arrangement of the power supply to the work quarters and to the work
site, and to the strengthening of the system’s reliability premise, a diesel generation center will
be installed to meet emergency loads.
Therefore, if for some reason external to the substation and to the internal construction
networks, a loss of the 30 kV power should take place, the power arriving from the diesel
generator units will be automatically switched on, generating in 15 kV and feeding the work
quarters and the construction distribution networks.
2.4.5.2. ADMINISTRATIVE QUARTERS
The administrative work quarters is distributed as shown in Figure 2.23, and is composed by the
mains structures described as follows:
Main Gate
To control the entrance and exit of people in the work area, a main gate will be built in the main
access entrance to the job site and to the work quarters. Such entrance is equipped with an
access control gate and watch house. Additionally, the installation of a truck scale is foreseen
for the weighting of trucks, close to the main gate.
At the side of the gate there will be a parking area, accessible before going through the gate, so
all trucks demanding the site and which had not yet checked in, may remain in waiting.
II-81
Figure 2.23: Layout of the administrative quarters
II-82
Offices of the Contractor and of the Plant Owner
The offices already built, will continue to assist the contractor’s administrative structures, which
are so distributed: office for transit and subcontracting; office for Human Resources structures;
office for the Acreditar Program and associated activities.
Additionally, another office will be designed and built, also to be used by the contractor to
house the contractor’s technical and administrative areas.
Similarly, an additional office will be designed and built for the plant owner, to house his
administrative and technical areas, as well as inspection structure, should this be the case.
Auditory
The auditory, with an area of 339,87m² and capacity for 300 seats, will be designed and built as
to compose the works administrative structure. It will be used for large events and presentations,
and may be used for large meetings, as well as a leisure area, for the projection of films to the
lodged personnel, should the plant administration so determine.
Operational Lodging
Each lodging house will have 72 rooms, each capable of lodging four people, with two single
double-level beds. The bathrooms are individual (shower and toilet), one per room. Therefore,
each lodging block will have capacity for 288 people.
Eight lodgings will be built with this format, with a unit area of 2.261.93m², totaling 576 rooms.
Therefore, the complete operational lodging will have capacity to lodge 2,304 workers.
Lodging for Supervisors
Each lodging house for supervisors will have 72 rooms, each of which will lodge two people in
individual single beds, with um an individual bathroom (shower and toilet) per room. Each
block will have capacity to lodge 144 people.
In seeking a better utilization of the structures already built for the river deviation, as well as the
optimization of the work quarter’s layout, lodging structures already built will be used.
Therefore, two finished blocks will be reallocated for utilization by workers at the supervision
level, being therefore necessary the building of another 6 blocks with this format, with a unit
II-83
area of 2,261.93m². The supervisor lodging area, with two workers per room, will have capacity
for lodging 1,152 people.
Lodging for Technicians
Each lodging block will have 64 rooms that will lodge one person in a single bed, with one
individual bathroom (shower and toilet).
In order to take more advantage of the areas already built, following the previously applied
criteria, the two lodging blocks with characteristics for the lodging of technicians and built to
suit the river deviation contract, will be used in this stage. Therefore, 2 additional lodging
blocks will be built, with a unit area of 1,602.37m². Finally, the four structures, each one with
64 rooms per block, will total 256 lodging rooms.
Residence for the Contractor and for the Plant Owner
Two residences will be built for the contractor, each one composed of 12 suites, kitchen, TV
room and dinning room and service area. The unit area is of 596.15m².
Similarly, two residences will be built for the plant owner, located close to the contractor
residences, composed by 8 suites, kitchen, TV room and dinning room and a service area. The
unit area is of 482.39m².
Main Canteen
The main canteen, built for the river deviation works will be expanded in order to suit the work
demands, totaling a built area of 1,508.94 m² with approximately 812 places. The canteen
expansion area is of 321.76 m². It is worth mentioning that, to complement the structures and
improve the worker’s nutrition, there will be also canteens in the advanced work quarters,
described in the respective item.
Health Care Facility
The Health Care Facility will count with a first-aid room, observation room, infirmary and
pharmacy, destined to basic and preventive assistance in the works. This facility was built
during the first contract, covering the river deviation works, and an area of 140 m² is foreseen
for the expansion, in the proximity of the already built structure.
It is destined to assistance in the case of diseases, endemic illnesses and accidents, and will
count with a waiting room, immunization room, examination room, dressing room, sterilization
and pharmacy, in addition to the pantry and bathroom.
II-84
Washing Room
Located close to the lodgings, the washing room is destined to provide cloth washing and drying
services to the lodged people, with a built area of 211.28m².
Leisure and Sports Areas
A leisure and entertainment area is foreseen for the lodged workers, being also used for carrying
out events. Additionally, areas for sports practice are foreseen.
Regarding the leisure area, the building of a covered structure is foreseen, with a total area of
507.30m². For holding corporate events and celebrations; the covered structure will be built with
total area of 2,410.00m².
Regarding sports, two soccer fields, three multi-sport courts, one tennis court and another soccer
field will be built. As a complement, an additional leisure area will be built close to the
residences of the contractor and the plant owner, to be used by them (built area: 339.87m²).
Warehouse
Warehouses will store, divided in sectors, the civil materials that will be used during the plant
construction. Two close individual units will be installed, each one with a built area of
339.87m².
Oil, Gas and Tire Storage
In order to separate the storage of lubricating oil in drums, gas and tires, separate structures will
be built for each one of these materials.
The structures will be individual, located within the general work quarters layout. Each structure
will be covered, and have a truck entrance area that will make loading and unloading easier.
Therefore, one exclusive structure for oil storage, one for gas, and finally, a third one exclusive
for tires will be built, each one with a unit covered area of 104.68 m².
Fuel Station
The fuel station is planned to carry out the fueling of the vehicles engaged in the works with oil
and gasoline, and is equipped with two oil fuel pumps and one gasoline fuel pump, as shown in
Figure 2.24.
II-85
Lubrication, Tire Repair and Washing Station
This covered structure will allow the execution of lubrication and tire repair works in heavy
equipment, and will include the extension of the existing structure as shown in Figure 2.25. It
will also count with a specific place for vehicle washing in the external area, presented in Figure
2.26, composed by a washing ramp and a washing area composed by another three washing
pads.
The used water will be directed to a decantation tank and later to a water/oil separation box,
built according to Figure 2.27 and Figure 2.28, respectively, which were expanded to suit the
expansion of the station structures.
Maintenance Halls in the Mechanic Workshop
Covered halls in metallic structure will be built to house the mechanical maintenance workshop,
which will be located in the area planned for this purpose as extensions of the existing
structures. Each structure will be adequate for the maintenance of light, medium and heavy
vehicles.
Figure 2.24: Fuel Station
II-86
Figure 2.25: Lubrication and Tire Repair Station
II-87
Figure 2.26: Vehicle Washing Station and Mechanical Workshop
II-88
II-89
Figure 2.27: Decantation Tank
II-90
Figure 2.28: Water/Oil Separation Tank
II-91
Water Treatment Station
The Water Treatment Station (ETA), built for the river deviation works, will be expanded to
allow the supply of drinking water to the work quarters and to the industrial installations that
will need drinking water during the execution of the main works. The treatment capacity will be
of 80 m³/h.
Next to the installation mentioned above, two drinking water reservoirs capable of storing
1,000,000 of liters of water will be built, and two raw water reservoirs capable of storing
2,000,000 liters of pumped water that will later be submitted to treatment.
Sewage Treatment Station (ETE)
The Sewage Treatment Station will collect all work quarter’s effluents and used waters, after
having passed through the separation process, being therefore stabilized and purified. It is
intended to serve a population of 4,000 people. The ETE will be better described in section
Error! The origin of the reference was not found. in this chapter.
Sanitary Landfill
A proper area for the storage of solid waste is defined, as shown in Figure 2.30 and Figure 2.31.
The sanitary landfill will be expanded to receive the debris generated during the plant
construction, under the monitoring of people qualified in environmental initiatives. The solid
waste management will be described in section Error! The origin of the reference was not
found. in this chapter, in the item Solid Waste Plan.
Explosives Warehouse
As shown in Figure 2.32, the already built explosive storage areas will be expanded for the river
deviation works. The location will follow the general construction layout.
Compressed Air Station
Two compressed air stations will be built, located close to the power house and the industrial
center work fronts.
Fire Contention Network
A network for fire contention and/or fighting is foreseen inside the administrative work
quarters, together to the main structures. It will be composed by hydrants, piping, passage boxes
and others accessories.
II-92
The network will start in the raw water reservoir located close to the ETA, and will feed the
underground network that will pass along the administrative work quarters until the hydrants
located in strategic positions within the structures.
2.4.5.3. ADVANCED WORK QUARTERS
The advanced work quarters is composed by support structures distributed around the site, out
of the limits of the administrative quarters. It is presented in Figure 2.29 and is composed by the
main structures described in the following sub-items. Such figure also presents the distribution
of the industrial work quarters structures inside the main construction site.
Field Office
The field office will be designed and built to suit the field team (responsible for the work
fronts), as well as the inspection, on the main construction site’s central area. It will have
enough space for meeting and its own toilet, the built area is 532.47 m².
II-93
Figure 2.29: Advanced/Industrial Work Quarters
II-94
Figure 2.30: Sanitary Landfill (plan view and sections)
II-95
Figure 2.31: Sanitary Landfill (details, plan view and sections) for the river deviation
II-96
Figure 2.32: Explosives Warehouse
Advanced Work Quarters Canteens
Advanced canteens will be built close to the work fronts. A canteen will be built in the
proximities of the power house, with an area of 340.48m², with approximate capacity of 150
places.
An advanced canteen is also foreseen to service the dam work fronts, and also a third one for the
water intake, with approximately 100 places each um and a unit area of 309.11m².
The above structures will have an area for washing dishes and kitchen instruments, an area to
store them and the incoming food as well, and a room for serving meals. There will be no
cooking area, because all the food will be prepared in the main site canteen.
Collective Field Bathrooms
The collective field bathrooms will be mounted in containers and will be placed according to the
general construction site layout, in the followings work fronts: power house, water intake, dam
and industrial centers.
II-97
Additionally, the use of chemical toilets is foreseen, due to their ease of installation, versatility
regarding the installation place in the work fronts and the maintenance during the use. They will
be placed together to the tunnels and in other fronts where the contractor will determine that
they are needed.
Concrete Mixer Washing Area
Located close to the concrete central, it is foreseen for the washing area of concrete mixers and
the respective vehicles, as well as other heavy vehicles engaged in the works, when necessary.
Two washing platforms will be built (platform for two vehicles), similar to the ones designed
for the lubrication and tire repair area, without ramp.
The used water will be directed to a decanting tank, for the removal of the solid materials and,
later, to a water/oil separator, built with characteristics similar to those of the mechanical
workshop area. As shown in Figure 2.27 and Figure 2.28.
Concrete and Soil Laboratory
Composed by an office area and material test rooms, the covered structure will have an area of
684.56m². This laboratory will have an area and equipment to carry out tests in concrete
specimens, as well as to carry out the required soil tests.
2.4.5.4. INDUSTRIAL WORK QUARTERS
Figure 2.29 shows the distribution of the structures mentioned below, that compose the
industrial work quarters. Additionally, it shows the location of the advanced work quarters
structures.
Crushing Center
The crushing center, designed as shown in Figure 2.33, is located close to the dam, being the
primary one facing the gneiss storage area. The primary feed will be carried out with trucks.
After passing through the crushing center screens and the storage, the aggregates with the
desired lump size will be transported by belt conveyors to the concrete center, downstream from
the production process.
Three crushing center units are foreseen, with a total nominal capacity of up to 1,600 ton/h.
II-98
Figure 2.33: Crushing center
Concrete and Ice Center
The concrete and ice center is located close to the crushing center, with the characteristics
presented in Figure 2.34. The aggregates will be deposited on the scale by a belt conveyor when
arriving from the crushing center storage. The automatic center will dose the components used
in the production of conventional and BCC concrete.
The conventional concrete will be collected directly on the center, in dosing nozzles. The BCC
will be deposited automatically on the belt conveyor that covers the entire distance up to the
dam work fronts, where it is applied. Two centers with similar characteristics will be used.
There will be two centers with two mixers each, both with the same characteristics, capable of
producing both conventional concrete and BCC, with a total nominal capacity of up to 320 m³/h.
Cement storage silos and mineral additive storage silos, with approximate unit capacity of 1,000
tons each, will be located in the proximities, to store the mentioned products.
II-99
Carpentry Center
This installation will be covered, with an uncovered yard for storing the materials. The covered
area will be equipped with measuring, cutting and planning equipment and other necessary
equipment to carry out the carpentry works, as well as handheld tools. Will have an office
container used also for keeping tools. It will be located close to the framework center, being
serviced by the crane of the framework center.
Framework Center
This installation will be covered and equipped with automatic and manual iron cutting and
bending equipment. It will have equipment to make easier the handling of iron bars, tool storage
containers and can be used as office. It will have also an open air yard fro the storing of
materials. It is located close to the carpentry center and is serviced by a cargo handling crane.
Precast Center
The precast center belongs to the industrial centers area. This installation will have a covered
hall for fabrication and a storage area for manufactured pieces under the movable portal crane,
where they will wait for the end of the cure time. Additionally, there will be an external open air
storage area.
II-100
Figure 2.34: Concrete Center and Ice Center
II-101
2.4.6. MINE HUNTING
Mine hunting at the dam construction site is out of the scope of this study, however, this activity
has been in progress since before the first phase of the project (river deviation). The basic
guidelines for this activity are shown below.
•
Subcontracting of a specialized entity for the issuing of the necessary reports from
specialized consultants for the preparation of the “Safety Plan for the Localization and
Safe Removal of Land Mines and Other Explosive Devices”, with the necessary minehunting requirements for the river deviation works (in progress) and for the dam
construction;
•
The “Safety Plan for the Localization and Safe Removal of Land Mines and Other
Explosive Devices” shall include all the necessary works for the detection, protection,
inspection, register, safety, removal and safe storage of land mines and other explosive
devices that may affect the works either temporarily or permanently;
•
Execution of search, localization and final disposal of mines and explosive devices
belonging to the mine-hunting operations by the specialized subcontracted company;
•
All the people involved in these works shall be appropriately trained and/or qualified;
•
All the equipment used in the localization, marking of sites, safety, removal and storage
of land mines, explosive devices and explosive artifacts, intended for the individual and
collective protection of the people belonging to the mine-hunting teams, shall follow the
applicable international standards;
•
The subcontracted entity engaged in mine-hunting shall have permanently available on
the operations site, a specific paramedic team and a vehicle for the evacuation of the
people injured in eventual accidents;
•
After the end of the works in the assigned mine-hunting areas, within the construction
site, the plant owner will request from the subcontracted entity, a “Mine-Hunting
Certificate of the Site” issued by the entity that have carried out the activity and valid
for the areas where they were carried out, clearly identifying the mine-free zone and
stating that this zone is free of all mines and other explosive devices;
•
All construction areas considered “clean” shall indicated as so and be subject to the
approval of the inspection. Odebrecht shall keep updated accurate registers of all the
mine-free and not mine-free areas within the construction site polygon.
II-102
Mine-hunting will be necessary in a total area of approximately 3,400 km2 (three hundred thousand and four
hundred square kilometers) for the implementation of Laúca AH.
The stages composing the mine-hunting process are the following:
•
Manual shrub removal or burning of the area to be searched for mines;
•
Search over the area using metal or explosive detectors;
•
Accurate inspection of the suspected area after the detector alarm and prospection of the object
found;
•
Careful removal of the artifact found, followed by transport and final storage in an adequate place;
•
In loco detonation, deflagration, should it not be possible to remove the artifact.
Mine-hunting in the construction site is being carried out by the Angolan army.
II-103
Figure 2.35: Areas to be mine-hunted for the Laúca dam Project
II-104
2.4.7. DEFORESTING, UPROOTING AND CLEANING
The deforesting, uprooting and cleaning operations will be carried out in compliance with the Odebrecht
technical specifications. The areas to be deforested will be only those foreseen in the excavation project or
those to be used as access, material extraction and material storage. The services included in the deforesting,
uprooting and cleaning operations are:
•
Tree cutting using manual or mechanical means;
•
Manual or mechanical excavation for the removal of trunks with diameter above 0.20 m;
•
Scraping of the vegetation layer over the soil;
•
Material loading and unloading;
•
Material transportation.
After the topographic marking of the perimeter to be deforested, based on the project drawings, this activity
will include the cutting and removal of the entire vegetation, of any dimension and density. The uprooting
and cleaning will consist of the operations for the removal of trunks or roots impossible of being removed by
the deforesting, with the use of adequate equipment.
The materials originated from the deforesting, uprooting and cleaning operations having diameter above 0.2
m or height above 3 m will be removed or stored in places adjacent to the deforested and uprooted areas.
The materials originated from the cleaning operation, which will consist of a small thickness excavation and
“scraping” of the vegetation layer, will be stored in a place defined by the work inspection, for the future
recovery of degraded areas. No earth movement can be started while the deforesting, uprooting and cleaning
services are not totally concluded. Figure 2.36 shows the localization of the deforesting areas.
II-105
Figure 2.36: Deforesting
II-106
2.5. SAFETY, OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENT
This item describes some prevention, correction and mitigation actions necessary for dealing with significant
environmental aspects and the dangers and risks affecting occupational health and safety, as well as the
fulfillment of the legal and other requirements applicable to the enterprise.
Operational controls and plans will be implemented for preparation, organization and dealing with
emergency situations, regarding the following safety, health and environment areas:
2.5.1. INTEGRATED SUSTAINABILITY PROGRAM
Odebrecht has developed an integrated sustainability plan (PI) for the construction works of the Laúca AH
dam that has established the following targets:
•
Ensure competitive results and the operational continuity of the works through a good sustainability
performance;
•
Support the process of consolidation and dissemination of the occupational safety culture;
•
Encourage respect to the environmental and cultural characteristics in the implementation of the
works;
•
Define an integrated sustainability standard in a didactic way and structured on the Pillar concept;
•
Define the minimum components integrating this process through the standardization of tools and
technical procedures that will ensure the leveling of the best integrated sustainability practices;
•
Ensure the generation of operational and managerial sustainability information, by means of
performance indicators;
•
Fulfill the conditions specified in the installation license for the first phase of the project (river
deviation) as well as the future license for the dam construction.
The PI is based on the integration of the requirements of the ISO 14001:2004 standards (Environment
Management Systems) and OHSAS 18001:2007 (Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems).
The later is applicable to all processes, activities, products and services belonging to the works, according to
the agreement with GAMEK.
The PI covers all the necessary actions of the entities involved in the works (company sectors) and presents
the necessary procedures to accomplish sustainability in the works.
II-107
Based on the commitments expressed in the Integrated Sustainability Policy, the Director of the Laúca AH
Project Agreement – River Deviation, has established the following PI strategic guidelines:
•
Legal compliance and compliance with other applicable requirements;
•
Focus on the customer needs and expectations;
•
Prevention, continuous improvement and measuring of the sustainability performance;
•
Sustainability management, in a uniform manner;
•
Installed capacity compatible with the PI demands;
•
Management of knowledge and education at and for the work;
•
Proactivity on sustainability;
•
Priority to the collective protection measures to be taken before the use of the personal protection
equipment, in order to control hazards;
•
Priority in the utilization of processes, products, equipment and services that minimize the aspects
and impacts of the activities;
•
Interaction and synergy among the sustainability actions;
•
Promotion of health protection, prevention and rehabilitation actions in the work activities;
•
Negotiations with product, material, equipment and service suppliers
The development of the Integrated Sustainability Program and its respective strategic guidelines are in line
with the supporting pillars: Planning, Implementation, Verification and Critical Analysis, defined in the
Corporate Integrated Sustainability Program Manual of Construtora Norberto Odebrecht S.A.
The PI also covers the planning, implementation and operation of activities regarding Environment,
Resources, Functions, Responsibilities, Account Reporting and Authorities, Competence, Training and
Awareness among other items.
2.5.2. HEALTH
The operational controls associated to the health concentration area will be composed by a minimum set of
procedures associated to the main occupational health dangers and risks, seeking the collective and
individual protection of the workers.
The assessment of dangers and risks, as well as the preventive and mitigation measures, will be analyzed by
professionals in the areas of occupational health and safety, production and engineering.
The scope of such specific health prevention and control actions include: the health service (monitoring
equipment and instruments , installations, medicines, rescue equipment, emergency vehicles, etc); the
II-108
audition protection program; the ergonomics program ; the breathing protection program; the program for the
insertion of handicapped and reduced mobility people; the rehabilitation for work program; operational
activities of the health service; waste management program for the health service residues; program for
assistance and collective health standards.
2.5.3. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY
The operational controls associated to the occupational safety concentration area cover the prevention,
mitigation and continuous improvement actions regarding the main dangers and risks having as basic
reference:
• The hazard situations associated to the operational conditions in the work environment ;
o Excavations
o Blasting of rocks
o Services with rotating tools
o Load lifting and handling
o Services in electric circuits
o Work in high places
o Earthmoving – cutting and landfill
o Molds – fabrication, installation and dismantling
o Framework – cutting, bending, assembly and installation
o Concrete pouring
o Transport of cargo, materials and supplies
• Exposure to physical and chemical agents; and
• Danger situations associated to the loss of stability or landslides.
As a guarantee for the identification of such potential dangers and risks and the definition of the respective
preventive measures and recommendations, preventive analyses of the tasks will be carried out before
starting each one of the activities, services and production and maintenance works.
The personal protection equipment will be managed in order to be kept in adequate hygiene and safety
conditions.
Activities involving any of the abovementioned risks will require “permission for hazardous works”, before
starting, a procedure that will include a series of inspections based in standardized checklists, to ensure the
conformity level of the specific occupational safety operational controls.
II-109
2.5.4. Environment
The environment concentration area defines rules for prevention, mitigation and continuous improvement,
associated to the main significant environmental aspects and impacts selected in the enterprise, taking in
consideration the execution of processes including specific prevention, control and recovery actions.
The main operational controls associated to potential environmental aspects and impacts of the enterprise are
presented below:
Water Supply
This set of actions includes the design, installation and operation of the drinking water collection, treatment
and distribution systems in the facilities supporting the works.
The Water Treatment Station (ETA) built for the river deviation works will be expanded to allow the supply
of drinking water to the work quarters and to the industrial installations needing drinking water, during the
building of the dam (see Figure 2.37). The treatment capacity will be of 80 m³/h. Next to this installation,
two drinking water reservoirs will be built to allow the storage of 1,000,000 liters of water, and two raw
water reservoirs will be built for the storage of 2,000,000 liters of pumped water that will later be submitted
to treatment (see Figure 2.38: and Figure 2.39:).
Treatment and Control of Liquid Effluents
Two project options were identified for the implementation of a treatment system that will supply 6,000
people, of which 4,000 are lodged. The first consists of expanding the present system in operation according
to the River Deviation Agreement and the second proposes the implementation of an system of aerobic and
optional treatment lagoons.
For the two systems, the stages of design, installation and operation of the treatment systems, for the liquid
effluents arising from the sanitary sewage, are included.
In order to carry out the first option, the use of a Compact ETE is foreseen, which will receive all domestic
effluents and used waters from the work quarters, after having passed through the separation process that
ensure the stabilization and purification of such waters.
The treatment will be carried out by a compact UASB (Upflow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket) system, aerated
biofilter, Dortmund decanter, according to the design of the Brazilian company Bio G. The ETE is composed
by:
• A scraping system for the lumpy materials that promotes the retention of domestic residues, as for
example, cloth, plastics and materials inherently inert;
II-110
• A desanding unit for the removal of sands and solid and inert particles;
• An equalization system to ensure the homogeneous entrance to the system, without neither flow
variations nor large physical variations in the effluent;
• An anaerobic treatment system of the UASB type, for the removal of organic material and solids in
suspension;
• An aerobic treatment system of the Aerated Submerged Biofilter (BAS) type that is used as a complement
to the UASB and have as main function the removal of organic compounds and nitrogen in the soluble
form;
• A tertiary treatment or finishing system of the Dortmund Decanter type, which has the main function of
removing solids in suspension and carrying out the polishing of the final effluent.
The compact ETE system was designed to service 1,400 people and will be expanded to meet the effective
peak of users during the works. Figure 2.40, Figure 2.41, Figure 2.42 and Figure 2.43 show the treatment
system.
A second option for the effluent treatment is a system composed by two lagoons in series, being the first
optional and the second aerobic. The sizing of these lagoons will be based on the following:
•
Total population in the works = 6,000 people, being 4,000 lodged.
•
Daily organic load of the people = 54 g/DBO5/day.
•
Total daily organic load = 324 kgs DBO5/day.
The organic load is based on the effective peak of users in the month with the higher number of employees in
the work quarters. The water consumption per employee is estimated as follows:
•
Lodged people = 150 l/day/person
•
People not lodged = 75 l/day/person.
•
Total volume of water consumed per day = 750 m3 /day.
•
The total volume sewage was adopted as 90% of the water consumed = 675m3/day.
For the optional lagoon, the foreseen load is of 300 kgs DBO5/ha/day. The depth of this lagoon will be of 2.5
meters. The minimum total area of the lagoon will be of 324/300 = 10,800 m2 (180 m x 60 m).
For the aerobic lagoon, the estimated load foreseen will be of 150 kgs DBO / ha / day. Therefore, the aerobic
lagoon area will be of:
II-111
•
•
Area = 105 / 150 = 7000 m2 (116 m x 60 m).
•
The depth of the aerobic lagoon will be of 1.5 meters.
The foreseen retention times are:
o Optional lagoon = 10800 x 2.5 / 675 = 40 days.
o Aerobic lagoon = 7000 x 1.5 / 675 = 16 days.
The treatment system using stabilization lagoons is carried out by an Optional Lagoon followed by an
Aerobic Lagoon, being the calculated treatment efficiency in the first lagoon of approximately 65% of the
DBO removal, remaining 35% to be treated in the Aerobic Lagoon.
Management and Disposal of Solid Residues
The residue management will service the work quarters and all its installations, being in compliance with
Odebrecht’s Residue Management Plan (Attachment V).
The management guidelines and disposal of residues consist of a set of recommendations intended to reduce
to a minimum the generation of residues and to define the handling and disposal of residues and hazardous
materials, in order to minimize their environmental impacts and avoid damages to health. As mentioned in
item 2.4.52-65 sub-item “Sanitary Landfill”, a residue center with sanitary landfill, mixing station and
separation center will be installed for the construction phase.
The Residue Management Plan consists in the detailed planning of the direct or indirect actions involving the
stages of collection, transport, treatment and environmentally correct final destination of the solid residues
and waste. It is intended to minimize the generation of residues on the source, adequate the segregation in the
origin, control and reduce risks to the environment and ensure correct handling, following the legislation in
force.
All residues to be generated by the works will be identified and registered in a spreadsheet called “Solid
Residue Inventory” that will be updated once a year. Table 2.10 shows a list of the main solid residues
generated in the work quarters and their respective classification, in a generic and illustrative way, in the
Classes of Hazardous and Non-Hazardous.
Table 2.10: Types of solid residues produced by the works.
Class
Type of Solid Residue
Hazardous
Domestic residues of offices
Civil Construction Waste
Used PPEs – Personal Protection Equipment
Used lubricating oil and contaminated oil
Empty paint cans
II-112
X
X
Non-Hazardous
X
X
X
X
Class
Hazardous
Non-Hazardous
Empty solvent cans
X
Mercury vapor bulbs
X
Incandescent bulbs
X
Sodium vapor bulbs
X
Organic slurry of the Water Treatment Stations – ETA
X
Sweeping residues
X
Slurry of the Sanitary Effluent Treatment Stations
X
Organic slurry of the water reservoir cleaning – ETA
X
Electric lead batteries and their residues
X
Other batteries – depending on the composition
X
X
Thermal insulation oils
X
Used cutting and machining oil
X
Food waste residues
X
Non-contaminated metallic scrap
X
Paper, cardboard and plastic
X
Non-contaminated rubber
X
Health service residues
X
Welding electrode stubs
X
Wood scrap
X
Soil waste / unused rock /production of aggregates
X
Residues of asphalt plants
X
Empty chemical products packing
X
Vegetation waste (branches and leaves)
X
Printing cartridges and toner
X
X
Scraped straps, belts and steel ropes
X
Thermal insulation – silicate
X
Glass wool
X
Asbestos tiles
X
Fat from the ETE
X
The solid residues produced in the work quarters will be stored in a safe way and protected against handling
and transport risks, in alternative recipients such as: drums, buckets, dumpsters, in bulk, large bottles among
others, according to the specific need and as a mechanism to prevent leaks, spills or water infiltration.
The recipients used for such residue storing shall be made of a material compatible with the residues to be
stored and be in perfect conservation state. The reutilization of recipients from raw materials or chemical
products will be conditioned to their decontamination and identification.
The solid residues will be stored in a segregated way, being the mixture of residues of different classes
forbidden, as for example, mixing hazardous residues with others. In case such mixture takes place
involuntarily, the mixed residues shall be treated as hazardous.
II-113
All residues collected from work quarters, work fronts and administrative areas will be sent to the defined
temporary storage areas, for later treatment or final destination. In this temporary solid residue storage stage,
the following requirements will be considered:
•
Criteria for selection of the area(s) associated to layout, accessibility, quantities to be stored,
distances from the work fronts, etc;
•
Segregation and compatibility among the residues to be stored, etc.
The selective collection process is under implementation according to the following stages:
•
Storing of the residues by making the recipients available in the work fronts, in order to suit the
generation point needs;
•
Awareness of the people involved toward the selective collection process;
•
Definition of the places for recycling, reutilization or recovery;
The selective collection process uses recipients, containers and buckets, identified by specific colors for the
storing of each type of residue. The definition of the recipient colors will follow legal requirements and/or
the good practices applied in Angola.
Industrial Residues
The industrial residues that will be generated during the Laúca AH construction activities shall be subject to
mandatory management in terms of collection, disposal and adequate destination.
The hazardous residues (class I) shall be stored in an isolated place, covered and with impermeable floor, so,
in case of leaks, no infiltration with the possibility of contaminating the soil will occur. Additionally, a
concrete wall shall be built around the hall, to prevent any spill from reaching the external environment.
Oils and grease shall be stored in cylindrical drums or similar recipients, in PVC (Polyvinyl chloride) or PP
(Polypropylene), and kept hermetically closed. The recipients shall be provided with label, attached to a
visible place on the side, with a description of the contents.
The final destination of the residues will depend on the possibility of reuse, recovery or recycling carried out
by third parties, licensed or authorized by the official environmental control entities or a receptor licensed for
final disposal, whether by means of controlled industrial landfill, co-processing or thermal destruction.
Used oils may be made available to third parties to be re-refined for utilization in less demanding processes.
However, the permanent maintenance procedures of vehicles shall be continued, to prevent oil leaks and
II-114
excessive consumption, as well as the hygiene measures in the workshop facilities, where in no case the
residues shall be disposed in the atmosphere, soil and water flows.
Plant bed
A plant bed will be implemented in the construction site with the purpose of meeting the demand in the
recovery of degraded areas as mines, storage areas for unused material and temporary accesses. Native
species predominant in the regional ecosystem, fruit trees and ornamental plants to be integrated to the work
quarters landscape design, will be cultivated (Figure 2.44). For the recovery of degraded areas, species and
methodologies in accordance to the Degraded Areas Recovery Plan (PRAD) will be used.
II-115
Figure 2.37: Water treatment station
II-116
Figure 2.38: Drinking water tank
II-117
Figure 2.39: Raw water tank
II-118
Figure 2.40: Effluent treatment station
II-119
Figure 2.41: Scheme of the ETE treatment system
Legend
GRADEAMENTO = SCREENING
DESARENADOR = DESANDER
EQUALIZADOR = EQUALIZER
II-120
Figure 2.42: Detail of the ETE’s preliminary treatment5
Legend
TANQUE DE EQUALIZAÇÃO = EQUALIZATION TANK
DEIXAR ESPERA NOS … = PREPARE PLACE IN BOTH CHANNELS FOR EMBEDDING PIPE
DEIXAR ESPERA PARA CHUMBAGEM … = PREPARE PLACE FOR EMBEDDING THE PARSHALL
TROUGH
_____________________________
5
Designed by Bio G Engenharia e Sistemas de Saneamento, provided by Odebrecht, 2013
II-121
Figure 2.43: Sections of the ETE’s preliminary treatment, equalization tank and pump well1
Legend
DEIXAR ESPERA PARA … = PREPARE PLACE FOR EMBEDDING PIPE
Figure 2.44: Plant beds
II-122
2.6. COSTS AND CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
The construction schedule foreseen for building the power plants resulted in five (5) years. The river
deviation works started in July 2012. They are still in progress and their execution schedule will overlap the
main works schedule (dam construction), scheduled to be started in July 2013.
The end of the works, considering the complete execution of the civil works and the supply, erection and
tests of the electromechanical equipment in the plants, counted as of the main contractor’s mobilization date
until be beginning of the commercial generation of the first generation unit is foreseen for June 30, 2018, 6
months after the commercial generation. Considering that the work progress will follow the schedule, the
start-up is foreseen for the second semester of 2017. The total estimated costs for the implementation of the
enterprise, based on information available in July 2008, are the following:
•
US$ 3,701,600,000, not considering the costs of the substation and transmission lines, with a cost
index of US$ 1,791/KW;
The overall schedule foreseen for the power plant implementation is presented below (Figure 2.45). The
main milestones for the implementation of this enterprise are foreseen as follows, as shown in Table 2.11.
Table 2.11: Important dates and events of the Laúca dam construction
Event
Date
Issuing of the Environmental License
Beginning of July 2013
Start of concrete pouring in the Main Plant
2nd half of June 2014
Start of concrete pouring in the Dam
2nd half of June 2014
Start of the reservoir filling
January 2017
Conclusion of the dam
March 2017
Commercial generation of generation unit 1
07-31-2017
Conclusion of the Main Plant
01-30-2018
II-123
Figure 2.45: Summarized schedule of the activities of the Laúca AH works
II-124
Legend:
LAÚCA AH – HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT
OVERALL PLANNING FOR THE MAIN WORKS
ITEM MAIN ACTIVITIES
1
ISSUING OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL LICENSE
JUNE 30, 2013
2
PREPARATION OF THE EXECUTION PROJECTS – INFRASTRUCTURE AND MAIN
WORKS
3
ACQUISITION OF MOBILE AND FIXED EQUIPMENT FOR THE EXECUTION OF THE
WORKS
4
INFRASTRUCTURE WORKS FOR THE EXPANSION OF THE WORK QUARTERS
5
INFRASTRUCTURE WORKS FOR THE INDUSTRIAL FACILITIES
6
EXECUTION OF THE DAM IN BBC
7
EXECUTION OF THE BOTTOM DISCHARGER
8
EXECUTION OF THE SPILLWAY
9
EXECUTION OF THE ECOLOGIC PLANT
9.1
CIVIL WORKS
9.2
GENERATION – DECEMBER 2017
10
EXECUTION OF THE APPROACH CHANNEL, WATER INTAKE AND SHAFT
11
EXECUTION OF THE PENSTOCKS - WATER INTAKE FOR THE MAIN PLANT
12
EXECUTION OF THE MAIN PLANT – 6 x 333 MW
13
FILLING OF THE RESERVOIR
14
POWER GENERATION – 2 UNITS – AUGUST 2017
15
POWER GENERATION – 2 UNITS – SEPTEMBER 2017
16
POWER GENERATION – 2 UNITS – OCTOBER 2017
II-125
CHAPTER 3
INSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL FRAMEWORK
III-1
CONTENTS
3. INSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL FRAMEWORK ...................................................................................... 5
3.1. INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK ........................................................................................................... 5
3.1.1. MINISTRY FOR THE ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................. 6
3.1.2. MINISTRY OF ENERGY AND WATER RESOURCES ...................................................................... 8
3.1.3. MINISTRY OF AGRICULTURE........................................................................................................... 8
3.1.4. MINISTRY OF FISHERIES ................................................................................................................... 9
3.1.5. LOCAL STATE AGENCIES ................................................................................................................ 10
3.1.6. TRADITIONAL AUTHORITIES ......................................................................................................... 10
3.1.7. ENVIRONMENTAL DEFENSE ASSOCIATIONS ............................................................................ 10
3.2. NATIONAL LEGAL FRAMEWORK .................................................................................................... 10
3.2.1. RIGHT TO LIVE IN A HEALTHY, UNPOLLUTED ENVIRONMENT AND TO THE BENEFITS
OF THE RATIONAL USE OF NATURAL RESOURCES ........................................................................... 12
3.2.2. EVALUATION OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND ENVIRONMENTAL LICENSING12
3.2.3. LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES .......................................................................... 13
3.2.4. TERRITORIAL ORGANIZATION ...................................................................................................... 14
3.2.5. CULTURAL HERITAGE ..................................................................................................................... 14
3.2.6. LEGISLATION APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT ........................................................................... 14
3.3. INTERNATIONAL LEGAL FRAMEWORK ......................................................................................... 20
3.3.1. UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION OF BIOLOGICAL DIVERSTIY ............................................. 20
3.3.2. BONN CONVENTION ......................................................................................................................... 20
3.3.3. INTERNATIONAL TREATY ON PHYTOGENETIC RESOURCES FOR FOOD AND
AGRICULTURE (TIRFAA) ........................................................................................................................... 21
3.3.4. UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION TO COMBAT DESERTIFICATION IN COUNTRIES
SERIOUSLY AFFECTED BY DROUGHT AND MITIGATION OF THE EFFECTS OF DROUGHT ..... 21
3.3.5. SADC PROTOCOL ON FISHERIES ................................................................................................... 21
3.3.6. SADC PROTOCOL ON ENERGY ...................................................................................................... 21
3.4. INTERNATIONAL GOOD PRACTICES ............................................................................................... 22
3.4.1. INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL CORPORTION .............................................................................. 22
3.4.2. WORLD BANK ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH, AND SAFETY GUIDELINES ................................. 24
3.4.3. EQUATOR PRINCIPLES..................................................................................................................... 25
3.4.4.
WORLD BANK SAFEGUARDS POLICY .................................................................................... 27
3.5. CONCLUSIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 27
III-2
Abbreviations
List of Figures
Figure 3.1: Diagram illustrating the Environmental Impact Evaluation process.
List of Tables
Chart 3.1: IFC Performance Standards
Chart 3.2.: Equator Principles
III-3
Abbreviations
AIA
ASS
IFC
EIA
EHS
EPI
ENE
GAMEK
GIIP
LBA
LRBA
LGT
IDF
IPA
INIP
ISO
IUCN
LGT
LOTU
MINAMB
MINEA
MINPESCAS
OCDE
PO
OIT
RNT
SADC
TDR
TIRFAA
UNCCD
UNCDB
Environment, Health, and Safety
International Financing Corporation
Environment, Health, and Safety
Individual Protection Equipment
National Energy Enterprise
Middle Kwanza Management Office
Good International Industry Practice
Basic Environmental Law
Basic Law on Water Biological Resources
Basic Labor Law
Forestry Development Institute
Artisanal Fishing and Aquiculture Development Institute
National Fisheries Research Institute
International Organization for Standardization
International Union for Conservation of Nature
General Labor Labor Law
Law on Territorial Organization and Urbanism
Ministry for the Environment
Ministry of Energy And Water Resources
Fisheries Ministry
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development
World Bank Operational Policy
International Labor Organization
Non –Technical Summary
Southern Africa Development Community
Terms of Reference
International Treaty on Plant Genetic Resources for Food and
Agriculture
United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification
United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity
III-4
3. INSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL FRAMEWORK
This chapter indicates the competences of several Government agencies responsible for issues
related to possible environmental and social impacts of the project under consideration. It also
addresses the provisions of the national legislation (of obligatory application) and a summary of the
international instruments (which are not binding) pertaining to the Environmental Impact Study
relative to the construction of the Laúca Dam, situated on the confluence of the provinces of
Malanje, North Kwanza, and South Kwanza.
The chapter further describes the environmental and social standards that must be met for the
protection and preservation of the environment and of the quality of life of the people likely to be
affected. The following aspects are addressed:
•
•
•
•
Institutional framework, indicating the administrative agencies responsible for the
management of the environment and of issues directly connected with the implications of
the Project for the areas of environment, energy, water, fishing, and agriculture;
Environmental and social legislation applicable to the construction of the dam, and
recommendations for the various actions under the Project; and provisions of the national
legislation, which are compulsory;
Description of the multilateral environmental agreements of which Angola is signatory, and
whose guidelines and recommendations pertinent to the Project are binding;
Summary of international good practices, with emphasis on the performance standards of
the World Bank and the International Financial Cooperation (IFC), which will be
implemented at the promoter’s discretion, as they are not binding instruments.
It should be noted that the national legislation and the international good practices here described
are not presented in their entirety, but only examples of the main laws; it will be up to the
undertaking’s promoter to define the mechanisms for identifying all the legislation applicable to the
Project.
3.1. INSTITUTIONAL FRAMEWORK
The characteristics of the natural resources in Angola’s current social, economic, and industrial
development context recommends the adoption of environmental protection measures to ensure
compliance with the principles of sustainable development. The policies on use of the soil and
territorial organization require regulatory measures to ensure the proper use of the Angolan
territory. For the same reason, the implementation of projects whose activities may have an impact
on the environment and on the sustainability of the natural resources is regulated by the State
through various governmental institutions that form its organic structure.
In light of the legislation in force, the Government approves the concession of the private use of
water resources for the production of electric energy. As regards the Project under consideration,
the institutions responsible for environmental issues are the Ministries for the Environment, Energy
and Water, Agriculture, and Fisheries.
III-5
3.1.1. MINISTRY FOR THE ENVIRONMENT
A result of the development of the institutional framework and of the recognition of the importance
of preserving the environment to ensure a better quality of life for the populations and sustainable
development, as well as a result of the environmental challenges for the 21st century, the Ministry
for the Environment (MINAMB) became responsible for drafting, implementing, and inspecting the
management of the environment and of the natural resources for the protection, preservation, and
conservation of environmental quality and for ensuring the rational use and preservation of the
renewable natural resources. The MINAMB’s new organic statutes, approved by Presidential
Decree No. 201/10 of 3 September 2010, purports to ensure the implementation of strategies and
policies aimed at the preservation and management of the environment.
As part of its environmental policy, the MINAMB, among other things, controls all actions likely to
cause pollution, coordinates actions to recuperate areas considered critical, ensures the management
of the continental or fluvial waters ecosystem in an integrated, sustained manner, as well as
promoting actions aimed at the conservation of nature and landscape protection, in accordance with
its current organic statutes.
It is also incumbent on the MINAMB to undertake the evaluation of Environmental Impact Studies
(EIA) pertaining to projects susceptible of causing negative environmental and social impacts. This
evaluation calls for one or more than one public hearings in localities near a project’s intervention
site, for presentation of the EIA report and the attendant Non-Technical Summary (RNT), and to
elicit comments and contributions from the interested and affected parties.
Should an EIA be approved, the MINAMB, upon specific application, issues the pertinent
environmental permits in the name of the undertaking’s proponent, indicating which mitigation
measures should be adopted.
The issuing of an environmental permit for the undertaking is compulsory. An installation
environmental permit is issued to approve, among other things, the process of preparation of the
terrain and the construction of the dam and support infrastructure, including the filling of the
reservoir; as well as an operation environmental permit, which approves the start of operations,
after verification of compliance with the mitigation measures required during the construction
phase.
The aforementioned actions related to the AIA procedure are under the responsibility of the
National Department for the Prevention and Evaluation of Environmental Impacts, which carries
out the impact evaluations, issues the permits, and performs the environmental audits (as provided
under Art. 19/1 of Presidential Decree No. 201/10). Figure 3.1 shows in diagram form the
Environmental Impact Evaluation process (pursuant to the environmental legislation in force in
Angola).
III-6
Figure 3.1: Diagram illustrating the Environmental Impact Evaluation process.
III-7
This study has been registered with the MINAMB as required under Executive Decree No. 92/12,
accompanied by Annexes I and II to the Decree. 1 The generic Terms of Reference (TDR) of the
Ministry for the Environment (MINAMB, 2012) were applied, to the study after being properly
adapted to fit the purposes of the EIA under consideration.
3.1.2. MINISTRY OF ENERGY AND WATER RESOURCES
In addition to its attributions pertaining to energy and planning policy, the Ministry of Energy and
Water Resources (MINEA) is responsible for proposing the formulation of, and for conducting,
executing, and controlling the Executive’s policy on energy and water resources (Presidential
Decree No. 246/12 of 11 December 2012, Art. 1).
It is incumbent upon the MINEA to establish strategies, promote, and coordinate the rational use of
energy and water resources, while ensuring their sustainable development; and to promote the
national policy on electrification, general utilization of water resources, as well as ensuring their
protection and conservation. The MINEA is also in charge of the water supply and sanitation policy
and, among other attributions, it is responsible for licensing, monitoring, and inspecting the
exploitation of services and facilities in the energy sector (Presidential Decree No. 246/12, Art. 2
(a), (d), and (i)).
The National Electric Energy Department participates in the concession granting process,
establishes norms, regulations, and appropriate technical specifications for energy production
facilities; issues quality certificates pertaining to the materials to be used in the facilities, as well as
performing technical audits of industrial electric facilities (Presidential Decree No. 246/12, Art. 15
2 (f) (i) and (k)).
The National Water Resources Department coordinates the formulation of the national water
resources policy and watches over its execution, follow-up, and systematic monitoring; promotes
and coordinates the drafting and establishment of norms and regulations pertaining to the use of
water resources, as well as promoting their publicity and enforcement; establishes, in the area of the
commissions on basins and in coordination with other competent bodies, the actions aimed at
optimizing the sharing of water resources of Hydrographic Basins in the common interest of the
basin’s state; and promotes the development of actions aimed at the sustainable exploitation of
water resources, especially to prevent waste, pollution, and contamination (Presidential Decree No.
246/12, Art. 18, 2 (b) (i) (p) and (r)).
3.1.3. MINISTRY OF AGRICULTURE
The Ministry of Agriculture’s mission is to propose the formulation of, and to conduct, execute, and
control the Executive’s policy on agriculture and food security, rural development, the welfare of
rural communities, and forest resources, with a view to sustainable development. This Ministry has
been restructured by Presidential Decree No. 228/12 of 3 December 2012, and to achieve its
objectives, it has the following attributions, among others:
•
To define strategies and programs for the national development in the areas of agriculture,
cattle-raising, forestry, food security, rural development, fight against poverty, and
1
The documentation for registering the EIA was submitted to the Legal Office of the Ministry for the Environment and
to the National Department for Environmental Impact Prevention and Evaluation (DNPAIA) on 8 April 2013.
III-8
•
•
•
community development, as well as promoting and coordinating the necessary actions to
achieve these purposes;
To ensure the management of land for the purposes of agriculture, cattle-raising, and
forestry;
To ensure the execution of policies and strategies for the sustainable management of forest
and fauna resources; and
To promote and execute policies and strategies aimed at the establishment and management
of food reserve.
The Agrarian Lands Management Office, as the name indicates, is responsible for managing the
lands for agriculture, cattle-raising, and forests in particular and participates in the issuing of titles
to land for those purposes; issues opinions on agricultural, commercial, and industrial undertakings
susceptible of influencing national development; and carries out a series of actions related to the
structuring of land tenure. The Forestry Development Institute (IDF), in turn, is in charge of
promoting, coordinating, and executing policies related to forestry, fauna, rural matters, and
development of technological transfer.
3.1.4. MINISTRY OF FISHERIES
The Fisheries Ministry (MINPESCAS) is responsible for formulating, executing, supervising, and
controlling the policy on the management of aquatic biologic resources and activities related to
fisheries, aquaculture, and salt in Angola. It was established by Presidential Decree No. 226/12 of 3
December 2012 and has the following attributions:
•
•
•
•
To propose strategies and implement policies on the development of fisheries, aquaculture,
and especially in respect of the exploitation and use of fishery resources;
To promote the sustainable development of the sector and ensure, in cooperation with other
competent agencies, the implementation of measures aimed at the preservation and
sustainable management of aquatic biologic resources and the aquatic environment;
To ensure, according to the overall policy on fisheries and industry, the harmonious
development of the national fishing fleet and industry by means of instruments that regulate
and control fishing and the transformation and processing of fishing and aquaculture
products; and
To coordinate the oversight of fishing in interior waters, on the territorial sea, and in the
exclusive zone, cooperating as needed with other competent agencies, and ensuring the
application of the pertinent sanctions.
To discharge its functions, the Fisheries Ministry has a series of central and provincial structures,
among which the National Fisheries Research Institute and the Institute for the Development of
Artisanal Fishing and Aquaculture deserve special mention.
The National Fisheries Research Institute (INIP) is a public institution devoted to scientific research
and technological development. It is a legal entity endowed with administrative, financial, and
proprietary autonomy, as a special State service for data collection and studies on aquatic biologic
resources and respective ecosystems.
Some of INIP’s main roles are to contribute to the definition of the strategy and tactics of marine
research on continental waters; to study the aquatic biologic resources and their environment; to
III-9
establish mechanisms for their rational conservation and exploitation, as well as for the exploration
of species that are not fishing targets; to engage in the prospection of the reserves of aquatic
biologic resources; and to propose measures aimed at the conservation and rational management of
the aquatic biologic resources and their ecosystems.
The Institute for the Development of Artisanal Fishing and Aquaculture (IPA) is a body under the
Ministry of Fisheries in charge of actions aimed at promoting and supporting the development of
artisanal fishing and of aquaculture in Angola.
3.1.5. LOCAL STATE AGENCIES
The provincial governments follow up the implementation of public investment programs and
economic intervention projects in their respective provinces; establish provincial territorial plans;
establish urbanism projects; administer the State’s public and private land tenure system; and
promote measures aimed at water resources protection and at soil and water conservation (DecreeLaw No. 17/10, Art. 12, 12/1/c, and 2(a-b)(i) and 6(c)).
The municipal administrations establish the municipal territorial organization and the municipal
development plans and ensure the preservation of sites classified as municipal cultural heritage
(Decree-Law No. 17/10, Art. 45, 2(a) and 3(f). All administrations of municipalities and communes
affected by the dam construction have been informed about the Project, and their opinions and
comments are reflected in the Environmental Impact Study (See Chapter 4).
3.1.6. TRADITIONAL AUTHORITIES
The traditional authorities participate in the municipal and communal councils for social
consultation and coordination (Decree-law No. 17/10, Arts 52 (f) and 57 (e)). Traditional and
community authorities were consulted and interviewed in connection with this Project, in relation to
aspects of it that are relevant to communities that will be directly affected by it.
3.1.7. ENVIRONMENTAL DEFENSE ASSOCIATIONS
The environmental defense associations are entitled to being consulted and informed about, among
other things, environmental impact studies and forest and fauna resources organization; to
participating in administrative processes that involve environmental issues; and to going to court in
connection with actions that harm the environment (Law 3/06, Arts. 6-8).
3.2. NATIONAL LEGAL FRAMEWORK
This section sums up the legal provisions in force in Angola, which must be taken into
consideration in the Environmental Impact Evaluation, and must thus form part of the
Environmental Impact Study (EIA). The summaries presented are not exhaustive; only the pertinent
environmental legislation is addressed.
Reference is also made to the international protocols that had an influence on the methodology used
in the EIA’s preparation. The need to protect the environment and the requirements for achieving
sustainable development are based on the citizens’ right to live in a healthy, unpolluted
environment, a right guaranteed under the Constitution of the Republic of Angola.
III-10
Pursuant to Art. 13 of the new Angolan Constitution of 5 February 2010, international treaties and
agreements duly approved or ratified are incorporated into the Angolan legal system after their
official publication and international entry into force and as long as they are binding upon the State.
The same law that guarantees to all the right to live in a healthy, unpolluted environment, imposes
the duty to defend and preserve it. To this end, the State adopts the necessary measures for the
protection of the environment and the flora and fauna on the national territory; for the maintenance
of ecologic balance; for the proper localization of economic activities; and for the rational
exploitation and use of all natural resources, in a context of sustainable development and respect for
the rights of future generations and for the preservation of the different species.
Angolan cities are entitled to living in a healthy, unpolluted environment (Constitutional Law, Art.
39 (1)) and to benefit from the rational use of the natural resources (Law No. 5/98, Basic
Environmental Law, Art 3 (1)).
The State must adopt the necessary measures to permit the citizens to exercise their rights
effectively (Constitutional Law, Art 39/2), including their right to go to court in case of violation of
their constitutional rights or rights guaranteed under other laws (Constitutional Law, Art. 74).
The Basic Environmental Law (LBA) establishes the general duties regarding the defense of the
environment and the sustainable use of the natural resources, as well as the contribution to the
quality of life (Arts. 3 (1) and 25, the latter referring specifically to citizens and enterprises of both
the public and private sectors). These provisions entail several legal consequences, such as the
following:
(a) Individuals and legal entities must, in the course of their activities, abstain from degrading
the environment or from in any way hindering the exercise of the fundamental right to live
in a healthy, unpolluted environment, a right established under the Constitutional Law, Art.
39 (1 and guaranteed under Art. 74 of the same Law; and
(b) As these duties form part of generic obligations, these individuals and legal entities must
chose the proper means for their fulfillment, in the lack of legislation specifying, even
partially, the tenor of these obligations.
Anyone that causes damage to the environment has the obligation to indemnify the State in terms of
objective responsibility (LBA, Art. 28); and any private citizen whose rights to live in a healthy,
unpolluted environment and to enjoy the benefits of the rational use of natural resources are
violated, are protected under the civil responsibility general regime, as provided under the Civil
Code Arts. 483 ff (LBA , Art. 23).
If the national legislation does not cover specific aspects or is incomplete, particularly as regards
technical specifications, the Project promoters should resort to the international instruments 2 in
respect of good practices in the pertinent areas, or to appropriate norms in force in other countries.
The undertaking’s promoter should thus resort to international instruments for orientation on some
aspects of the generic duty to protect the environment and the quality of life, which that may not be
reflected in the national legislation.
2
The most relevant international instruments for the Project are the Performance Standards of the International
Financial Corporation and the World Bank’s Standard Operating Procedure.
III-11
3.2.1. RIGHT TO LIVE IN A HEALTHY, UNPOLLUTED ENVIRONMENT AND
TO THE BENEFITS OF THE RATIONAL USE OF NATURAL RESOURCES
Angolan citizens have the right to live in a healthy, unpolluted environment, as well as the duty to
defend and protect it (Constitution of the Republic of Angola, Art. 39(1)) and the right to benefit
from the rational use of natural resources (Basic Environmental Law, Art. 3 (1)).
The State must adopt the necessary measures to permit the citizens to exercise their rights
effectively (Constitution of the Republic of Angola, Art. 39 (2)), including their right to go to court
in cases, and in accordance with the law, of acts that are harmful to their health (…), the
environment, and their quality of life ( Constitutional Law, Art. 74)).
3.2.2.
EVALUATION OF THE
ENVIRONMENTAL LICENSING
ENVIRONMENTAL
IMPACT
AND
The Basic Environmental Law (Law No. 5/98 of 19 June 1998) provides for the obligatory
environmental impact evaluation procedure in respect of actions that have implications for
environmental and social balance and harmony (Art. 16 (1), including those that have a bearing on
the communities’ interest (Art. 10).
Decree No. 51/04 complements the Basic Environmental Law, establishing a series of procedures
for the environmental impact studies prior to the approval, by the competent body, of projects that
require an Environmental Impact Study; it further establishes norms on the preparation of this study
and its later evaluation. Decree No. 51/04, Art. 4 (1) on the AIA requires that AIAs be done in the
case of infrastructure projects that by their nature, dimension, and localization have implications for
the environmental balance and harmony.
Annex to Decree No. 51/04 expressly requires, in connection with Art. 4 (2), that an evaluation of
environmental impact (AIA) be done in the case of hydroelectric dams, industrial facilities for the
transmission of electric energy by aerial cables (Art. 3 (a)(k)), “Hydroelectric works for the
exploration of hydric resources, such as dams for hydroelectric purposes (…)”, “industrial
installations intended (…) to the transportation of electric energy by aerial cables” (Art. 3/a)” and
electric energy transmission lines above 230 KV (Art. 3 (i)). 3
Decree No. 51/04, Art. 6 (on AIAs) further establishes that the Environmental Impact Study (EIA)
must be submitted by the undertaking’s owner (Art. 5). Art. 7 requires that for the study’s
preparation a series of technical activities be carried out . Accordingly, this study must meet these
requirements.
The Minister for the Environment’s decision about the project (opinion) is preceded by public
consultation (LBA, Art. 10 and Decree No. 51/04, Art. 10). Compliance with his decision by the
undertaking’s owner is compulsory (Decree No. 51/04, Arts. 13 (1) and 16 (c)).
3
Lines of transmission of the energy to be generated by the future Laúca Dam to consumer centers are not addressed
in this study.
III-12
The Basic Environmental Law further provides (Art. 17) that projects that by their nature,
localization, or dimension are susceptible of causing significant environmental and social impact
are subject to licensing; an environmental license is granted on the basis of the AIA (Art. 17 (2)).
Licensing is obligatory in the case of projects that by law require an AIA. As the Project is for work
connected with the construction of a future dam, an environmental installation and operating license
shall be required (Decree No. 59/07, Arts. 3 and 4 (2) on environmental licensing).
The environmental installation license applies to the implementation and modification of an
undertaking in accordance with the specifications listed in the execution project (Decree No. 59/07,
Art. 1 (c)). The environmental operating license applies to the start of the facilities’ operation, after
verification of compliance with all requirements of the environmental impact study (same Decree,
art. 1 (d). It should include the elements required under Art. 14 of the same Decree), particularly the
following:
•
•
•
The reference documents on the best methods and techniques applicable to the exercise of
the licensed activity (Art. 14 (a));
The limit values of pollutants emission (Art. (b)); and
Indication of the measures to ensure the proper protection of the soil and the subterranean
waters (Art. 14 (c)).
The license is valid for no less than three years and not more than eight years, and is renewable after
environmental auditing (Decree No. 59/07, Arts. 14 (g) and 16). The fee to be paid for obtaining the
license is regulated by Joint Executive Decree No. 130/09 of the Ministries for the Environment and
of Finance.
3.2.3. LIABILITY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGES
Decree No. 194/11 of 7 July 2011 establishes the liability for environmental risk and degradation,
based on the “payer polluter” principle to prevent and exact reparation for any environmental
damage. This applies to any environmental damage but does not apply to cases of armed conflicts,
hostilities, civil war, insurrections, or natural phenomena of an exceptional character. It applies to
environmental damages or imminent threat of such damage caused by pollution of a diffuse
character, always under the assumption that there is a connection between the cause of the damage
and the activity of the operator that caused the damage.
One type of environmental damage is the pollution that threatens human health and the biodiversity
owing to toxic elements introduced in the environment. In the lack of applicable norms on
environmental quality, the decree mentions the ISO standards. The costs of prevention and
compensation of environmental damage are shouldered by those responsible for the environmental
pollution.
The amount of the fine for violation of a legal norm or environmental license requirement varies
from the Kwanza equivalent of US$1,000.00 to US$100,000,000.00 (one thousand to one hundred
million U.S. dollars).
III-13
3.2.4. TERRITORIAL ORGANIZATION
In general terms, according to Law 3/04, the Territorial Organization and Urbanism Law (LOTU),
the use of land must conform to municipal or special territorial plans, which are binding on private
citizens with the force of a regulation (LOTU, Art. 57 (2)). Private citizens have the right to access
the information contained in these plans (Art. 53 (1), a subject regulated by Art. 11 of Decree No.
2/06 (General Regulation of Territorial, Urban, and Rural Plans).
Decree 51/04, Art. 6 (f) determines that environmental impact studies take into consideration the
content of government plans and programs that encompass the various territorial plans.
3.2.5. CULTURAL HERITAGE
Law 14/05 (Cultural Heritage Law) defines cultural heritage as the material and immaterial assets
that because of their recognized value should come under custody of the law (Art. 2 (1). These
include paleontological, archeological, and architectonic assets that are valuable owing to their
memory content, antiquity, authenticity, originality, rarity, exemplary quality, singularity, or other
qualities (Art. 3 (1)). Immovable cultural assets include, among other things, the sites and spaces of
historical, archeological, artistic, scientific, or social interest (Art. 6 (1c). Immovable cultural assets
may be classified as being of local, regional, national , or international interest (Art. 7 (3)).
Moveable cultural assets include, among others, those that express an evolution of nature or
techniques, including those that are buried or submerged or are found in places of archeological,
historical, or ethnological interest or in other places (Law 14/05, Art. 6 (2a)).
The Law establishes the duty of all citizens to preserve, defend, and value their cultural heritage, as
well as the duty of public and private entities to promote the safeguard and valorization of these
assets (Art. 14 (1-2). Anyone who has found or may find on public or private land, or in a
submerged location, any of such archeological testimonies must report the fact to the local
authorities (Art. 35 (1). Infractions against cultural assets are subject to the sanctions provided
under Art. 56 of Law 14/05.
In the areas affected by the construction of dams, and of reservoirs and tunnels in particular, there
may be cultural assets on the surface, which will be submerged; it is thus necessary to identify them
and adopt measures for their preservation. As in this specific case the Project will require the
building of tunnels for the deviation of the river course, including preparation work as well as
digging, it would be convenient to alert the builder and his workers about the duty to report to the
provincial cultural department or to the Cultural Heritage Institute any vestiges of a paleontological
or archeological nature (artifacts or other items) that might have cultural value.
It is also necessary to verify if there are in the area cultural or natural assets as defined under Law
14/05, Arts. 6 and 23. In the case such an asset exists, its demolition or destruction is subject to an
opinion from the Ministry of Culture (Art. 13 (1) of the same law).
3.2.6. LEGISLATION APPLICABLE TO THE PROJECT
3.2.6.1. USE OF WATER RESOURCES
III-14
The construction of the facilities associated with the Laúca Dam and the future filling of the
reservoir raise questions pertaining to the affected and environmental rights. The use of water
resources is regulated by Law 6/02 (Water Resources Law), which expressly provides for the use of
water resources for energy generation (Art. 25(1)).
The General Law on Electricity determines that the activities aimed at energy generation,
transmission, and distribution presuppose the conception and implementation of projects and the
use of equipment ad methods that conform to the norms on the safety of people and assets and
respect for property rights (Art. 3 (1/d).
This law also determines that local communities in whose areas will be implemented projects for
the generation, transmission, and distribution of electric energy are entitled to compensation for any
damage as well as to deriving benefit for the region, on terms that may be regulated or on terms of
the concessions or the licenses granted for that purpose (Art. 16 (3)). Such compensation should
reflect the necessary sharing in the benefits resulting from the construction of the Laúca Dam.
The General Law on Electricity further provides for public consultations in the case of the
concession of rights to exercise activities aimed at the generation, transmission, and distribution of
electric energy (Art. 5).
3.2.6.1. WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Presidential Decree No. 261/11 approved the Regulations on Water Quality, which sets water
quality norms ad criteria to protect the water environment and improve water quality in light of its
main uses.
This decree applies to interior waters, both surface and subterranean, as well as water for
aquaculture, cattle-raising, agricultural irrigation, and spas; it also regulates the norms for the
control of residual water discharge into the national bodies of water and onto the soil, so as to
preserve the quality of the aquatic environment and protect public health.
Water used for human consumption at the dockyard and any infrastructure associated with the dam
construction and the deviation of the river course must comply with the standards established under
this decree.
Undertakings that discharge residual waters onto the soil or into water resources must have a license
issued by the Ministry for the Environment. This license will set the norms on discharge and on the
prevention or mitigation of environmental damage. This decree is to be enforced together with the
Law on Water Resources.
3.2.6.2.
WATER RESOURCES USE RIGHTS AFFECTED BY THE
CONSTRUCTION OF THE DAMS
The water use rights affected by the dam construction are as follows:
III-15
•
The rights of local communities and families that use the river water pursuant to the shared
use regime (unimpeded, free of charge access for subsistence purposes), as provided under
Arts. 21-23 of the Law on Water Resources;
•
The rights of farmers that are holders of land rights who use water from the Kwanza River
hydrological basin, pursuant to Art. 26 of the Law on Water Resources (unimpeded, free of
charge access to certain bodies of water for agricultural, fishing, and forestry purposes); and
•
The rights of privative use by individuals that use the water for the purposes established
under Arts. 24 and 25 of the Law on Water Resources (access for commercial purposes is
not provided under Art. 26).
Shared use prevails over private use; and, in principle, concessions may not be granted to the
detriment of shared use (Law on Water Resources, Arts. 22 (2) and 33 (1)). It is thus necessary to
identify the holders of water use rights, private and shared, whose rights will be expropriated for the
sake of public interest. Fair compensation should be negotiated pursuant to the law, taking into
consideration the provisions under the LOTU, Arts. 6 (1c), 10, and 20 (4) and the aforementioned
provisions under the General Law on Electricity.
The Law on Water Resources requires that public consultations be undertaken before the
concession of private use of water resources for purposes that include the construction of dams (Art.
36). In particular, users associations, local authorities, social organizations, and other organizations
directly interested in the use of the water resources of the geographical area where the undertaking
will take place should be consulted (Art. 36 (1)).
3.2.6.3. FISHING RIGHTS AFFECTED BY THE DAMS’ CONSTRUCTION
Persons that engage in commercial or subsistence fishing, pursuant to Arts. 35 and 42 of Law 6A/04 (Law on Aquatic Biologic Resources (LRBA), are one of the social groups to be affected by
the river changes called for under the Project.
The general principles on the use and management of aquatic biologic resources are sustainable
development principles on the defense of the fishing communities’ interests and on the participation
of all the interested parties in the management of the resources (LRBA, Arts.6 (3a, h, and j)).
Accordingly, the EIA should identify the people whose fishing rights will be affected by changes in
the river, and foresee mechanisms for compensating them, including by granting them access to the
reservoir to fish. This information is available in the chapter on the environmental and social
characterization of the area (Chapter 4).
3.2.6.4. RIGHTS TO LANDS SUMBERGED BY THE RESERVOIRS
The lands that will become submerged may be in the possession of rural communities, holders of
land titles granted by the State, and holders of titles to private property.
In the case of lands under concession, there must be expropriation based on public interest and
payment of a fair indemnity, as provided under Art. 12 of Law 9/04 (Land Law). As regards
III-16
expropriations, Articles 217 and 237 of Decree No. 43894 (Regulation on Land Occupation and
Concession), should be applied.
In the case of community lands, those that are unoccupied will be released after consultation with
the traditional authorities, pursuant to the customary land exploitation regime, and against payment
of compensation as provided under Art. 37 of the Land Law. If these lands cannot be released they
may be expropriated on the basis of public interest, against payment of a fair indemnity (Land Law,
Art. 9 (2)).
3.2.6.5. ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT OF THE USE OF WATER
FOR THE DAMS
Water Pollution
The pollution of waters by any means, including the discharge of any type of effluent, is forbidden,
unless authorized by the basin managing body (Law on Water Resources, Art. 68).
Art. 71 of the Law on Water Resources provides for the establishment of a protection area next to
catchment zones, where any activities leading to water quality degradation are forbidden.
Accordingly, the EIA must indicate possible sources of pollution of the waters. The environmental
license will indicate the undertaking’s limits of emissions of pollutant substances (Presidential
Decree 261/11, Art. 13 (1)).
The EIA should also identify the new water catchment zones that will supply water for the dam
workers, as well as the new points of shared use by the communities that might be relocated
because of the Project, particularly owing to the filling of the reservoir.
Aquatic Conservation Areas and Aquatic Ecosystems Protection
There is no information on the establishment of aquatic conservation areas as called for under Arts.
78-81 of the LBRA. And yet, the LBRA requires the establishment of conservation areas such as
humid and mangrove zones and the biologic resources spawning zones (Art. 86, (a)(d)).
As it is expected that ecosystems and biologic resources will be affected, it might be necessary,
depending on the AIA, to establish natural aquatic reservations, whole or in part, for the
regeneration and sustainable renewal of species, particularly protected species, that will be affected
by the Project (LBRA, Art. 82).
Aquatic Biologic Resources and Ecosystems
There is no information as to whether any fresh water species is listed as threatened, pursuant to the
LRBA (Arts. 69 and 71). However, the EIA should identify the aquatic fauna and flora species that
will be affected by the changes in the river, particularly rare, close to extinction, or threatened
species, or species whose numbers will be reduced owing to the Project’s implementation. This
description is found in the chapter on characterization of the area’s biodiversity.
The EIA should also indicate appropriate measures for conservation of these species, taking into
consideration not only the legislation on the AIAs, but also the principle of conservation and
optimum use of aquatic biologic resources, as provided under Art. 6 (3)(c) of the LRBA. These
measures are described in the management plans.
III-17
Terrestrial Biologic Resources
As regards the terrestrial fauna, Joint Executive Decree No. 37/99 has updated the provisions of the
Hunting Regulations (Legislative Diploma No. 2873 of 11 December 1957, amended by
Legislative Diploma No. 86/72 of 20 September 1972, forbidding the hunting of some species and
conditioning the hunting of others that may be captured only in quantities and in seasons to be
announced by the competent authority, currently the Ministry for the Environment. In case these
animals are submerged, there will be no hunting, except for capture of animals for their transfer to
other previously determined habitats.
As to the wild flora, Decree No. 44531 (Forestry Regulation) sets norms on the protection of these
species. It forbids the cutting down of honey-producing species of greater regional interest and of
producers of essences of recognized utility for rural communities, pursuant to lists to be adopted in
each province (Art. 188). The Regulation further establishes norms on the felling of trees.
The regime of areas of terrestrial species conservation in force since colonial times is considered
obsolete. The flora and fauna protection zones recognized in Angola in the colonial period (Decree
No. 40040, Arts. 31 and 53, the latter in reference to Art. 31) were classified as National Park,
Integral National Reserve, Partial Reserve, and Especial Reserve, which also includes forest
reserves.
The Forestry Regulation calls for the creation of local conservation areas, the forest reservations
referred under Art. 31 of Decree No. 40040. Under it, the hydrographic basins of water courses
subject to torrential rains are obligatorily included in a total or partial reserve regime (Art. 62).
The Land Law distinguishes only between total and partial reserves (Art. 27 (3)). Conservation
areas are included in total reserves (Art. 27 (4) (5). The Law on Territorial Organization and
Urbanism calls for especial plans for conservation areas (Art. 28, (3)(a). In partial reserves are
included the strip of protection land around dams and reservoirs as well as land occupied by
electricity facilities and transmission lines (Land Law, Art. 27 (7e) and (7g)).
3.2.6.6. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT
Presidential Decree No. 190/12 sets the general rules regarding the production, treatment,
collection, storage, and transportation of any solid waste, except for radioactive residues or those
subject to specific regulations. The decree calls attention to the prevention or minimizing of the
negative impacts of residues on human and environmental health.
It applies to all individuals and legal entities, public or private, engaged in activities susceptible of
producing waste or involved in waste management, as well as to all types of waste on the Angolan
soil. It further regulates the classification of waste, the different waste categories, the management
of hazardous and non-hazardous waste, and establishes the appropriate sanctions.
The Decree classifies waste and establishes detailed screening, storage, and container requirements
for all types of solid waste, so as to distinguish between hazardous and non-hazardous residues.
These requirements regarding specific residues should be incorporated into the standard operating
procedures that produce waste.
III-18
All enterprises, both public and private, must have a Solid Waste Management Plan before starting
operations, with all the information in Annexes I and II to the Presidential Decree. This waste
management plan must be submitted to the MINAMB for approval and renewed every four years
thereafter.
Still according to the Decree 190/12, waste must be transported by authorized services providers, in
properly adapted vehicles to ensure safe transportation. Vehicles must be kept in proper functioning
conditions and regularly maintained. Load limits must be respected, and the containers must have
the appropriate or obligatory label and alert signs. In addition, the vehicles must carry the
appropriate equipment for fighting fire and for solving leaking problems.
The vehicles provider and drivers must have the proper license and authorization from the pertinent
authorities. Drivers must have been trained for safe driving and for responding to basic
emergencies, and must comply with the requirements relative to labeling and alert signs for any
transportation means that carry hazardous waste. Vehicles must carry a filled out Waste Declaration
Form with information on the transported material. Each driver is responsible for making sure that
this form is properly filled out and placed in the vehicle before starting. The Decree further requires
that copies of all hazardous waste declaration forms be submitted to the MINAMB.
3.2.6.7. WORK SAFETY AND HYGIENE
From a labor legislation standpoint, the Project’s social impacts may be seen from two angles:
•
•
Work safety and hygiene; and
Living conditions of workers engaged in the Project.
Work safety and hygiene
The General Labor Legislation (Law 2/00, LGT) makes employers responsible for ensuring the
quality of the work environment, including through the adoption of appropriate work safety and
hygiene measures (Art. 43 (g)). Arts. 85-93 establish the employer’s duties in this regard. But the
Angolan legislation fails to address technical norms on safety and hygiene in the different work
environments, notwithstanding the determinations of the International Labor Organization (OIT) on
this subject.
Responsibility for the quality of the work environment falls on the employer, whether he is the
contractor that executes the Projector or the enterprise that is going to exploit the undertaking, in
relation to the workers involved.
Decree No. 31/94 on safety, hygiene, and health in the workplace establishes the workers’ right to
safety and hygiene conditions in the workplace; to be provided, free of charge, with the collective
and individual protection equipment needed in their work post; to be regularly informed about work
safety, hygiene, and health; and to elect a committee to treat these issues with the enterprise (Arts.
14 (a-c), 14 (d-e-f), and 17 (1)).
The law also establishes the workers’ duties, including the duty to care for their own safety and
health and for that of others that may be affected by their actions or omissions in the performance of
their tasks (Art. 13 (1)).
III-19
In the lack of specific legislation on work safety and hygiene in the construction of dams for the
generation of electric energy, it is recommended, as a good practice, that international standards be
applied when appropriate.
Workers’ living conditions at the work site
The General Labor Law requires that conditions in the work environment safeguard the worker’s
freedom and dignity, permitting them to satisfy normally their needs and those of their families,
protecting their health, and ensuring that they may enjoy decent living conditions (Art. 3 (4)).
As regards workers that have to relocate from where they habitually live to render services at the
work site, Art. 191 (1b) establishes the employer’s obligation to ensure safe lodgings for the worker
and his family, in appropriate condition, and in accordance with the requisite hygiene and health
measures as well as with other measures required by the regulation, if these issues have not been
discussed with the worker for his individual contract.
3.3. INTERNATIONAL LEGAL FRAMEWORK
Angola has not ratified any treaties related to water, in respect of regulation of the non-navigational
uses of shared water, but it forms part of the Southern African Development Community (SADC)
protocol on Energy and Fisheries. In addition to previously mentioned protocols, some provisions
of agreements signed and ratified by Angola are relevant to the Project, such as the following:
•
•
•
•
United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity (UNCDB);
United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification (UNCCD);
Bonn Convention: Convention of the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals
(CMS); and
International Treaty on Phytogenetic Resources for Food and Agriculture (TIRFAA)
There follows a summary of provisions of some international instruments that are relevant to the
Project.
3.3.1. UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION OF BIOLOGICAL DIVERSTIY
The United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity (UNCBD) obligates the States Parties to
identify and conserve their biological resources and their diversity (Art. 6), an obligation that has
been incorporated into the Angolan legislation. The identification of biological resources that will
be affected and the measures for their conservation are addressed in the chapter on environmental
characterization. These measures are consistent with the National Biodiversity Strategy and Action
Plan (2006-2012), currently being updated by the MINAMB.
3.3.2. BONN CONVENTION
The Bonn Convention on Migratory Species of Wild Animals (CMS) obligates the States to identify
these species and to prevent, eliminate, compensate, or minimize, if appropriate, the adverse effects
of activities or obstacles that seriously obstruct or impede these species’ migration.
III-20
3.3.3. INTERNATIONAL TREATY ON PHYTOGENETIC RESOURCES FOR
FOOD AND AGRICULTURE (TIRFAA)
The International Treaty on Phytogenetic Resources for Food and Agriculture (TIRFAA), in the
section that incorporates the CBD provisions regarding these resources, obligates the States to
ensure their diversity and sustainability, including the maintenance of agricultural systems that
contribute to this end (Art. 6).
3.3.4. UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION TO COMBAT DESERTIFICATION IN
COUNTRIES SERIOUSLY AFFECTED BY DROUGHT AND MITIGATION OF
THE EFFECTS OF DROUGHT
The United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification in countries seriously affected by
drought and to mitigate the effects of drought (UNCCD) obligates the States to adopt an integrated
management of soils, water resources, and biological resources, as well as effective measures to
prevent or mitigate desertification. It calls further for measures that permit the participation of local
populations and communities in actions that affect these resources (Arts. 2-5).
3.3.5. SADC PROTOCOL ON FISHERIES
The Southern African Development Community (SADC) Protocol on Fisheries, applicable to water
resources (Art. 2), determines that the States should take proper measures to regulate their use and
protect them against over-exploitation, while creating an enabling environment and building
capacity for the sustainable utilization of these resources; and ensuring the participation of all
stakeholders in the promotion of the objectives of the protocol (Art. 4). These objectives include the
promotion of food security, ensuring that future generations will benefit from these renewable
resources, and alleviating poverty with the ultimate objective of its eradication (Art. 3).
The State Parties are under the obligation to adopt measures to ensure that their nationals act in a
responsible manner in the use of living aquatic resources (Art. 5/2).
The States should also promote artisanal and subsistence fishing and facilitate the participation of
artisanal and subsistence fishermen in the control and management of their fishing and related
activities (Art. 12). Art. 14 obligates the States to conserve aquatic ecosystems, including their
biodiversity and unique habitats, and to adopt measures to protect threatened species and to prevent
pollution of their habitats.
3.3.6. SADC PROTOCOL ON ENERGY
The SADC Protocol on Energy calls on the States to use energy to support economic growth and
development, alleviate poverty, and improve the standard and quality of life throughout the Region,
as well as ensuring that the use of energy for development is environmentally sound (Art. 2).
Annex 1 to the Protocol on Guidelines for Cooperation among member States establishes that
cooperation in the area of electricity should aim at the development and use of energy in an
III-21
environmentally sound manner; and that electricity projects should be subject to the AIAs, and in
conformity with mutually agreed basic environmental standards (Art. 1).
3.4. INTERNATIONAL GOOD PRACTICES
In addition to the national legislation, some guidelines on environmentally good practices may be
followed by projects of similar nature as the one under review. If followed, the undertakings will
have a better environmental performance in the execution of their projects. Some of the main
elements gleaned from international legislation, whose implementation is optional, at the discretion
of an undertaking’s promoter, are shown a little further.
3.4.1. INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL CORPORTION
This section of the EIA presents a summary of the performance standards on environmental and
social sustainability suggested by the International Financial Corporation (IFC), dated January 2012
(Chart 3.1).
Chart 3.1: IFC Performance Standards
Performance Standard
Objectives
Performance
Standard
1
stresses the importance of
performance in social and
environmental management
throughout a project’s life
(any business activity subject
to
evaluation
and
management).
1. Impact identification and study. Identify and
assess social and environmental impacts, both
positive and negative, in the Project’s area of
influence.
2. Mitigation. Prevent, and if this is not possible,
minimize, mitigate, or compensate for negative
impacts on workers, affected communities, and the
environment.
3. Stakeholders’ participation. Ensure that the
affected communities be duly involved with the
issues susceptible of affecting their lives.
4. Efficient management. Promote better social and
environmental performance of enterprises through
the efficient use of management systems.
Performance Standard 2.
Recognizes
that
the
achievement of economic
growth through the creation
of jobs and income generation
should be balanced with the
workers’ basic rights.
5. Establish, maintain, and improve the workers’
administrative relations.
6. Promote fair treatment and non-discriminatory,
equal opportunities for all workers; compliance with
the labor laws and hiring of nationals.
7. Protect the work force, reporting child labor and
forced labor.
8. Promote safe and sound working conditions; and
protect and promote the workers’ health.
III-22
Recognizes that the high levels
of industrial activity and
urbanization often produce
high levels of water and land
pollution that may threaten
the community and the
environment at the local,
regional, and global level.
9. Prevent or minimize impacts that are adverse to
human health and the environment, preventing or
minimizing pollution caused by the Project’s
activities.
10. Promote the reduction of emissions that
contribute to climate change.
Recognizes that a project’s
activities, equipment, and
infrastructure
frequently
bring
benefits
to
the
communities, including jobs,
services,
and
economic
development opportunities.
11. Prevent or minimize risks to and impacts on the
health and safety of the local community throughout
the life of a project, under both routine and special
conditions.
12. Ensure the safeguard of functionaries and
property in a legitimate manner that prevents or
minimizes risks to the community’s safety.
Addresses
involuntary
resettlement, which entails
transfer (relocation or loss of
home)
and
economic
displacement (loss of goods or
of access to goods leading to
the loss of sources of income
or way of life) as a result of
the purchase of land in
connection with a Project.
13. Prevent or minimize negative impacts o human
health and the environment, preventing or
minimizing pollution from a Project’s activities.
14. Promote the reduction of emissions that
contribute to climate change.
Performance
Standard
6
Recognizes that protecting
and conserving biodiversity –
the variety of life in all its
forms, including the genetic
diversity of species and
ecosystems – and their
capacity for changing and
evolving is fundamental to
sustainable development.
15. Protect and conserve biodiversity.
16. Promote the sustainable management and
utilization of human resources through the adoption
of practices that integrate conservation needs and
development priorities.
Recognizes that Indigenous
peoples, as well as social
groups whose identify differs
17. Ensure that the development process fosters
respect for the Indigenous Peoples’ dignity, human
rights, aspirations, cultures, and ways of life based
on natural resources.
III-23
from that of the dominant
groups in national societies,
are in general some of the
more
marginalized
and
vulnerable segments of the
population.
18. Prevent negative impacts on the communities of
Indigenous Peoples; or, if these impacts cannot be
prevented, minimize and mitigate them or
compensate for them, as well as providing
opportunities to enjoy the benefits of development
in a culturally appropriate manner.
19. Establish and maintain continuous relations with
the Indigenous Peoples affected by the Project
throughout the Project’s life.
20. Foster good faith negotiations and informed
participation of the Indigenous Peoples in case
projects are situated on their traditional lands or on
shared lands in use by the Indigenous Peoples.
21. Respect and preserve the culture, knowledge,
and practices of Indigenous Peoples.
Performance standard 1 thus establishes the importance of (i) integrated evaluation to identify
possible environmental and social impacts, and the risks and opportunities attendant to the project;
(ii) effective community participation, by means of dissemination of information about the project,
and consultation of local communities about issues that directly affect them; and (iii) client
management of the environmental and social performance throughout the project’s life.
Performance standards 2-8 address conditions to prevent, reduce, mitigate, or compensate for
impacts on humans and on the environment and thereby improve conditions as appropriate. When
social and environmental impacts are anticipated, the client must manage them using an
Environmental and Social Management System (ESMS) consistent with performance standard 1.
3.4.2. WORLD BANK ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH, AND SAFETY GUIDELINES
The World Bank Environment, Health, and Safety Guidelines (EHS) provide a reference framework
with general and specific examples of Good International Industry Practice (GIIP), as defined under
IFC Performance Standard 3.
The ASS guidelines indicate performance levels and measures normally accepted by the IFC are
generally considered as viable ay new facilities at reasonable costs, according to the existing
technology. When the host country’s regulations differ from the levels and measures indicated in
the ASS Guidelines, clients should attain the more rigorous levels. If the less rigorous levels and
measures than those indicated by the ASS Guidelines are appropriate in view of the project’s
particular circumstances, the client should provide a full, detailed justification of any alternative
proposed on the basis of the identification and assessment of the social and environmental risks and
impacts. This justification should demonstrate that the choice of any alternative performance level
is consistent with the objectives of this Performance Standard.
The ASS Guidelines for the Extraction of Construction Materials provide information relevant to
the extraction of construction materials, such as aggregates, limestone, slate, sand, clay, gypsum,
feldspar, siliceous sand, and quartzite, as well as ornamental rocks. They address extraction
activities in support of construction projects, civil engineering works, and cement production. They
III-24
also provide a summary of the issues associated with the extraction of construction materials during
the construction, operation, and deactivation phases (e.g., atmospheric emissions, noise and
vibration, water pollution, respiratory hazards, risks associated with uncontrolled access, and earth
instability), together with recommendations on their management.
3.4.3. EQUATOR PRINCIPLES
The Equator Principles are a set of guidelines developed by the major financial institutions to deal
with environmental and social issues for granting credit for project financing. These principles are
adopted on a voluntary basis. They require compliance with the IFC performance standards and the
ASS guidelines for the implementation of projects in low-income countries of the Organization of
Economic Cooperation for Development (OCDE). The guidelines indicate an approach for
determining, evaluating, and managing environmental and social risks in connection with project
financing.
Projects to be financed should be implemented in a manner that is socially responsible and that
reflects good environmental management practice. The purpose is to ensure that projects are
developed in a locally and socially responsible manner, so as to reflect the good practices of
environmental management. Credit will be granted only to projects that abide by principles one to
nine of the ten principles. These are shown in summary form in Chart 3.2.
Projects are classified into categories A, B, and C, in accordance with the environmental and social
criteria adopted by the IFC:
•
•
•
Category A: Projects with possible, significant social or environmental impacts that are
heterogeneous, irreversible, or unprecedented;
Category B: Projects with potentially limited social or environmental impacts that are in
reduced number, usually specific to a locality, amply reversible, and promptly addressed by
mitigation measures; and
Category C: Projects with no social or environmental impacts, or with minimal impacts.
Chart 3.2.: Equator Principles
Principle
Description
Principle
1:
Review
and The project is categorized on the basis of the magnitude of is
potential impacts and risks according to the IFC criteria.
Categorization
Principle 2: Environmental and Categories A and B projects require a social and
environmental assessment for identifying the social and
Social Assessment
environmental risks relevant to the project.
Principle
3:
Applicable In the case of projects that are not OCDE members the
Environmental
and
Social assessment will be based on the IFC Performance Standards
and the World Bank ASS Guidelines.
Standards
Principle 4: Environmental and In the case of categories A and B projects in countries that are
Social Management System and not OCDE members, an Action Plan is required, reflecting
the relevant aspects pointed out in the assessment report
Equator Principles Action Plan
conclusions. It should describe and prioritize the actions
III-25
Principle
Description
necessary for the management of mitigation measures,
corrective measures, and measures for monitoring the impacts
and risks identified in the assessment.
Principle
5:
Stakeholder For all category A projects and, if necessary, for category B
projects in countries that are not OCDE members, the
Engagement
Government, the specialist, or the entrepreneur should have
consulted, in a culturally adequate manner, the communities
affected by the project. The documentation pertaining to the
Assessment and the Action Plan or their non-technical
summaries should be made available to the public.
Principle
6:
Grievance In relation to all category A projects and, if necessary, to
category B projects in countries that are not OCDE members,
Mechanism
so as to ensure continuous consultation, public information,
and community engagement throughout the project’s
construction and operation, the entrepreneur should establish
a grievance mechanism as part of the management system.
The communities should be informed of the existence of such
mechanism.
Principle 7: Independent Review For all category A projects and, if necessary, for category B
projects, an independent social specialist or environmentalist
without direct connection with the client will review the
Assessment documentation, the Action Plan, and the Public
Consultation process to verify compliance with the Equator
Principles.
The following requirements should be incorporated into
Principle 8: Covenants
category A or B project contracts:
• Compliance with the host country’s social and
environmental
legislation,
regulations,
and
authorizations;
• Compliance with the Action Plan during the project’s
construction and operation;
• Availability of periodical reports prepared by
enterprise functionaries, indicating compliance with
the Action Plan; and
• Decommissioning of facilities, when applicable and
appropriate, according to an agreed decommissioning
plan.
Principle
9:
Independent For all category A projects and, if necessary, for category B
projects, an independent environmental and/or social
Monitoring and Reporting
specialist should be nominated or the client should contract
qualified external specialists to verify the information and
follow-up, which should be shared with the EPFIs.
Principle 10: Reporting by and At least on a yearly basis information on the processes and
Transparency on the part of the experience related to the Principles’ implementation will be
III-26
Principle
Equator Principles
Institutions (EPFIs)
Description
Financial made public, while observing the proper confidentiality.
3.4.4. WORLD BANK SAFEGUARDS POLICY
The World Bank operating policies (OP) were established to ensure that its operations would not
impact on people or the environment. Of these policies, OP 4.37, revised in April 2013, is of
particular importance here.
OP 4.37 addresses the issue of dam safety and requires that experienced, competent professionals
project and oversee the construction and that the entrepreneur adopts and implement dam safety
measures throughout the project’s entire cycle. This policy applies also to existing dams or dams
under construction, and is relevant to the project’s performance. In this case, an assessment of the
dam’s safety must be done, and additional measures must be implemented, if needed.
There are ten World Bank safeguards policies, and some of policies other than OP 4.37 may also be
applied to dam projects, including OP 4.01 (Environmental Assessment), OP 4.04 (Natural
Habitats), OP 4.10 (Indigenous Peoples), OP 4.11 (Material Cultural Assets), and OP 4.12
(Involuntary Resettlement).
3.5. CONCLUSIONS
Environmental legislation governs mankind’s sustainable development and purports to safeguard
environmental defense and peoples’ quality of life. Accordingly, natural resources are used in a
sustainable manner, respecting ecosystems and the species that have their habitat in them.
The norms and principles reviewed and explained in this chapter are important, as they permit the
setting of boundaries and limits in respect of safeguarding the environment in the region where the
future Laúca Dam is to be built. Aspects not covered or insufficiently covered by national
legislation may be solved or supplemented by international good practices.
Compliance with Angolan legislation is mandatory; noncompliance subjects the entrepreneur to
sanctions. It is incumbent upon the entrepreneur and the owner of the project to carry out actions
aimed at compliance and at the realization of international good practices and of sustainable
development principles.
III-27
CHAPTER 4
CHARACTERIZATION OF THE REFERENCE
SITUATION
IV-1
Abbreviations
AAR
ADA
AID
AII
AH
ART.
BCR
CCD
CDB
DEC.
EFB
EIA
ENE
FAO
GAMEK
GSHAP
LBA
LBRA
LGT
LOTU
MINAGRI
MINAMB
NBSAP
OIT
ONS
OP
SADC
SEA
SONEFE
TIRFAA
USDA
ZCIT
Regional Coverage Area
Directly Affected Area
Direct Influence Area
Indirect Influence Area
Hydroelectric Power Plant
Article
Rolled Compacted Concrete
Convention to Combat Desertification
Convention on Biological Diversity
Decree
Concrete Face Rock Fill
National Energy Company
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations
Middle Kwanza Management Office
Global Seismic Hazard Map
Basic Environmental Law
Basic Law on Water Biological Resources
Basic Labor Law
Law on Territorial Organization and Urbanism
Ministry of Agriculture
Ministry for the Environment
National Biodiversity Strategy and Action Plan
National Electric System Operator
Southern Africa Development Community
State Office for Water Resources
National Society for Study and Financing of Overseas Enterprises
International Treaty on Plant Genetic Resources for Food and
Agriculture
United States Department of Agriculture
Intertropical Convergence Zone
IV-2
CONTENTS
4. CHARACTERIZATION OF THE REFERENCE SITUATION................................................................... 9
4.1 PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................................... 9
4.1.1 CLIMATE ................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.1.2 CLIMATOLOGIC MAGNITUDES AND SEASON ANALYSIS ........................................................ 10
4.1.3. GEOLOGY ............................................................................................................................................ 22
4.1.4 SEISMICITY ......................................................................................................................................... 30
4.1.5. MINERAL RESOURCES...................................................................................................................... 31
4.1.6. GEOMORPHOLOGY ........................................................................................................................... 32
4.1.7. PEDOLOGY .......................................................................................................................................... 41
4.1.8 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO EROSION ......................................................................................................... 45
4.1.9 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CHARACTERIZATION........................................................................................ 46
4.1.10. WATER RESOURCES........................................................................................................................ 49
4.1.11. SEDIMENTS ....................................................................................................................................... 55
4.1.12. WATER QUALITY ............................................................................................................................. 56
4.2. THE BIOTIC ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................................. 61
4.2.1. VEGETATION COVER ........................................................................................................................ 64
4.2.2. MAIN VEGETATION CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................................... 66
4.3. BIOTIC ENVIRONMENT IN THE ADA AND SURROUNDINGS ...................................................... 81
4.3.1. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURES ............................................................................................... 81
4.3.2. CACULO-CABAÇA COLLECTION LOCATION .............................................................................. 84
4.3.3. LAÚCA COLLECTION LOCATION ................................................................................................... 85
4.3.4. MUTA 1 COLLECTION LOCATION – FOREST ............................................................................... 86
4.3.5. MUTA 2 COLLECTION LOCATION – BEACH ................................................................................ 87
4.3.6. VILA DE MUTA COLLECTION POINT ............................................................................................ 89
4.3.7. GALLERY FOREST COLLECTION LOCATION .............................................................................. 89
4.3.8. VEGETATION COVER IN THE ADA AND SURROUNDINGS ...................................................... 91
4.3.9 TERRESTRIAL FAUNA ..................................................................................................................... 124
IV-3
4.3.10. AQUATIC FAUNA ........................................................................................................................... 177
4.4. ANTHROPIC ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................................................ 210
4.4.1. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURE ................................................................................................ 210
4.4.2. CURRENT SITUATION ..................................................................................................................... 215
4.4.3. RESULTS OF INTERVIEWS IN THE VILLAGES........................................................................... 230
4.4.4. RESULTS OF INTERVIEWS WITH THE COMMUNAL ADMINISTRATIONS .......................... 237
4.4.5. CONCLUSIONS .................................................................................................................................. 239
Abbreviations
List of Figures
Figure 4.1: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Relative air humidity averages – 1955/1990.
Figure 4.2: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Number of insolation hours – 1955/1990.
Figure 4.3: Wind speed averages (m/s) – 1955-1990
Figure 4.4: Summary of predominant wind directions at the Capanda AH Station –
(1955/1990).
Figure 4.5: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Atmospheric pressure – 1955/1990.
Figure 4.6: Geological Map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Figure 4.7: Regional Geological Map.
Figure 4.8: Altimetric Map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Figure 4.9: Iso-declivity map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Figure 4.10: Pedological Map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Figure 4.11: Pedology – Soils Classification – Indirect Influence Area
Figure 4.12: Format of the typical hydrograph adopted.
Figure 4.13: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Minimum flows for recurrences of 5, 10,
and 50 years, with duration of 30 and 90 days.
Figure 4.14: Map of the vegetation cover in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Figure 4.15: Map showing the localization of locations for the collection of biotic
material (aquatic and terrestrial flora and fauna).
Figure 4.16: Map of the Anthropic Environment – Territorial Organization – Indirect
Influence Area.
List of Photo
Photo 4.1: Residual hills (inselbergs) in the Mucoso River basin, São Pedro da
Quilemba district.
Photo 4.2: View of the Malange Plateau near the right bank of the Kwanza River.
Pungo Andongo district.
Photo 4.3: Site of the future Laúca AH dam (April 2008).
Photo 4.4: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Toca do Coiso.
Photo 4.5: Water sampling points. A) Praia Muta; B) km 41 of EN 322; and C)
Emboque Laúca
Photo 4.6: Savanna in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Photo 4.7: Tract of savanna with predominance of the herbaceous layer.
IV-4
Photo 4.8: Riparian forest along the Kwanza River in the riparian stretch above LaúcaAlto. Predominance of oil palms [Elaeis guineensis Jacq] can be noted.
Photo 4.9: Gallery forest (Buiza River). Tree canopy is seen over the river.
Photo 4.10: Tract of Panda Woods
Photo 4.11: Tract of Panda Woods after fire in the dry season, when the grassy layer
was charred. The soil, with rock outcrops, becomes practically exposed.
Photo 4.12: Open savanna after fire (dry season).
Photo 4.13: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Tract of open savanna after fire in the dry
season, already showing vigorous, newly sprouted grass.
Photo 4.14: Tract of open mono-dominated savanna in the Laúca influence area, with
the predominance of fruiting Julbernadia sp.
Photo 4.15: Thin savanna in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Photo 4.16: Park savanna in the dry season. One can note open tracts covered only by
the grassy layer and tracts with groups of trees forming small woods.
Photo 4.17: Tract of Park savanna with murundus in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
One can note the terrain with some more elevated patches (murundus), where arboreous
woody plants (area not burnt) are concentrated. These small islands check the advance
of fire in the dry season, which spreads over the field.
Photo 4.18: Chana adjacent to gallery forest by the Kwanza River. In the detail, a strip
of level grassy field (drained in the dry season) that is flooded in the rainy season.
Photo 4.19: Humid grassy field in the Capanda surroundings. Grass adapted to soaked
soil at the end of the rainy season.
Photo 4.20: Detail of Vellozia sp specimen in a tract of rupestrian field.
Photo 4.21: Marshy tract with Typha p. predominance.
Photo 4.22: Dense grassy tract, common in river pool areas, above Laúca (Kwanza
River).
Photo 4.23: Area adjacent to the Kwanza River; sandy soil, with widened stretches.
Photo 4.24: Anthropic area in the Capanda village. Secondary vegetation in the grassy
stratum and exotic plants under cultivation.
Photo 4.25: Caculo-Cabaça collection location.
Photo 4.26: Laúca location.
Photo 4.27: Muta 1 collection location – Forest.
Photo 4.28: Muta 2 collection location. Beach, strip of gallery forest, bare rocks
abutting on the Kwanza River channel in the Laúca direct influence area.
Photo 4.29: Collection Location 4 – Beach in the rainy season
Photo 4.30: Vila de Muta Collection Location 8.
Photo 4.31: Gallery Forest collection location
Photo 4.32: Tract of gallery forest on the Middle Kwanza River (dense vegetation
adjacent to the river) in the Caculo-Cabaça region.
Photo 4.33: Inside a gallery forest adjacent to the Kwanza River, in the Laúca region,
on the right bank.
Photo 4.34: Gallery forest and bare rocks adjacent to the Kwanza River in the lower
part of its middle course (Filomeno Câmara Bridge region).
Photo 4.35: Gallery forest with the occurrence of oil palms (Elaeis guineensis).
Photo 4.36: Tract of Miombo in the vicinity of Capanda.
Photo 4.37: Tract of Panda Forest in the Laúca access region.
Photo 4.38: Rupiculous area in Kyangulungo, where the Euphorbia grandicornis is
common.
IV-5
Photo 4.39: Tract of chana adjacent to a Kwanza River gallery forest. In the detail, a
tract of grassy field (drained in the dry season), which becomes flooded in the rainy
season.
Photo 4.40: Pedra de Laúca
Photo 4.41: Accacia welsitschii in the ADA.
Photo 4.42 Area near the caisson construction site.
Photo 4.43: Vegetation on steep banks near the area where the dam will be constructed.
Photo 4.44: Orchid specimen (Eulophia spp.).
Photo 4.45: Orchid specimen (Eulophia othoplecta).
Photo 4.46: Footprint vestiges recorded in the region.
Photo 4.47: Capture of bats with mist nets.
Photo 4.48: Setting up a night vision camera in the ADA.
Photo 4.49: Vestiges of the presence of porcupines
Photo 4.50: Footprint of young common duiker (Sylvicapra grimmia).
Photo 4.51: Footprint of an aardvark (Orycteropus afer).
Photo 4.52: Run over Bits sp, found on the Capanda road.
Photo 4.53: Footprint of an aardvark (Orycteropus afer (left front paw) on the Kwanza
River left bank.
Photo 4.54: Aardvark (Orycteropus afer) burrows on the Kwanza River left bank. The
diameter of the camera objective lid (arrow) is 6 centimeters.
Photo 4.55: A Hyrax (Heterohyrax cf. brucei) photographed on the left bank of the
Kwanza River near a stretch of steep bank.
Photo 4.56: Otolemur crassicaudatus individuals photographed near the Capanda
village road/location 5 (on the left) and near the Dombo port (on the right).
Photo 4.57: Young Chlorocebus pygerythrus captured in the area by the road that
connects Kyangulungo to the Kwanza River. The smaller photo shows a female with its
young photographed on the Kwanza River right bank, near the Dombo port.
Photo 4.58: Papiocynocephalus (yellow baboon) photographed in the rustic area on the
left margin of the road to Capanda village/Location 5.
Photo 4.59: Cricetomys sp. photographed on the Kwanza River left bank, near a steep
rock formation.
Photo 4.60: Burrows of mole-rats on the left bank of the Kwanza River.
Photo 4.61: Burrows of the Hystrix africaeaustralis (in this case, apparently in search
of food instead of shelter) observed on the right bank of the Kwanza River (Photo on
the left). Footprint (right front paw) observed near a small left bank tributary (Photo on
the right).
Photo 4.62: Thryonomys area on the Kwanza River left bank.
Photo 4.63: Thryonomys swinderianus specimen obtained from trappers; and feces
observed on the left bank of the Kwanza River.
Photo 4.64: Lepus cf saxatilis photographed in the study area. The species
characteristics are noticeable (see detail on the Photo), but there is need of confirmation,
given the great Lepus variability on the African continent.
Photo 4.65: Genet footprints on the left bank of the Kwanza River.
Photo 4.66: Genet photographed on the right bank of the Kwanza River near a gallery
forest in transition to a grassy savanna.
Photo 4.67: cf. Atilax paludinosus footprints seen on the Kwanza River’s left bank.
Photo 4.68: Ichneumia albicauda photographed in the vicinity of the Dombo port, on
the Kwanza River’s right bank.
Photo 4.69: Warthog (Phacochoerus africanus) photographed in the Caculo-Cabaça
AH region.
IV-6
Photo 4.70: Hippopotamus grazing areas, trails, and footprints on the banks or vicinity
of the Kwanza River.
Photo 4.71: Hippopotamus photographed approximately 2.0 kilometers downstream
from the Dombo port (Kwanza River).
Photo 4.69: Forest buffalo footprint on the Kwanza River’s left bank.
Photo 4.72: Palm-nut buzzard.
Photo 4.73: Red-necked buzzard.
Photo 4.74: Common button quail (Turnix sylvatica).
Photo 4.75: Female Namaqua dove (Oena capensis).
Photo 4.76: Lesser grey shrike (Lanius minor).
Photo 4.77: Flat-backed toad.
Photo 4.78: Angolan reed frog.
Photo 4.79: Anchieta’s ridged frog.
Photo 4.80: Male yellow-throated plated lizard.
Photo 4.81: Black-lined plated lizard.
Photo 4.82: Male Namibian rock agama.
Photo 4.83: Tree agama.
Photo 4.84: Carapace of a crustacean typical of the Kwanza River.
Photo 4.85: Marginal environment at the Caculo-Cabaça location.
Photo 4.86: Marginal environment at the Muta 1-Mata location.
Photo 4.88: Sampled marginal environment at the rain gage post.
Photo 4.89: Marcusenius cf. stanleyanus (measuring about 20 centimeters)
Photo 4.90: Parakneria cf. Vilhenae.
Photo 4.91: Specimens of the order Cypriniformes: A) Raimas cf. christyi; B) -H)
different species of the gender Barbus.
Photo 4.92: Labeo cf. annectens (A, B) and Labeobarbus marequensis (C).
Photo 4.93: Brycinus cf. lateralis (A and B); and Rhabdalestes cf. rhodensiensis (C).
Photo 4.94: Hepsetus odoe.
Photo 4.95: Doumea angolensis.
Photo 4.96: Parauchenoglanis ngamensis (A) and Chrysichthys cf. delhezi (B).
Photo 4.97: Synodontis sp. (A) and Chiloglanis cf. lukugae (B).
Photo 4.98: Schilbe cf. Bocagii.
Photo 4.99: Clariasngamensis (A) and Clariallabes platyprosopos (B).
Photo 4.100: Serranochromis cf. angusticeps (A); Tilapia rendalli (B); and
Pharyngochromis cf. schwetzi. (C).
Photo 4.101: Mastacembelus cf. batesii.
Photo 4.102: Aplocheilichthys cf. johnstonii.
Photo 4.103: Social team’s visit to villages in influence areas.
Photo 4.104: Distribution and reading of the information brochure.
Photo 4.105: The abandoned health center in Ngola Ndala.
Photo 4.106: Houses in Kissaquina.
Photo 4.107: Irrigation system on the Jackson Boy farm.
Photo 4.108: Crops on the Ze Boy farm.
Photo 4.109: Fishing community from the Kissaquina village.
IV-7
List of Table
Table 4.1: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Selected Meteorological Stations –1955/1990
Table 4.2: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Temperatures (Maximum, mean, and
minimum) – 1955/1990
Table 4.3: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Wind Speeds and Directions at the Capanda
AH Station – (1955/1990).
Table 4.4: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Net evaporation – 1955/1990.
Table 4.5: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Rain gauging posts considered at the
Cambambe AH and Capanda AH stations.
Table 4.6: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Monthly precipitation averages series (mm) –
1955/1990.
Table 4.7: Flood flows in the Laúca hydroelectric plants
Table 4.8: Volumes and duration of flood hydrographs in Laúca AH localities.
Table 4.9: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Minimum flows at the Laúca AH (m3/s)
Table 4.10. Data used to calculate sediment retention in the Middle Kwanza River
Basin.
Table 4.11: Water quality analyses results. (2008)
Table 4.12: Sampling results (April/2013)
Table 4.13. List of autochthonous species recorded during the expeditions – April and
August 2008
Table 4.14: List of cultivated and ruderal plants of wide distribution occurring in the
middle Kwanza, established the first expedition (April 2008) region species.
Table 4.15: Mammalian fauna present in the study area.
Table 4.16: Avifauna recorded in the study area.
Table 4.17: Birds recorded by the field survey (2013)
Table 4.18: Herpetofauna occurring in the study area.
Table 4.19: Amphibians identified by the environmental survey (2013)
Table 4.20: Reptiles recorded by the environmental survey (2013).
Table 4.21: Number of inhabitants per village studied (2013).
Table 4.22: Access to school, and schooling level per village.
Table 4.23: Types and number of homes per village.
Table 4.24: Access to potable water in the villages.
Table 4.25: Number of people employed on the Laúca Project or on farms
Table 4.26: Cemetery localization in relation to the villages and the Laúca Project
Table 4.27: Summary of the relevant socioeconomic aspects.
List of Frame
Chart 4.1: Ichtyofauna list. OSTEICHTHYES
IV-8
4. CHARACTERIZATION OF THE REFERENCE
SITUATION
This chapter provides information and data on the characterization of the current
reference situation on the project site and surrounding area.
It is divided according to the physical, biotic, and antitropical environment. The
characterization is based on bibliographical and field survey data in the four (4) areas of
influence defined for the construction of the Laúca dam.
Emphasis is placed on the direct influence areas (AID) and the directly affected area
(ADA), as these may have greater direct interference on the populations and on the
biotic environment.
4.1 PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT
For the characterization of the physical environment in the undertaking’s influence
areas a bibliographical survey was done regarding each aspect (climate, hydrography,
geology, geomorphology, and soil conditions) as herein described. In respect of water
resources, a field survey was done to determine water quality.
4.1.1 CLIMATE
According to the Köppen classification, the climate in the Middle Kwanza River Basin
is tropical, with a dry winter season (Aw). In Aw-type climates the monthly mean
temperature throughout the year is above 18° C and in at least one month mean total
rainfall is lower than 60 mm. The typical biome of regions with this type of climate is
the savanna, hence their common denomination.
As they are megathermal, i.e., above the 18° C isothermal range, and located in the
intertropical region, the savanna climates have two well-defined seasons: a dry season,
IV-9
during which potential evapotranspiration greatly exceeds rainfall, occasioning in some
cases extreme dryness conditions; and a humid, rainy season, when rainfall is more or
less abundant, but always in excess of potential evapotranspiration, thereby permitting
the replacement of water reserves in the biomass, the soils, and the aquifers.
As is the case in equatorial climate, the main rainfall generating mechanisms are
convective phenomena, usually associated with thunder at night, when the soil
temperature is higher and air instability is more pronounced. Thus, the period of greater
rainfall is associated with the presence of the Zone of Intertropical Convergence Zone
(ZCIT) over the region.
In this type of climate, rainy seasons coincide with summer in the respective
hemisphere owing to the ZCIT presence in the region. Under these conditions, the
moisture brought by the trade winds that converge over these regions feed the
convection, giving origin to cumulonimbus clouds that cause heavy rains.
In the Middle Kwanza region, though the geographical factors (relief and altitude) lead
to diversity, the atmospheric mechanism creates a regional uniformity, determining a
seasonal rain pattern, with maximum rainfall in the summer and minimum rainfall in the
winter, as described above.
4.1.2 CLIMATOLOGIC MAGNITUDES AND SEASON ANALYSIS
The climatologic magnitudes chosen for the analysis in this study are as follows:
• Monthly temperatures: absolute maximum, mean, and absolute minimum (°C);
• Mean monthly humidity (%);
• Mean insolation (hour/day);
• Monthly maximum and mean wind speed (m/s);
• Percent duration of each wind direction and respective mean and maximum
speed (m/s);
• Mean monthly rainfall (mm/month) and daily maximum for each month
(mm/day), and number of rainy days per month;
• Mean monthly atmospheric pressure (mb); and
IV-10
• Evaporation (mm).
The climatologic data for the study of the Kwanza River Basin were gleaned from the
following sources:
• Hydrometeorological study of the Capanda AH (ANGOLA, 19--), hereinafter
denominated “Capanda Project;”
• Three technical studies by the hydrologic services, pertaining to the 1987-1988,
1988-1989, and 1989-1990 hydrologic years, published by GAMEK, and
providing data gathered by the Capanda meteorological station; and
• Five
yearbooks
on
surface
meteorological
observations
by
several
meteorological stations geographically scattered throughout the country,
pertaining to 1955, 1959, 1960, 1962, and 1970. Hereinafter these the data will
be designated as obtained from the “yearbooks.”
The results of the abovementioned studies will be compared with each other to ensure
greater accuracy in the climatologic characterization of the Kwanza River Basin. Table
4.1 shows the stations evaluated in the study, the elements available in each of them,
and the respective data sources.
IV-11
Table 4.1: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Selected Meteorological Stations –1955/1990
Station
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
(m)
IV-12
Data Source
Magnitude
Source: (i) Capanda Study; (ii) Yearbooks; (iii) Capanda Station. Magnitudes: (1)
Temperature; (2) Relative Humidity: (3) Insolation; (4) Wind; (5) Atmospheric
Pressure; (6) Evaporation.]
The meteorological data obtained from the Capanda Project show long-term averages
for stations in the Kwanza River basin that represent both the basin and the Capanda
utilization influence area – relatively close to the Laúca dam, this study’s object.
As regards yearbook data, only stations located in the Kwanza River Basin were
selected for this study’s preparation; annual averages were compiled for the years 1955,
1959, 1960, 1962, and 1969.
In respect of the period of meteorological observation, both the yearbooks and the
Capanda study data refer to the 1950s, 1960s, and 1970s. The data from the Capanda
AH station refer to a shorter period (1987-1990) and to only one locality.
As the data were obtained from three different sources, analyses of all magnitudes were
done to verify the consistence of results. In general, the yearbooks and the Capanda AH
Project data showed the same trend, as they cover stations in common and refer to a
similar period. Data from the Capanda station, though, often showed a quite different
trend from the others. As this station is close to the Laúca AH and the period covered by
its data is quite different, the decision was made to present this station’s data separately
whenever their trend deviated from the trend shown by the other stations. For
simplification purposes, hereinafter the yearbook results, combined with those of the
Capanda AH Project, will be indicated as having been obtained from the series
“yearbooks + Capanda AH.”
Air Temperature
Table 4.2 shows maximum, mean, and minimum air temperatures from January thru
December, given in the two series analyzed: Capanda AH station and “yearbooks +
Capanda AH.” The disparity of the data between the two series stems mainly from the
fact that the observation periods were different. In addition, the series “yearbooks +
Capanda AH” consists of data from various meteorological stations, and at times some
of these stations may have shown extreme results, which have influenced the data trend.
IV-13
Absolute maximum temperatures observed range between 30.1° C and 34° C at the
Capanda AH station, and between 33° C and 37° in the “yearbooks + Capanda AH”
series. In both series, the highest temperatures occur in September.
Mean temperatures in the two series show a slightly different trend. In the “yearbooks +
Capanda AH” they range between 18.7° C and 21.5° C, with a long-term mean of 20.7°,
while in the Capanda AH station series they range between 20.1° C and 23° C, with an
mean of 21.9° C. The data show little seasonal difference in mean temperatures. June,
July, and August are the coldest and the driest months, while December-March are the
warmest and wettest.
Table 4.2 also shows extreme minimum air temperatures. Minimum temperatures
observed range between 9.6° C and 0.1° C in the “yearbooks + Capanda AH” series,
and between 16.3° C and 8.7° C in the Capanda AH series. The minimum temperature
observed was 0.1° C in June.
June thru August are the coldest months, already
mentioned in connection with mean temperatures as well as with minimum
temperatures observed.
Table 4.2: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Temperatures (Maximum, mean, and
minimum) – 1955/1990
Source
Series
1
Series
2
Jan
32.0
Feb
31.2
Mar
30.1
Maximum temperature observed (°C)
Apr Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct
31.5 33.3 31.0 31.2 33.0 34.0
Nov
32.6
Dec
30.3
Maximum
30.5
33.0
34.8
33.0
33.0
35.2
33.8
37.0
34.0
35.0
32.6
Oct
20.7
Nov
22.3
Dec
22.2
Mean
33.8
33.5
Source
Series
1
Series
2
Jan
22.5
Feb
23.0
Mar
22.6
Apr
22.7
Mean temperature (°C)
Jun Jul Aug Sep
22.8 21.4 20.1 20.4
21.7
21.4
21.3
21.3
20.2
21.5
21.5
20.7
20.9
Source
Series
1
Series
2
Jan
16.0
Feb
16.3
Mar
16.5
Minimum temperature observed (°C)
Apr Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct
14.5 11.0 8.7
9.0
9.9 11.7
Nov
16.2
Dec
10.7
Minimum
9.6
7.7
9.6
8.5
8.4
9.4
9.0
2.7
18.7
0.1
18.7
1.6
20.1
3.0
5.0
22.3
11.0
Source: Capanda Station, Capanda Project, and Yearbooks Series 1 = Capanda Station
and “Yearbook + Capanda Project Series 2.
IV-14
Relative Humidity
Relative humidity refers to the degree of saturation of the air with water vapor. The
record shows that the monthly mean has ranged between 55% and 80% at the
meteorological stations (including the Capanda AH Station).
The results for humidity from both the “yearbooks + Capanda AH” and the Capanda
AH station converge. The results for monthly averages, whose long-term mean was
70%, are shown in Fig. 4.1. This Figure shows that the lowest relative humidity was
recorded in the dry months, June-August, and the highest in the rainy months,
November-April.
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Figure 4.1: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Relative air humidity averages – 1955/1990.
Source: Capanda AH Station, Capanda AH Project, and Yearbooks.
Insolation
Insolation in a given period is defined by the number of direct sunlight exposure,
measured by a device called heliograph. The insolation data in the “yearbooks +
Capanda AH Project” and the Capanda AH series converge. Figure 4.2 shows the
monthly averages, with long-term mean of 199.3 hours/month.
IV-15
The months of greatest insolation are the less rainy and less humid, May thru July. The
highest insolation mean is recorded in May, at 281 hours/month, while the lowest is
recorded in November, at 132.3 hours/month.
A frequent behavior of data has been noticed, as insolation shows a trend
complementary to that of humidity: the months with a highest number of sunlight hours
are also the driest, while those with less insolation are the most humid.
Hours/month
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Figure 4.2: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Number of insolation hours – 1955/1990.
Wind
The monthly averages in the “yearbooks + Capanda AH Project” series are quite
different from those in the Capanda station, as can be seen from Figure 4.3.
The long-term mean in the “yearbooks + Capanda AH Project” series is 2 m/s, while the
mean at the Capanda AH station is 3.9 m/s. The Capanda AH station was selected for
IV-16
the studies of wind maximums and directions hereinafter because it is located near the
Laúca AH and has maximum records.
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
Capanda
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Yearbooks+Capanda Project series
Figure 4.3: Wind speed averages (m/s) – 1955-1990
Source: Capanda AH Stations, Capanda AH Project, and Yearbooks.]
Table 4.3 shows the predominant wind directions on a monthly basis as well as mean
and maximum speeds at the Capanda station. This table also sums up the percentage of
time winds blew in each direction, and the respective mean and maximum speeds.
Table 4.3: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Wind Speeds and Directions at the Capanda
AH Station – (1955/1990).
Predominant Direction and attendant mean and maximum speed
Month
Direction
Mean (m/s)
Maximum (m/s)
Jan
NW
4.30
12.00
Feb
NW
4.37
12.00
Mar
E
3.30
9.00
Apr
E
3.60
12.00
May
E
4.03
12.00
Jun
E
4.57
12.00
Jul
W
4.20
14.00
Aug
W
4.47
13.00
Sep
W
3.67
10.00
Oct
NW
3.77
9.00
Nov
NW
3.07
7.00
Dec
NW
3.47
9.00
Wind speed summary
Direction
%
Mean (m/s)
Maximum (m/s)
N
2.0
2.27
12.00
IV-17
NE
2.23
2.60
17.00
E
21.33
3.47
12.00
SE
10.63
2.73
17.40
S
1.97
2.00
7.00
SW
5.17
2.13
7.00
W
25.07
3.80
13.00
NW
25.40
3.97
14.00
Calm
6.2
0.00
0.00
Figure 4.4 shows a summary of predominant wind directions at the Capanda Station.
Figure 4.4: Summary of predominant wind directions at the Capanda AH Station –
(1955/1990).
Some of the information that may be gathered from Figure 4.4 and Table 4.3 include the
following:
• The predominant wind directions at the Capanda station are W and NW, each
one accounting for 30% of the time;
• The maximum wind speed recorded at this station was 17.4 m/s on a SE
direction; and
IV-18
• From October thru February the predominant wind direction is NW; from March
thru June, E; and from July thru September, W.
Atmospheric Pressure
Atmospheric pressure data could be obtained only from the yearbooks; a summary
of monthly data is shown in Figure 4.5. Long-term mean is 860.1 mb, which
changes little over the year.
Jan
Feb
Mar
Apr
May
Jun
Jul
Aug
Sep
Oct
Nov
Dec
Figure 4.5: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Atmospheric pressure – 1955/1990.
Source: Yearbooks.
Evaporation
Evaporation is a phenomenon that depends on various factors, such as the degree of
relative air humidity, temperature, radiation, and the albedo, among others. Surface
changes, as in the case of the construction of reservoirs, increase the amount of
water evaporated in an environment, known as net evaporation.
The method employed for measuring net evaporation in the Kwanza River
reservoirs was the same used by the National Electric System Operator (ONS) at
the reservoirs of the Brazilian Northeast (ONS, 2004), which has similar
characteristics as Angola in some aspects.
IV-19
Table 4.4 shows the results of the calculation of the monthly net evaporation figures,
which resulted in 547.01 mm/year. This corresponds to the reservoir’s moderate
evaporation capacity, i.e., 1.5 mm/day. A comparison between the drier months
(June-August) with those of the rainy season (October-April) shows a marked
difference.
For instance, if we take the month of August, when net daily
evaporation reaches a maximum of 3.18 mm/day, and the month of January, when
evaporation is only 0.25 mm/day, one can see that at the height of the dry season the
liquid surfaces (particularly of reservoirs) lose up to 12 times more water to the
atmosphere than during the rainy season.
In dry periods a series of factors contribute to these high evaporation rates. The low
rainfall index, coupled with increased insolation and lower relative air moisture,
favor increased evaporation on the water surface.
Table 4.4: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Net evaporation – 1955/1990.
Jan
7.54
Feb
31.22
Mar
30.80
Apr
20.44
May
52.18
Jun
94.54
Jul
93.57
Aug
95.60
Sep
75.26
Oct
22.96
Nov
13.30
Dec
9.60
Total
547.01
Source: Capanda Project and Yearbooks.
Precipitation
Hydrologic data from previous studies are not homogenous in terms of time; they
stem from various sources, and show extensive gaps. Thus, the analysis of the
consistency of these data has been based on the Lorenz curve.
For obtaining the monthly precipitation mean in the segment of interest the rain
gauging posts shown on Table 4.5 have been taken into consideration. Posts not on
this table have been excluded because their series are too short.
IV-20
Table 4.5: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Rain gauging posts considered at the
Cambambe AH and Capanda AH stations.
Number
Post
Longitude
Latitude
Source: Capanda Project and Yearbooks.
Data from the selected posts provided the basis for establishing the average
precipitation in the Cambambe AH station segment of the basin, shown together
with data from the Capanda AH meteorological station in Table 4.6.
IV-21
Table 4.6: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Monthly precipitation averages series
(mm) – 1955/1990.
Month
Cambambe
Capanda
173.70
59.60
January
148.10
111.50
February
205.60
297.80
March
135.30
159.80
April
18.10
11.30
May
0.60
0.00
June
0.30
1.00
July
2.60
3.20
August
30.10
20.00
September
102.60
81.90
October
182.50
251.90
November
184.10
131.40
December
98.63
94.12
Mean=
205.60
297.80
Maximum=
Source: Capanda Station, Capanda Project, and Yearbooks
From the available information one can see that the spatial distribution of
precipitation is uniform. The Capanda AH station shows a cycle similar to that of
the regional rainfall regime, represented by the Cambambe AH station, with the
exception of the intensity of rains at the peak, which shows a record of 297.8 mm in
March.
Two clearly distinct seasons are observed: May-September, when monthly totals are
less than 60 mm; and October-April, when average precipitation is around 160 mm.
The most critical quarter is June-August, when precipitation is less than 10 mm,
often with periods with no precipitation at all. The rainiest quarter is January-March,
with 40% of the annual rainfall total. The humid station is characterized by two
rainy peaks: the first varying between November, with 182.5 mm and December,
with 184.1 mm; and the second, with the highest precipitation: 205.6 in March.
4.1.3. GEOLOGY
IV-22
From a regional viewpoint, the Regional Coverage Area (AAR) forms part of an
area characterized by extensive, profound continental faults. Between such faults is
located the Kwanza Horst, a latitudinal linear elevation of the crystalline basement,
about 300 kilometers long and 20-50 meters wide, with lithographic structures
covered in the Lower Proterozoic. The Kwanza Horst separates two other major
geological structures: the Maiombe Shield in the Northwest and the Angola Shield
in the Southwest.
Regionally, the portion of the Middle Kwanza River Basin, located in the proximity
of the city of Dondo (coastal peneplain surface) encompasses rocky and crystalline
formations from the ancient rock mass. Most of these rock formations are
characterized by a high degree of metamorphism, including the Basement Complex,
in which gneiss, paragneiss, migmatite, mica schist, and granite-gneiss, and other
rocky materials are more abundant. In general, these materials are very rich in vein
quartz, although granitic faced rocky outcrops, little or non-metamorphosed, do
occur.
Between the Upper Dondo and the Kwanza River there occur expanses of schistous
rocks associated with arkoses (in the Sansikwa Series-Western Congo System). The
sedimentary coverage formations crop out first in a narrow margin, which widens
considerably from then on until it becomes part of the Kwanza sedimentary basin,
where there are deposit outcrops that range from the Lower Cretaceous to the
Holocene, forming the expanse’s inner peripheral strip, in contact with the
crystalline complex, and then largely forming the low seashore. The geology of
Middle Kwanza River Basin is shown in Figure 4.6.
In the Malanje Plateau region, the basement complex formations display a wide
distribution along an E-W central strip, which surrounds a major part of the Lucala
River basin on the west, where rocky outcrops are frequent. These formations
consist of metamorphic rocks, particularly gneisses, migmatites, and granitegneisses, with abundant quartz veins, characterized by their varied texture and
mineralogical composition, as well as the occasional occurrence of quartzites and
quartzitic schist that form high-profile rocky reliefs and other highly
metamorphosed rocks.
IV-23
The greatest occurrence is of ancient Higher Precambrian sedimentary formations
that have largely covered the crystalline rocks of the metamorphic base. They
consist primarily of sandstone and conglomerates of reddish or pink colors, and of
arkoses, greywacke, and clayey, silty schist.
IV-24
These formations form part of the silty schist series, of the more recent age of the
Western Congo System, and of the various rocky materials that also form part of the
series; the coarse and consolidated sandy materials are the formations that occupy
the most extensive areas, where the outcrops that make up the Lucala and Luando
falls stand out. The Gango sub-basin region is located on the Old Continental
Massif, consistently with the Precambrian formations.
The Silty Schist series include the Pungo Andongo layers, which consist of arkoses,
conglomeratic and conglomerate sandstone, with the predominance of rolled,
roundish pebbles. The cement that aggregates these materials is sandy and purple.
The rock monoliths that rise up from the Pungo Andongo plain, known as Black
Rocks and Guinga Rocks, belong to these typical conglomerates. In addition to these
rocky outcrops, there are others on the lower plane west of Pungo Andongo,
sometimes disposed in ridges along the margins of the Kwanza River and even in its
riverbed, giving origin to frequent rapids and falls (Salto do Cavalo and the Mucala
rapids). In these places conglomerates and sandstone alternate, frequently alternated
with reddish argillites.
IV-25
Figure 4.6: Geological Map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin
Other than these cases, rarely are outcrops seen on the surfaces of the Precambrian
sedimentary substrate. There are also various surfaces covered by coarse,
nonconsolidated deposits, particularly of Kalahari sand (Higher Tertiary and
Pleistocene), which become more abundant in the northeast, and have their
boundary defined by the Cassange Lowland escarpment. The Kalahari System,
IV-26
which is related to continental and tertiary quartzitic sediments, consists essentially
of coarse and friable yellowish, grayish, or brownish sandstone, consistently in thick
horizontal layers. Their quartz components are rounded owing to the action of the
wind, and are agglomerated by soft, ferruginous cement. Nearly the entire Kalahari
formation is covered by a layer of nonconsolidated, predominantly wind-driven sand
of more recent age, probably deposited in the Pleistocene.
In addition to the large expanses of sand, smaller, thinner ones are sparsely found in
the northern part of the plateau surface, in sharp contrast to the old silty formations,
and consisting of lightly consolidated or even lose sand, with outcrops of pebbly
debris, rolled or sub rolled, of a sandy, quartzitic, and gneissic nature, mingled with
abundant lateritic material. On top of this pebbly layer there is a thin quartzous sand
stratum.
In the city of Calulo region, in the South Kwanza province, the Precambrian
eruptive complex formations form part of the great batholiths that start next to the
Kwanza River and fans out toward the south, encompassing a large part of the
plateau and sub-plateau regions of the Angolan territory’s Center-West. These are
essentially rocks consisting of granite, granodiorite, quartz-diorite, and nonzonitic
granite.
To the south of the Kwanza River are found rocks of the Silty Schist series and the
Basement Complex. These formations are found in the northern portion of the zone
of outcrops of compact coarse- or medium-grained, purplish sandstone,
physiographically identified by smooth surfaces. The Basement Complex has
crystallophyfillic formations of marked metamorphism, with metamorphosed and
semi-metamorphosed rocks, particularly gneisses, granite gneisses, and different
schistous rocks. The top of mountain forms are of quartzitic rocks and particularly
quartzites. There are formations of the Precambrian eruptive complex, consisting
essentially of granite, granodiorite, quartz-diorite, and nonzonitic granite, with a
greater quantity of granitic rocks. To the west of the city of Calulo there are
expanses of sedimentary rocks of the Sansíkwa formation, associated with outcrops
of quartzitic rocks and quartziferous sandstone, similar to the crowning of the major
mountainous massifs, and of clayish schist more frequently found in level areas.
IV-27
According to the Angola Geological Survey (Mouta, 1998), the AID and the ADA
are under lithostratigraphic units that encompass the rock formations of the Ancient
Continental Massif, characterized by the predominance of formations of the
Precambrian eruptive complex, represented by large-scale granitic rocks of the
Basement Complex formation, as well as eruptive rocks. Precambrian sedimentary
rocks of the Silty Schist and Calc-Schist formation are found, as are small recent
alluvial deposits.
On the basis of the available topographic and surveying data and of the mapping of
both margins, faults and fractures have been identified in the area of the Laúca dam
construction site, consisting of sedimentary rocks of the Silty Schist Group and
older crystalline rocks. The location of the axis of the future reservoir is firmly set,
with sloping lateral walls of sandstone, siltstone, and conglomerates. The
stratigraphy observed on the slopes consists, at the top, to a 3-meter depth, of
sandstone of variable grain size, followed by more consistent sandstone with a little
feldspar and 40-meter thickness, then by finely stratified intercalations of
subordinated siltstone, calcarenite, and claystone, with an estimated thickness of 15
meters-20 meters, with a predominance of siltstones of about 15 meters. At the base
there are sedimentary deposits with a depth of up to 5 meters. The geologic map of
the region is shown in Figure 4.7.
The Silty Schist Group consist of sedimentary rocks of the lower Proterozoic (Late
Riftean /Vediano) similar to the formations of the Western Congo System (late
Precambrian), formed by meteronites with thick stratification, metasiltites; at the
base, cemented gravel and gravel metaconglomerates. This unit is prevalent in the
area directly affected by the construction of the tunnels, which extend from the
Queta Candombe hilly formations, on the left bank of the Kwanza River, to the
embankment of the Capanda AH, in a SW/NE direction. They are also prevalent in
the Serra M’Bango formation. On the right bank, this unit extends from the
escarpment joining the Kwanza River channel, and extending further northwards.
The Quibala Complex, the oldest formations on the Angolan territory, consists of
granites, biotites, and siento-diorites and is composed of intrusive rocks of the lower
IV-28
Archean, which occur on the left bank of the Kwanza River, and sparsely
downstream of the Luinga and the Buiza Rivers. On the right bank, they occur
sparsely in the form of steep hills locally known as Quizacala, Lunga, and Calombe.
Figure 4.7: Regional Geological Map
The alluvial-pluvial deposits are formations from the quaternary, usually with
surfaces covered by extensive sedimentary deposits, up to a few meters deep, and
consisting of angular pebbles, sand, and clay. They have been identified in the AID,
on the alluvial plains of the Malassangi and Dibo Rivers, both located on the
Kwanza Rivers right bank.
The Calcareous Schist Group consists of calcareous rocks from the late Proterozoic
(Late-Middle-Riftean),
with
alternating metarenites,
metastiltites,
argillites,
dolomites, and cemented gravel and gravel metaconglommerates at the base. In the
AID this formation occurs in a narrow strip, to the north of the Kwanza River’s right
bank, between 800 meters and 900 meters altitudes, in the Mucoso River watershed,
in the Quimbalacata region, which marks the transition between the formations of
IV-29
the Silty Schist Group (late Proterozoic) and the Basement Complex (late
Archean/lower Proterozoic).
4.1.4 SEISMICITY
Though modest as compared with other regions of the world, seismicity in Angola is
significant, as several earthquakes measuring 5.0 on the Richter scale have occurred,
and for this reason seismic risk in the country cannot be ignored.
Notwithstanding the seismic studies done in recent years in connection with the
Global Seismic Hazard Map-GSHAP, which points to few areas in Angola
recognized as having active tectonics, seismicity in the country is not well-known.
The identification of homogenous sources zones is hindered by the sparse,
incomplete seismic records and the lack of more modern seismic stations, which
causes uncertainty as to the earthquake parameters.
Seismologic studies (ANGOLA, 1986, 1988, and CATANIA, 2006) indicate that
seismic activity in the AAR is low, and that the areas with greater activity are
located in the country’s Center-South. Studies done for the Capanda AH Project
located in the neighborhood of the dam construction site have indicated seismicity
associated with the two profound regional faults within the perimeter established for
the AAR.
The first profound fault, known as the Eventual Seismic Focus (FSE-1) or South
Kwanza fault, runs at about 15 kilometers north of the reservoirs’ location, being
limited on the south by the Kwanza Horst, which geologically divides the Maiombe
and the Angolan crystalline shields. On the right flank it has an approximate E-W
direction, and was associated with two quakes that occurred in 1968 and 1976, with
a magnitude of 4.4 and 4.8, respectively. The latter quake’s focal depth was 33 km.
The second profound fault, the Eventual Seismic Fault IV, runs at about 50
kilometers from the Capanda AH dam, on its left flank, and was associated with a
great quake in 1914, of a 6.54 magnitude, and two smaller quakes of 4 and 6
magnitudes.
IV-30
An analysis of the seismic intensities of various quakes recorded at the Capanda AH
and their acceleration indicate that the parameters calculated for the events included
in international catalogues, with maximum accelerations of 0.02g, are consistent
with the values estimated in the regional studies done in recent years under the
GSHAP. The quakes studied by SONDOTÉCNICA were located to the west and at
long distances (a minimum of 245 kilometers) from the Capanda AH site, with their
epicenters located mainly in the Kwanza Sedimentary Basin.
The values calculated for the quakes associated with the FSE-1 ad FSE-IV faults, at
15 kilometers and 50 kilometers from the Capanda AH dam, which are not shown
in the international records, indicate considerably greater accelerations, between
0.1434g and 0.314g for the maximum magnitudes adopted for the faults. These
quakes were probably recorded in regional seismographic stations and are not
included in international records.
It is thus recommended that the same seismic parameters employed in the Capanda
AH projects be adopted. These parameters are related to intensity 7 on the MSK-64
scale, which corresponds to intensity VII-III (7.5) on the Modified Mercalli scale, as
noted in the “Relatório Detalhado do Projecto – RPD – Parte VIII – Investigações –
Livro 3 – Estabilidade da Barragem e Fundações – Memória Explicativa,” issued by
Hidroprojekt” [Detailed Project Report-DPR – Part VIII – Surveys – Book 3 –
Stability of the Dam and Foundations – Explanatory Document].
4.1.5. MINERAL RESOURCES
In view of the impossibility of gathering secondary data for lack of specific studies,
it is not possible to know the AAR’s current mineral potential.
Although there is evidence that the Middle Kwanza River Basin has some mineral
resources deposits, such as diamond iron, copper, and limestone, according to the
available literature, only manganese has been exploited so far.
IV-31
Prior to independence, manganese was exploited in 20 mining sites in the northwest
of the Malange province, in the Lucala region, in more than 80 small deposits,
particularly in those of Quiota and Lengué, where ferromanganese with 25%-45%
manganese and 2%-44% iron content. The main metallic minerals were psilomelane
and pyrosulite, and in smaller quantities, manganite and braunite with Fe, Ba, and
Ca impregnations. Alluvial ores are found in surface deposits in the form of a
carapace measuring up to hundreds of meters in length and width and up to 3.0
meters depth on the surface.
Reserves of high grade manganese are estimated at 4-5 billion tons. But this figure
can be higher, as sufficient studies have not been made to determine the total area
where manganese occurs in the Angolan subsoil.
As regards possible mineral resources to be found, particularly in the AII, according
to the Capanda Agro-Industrial Hub Project, some minerals of commercial interest
may occur, indicated by the type of rock and lithological stratification found in the
region, including gold and diamond in the rock substrate of the Silty Schist group.
Manganese, as well as limestone, may occur in rocks of the Calc-Schist group.
Ornamental stones and aggregates for civil construction may occur in the arkosean
basement, in different types of gneiss, migmatites, granites, and quartzites.
Sandy soils in river channels, appropriate for asphalt paving, are easily available, as
are sandy clay soils appropriate for embankments in civil construction. There are
thick layers of laterite in grainy soils, which are used as road paving base and subbase, railroad ballast, and protection of slopes.
4.1.6. GEOMORPHOLOGY
The relief of the Angolan territory is characterized by a series of plateaus that slope
down from inland towards the East and the Southeast and to the ocean shoreline;
some of these plateaus reach altitudes above 1,500 meters (Figure 4.8).
IV-32
The territory consists mainly of a highland massif, limited by a narrow strip of
lowland, whose altitude ranges from 0.0 meters to 200 meters. Above 200 meters
come mountains and plateaus, which occupy most of the Angolan territory.
The Moco Mount in the Huambo province, approximately 2,620-meters high, is the
highest point. The coast slopes down slightly and has few bays and promontories.
(Figure 4.9).
Relief in the Middle Kwanza River hydrographic basin is diversified, encompassing
coastal and sub-coastal, sub-plateau, and plateau areas. The coastal area has altitudes
of 50 meters to 100 meters, and is cut by an intricate hydrographic network. The
gently rolling relief gradually becomes hilly and steep.
In the Kwanza River valley there are residual reliefs up to 800-m high; and
inselbergs, known as “isle mounts,” are frequent. In some areas, drainage is internal,
and is characterized by small internal basins that converge to a central, lower point,
where they remain for a long period during the dry season. These natural reservoirs
are regionally known as cacimbas.
The sub-coastal surface has altitudes of 400 meters-600 meters and is characterized
by forms of strong relief or hills, particularly in the inner strip, which marks the
transition to the sub-plateau surface.
IV-33
Figure 4.8: Altimetric Map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin
IV-34
Figure 4.9: Iso-declivity map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin
The escarpment grade beginning in the Kwanza River increases and extends
southward. The craggy surface takes on steep forms, with levels ranging from 600
IV-35
meters to 750 meters from the base, with contour curves 300 meters to 400 meters
up to the crest that marks the beginning of the high plain; isolines range between
900 meters to 1100 m. With an approximate N-S orientation, the escarpment veers
toward the NE (10°30’), often showing an abrupt profile. At other times, the level
difference is marked by a succession of hills and heights bordering on deep valleys.
There are spots where the terrain is more or less level or gently rolling, where major
rivers flow, such as the Muconga and the Mucoso, with significant river banks. But
rough, craggy terrain predominates owing to the concentration of rock outcrops at
the soil level, where inselbergs (Photo 4.1) are found, which in some cases change
into mountainous massifs.
The hydrographic network has little density; it becomes denser in areas where river
flow volumes are temporary, such as the Mucoso, Moisés, Luime, and Muconga; or
dry up, with the exception of the Kwanza and the Lua Rivers. The rivers flow
almost at the plain level, without forming significant valleys, except for the Kwanza,
which has a deep channel, drying up the surface as it runs speedily through rocky,
deep beds, where rapids and falls are frequent. These characteristics evidence its
potential for hydroelectric power generation.
Photo 4.1: Residual hills (inselbergs) in the Mucoso River basin, São Pedro da
Quilemba district.
IV-36
On the sub-plateau surface altitudes range between 700 meters and 800 meters and
on the typically rolling terrain bristly outcrops rise, as do small hills in some areas.
The hydrographic network is moderately dense, encompassing the basins of the
Lucala and the Middle Kwanza Rivers. The flow volume of the main rivers is
reduced in the dry period, becoming intermittent downstream, as is the case of the
Mucoso River. The Malanje Plateau region (Photo 4.2) is a vast plateau expanse of
gently or moderately rolling terrain, where altitudes average between 1,050 meters
and 1,250 meters. This surface forms an extensive peneplain starting from the
Kwanza River and continuing northward toward the Camabatela Plateau. This
plateau is the oldest regional plain, above which no residual relief forms are to be
found to indicate the existence of primitive erosion surfaces.
The aspect of the relief evidences marked stabilization, with extensive undulating
surfaces; in some places it shows level terrain cut through by frequent water courses
that run through very wide, broad-bottom valleys, with little level differentiation.
Photo 4.2: View of the Malange Plateau near the right bank of the Kwanza River.
Pungo Andongo district.
IV-37
To the east and northeast, the Malanje Plateau is abruptly interrupted at the top by a
single escarpment that marks the limit of the Cassange Lowland. The springs of the
Gango River are located in the ancient plains in the hinterland, but a large part of its
sub-basin forms part of a peneplain of moderately rolling terrain devised from the
crest of the great Amboim-Seles escarpment, with its northeastern prolongation
(Libolo), dipping significantly thence until it meets, inland, another steep terrace
that marks the abrupt transition to the higher altitude plateau plains. On the steep
terrace that separates the local base levels from the higher level, the river courses
flow in a succession of rapids and falls, evidencing the movement of the terrain
through deep cuts in the old surface. Thus are formed significant interfluves that,
through progressive erosion, have resulted in inselbergs on the escarpment border.
The portion east of the Malanje Plateau belongs to another major geomorphologic
unit separated from the higher plateau surface by an escarpment where level
differences range from 100 meters to 150 meters.
As they cross this escarpment,
the rivers precipitate down overhangs, forming falls such as those on the Lucala
River and those of the Luando River, its tributary; or they traverse it through
successive rapids and waterfalls, such as those on the Lutete River. This lower
surface, already rather dry, with altitudes that range between 700 meters and 950
meters, is characterized by an irregular, rough terrain, with residual forms resulting
from the escarpments’ retreat and the activity of the rivers, which define deep
valleys, thus separating significant interfluves in certain places. The relief’s
movement is witnessed by the various forms of rejuvenation, notably various
inselbergs and some sierras with rocky tops parallel to the rivers’ course. In these
sierras, the tops reach altitudes practically identical to those of the higher level
planations, which become more evident eastward, as can be noticed between the
Lucala and the Kwanza Rivers.
The Lucala River, a major Kwanza River tributary, plays a significant role in
modeling the landscape. Upstream from the Duque de Bragança Falls, whose rocky
entrance functions as a dyke, all the hydrographic network is of perennial flow, with
rivers slowly circulating in deep valleys with a marshy base, forming meanders
whose beds are not always well defined. In the rainy season, the margin lowlands
become easily flooded and remain thus for long periods; in a humid climate, this
IV-38
makes for an appropriate environment for the formation of organic or peat
hydromorphic soils. After the falls, the Lucala River begins to run speedily on a
deeper bed in a more pronounced valley, without giving room to low surfaces – or,
when these occur, they are narrow margin strips.
The area under study is located in the middle portion of the Kwanza River Basin and
is characterized by gently rolling hills and extensive pedimentary ramps,
occasionally interrupted by residual elevations formed by inselbergs and steep
sierras that result from the dissection of ancient surfaces based on sedimentary rocks
of the Middle Kwanza River Basin and of the crystalline basement.
The AID geomorphologic units are located within Angola’s central plateau. They
are divided into two geomorphologic regions: one located to the north of the
Kwanza River, encompassing the Malange plateau and sub-plateau zone; and one to
the south, encompassing the Bié plateau, with sierra formations of middle and high
declivity.
On the basis of lithology, structure, chronology, and drainage criteria applied to the
relief’s regional compartmentation and morphological sculpturing, the following
geomorphologic units are defined in the area under study: the Malange Plateau, the
N’gango-Buiza Interfluves, and Lower Platforms.
The Malange Plateau
This unit, located on the right bank of the Kwanza River, is characterized by a little
dissected morphostructural arrangement; relief is generally level, gently to
moderately rolling, and encompasses a vast surface with 800 meters-900 meters
elevations. In the portion next to the Kwanza River, contact with sub-horizontal flat
hills displays an erosive surface formed by pedimentary ramps at the foothills.
Northward, in the interfluves with the Mucoso River, the gently rolling pediplain is
occasionally broken up by residual elevations (inselbergs). The level relief is
responsible for the little density of the hydrographic network, characterized by
temporary rivers that feed the reduced flow of the Mucoso River in the rainy season.
As their relief is typically rolling, these areas have low declivity, between 3% and
5%, and are broken up by hills (inselbergs), that have a declivity above 15 %. Given
IV-39
these terrain characteristics, the surface drainage processes form ravines and fluvial
trenches. This small effect of surface erosion is counteracted by the intermittent
channels and by their connection to the drainage system flowing toward the Mucoso
River. The contribution of this morphostructural arrangement has little significance
as regards the transportation of detritus from the river channels toward future
reservoirs.
N’gango-Buiza interfluves plateau
This unit is characterized by a morphosculptural plateau arrangement, including the
frequent occurrence of residual reliefs in the N’gango-Buiza interfluves. In the AID,
this unit starts from the Kwanza River and extends to the sources of the Luinga and
Buiza. The relief in this area is typically gently rolling, with altitudes ranging from
900 meters to 1,000 meters; the terrain is broken up at the point of contact with
mountain formations, formed by a pediplain resulting from erosion of the steep
hillsides. The hydrographic network that forms the Luinga River valley is little
dense, with river channels with intermittent flow and little level difference, owing to
the relief characteristics. Starting from the Kwanza River, the sierra formations
display a succession of crests and escarpments in the NW/SE direction, reaching
heights above 1,600 meters (Serra M’bango) and 1,300 meters (Serra Quissangi),
marking the Luinga and Buiza Rivers basins watersheds, in the case of Serra
M’bango, and of the Luinga and N’gango Rivers basins, in the case of Serra
Quissangi. The lithostructural arrangement of the Luinga River valley plateau
consists of quartiziferous crystallophic rocks, and the formation of the higher
arkosean Basement Complex, but with the occurrence of intrusive Lower
Proterozoic rocks above 1,000 meters. The sierra residual formations consist of
rocks of the grainy schist group from the Lower Proterozoic, and, less often, rocks
of the calco-schist group. The Luinga River valley’s plateau surface has little
declivity – between 3% and 5%. The sierra formations have steep escarpment
surfaces, with level differences between 400 meters and 500 meters and declivities
above 30%.
Lower terraces
This unit is represented by lower topography, formed by pedimentary terraces
whose altitude ranges between 500 meters and 700 meters. The morphosculptural
IV-40
arrangement has relief features inclined toward the Kwanza River channel, forming
alluvial fans, a result of the setting of the hydrographic network, with scattered
residual forms caused by the escarpment’s retreat. In the AID this unit starts at the
escarpments upstream in the Caculo Cabaça area, with a 30%-declivity and a
northwest orientation, extending up to the area’s boundaries. The lithostructural
condition consists of higher arkosean rock substrate, made up of gneisses, quartzites,
charnockites, and amphibolitic schists.
This unit’s relief has a rather restrict
influence on the dynamics of the river basin. The minute result of surface and river
channel erosion is carried away through the channels and incorporated into the
drainage network that flows into the Kwanza River.
4.1.7. PEDOLOGY
The country has vast expanses of fertile soils and abundant natural resources.
However, over 50% of the soils suffer under constant or periodic erosion processes
caused by rains. The more fertile soils are found near the rivers, where there is a
concentration of alluvion, generally rich in minerals and organic materials, while soil
fertility in the drier regions of desert climate is small.
In the Angolan territory there is a predominance of soils of the Arenosol and Ferrasol
types, according to the classification system adopted by the Food and Agriculture
Organization of the United Nations-FAO. According to the classification system
used by the U.S. Department of Agriculture-USDA, the Angolan soils are entisols,
ultisols, and oxisols. The Huambo and Bié provinces have various types and
combinations of these soils, depending on the detailed horizon characteristics, such
as ferralicarenosols, gleyicarenosols, and acric ferrasols, which are predominantly of
the arenosol and ferralsol types, but with other characteristics, such as humidity
regime, mineralogy, and the occurrence of certain horizons specific to the location.
In the Middle Kwanza River Basin’s hydrography one notices a distribution of the
soil types associated to the climate and the parent rock (Figure 4.10).
In the lands located in the dry climate one finds alluvial-fluvial soils, which are very
appropriate for hydro-agricultural use. In higher lands, there are sparse areas with
IV-41
favorable topography and more or less deep soils, and with favorable physical
characteristics, making farming viable. These soils include brown lime soil
(associated with Cretaceous formations); tropical aridic soils, particularly the modal
reddish brown meso-aridic and modal grayish brown ultiaridic soils; loam (claysmodal black and reddish brown litho-clays); and tropical fersialitic soils, particularly
brownish chrome clino-clayish eutrofersialic soils.
Other than in the plains and in some level spots in the highlands, hydro-agriculture is
limited owing to unfavorable relief conditions, with a predominance of lithosoils
often associated with rock outcrops. Even in surfaces of gently rolling relief gravelly
elements occur, and in addition, soils have little depth in some cases.
IV-42
Figure 4.10: Pedological Map of the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
In other areas coarse/semi-coarse psamitic soils occur, often consisting of cover
quartzous materials or quartzous materials originating in Precambrian quartiziferous
IV-43
rocks, containing changeable minerals (feldspathic and micaceous materials) and a
spare portion of fine soil related to fersialitic clay (psamo-fersialitic soils). In this
zone, alluvion-filled valley bottoms occur, corresponding to colluvional and coluvioalluvional soils.
In transition zones, climatic conditions favor the occurrence of tropical fersialitic
soils, usually fine-grained and well-structured. Chrome clino-argillic tipofersialic
soils, with little mineral reserve but of good depth predominate.
In humid climate zones, particularly ferralitic soils occur on the planation surface,
related to crystalline rock formations and to ancient Precambrian sedimentary rocks.
These soils have good physical characteristics, low or very low fertility, occurring
usually in planation surfaces.
Paraferralitic soils occur in association with ferralitic soils, in rough but highly fertile
terrain owing to the presence of minerals. Coarse-grained soils are also found, owing
to the sandy material deposits related to the lower Kalahari and the Pleistocene. They
are psamitic soils from the humid regions (brownish or grayish) and the psamoferralic soils (orangey or reddish), both consisting essentially of quartzous sand and a
small argillic amount. The fluvial lowlands have humic as well as organic
hydromorphic soils. The latter occur in more extensive areas where water is retained
permanently or for long periods. They occur also in humid climate zones with soils
with lateritic materials near the surface (thin soils).
The soils of the AID contributing basins originate mostly from rocks of the
undifferentiated silty schist group and the Basement Complex. On the basis of the
predominant soils in the AID, bibliographic material, and the pedological map
(Figure 4.11), the pedological units have been classified as follows:
Tropical fersiliatic soils
These soils occur in the Laúca area and in the Middle Luinga River sub-basins, and
extend to the Kwanza River channel, occurring also on its left bank in the entire
northern part of the AID. In general, these soils are medium- and fine-grained,
argillic, or sandy-argillic, brownish on the top layer and in vivid colors in the texture
IV-44
B horizon. In this area there may also occur mineralogical soils dependent on the
parent rock, with high concentration of feldspar and quartzous elements.
Ferralitic soils
Associated with highly stabilized level surfaces, these soils are considered to be of
high maturity. They are very common in the AID, within the western boundaries of
the Luinga River basin and extend to Serra Quissangi. In respect of morphological
aspects, ferralitic soils are friable and fragile, usually unstructured. They are fine- or
medium-gained chromic mineral soils consisting of kaolinic minerals, ferrous oxides,
and aluminum.
Paraferralitic soils
These soils occur in rolling and steep terrain and their depth is less than that of the
ferralitic soils. They have a dark horizon, which depends on the type of vegetal cover
and topographic location. They are usually bright red, reddish, or orangey, and may
be brown, depending on the parent rock. Their occurrence is frequent south of the
Caculo-Cabaça area and extends southward along the Buiza River valley.
Litholitic soils or lithosoils
This unit is frequent in rougher terrains, and is represented in the various residual
forms that occur in the AID, such as Serra do M’bango, and is more or less
frequently associated with rock outcrops.
Psamo-ferralic soils
Associated with surface sandy formation, these soils have a sandy texture, with a
small portion of ferralitic origin, consisting of ferrous oxides and aluminum. They
occur in a small part of the AID, on the left bank of the Kwanza River.
4.1.8 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO EROSION
On the basis of bibliographical sources and of geomorphologic and soil types studies,
the AID’s susceptibility to erosion is very low (Figure 4.11). Some contributing the
factors to this condition include the following:
IV-45
• Good physical properties of the soil;
• Gentle, slightly rolling relief;
• Little dissected and high maturity relief;
• Predominance of declivities under 10%, except on the slopes of some residual
mounts, where declivities exceed 25%;
• The region is little anthropized; and
• Predominance of native vegetation cover.
Field surveys have identified few scars of the erosive action of rain, and extremely
low occurrence of linear erosion (trenches and gullies), which occur only in
roadbeds. Given its climatic, geologic, geomorphologic, and vegetation cover
characteristics and anthropic activities, the AID is only moderately susceptible to
laminar erosion. As there is little anthropic activity, no silting up of water courses in
the region has been identified.
4.1.9 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CHARACTERIZATION
The AAR is located in the middle course of the Kwanza River, in a transition zone
between the coastal peneplain of Luanda and the interior plateaus.
In the initial stretch of the Kwanza River conglomeratic sandstone of the silty schist
series occurs, while in the lower portion it occurs in the basement complex. The
upstream stretch is characterized by a narrowing of the channel in the initial portion,
which has gentle declivity; from Pungo Andongo on the river displays a more
marked declivity and a concentration of successive rapids and falls, with little
occurrence of widening banks.
On the right bank, the Malanje Plateau predominates, a vast expanse of gently or
moderately rolling relief, which differs from the western portion by a escarpment
with level differences ranging between 100 meters and 150 meters, crossed by rivers
in successive rapids and falls. The terrain is characterized by irregular, rough relief
marked by residual forms owing to the retreat of the escarpments, which define deep
valleys and significant interfluves.
IV-46
Figure 4.11: Pedology – Soils Classification – Indirect Influence Area
The southern portion of the AAR, to the Middle Kwanza River’s left, consists of two
major units with sharply contrasting relief forms of great significance in the
landscape. To the west, a rugged surface with steep, craggy forms, with a level
difference ranging between 600 meters and 750 meters, begins with a peneplain at
heights ranging between 300 meters and 400 meters, which extends up to the crest
that marks the beginning of the higher planation (unit’s predominant relief) that
reaches about 1,000 meters on the edge of the escarpments and gradually rises
toward the south to 1,500 meters or more on the basin’s boundary.
The AII’s relief encompasses a small portion of the Malanje Plateau on the North,
and the region formed by the Luinga and Buiza rivers’ sub-basins, which account for
80% of the total area. In general terms, drainage is intermittent, except for the main
water courses, which at times follow the fracture lines, assuming a rectilinear line
IV-47
broken up into acute angles, as a result of intense tectonic activity, with possible
influence on the relief’s local movement.
IV-48
Between the two basins there are forms of residual relief resulting from pediplanation processes,
especially in connection with Serra do M’Bango, the main divide, with heights of up to 1,600
meters, a level difference between 400 meters and 500 meters, and declivities above 30%.
4.1.10. WATER RESOURCES
The middle portion of the Middle Kwanza River Basin encompasses an area of approximately
54,537 square kilometers; it has an elongated shape, with a latitudinal orientation, and is
approximately 435 kilometers in length and 350 kilometers in width.
The drainage network in this zone is asymmetrical, with predominance of the right bank. The
major tributaries are the Lucala, Mucoso, Lombe, Kuiji, and Kuque rivers on the right bank, and
the N’Gango, Mui, Luinga, and Buiza rivers on the left bank. Of these rivers, the Lucala and the
N’Gango stand out owing to the size of their hydrographic basins.
•
Surface water availability
The temporal distribution of the fluvial regime in the Middle Kwanza River Basin is highly
seasonable, and many of its tributaries are intermittent. Between June and December the flow
volume is below average, with a dry period between June and November, and lesser flow in
September. The greatest flow volumes occur between March and May, peaking in April.
Approximately 15% of the annual precipitation in the area of the Middle Kwanza River Basin
results in surface runoff. In the months of smaller flow volumes (June-October), runoff is 18% of
the annual total. This characteristic is partly associated with the temporary retention of the runoff
in lakes and in the sandy formations on the plateau of the Kwanza River’s upper basin.
Between 1951 and 1974, the Cambambe AH rain gauge post recorded extreme minimum and
maximum readings: 122 m3 and 3,740 m3. The long-term outflow mean recorded in this post
between 1952 and 1982 was 684 m3/s.
IV-49
•
Flows
Hydrological data from previous studies do not indicate temporal homogeneity. These data come
from different sources and show considerable gaps. Nevertheless, an analysis of the available
data points to the hydrological regime’s great regularity, ensured by the fact that the Upper
Kwanza River functions as a great reservoir that regularizes the river flows, storing them in flood
times and maintaining the flows in dry periods.
The average flow series in the Laúca AH area have been regionalized on the basis of the
available Capanda AH region data (1952-1974), by using the relation between drainage areas
and specific water courses. The seasonal pattern of the projected medium courses indicates that
the largest flow volumes occur between November and May, totaling 73% of the annual flow
volume. The largest flow identified in the projections was 2,808 m3/s in April 1962, while the
smallest was 129 m3/s in October 1958.
Annual maximum flows
Annual maximum flow data were obtained in a similar manner as above, by using the
extrapolation of the information available at the Cangandala and Cambambe stations, in addition
to the Capanda monitoring records. On the basis of the statistical analysis performed, the
decision was made to adopt the results generated through GEV/PWM distribution (Generalized
Extreme Values obtained by Probabilistic Weighted Values), which proved conservative.
However, as the spillways project flow, the decision was made to adopt the Capanda AH
spillway’s discharge capacity in operation upstream of the future Laúca AH, transferred through
the relation between drainage areas to the site of the hydroelectric plants under analysis. Table
4.7 shows the results obtained.
Table 4.7: Flood flows in the Laúca hydroelectric plants
Laúca AH (m3/s)
TR (years)
IV-50
2
5
10
50
100
200
500
1,000
10,000
Vertedouro
1,841
2,633
3,161
4,337
4,839
5,343
6,012
6,522
8,239
10,020
Source: Intertechne Consultores S.A.
Annual Flood Hydrographs
To determine the typical annual flood hydrograph, use was made of the daily data from the
Cambambe AH post, available in the SONEFE yearbooks. It was noted that over the years taken
into consideration, there was the occurrence of floods that lasted up to eight months, which
maintained, during nearly the entire period, flows of considerable magnitude and, consequently,
of great volume. It was also noted that, despite the different magnitude of the floods analyzed,
they show great regularity and similarity as regards form, volume variation, and duration. Also
noted was the fairly regular occurrence of flood events with two peaks.
On the basis of these observations, the decision was made to adopt as typical flood hydrograph
the hydrograph format resulting from the maximum flow recorded each day, i.e.,
comprehensively, as shown in Figure 4.12.
An analysis of volume variation and duration of floods was also performed on the basis of the
maximum flow recorded. Based on adjusted regressions, the volumes and duration of floods in
Laúca were determined, as shown in Table 4.8.
IV-51
Figure 4.12: Format of the typical hydrograph adopted.
Legend:
Flow (m3/s)
Typical flood hydrograph
Duration (days)
IV-52
Table 4.8: Volumes and duration of flood hydrographs in Laúca AH localities.
TR (years)
2
5
10
50
100
200
500
1,000
10,000
Vertedouro
Laúca
Max flow (m /s)
Volume (m3/s)
Duration (days)
1,841
11,798
116
2,633
19,697
159
3,161
24,973
181
4,337
36,713
220
4,839
41,730
233
5,343
46,761
245
6,012
53,448
259
6,522
58,539
269
8,239
75,677
297
10,020
93,464
321
3
Minimum flows
Minimum flows for the recurrence periods of five, ten, and fifty years and the periods of drought
duration of seven, thirty, and ninety days were calculated according to the Weibull distribution,
one of the most used worldwide in the study of droughts. The moments method (Kite, 1977) was
employed to estimate parameters.
The distribution chosen was applied to the Cambambe station, and the dry period flows for the
durations and recurrences indicated above were locally calculated. These values were then
transferred to the Laúca AH station through drainage area relations. Owing the proximity of
results for the two plants, the same values were adopted for both. Results are shown in Table 9
and in Figure 4.13.
Table 4.9: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Minimum flows at the Laúca AH (m3/s)
Duration of drought
(days)
7
30
90
Minimum flows (m3/s)
5 years
10 years
137.6
120.6
146.4
128.5
166.6
146.6
IV-53
50 years
99.3
105.5
119.9
flows (m3/s)
5 Years
10 Years
50 Years
Number of drought days
Figure 4.13: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Minimum flows for recurrences of 5, 10, and 50
years, with duration of 30 and 90 days. Source: Intertechne Consultores S.A.
Compromise flows downstream
According to the Water Research Commission (apud Benetti et al., 2003), complex
computational programs to calculate minimum ecologic runoffs, which employ a wide range of
entry data (such as the IFIM or the PHABSIM), are not viable for such countries as those of
Southern Africa, for lack of the requisite information, time, specialized personnel, and financial
resources. This applies also to Angola. Moreover, in some cases results obtained through
complex methods are not better than those obtained through simpler methods (Benetti et al.,
2003).
In view of the preceding, it seems that the use of the simpler method of ecologic flow
maintenance is perfectly justifiable in the case of the Middle Kwanza River Basin. For the Laúca
AH, the criterion chosen for maintenance of minimum flows downstream is the same adopted in
the state of Paraná, Brazil, which is 50% of the Q7,10 flow, i.e., the minimum flow with seven
days of duration and ten years of recurrence.
The Q7,10 flow criterion has been employed in water quality studies to determine the efficiency of
pollutants removal in residual water treatment plants that do not violates the water quality
standards in receiving bodies (Thomann and Mueller, 1987, apud Benetti et al., 2003).
IV-54
4.1.11. SEDIMENTS
The hydro-sedimentological information for the Kwanza River is very scarce and indicates only
quantitative data regarding solids transport. The only data pertaining to the area under study are
found in the Capanda AH Hydro-meteorological Studies and Hydrologic Yearbook (1988-1989).
Based on available records, the Capanda AH Hydro-meteorological Studies estimate the volume
of sediments at 430,000 m3/year, with a specific weight of 1.2 t/m3, which corresponds to an
annual burden of 516,000 t/year. However, the study mentioned recommends the adoption of the
figure of 720,000 t/year.
The 1988-1989 Yearbook on hydrological services done for the Capanda AH show three solid
flow measures taken in that period 1986 and 1989, indicating an average burden of 550,000
t/year. But, given the serious lack of information on the subject, the calculation of sediments
retained in the reservoirs has adopted the aforementioned higher figure of 720,000 t/year.
The efficiency of sediment retention in a reservoir may be determined by the curves in the chart
proposed by Brune (1953), which relates efficiency to the ratio between the reservoir volume and
the affluent flow. Table 4.10 shows a summary of the data used in this calculation.
Table 4.10. Data used to calculate sediment retention in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
Entry data
Reservoir volume – maximum level (hm3)
Mean flow in the period (m3/s)
Retention efficiency – Brune curve (%)
Laúca dam
5651.2
684.5
94.6
The analysis results indicate that the future Laúca dam reservoir may retain water for a long
time, thereby permitting the nearly total depositing of suspended solids. For example, with an
annual burden of 720,000 t/year, the Laúca AH reservoir will discharge about 38,880 t/year, of
which 15,202 t/year will be discharged by the Caculo Cabaça AH, which means a 98% reduction
by the two reservoirs together. Based on this information, one can conclude that retention
efficiency will have a bearing on the river’s erosive capacity downstream the reservoirs.
It is important to remember that the calculations performed are approximate and that the data
available refer to a scenario prior to the existence of the Capanda AH reservoir.
IV-55
More refined results may be obtained by considering a non-horizontal depositing of sediments,
as well as variations in the material’s specific weight and the reservoirs’ retention efficiency over
time. Moreover, it is crucially important to confirm the sediments burden in the sites of interest.
4.1.12. WATER QUALITY
The hydrochemical and biological characterization of reservoirs is necessary for a prognosis of
the future immunological conditions in the lacustrine environment that will be created. This
characterization is all the more important as the more complex is the drainage basins’ runoff
regime and the more diversified is the soil occupation pattern and the use of water resources.
The stretch of the Kwanza River to be flooded for the reservoirs in the proposed projects (i.e.,
Caculo Cabaça, Laúca, and the raising up of Cambambe) has a generally wide channel, but with
steep banks that make the access to the water course difficult or impossible.
According to satellite images, there is a stretch of apparently slower flow, with some islands that
seem to be of little ecological significance for the fluvial environment during the rainy season;
but it is highly likely that planktonic and benthonic communities may flourish there during the
dry period (Photo 4.3).
There are no relevant tributaries between the Capanda AH and the Laúca AH axis, so that the
hydrochemical conditions determined by the Capanda discharges and the sequence of numerous
rapids along the stretch predominate.
Photo 4.3: Site of the future Laúca AH dam (April 2008).
IV-56
These rapids promote the oxidation of chemically reduced substances transported downstream
the dam by the turbines catchment and bottom discharge. The normally observed impact from
the discharge of water without oxygen may be minimized by the rapids in Laúca’s proximity.
Once the rainy season is over, the spillway operation will cease, as will bottom discharge. At this
time it is important to know the Capanda AH reservoir’s thermal pattern, as the quality of the
water that will pass through the turbines will result from the water gauge mixing processes,
common in both autumn and winter. A lower oxygenation rate is to be expected in the discharge
channel, but there is the expectation of prompt recovery of dissolved oxygen, though this
possibility can be confirmed only by monitoring.
During the months of April-July 2008, the Capanda laboratory performed chemical analyses of
the Kwanza River water. Three sectors were well defined: downstream the Capanda AH; the
middle stretch of the Kwanza River course (where the Laúca axis will be built and near the Muta
village); and at the Filomeno Câmara bridge downstream. The analyses were limited to the
available reactants. Table 4.11 shows the results obtained.
The data from the limnological and water quality sample parameters indicate that the Kwanza
River waters do not transport a large quantity of nutrients, thus reflecting the little soil use in the
region. The waters are clear and tend to neutral pH, with moderate plugging, indicated by
alkalinity. This would reduce the risk of machine corrosion. Hardness, though, is low, as is the
concentration of calcium an manganese ions.
Phosphate analyses in the stretches directly downstream the Capanda AH, in Toca do Coiso
(Photo 4.4), suggest the existence of a phosphate stock in the reservoir’s bottom. This phosphate
could be potentially available to phytoplankton. In April 0.05 mg/L of sulfate was detected . The
sulfate is an indicator of aerobic environments, in which phosphate is found dissolved.
Transferred downstream through the turbines or bottom discharge, phosphate would have
eutrophication potential, though neutralized by the Kwanza River’s vigorous rapids, which do
not favor the growth of algae, even when nutritional conditions are appropriate.
The total nitrogen and its fractions indicate low concentration of this nutrient in the river,
reflecting a probable stabilization of the Capanda AH reservoir’s trophic condition and the
absence of agricultural activities or urban areas near the river. As to the sanitary aspect and
IV-57
organic pollution, the water environment studied has shown lack and low rates of nitrogenous
nutrients in the river portions studied.
This is due to the inexistence of intense settlement in the influence area.
Photo 4.4: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Toca do Coiso.
IV-58
Table 4.11: Water quality analyses results. (2008)
Water Quality
Variables
Turbidity
pH
Total hardness
Calcium
Total alkalinity
Magnesium
Aluminum
Manganese
Iron
Phosphate
Total nitrogen
Nitrite
Nitrate
Ammonia
Sulfates
Sulfites
unit
NTU
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
04/22/2008
Toca do Coiso
4
7.12
4.4
1.06
31.12
3.34
0.02
0.41
0.23
0.11
0.8
x
x
0.019
0.05
1.2
Downstream Capanda
05/20/2008
07/10/2008
Toca do Coiso
Toca do Coiso
5
4
7.3
6.8
4.1
4.89
1.08
1.64
24.4
31.12
3.03
3.25
0.07
0.03
0.21
0.25
0.21
0.16
x
x
0.3
x
0,009
x
0,1
x
x
x
0.018
0.013
x
0.8
Middle Stretch
04/22/2008 06/12/2008
Laúca
Muta
x
4
7.16
7.24
4.46
4.53
1.3
1.72
32.95
x
3.16
2.81
0.17
0.06
0.31
x
0.22
0.26
x
x
0.1
0
x
x
x
0
x
x
0.01
0.014
1.1
1.1
Source Intertechne Consultores s.A.
IV-59
Downstream Caculo-Cabaça
05/21/2008
07/10/2008
Filomeno Camara
Filomeno Camara
5
4
7.7
7.33
4.4
4.44
1.24
1.08
24.4
x
3.1
3.35
0.06
0.11
0.2
x
0.23
0.16
x
x
0.2
x
0.005
x
0.2
x
x
x
0.015
0.009
x
0.6
A social survey (2013) showed that the Kwanza River water near the Laúca AH is
little used by the local population. The water is commonly used for fishing and
washing clothes. These uses do not change the water’s quality. The river does not
receive organic discharges near the Laúca AH.
Odebrecht has a Kwanza River Water Monitoring Plan, whose main objectives are
the publicizing of the analyses and the comparison of the results obtained according
to the limits established by Presidential Decree no. 206/11 (Water Quality
Regulation).
As a first evidence of this plan, a punctual sampling was done in three points of the
Kwanza River to update the previously sampled points under the 2007-2009
limnologic surveys of the area.
Once again notice should be taken of the difficult access to the river and the
occurrence of rapids, which hinder water sampling. Consideration was also given to
the future access to the sampling sites, in view of the changes that will occur with the
work on the dam site. Samplings were done on April 11 and 12, 2013 (See photo
4.5).
Measurements for the water’s physiochemical characterization were taken on the
surface; in situ readings were done with a Horiba (U-52G) multiparameter probe,
which defined the following parameters: pH, conductivity, dissolved oxygen, water
temperature, total dissolved solids, and oxidation reduction potential. Results are
shown in Table 4.12.
IV-60
Photo 4.5: Water sampling points. A) Praia Muta; B) km 41 of EN 322; and C)
Emboque Laúca.
Table 4.12: Sampling results (April/2013)
Parameters
Units
Praia Muta
T
pH
ºC
-
26.34
7.76
IV-61
Km 41 (EN
322)
26.52
7.88
Emboque
Laúca
25.30
7.72
ORP
COND
DO
TDS
TURB
SAL
mV
mS/cm
mg/l
g/l
NTU
ppt
225.00
0.04
10.63
0.02
0.00
0.00
206.00
0.03
11.00
0.02
0.00
0.00
171.00
0.03
10.68
0.02
0.00
0.00
The physiochemical characterization of the water done in April 2013 (Table 4.12)
indicates that the Kwanza River in the study area has clear, slightly alkaline waters
with low conductivity and a low rate of dissolved solids, and well oxygenated,
mainly because of the occurrence of several rapids that permit mixing and
oxygenation.
The water’s physical and chemical characteristics in the study area are probably
determined by the basin’s geochemical properties, the occurrence of numerous rapids
along the stretch, the climatic conditions, and the Capanda dam’ discharge regime.
The results obtained were also compared and interpreted in light of the national
legislation in force (Presidential Decree no. 261/11 of October 6) and the
international standard values, especially as regards the European Union’s (Directive
2008/105/EC - Environmental Quality Standards-EQS) for water quality in natural
environments.
These results show that in general the Kwanza River, in the study area, has good
quality water, which clearly shows little influence of upstream diffuse and punctual
pollution.
Comparison of the results obtained with previous studies show some analogy,
thereby corroborating the preceding statements. However, the available data do not
permit an accurate evaluation, as continuous sampling has not been done to establish
with rigor the current quality of the water in the area under study. Thus, the results of
physiochemical analyses shown in Table 4.12 should be taken with due caution, as
they have a punctual character and only an indicative value.
IV-62
4.2. THE BIOTIC ENVIRONMENT
For the characterization of the biotic environment in the undertaking’s influence
areas various field surveys were done, with the employment of specialized
techniques. Initially, in 2007 and 2009, extensive field surveys were carried out,
encompassing all location alternatives (shown in Chapter 2), under a study titled
Caculo-Cabaça. The Laúca influence areas were visited again to confirm and validate
the 2012 information for the Environmental Impact Study (EIA) regarding the
deviation of the river course. In 2013 new field visits were undertaken to update the
data for this study (dam construction).
The starting point for the drafting of a work plan was the acquisition of knowledge of
the reference situation of the species and environmental conditions in the
undertaking’s influence areas. To this end, a bibliographical research was done,
based on scientific publications, technical documents, and reports and consultations
available on the Internet.
Compilation of this information made possible a preliminary reconnoitering of the
diversity of species likely to occur in the region, and the establishment of a database
about their morphological, biological, and reproductive characteristics, their feeding
habits, distribution patterns, and the main impact of anthropic origin to which they
are subjected. Assembling the greatest number of scientific publications on the area
was crucial, as there are no reference collections in the Angolan Museum of Natural
History or in the Luanda Herbarium (Santos, 2002).
On the basis of the data thus compiled, it was possible to determine the size of the
teams, the number of specialists, and the study’s target groups, as well as the
methodology and the most appropriate field sampling techniques. It was also
possible to prepare field guides to facilitate the identification of the biological
material collected and of the feeding habits and preferred habitats of local species, as
well as their conservation status, reproductive characteristics, and other pertinent
information.
IV-63
Field visits were undertaken to update data in phase two of the study (dam
construction), emphasizing the ADA, i.e., the reservoir filling area. Some of the
information gathered in the area is herein presented.
4.2.1. VEGETATION COVER
The undertaking under study is located in the phytogeographical savanna domain. In
general, savannas consist of small, crooked trees, sparse shrubs, and a dense grass
layer vegetating on soils with low rates of nutrients (Photos 4.6 and 4.7)
Photo 4.6: Savanna in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
IV-64
Photo 4.7: Tract of savanna with predominance of the herbaceous layer.
Characteristics of the tree/shrub savanna are thick bark, large leaves and thick,
leathery leaves. The root system may reach a depth of 15 meters, absorbing water
from permanently moist layers of the soil even in the dry season.
The herbaceous and undergrowth vegetation consists of predominantly perennial
species that have underground resistance organs, such as bulbs, xylopodia, and
soboles, which allow the plants to survive drought and fire. The root system is
usually superficial, attaining up to 40 centimeters. Aerial branches are annual; they
dry and die during the dry season; their leaves are small and their stem and branches
are less twisted.
Between these physiognomic extremes there is a wide range of intermediary forms.
This mosaic is determined by patches of soils more or less poor in nutrients, the
irregularity of the climatic regimes, the fire characteristics in each location
(frequency, time, intensity), and human action.
IV-65
4.2.2. MAIN VEGETATION CHARACTERISTICS
There follows a description of the main characteristics of the vegetation encountered
in the Middle Kwanza River region and in the areas influenced by the dam
construction. Definitions seek to provide a basic characterization of the types as well
as of some subtypes (Figure 4.14).
IV-66
Figure 4.14: Map of the vegetation cover in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
IV-67
Forests
•
Woods/Riparian woods (dense riparian alluvion forests/foggy humid, semi
deciduous forests); riparian forest associated with wide water courses (rivers),
particularly with the Kwanza River. The canopy height reaches 15 meters to 20
meters from the soil, without visible emergent trees, and there are places where
oil palms dominate (Photo 4.8).
•
Woods/Gallery forests (dense, humid, hygrophytic, riparian forest in deep
valleys/discontinuous woods and forests in dense masses, with evergreens and
annual species/wetland forests on river banks): ombrophilous evergreen forest
associated with streams and small water courses in valleys or narrow ravines.
Usually of modest width (Photo 4.9).
•
Panda woods/Open forests Open forests/more or less dense woods of
Brachystegia spiciformis, Julbernadia paniculata, and submontane miombo,
savannas, and ongote/more or less dense, tall, and mixed miombo/sparse miombo
and savanna on medium altitude plateau declivities/Panda woods; Miombo): thin
forest or dense groves, with predominance of leguminous plants of the
Brachystegia, Julbernardia, and Pterocarpus genders (Photos 4.10 and 4.11).
This vegetation is essentially deciduous.
IV-68
Photo 4.8: Riparian forest along the Kwanza River in the riparian stretch above
Laúca-Alto. Predominance of oil palms [Elaeis guineensis Jacq] can be noted.
Photo 4.9: Gallery forest (Buiza River). Tree canopy is seen over the river.
IV-69
Photo 4.10: Tract of Panda Woods
IV-70
Photo 4.11: Tract of Panda Woods after fire in the dry season, when the grassy
layer was charred. The soil, with rock outcrops, becomes practically exposed.
IV-71
Savannas
•
Open savanna (including a mosaic of thickets and savannas on ferralitic soils or
ferralsols/thin Baikiaea cocholospermum woods): area with low trees or bushes
scattered over a dense grassy layer (Photos 4.12 and 4.13).
•
Mono-dominated open savanna (more or less secondary savanna or savanna
on deficient soil): tract with low trees or shrubs scattered over a dense grassy
layer, dominated by one or a few woody species (Photo 4.14).
•
“Thin” savanna (low, sandy savanna/savanna on sandy lowlands, poorly
drained, with or without trees): tract with few trees or thick shrubs scattered over
a dense grassy layer (Photo 4.15).
•
Park savanna: tract with tall trees forming small stands concentrated on
specific portions of the terrain, separated from similar copses by a considerable
expanse of exclusively herbaceous, grassy vegetation (Photo 4.16).
•
Park savannas with murundus: tract with arboreous-shrubby vegetation
concentrated on patches of slightly elevated terrain (murundus), separated from
other similar woody vegetation by considerable expanses of exclusively
herbaceous vegetation (Photo 4:17).
IV-72
Photo 4.12: Open savanna after fire (dry season).
Photo 4.13: Middle Kwanza River Basin – Tract of open savanna after fire in the dry
season, already showing vigorous, newly sprouted grass.
IV-73
Photo 4.14: Tract of open mono-dominated savanna in the Laúca influence area,
with the predominance of fruiting Julbernadia sp.
Photo 4.15: Thin savanna in the Middle Kwanza River Basin.
IV-74
Photo 4.16: Park savanna in the dry season. One can note open tracts covered only
by the grassy layer and tracts with groups of trees forming small woods.
Photo 4.17: Tract of Park savanna with murundus in the Middle Kwanza River
Basin. One can note the terrain with some more elevated patches (murundus), where
arboreous woody plants (area not burnt) are concentrated. These small islands check
the advance of fire in the dry season, which spreads over the field.
Fields
IV-75
•
Dry grassy field (low sandy, poorly drained savannas, with or without trees 1;
“chana”: tract without woody vegetation and with dense grassy cover and plants
adapted to dry soils. It may be seasonally flooded in areas adjacent to rivers,
when it is called chana (Photo 4.18).
•
Humid grassy field (lowland savanna; chana) tract without woody vegetation in
lowlands, with plants adapted to soaked soils in the rainy season, formed by
herbaceous species, with predominance of Poaceae and Cyperaceae (Photo
4.19). These fields are also known as “low-lying fields.”
•
Rupestrian field (skeletal soils vegetation and rock outcrops/altitude meadows):
tracts with large outcrops in level areas or small outcrops on steep slopes, with
flora adapted to a rupestrian environment, such as Vellozia sp (Photo 4.20).
1
It should be noted that Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970) treat these types of clear fields as “savanna,” but
this view is not shared in this study.
IV-76
Photo 4.18: Chana adjacent to gallery forest by the Kwanza River. In the detail, a
strip of level grassy field (drained in the dry season) that is flooded in the rainy
season.
Photo 4.19: Humid grassy field in the Capanda surroundings. Grass adapted to
soaked soil at the end of the rainy season.
IV-77
Photo 4.20: Detail of Vellozia sp specimen in a tract of rupestrian field.
Other types
•
Marsh (palustrine meadow; grass in flooding depressions): permanently flooded
tract (even in the dry season), with dense shrubby-herbaceous flora adapted to
this environment, and presence of genders such as Typha (Photo 4.21).
•
Riparian arboreous-shrubby vegetation (non-forest): riparian tracts adjacent
to river pools, consisting of arboreous aquatic macrophytes, including Pandanus
and occasional greater grass density (Photo 4.22).
•
Riparian
beaches
(pioneer,
psammophyte,
steppe-type
vegetation):
discontinuous sandy tracts with thin herbaceous vegetation adjacent to the
Kwanza River (Photo 4.23).
•
Anthropic, agricultural, and ruderal areas: tracts with secondary vegetation,
anthropized or crop areas (Photo 4.24).
IV-78
Photo 4.21: Marshy tract with Typha p. predominance.
Photo 4.22: Dense grassy tract, common in river pool areas, above Laúca (Kwanza
River).
IV-79
Photo 4.23: Area adjacent to the Kwanza River; sandy soil, with widened stretches.
Photo 4.24: Anthropic area in the Capanda village. Secondary vegetation in the
grassy stratum and exotic plants under cultivation.
IV-80
4.3. BIOTIC ENVIRONMENT IN THE ADA AND
SURROUNDINGS
This section describes the characterization of the main biological aspects of the ADA
and surroundings abutting on the Laúca dam. Tools used included field trips made
between 2007 and 2009 by a specialized team, and bibliographical material related to
specific regional reports. Visits to the site were made for the EIA regarding the
deviation of the river course (2012) and again in 2013 for updating and validating the
information.
4.3.1. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURES
Note should first be taken of some difficulties encountered in planning and carrying
out the collection of information in 2007 and 2009, such as limited access to the field
owing to the possible existence of mines in the locations to be visited, the scarce
bibliography on the subject, and the difficulty in biological material identification.
The general methodology employed in this project was thus an adaptation of the
rapid ecological evaluation (Sobrevilla and Bath, 1992), which consists in investing
heavily in obtaining the greatest volume of data in the time available for field
activities, and integrating the various specialists’ evaluation of different subjects in
common sampling locations. For greater data integration, all information was
georeferenced.
To understand the region’s biological complexity, some indicative parameters have
been chosen on the basis of logistic and ecologic factors, as follows:
•
Biological diversity: the groups involved ought to represent a set of trophic and
functional levels of the aquatic and terrestrial systems;
•
Biological characterization: identification of species or group of species likely
to assist in the characterization of local environments and their interaction within
species and between species;
IV-81
•
Species composition: recognition of species in both the aquatic and the
terrestrial ecosystems that might be impacted by the dam’s construction and
operation; and
•
Environmental parameters: definition of ecological parameters of terrestrial
ecosystems (natural and anthropic) and aquatic ecosystems (limnological and
water quality aspects) for the establishment of future prognosis.
The data generated are essential for determining possible endemisms, the presence of
rare or threatened species; areas of greater biodiversity concentration; biological
aspects of natural populations; recognition of different landscapes and habitats;
identification of existing anthropic pressures; and survey of the limnological
characteristics of the region’s watercourses. In addition, these studies provide
important data for a better programming of fauna and flora recovery activities as well
as monitoring activities or any other conservation strategy to be proposed for the
undertaking.
The ADA has been defined as an area where the majority of environmental
phenomena that will be reflected in the project’s implementation are agglutinated, so
as to permit the analysis of the inherent environmental processes, as well as the
identification and evaluation of the impacting processes to be generated by the
undertaking’s implementation, as a basis for projecting the Laúca AH.
To represent accurately the biological components of the influence area, several
sampling locations were selected, whose definition was based on satellite images and
maps of the region, as well as on information provided by the teams that did the
previous reconnoitering of the work site. Consideration was also given to the teams’
safety and to the accessibility and integrity of the ecosystems, i.e., the state of
conservation of the environments to be sampled. The specific strategies regarding
each component of the biotic environment will be addressed under the appropriate
items.
Each sampling location is characterized from the standpoint of vegetation on a wide,
ample scale of the predominant landscape, with emphasis on locations where
samples were collected from water and from aquatic and terrestrial fauna and flora
IV-82
groups. For the 2007 and 2009 surveys, eleven specific locations were studied during
the expedition, from Caculo-Cabaça to Capanda. As this study addresses only the
Laúca dam construction work, only six locations are presented here, as the other five
are more pertinent to the future Caculo-Cabaça AH. Figure 4.15 shows the
localization of the locations of the 2007 and 2009 collection of aquatic and terrestrial
fauna and flora samples.
For the first phase of the work (deviation of the river’s course), where the incidence
zones for the collection of environmental information were updated, the Directly
Affected Area was targeted, i.e., the ADA as defined in Chapter 1. There were also
incursions into the AID, in a radius of 15 kilometers from the river course deviation
worksite.
For the 2013 updating work, the focus was directed at the reservoir filling area, as
this is likely to suffer the greatest impact. The list of species found in the previous
studies has been corrected and updated.
Figure 4.15: Map showing the localization of locations for the collection of biotic
material (aquatic and terrestrial flora and fauna).
IV-83
4.3.2. CACULO-CABAÇA COLLECTION LOCATION
Located at 9°41’13”S and 14°59’23”E (altitude ± 560 meters) in the North Kwanza
province, this location is a tract of gallery forest of uneven width, now narrow in
relation to the river bank (about 30 meters to 50 meters), now wider (about 150
meters to 200 meters), with a strip of trees bordering on the river, ranging between
15 meters and 20 meters in height, on rough terrain. The forest transition proceeds
through open savanna tracts, though there are also some limited patches of what may
be considered as rupestrian fields abutting on the forest fringe. A tributary stream
runs through gallery forests. Large outcrop rocks are scattered from the forest into
the riverbed, separated by sandy-clayey soil with some detritus layer. Afternoon
shade owing to the forest trees (Photo 4.25).
IV-84
Photo 4.25: Caculo-Cabaça collection location.
4.3.3. LAÚCA COLLECTION LOCATION
Situated at 9°46’12”S and 15°11’04”E (altitude ± 785 meters) in the Malanje
province, this location is a tract of wide gallery forest about 200 meters to 300 meters
in width, with transition into a open forest of the Panda type. The terrain is steep
(more than 100-meter altitude variation). It has a diversity of arboreous species; even
the shrubby-herbaceous undergrowth plants are tall. Many species of herbs, shrubs,
epiphytes, and lianas species are pending collection and identification.
In the proximity of this location there is a dry ravine with a large amount of lianas in
the trees and a patch of a grass species (BW 5593 in table 4.13) growing on moister
soil. In addition to the lianas, the lay of the terrain leaves the location in much shaded
all afternoon (Photo 4.26).
Photo 4.26: Laúca location.
IV-85
4.3.4. MUTA 1 COLLECTION LOCATION – FOREST
The Muta 1 – Forest location is situated at 9°46”28”S and 15°11’24”E (altitude ±780
meters) in the Malanje province. It is an area consisting of a gallery forest of uneven
width ranging between 50 meters and 200 meters. The canopy height is about 20
meters. It lies on rolling, at times rugged terrain, much less steep than the CaculoCabaça and the Laúca locations.
There is a transition area with tracts of both open grassy savanna and dense, wooded
savanna, where woody vegetation is denser. A small tract on the gentle slope, which
may be called Panda forest, starts a difficult to be delineated transition to a gallery
forest. It is a relatively homogeneous place from a vegetation standpoint of the
forest’s arboreous vegetation, with abundant shrubby, scandent lianas under the
treetops. These lianas, hanging down into the undergrowth in the area adjacent to the
river made it difficult to advance through the tangle of branches; this could be done
only by opening trails. Afternoon shade was similar to that of the Caculo-Cabaça
location (Photo 4.27).
IV-86
Photo 4.27: Muta 1 collection location – Forest.
4.3.5. MUTA 2 COLLECTION LOCATION – BEACH
province, this location is characterized by a white sand, rocky beach, without trees
(Photo 4.28). Both downstream and upstream the beach there is a succession of tracts
of narrow gallery forest. Upstream the forest is low, followed by savannas that
approach the river. The collection was done in an open area with only a grassy layer
and a few shrubby and semi-shrubby phanerogamae (such as Mimosa cf Pigra, BW
5757 shown in Table 4.13) in patches of exposed sandy soil, and a few herbaceous
aquatic macrophytes. The terrain at the site is basically level with open savannas
extending quit close to the river channel upstream, and rock outcrops, as part of the
natural riverine vegetation. No shading all day (Photo 4.29).
IV-87
Photo 4.28: Muta 2 collection location. Beach, strip of gallery forest, bare rocks
abutting on the Kwanza River channel in the Laúca direct influence area.
IV-88
Photo 4.29: Collection Location 4 – Beach in the rainy season
4.3.6. VILA DE MUTA COLLECTION POINT
province, it is an anthropized area with some isolated baobabs. The surrounding
vegetation matrix is open savannas, where baobabs, Cussonia, Julbernardia, and
Phylostigma may be found, as well as gallery forests with oil palm less than 1.0
kilometer away (Photo 4:30).
4.3.7. GALLERY FOREST COLLECTION LOCATION
Situated across and above the Muta 2 Collection Location – Beach (at 9°46’S and
15°11’E (altitude ± 785 meters) in the South Kwanza province, this is a tract of
gallery forest on a left bank tributary of the Kwanza River, in the midst of an open
savanna matrix, and denser stretches. Botanical collections were taken from both the
forest and the adjacent savannas (Photo 4.31).
IV-89
Photo 4.30: Vila de Muta Collection Location 8.
Photo 4.31: Gallery Forest collection location
IV-90
4.3.8. VEGETATION COVER IN THE ADA AND
SURROUNDINGS
This section presents data pertaining to the vegetation and flora on the tracts explored
by the expeditions for the preliminary inventory of the biotic environment in the
Middle Kwanza River Basin (2007-2009), as well as new species found by surveys
for the river course deviation (2012) and for the dam’s construction (2013).
According to chorological divisions, the collection locations are situated in the
Sudanese-Zambezian floristic region within the Zambezian Domain. Still according
to Monteiro (1970, p. 170), the Zambezian Domain encompasses a small part of the
Democratic Republic of Congo, nearly all of Angola, Zambia, Zimbabwe, most of
Mozambique, Malawi, and almost half of Tanzania. The region addressed in this
report is situated basically in the Bié Sector, where various types of savanna and
open forests predominate, in addition to the Huila-Moxico-Lunda-Malanje Sector,
dominated by open forests (Monteiro, 1970, p. 122).
•
Methodological Procedures
The objective of this study was to identify and locate the different vegetation
formations and the various uses of the soil in the ADA and surroundings, make
qualitative surveys of the flora in the most representative formations, and identify
areas of relevant interest for preservation.
As seasonal variation is a basic characteristic of the savanna climate and vegetation,
the first expedition was undertaken April 14-27, 2008, which coincided with the end
of the rainy season. The plan was to cover especially areas on the Kwanza River’s
right bank to identify natural vegetation formations and other uses of the soil
(farming and grazing). The second expedition, undertaken in August 2008, assigned
priority to investigating the left bank of the Kwanza River. The third survey was
done in November 2012, focusing on the locations near the Laúca AH construction
work site. The sampled areas and the photographed locations were recorded, with the
help of GPS, which permitted the spacing of both information and data.
IV-91
On the basis of the maps available, the region’s representative physiognomies and
the field sampling locations in the AID were defined. The different physiognomies
served as a basis for surveying the floristic composition, which is fundamental to a
qualitative assessment of the flora to be studied and for estimating the impact on the
vegetation populations and communities.
The bibliographical support available in Angola comes from the scientific production
of neighboring countries, such as South Africa (Palgrave, 2002) and old data, some
with a lag of more than four decades, although still accurate and useful (i.e., Shaw,
1947; Gossweiler, 1953; Exell and Fernandes, 1956, 1962-1966; Monteiro, 1967;
Exell et al., 1970; Grandvaux-Barbosa, 1970; Machado, 1970; Diniz 1973). The
Angolan flora (Conspectus Florae Angolensis), for instance, was partially edited by
Arthur Wallis Exell and collaborators from 1930 to 1970 under the auspices of the
Coimbra Botanical Institute and with the collaboration of the British Museum, when
many taxonomic works, monographs, and revisions were published in journals such
as the Kew Bulletin and Taxon. All these sources provide information that should be
fully exploited.
The methods employed in surveying the floristic composition focused the following
topics:
o
Identification of physiognomies in the study area;
o
Surveying, during random walks in the representative areas of each phytophysiognomy, the greatest possible number of each. It should be noted that
botanical collections were limited to locations near roads, trails, and the precise
locations allowed by the military after the terrain had been demined;
o
In each segment and in the two expeditions (2007 and 2009), botanical
collections were made of fertile vascular species from the different
physiognomies;
o
Collection of specimens of the arboreous, shrubby, and grassy strata were made,
including epiphytes and aquatic macrophytes; and
IV-92
o
Sampling efforts aimed at locating populations of the target species, finding
ways to access the various collection areas, and defining the needs to be
encountered for future conservation actions (such as germplasm recovery).
On the field, the material was placed in plastic bags, and then on field presses, each
botanical specimen separated from another by newspaper. At the laboratory, the
specimens were transferred to field dryers; after they were dry, they were sent to
their final destination. On a field log were recorded data, including identification of
the specimen collected (scientific and/or common name, family), type of material
collected, growth pattern (tree, shrub, grass); morphological features (color, size,
etc.), general environment, substrate, localization, relative frequency, and other
pertinent information.
Randomly, based on observation of the plants in flower and/or with fruit, a small
though significant herbarium collection was started. In the average four to five
duplicates were obtained for each number (up to seven duplicates during the August
expedition).
For a preliminary identification were used the references of Gossweiler (1953);
Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970); Bärtels (2007); Pooley (1998); and Palgrave (2002).
Despite the lack of access to the collected botanic material, brief attempts were made
to consult the Conspectus Florae Angolensis volumes (Exell and Fernandes, 1956,
1962-1966; Exell et al., 1970).
To help taxon identification, each item collected was photographed on the field. In
addition, photos were taken of several plants in flower; some of these helped enrich
the region’s floristic list. In view of the difficulties inherent to collection work in the
region, some species that were only photographed are included in this report’s
listing.
Cultivated, invading, ruderal, and widely distributed plants were also observed,
photographed, and entered into the records to expand the list of species. This list
figures separately from the list of autochthonous species.
The families ordering, which followed Cronquist (1988) in April, was transferred to
the APG II (2003) system, as planned. The names of the authors related to the
IV-93
species were consulted on the site of the Missouri Botanical Garden (Mobot, W3
Tropics).
The 2012 field study assigned priority to the area directly affected by the river course
deviation work and by the future dam construction, to verify the existing
phytocoenosis and its condition.
IV-94
•
Landscapes description
The tract preliminarily studied (from Laúca to the Capanda AH) consists essentially of forest and
savanna formations and restricted tracts in typically rustic areas: forests, savannas, and fields
taken here in the Ribeiro and Walter (2008) 1 sense. There are also marshy tracts on permanently
poorly drained or flooded terrains, where soils must be shallow. These formations’ phytophysiognomy has been defined under a specific item and succinctly described. But it should be
recalled that Gandvaux-Barbosa (1970, p. 146) issued a warning about part of the savanna
vegetation on the central plateau, so vast ad complex, pointing out that the area of the Angolan
central plateau holds various 2 subtypes that should be presented in greater detail in future works.
This being the case, it is difficult, in the course of only two expeditions of short duration, to
record all the vegetation nuances that more detailed previous works were not able to clarify.
Along the Middle Kwanza River, the riverine vegetation alternates forest and savanna tracts that
extend to the river channel, small tracts of sandy beaches and others with outcrops, with only
grassy vegetation, as well as some tracts of denser vegetation, with large aquatic macrophytes in
river pools. In the latter case, the Pandanus gender is characteristic. Forest tracts are the
predominant pattern, with a typical gallery forest, with a canopy about 15 meters to 20 meters in
height, without visible emergent trees (Photos 4.32 and 4.33).
1
In a physiognomic sense, these authors treat as forest vegetation tracts or areas with predominance of arboreous
species, where a continuous or discontinuous canopy occurs. The term savanna refers to areas with trees and shrubs
scattered over a grassy layer, without the formation of a continuous canopy. The term field designates areas with
predominance of herbaceous and some shrubby plants, with no trees in the landscape. This definition of savanna is
not universal, as there are different concepts around the world, which may also encompass physiognomic, floristic, or
ecological meanings. But it is in that sense that the term is used in this report.
2
What Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970) treat as subtype is occasionally treated in this study as “type” – “type of
vegetation.” A “type of vegetation” is defined by physiognomy, flora, and environmental features. Physiognomy
includes structure, consistence, and leaf size as well as seasonal changes (Ribeiro and Walter, 2008).
IV-95
Photo 4.32: Tract of gallery forest on the Middle Kwanza River (dense vegetation adjacent to
the river) in the Caculo-Cabaça region.
IV-96
Photo 4.33: Inside a gallery forest adjacent to the Kwanza River, in the Laúca region, on the
right bank.
Lianas are found throughout the forest (border-dam direction), particularly in the strip adjacent to
the river. The forest width changes according to the terrain, from a few meters in some cases, when
the river bank terrain tends to be more level, to a strip of 200 meters-300 meters of closed forest,
which is characteristic of steep terrain excavated by the river over time.
In this case, the forest on the slopes seem to be dry rather than of the gallery type, and terminates
abruptly in the upper part, being succeeded by savanna vegetation formations (which may be open
or denser) until the Panda Forest, which is characteristic of Miombo. Savanna tracts are also found
adjacent to the gallery forest strip, where arboreous-shrubby and low grassy vegetation approaches
the river channel on sandy soil. Bare rocks are frequent in the river channel along the Middle
Kwanza, as shown in Photo 4.34.
Photo 4.34: Gallery forest and bare rocks adjacent to the Kwanza River in the lower part of its
middle course (Filomeno Câmara Bridge region).
IV-97
The vegetation that follows rarely seems to be a forest, rather resembling savannas with a dense
grassy biomass. The tracts of gallery forest consist of some ten species 3, ranging between 6 meters
and 8 meters in height. In river pools, some grass and dense Cyperaceae are also characteristic,
particularly Cyperus papyrus L., which is also found in stretches with more rapid waters.
In river pool areas and sandy beach formations, a pure layer of lower grass and small shrubs occur,
a sign that in the Middle Kwanza River the gallery forest is not restricted to a single
phytophysiognomic type or to a single formation. Each case has a particular flora, which suggests
that the gallery forest is rich in species.
It should be noted that many plants in the Kwanza River gallery forest have thorns and/or prickles.
Of these, the following have been collected by the two expeditions: BW 5667 (Blepharis cf.
subvolubilis C.B. Clarke), BW 5612 (Commiphora cf. angolensis Engl.), BW 5757 (Mimosa cf.
pigra Oliv.), BW 5627 (cf. Erythroxylum), BW 5736 (cf. Maytenus), BW 5633 (cf. Zanthoxylum),
BW 5668 (cf. Flacourtiaceae) and BW 5604 (indeterminate, species 1), among others.
On both banks, Kwanza River tributary streams are covered by gallery forests which join the river’s
gallery forest. Both in this tract and in that other type of forest (Photo 4.35) Elaeis guineensis Jacq.,
the oil palm is found (palmeiras-de-dendém, according to Almeida, 2006).
Structurally, the gallery forests are usually narrow, covering perennial or temporary streams, with
abrupt transition to open savanna tracts. The forests’ width is always less than 40 meters-50 meters.
3
According to Monteiro (1970), the Pandanus welwitschii Rendle species, the same one found in the Middle Kwanza
River, occurs in association with Syzgium cordatum Hochst ex C. Krauss, Gardenia imperialis K. Schum, and Phragmites
mauritianus Kunth on the margins of the Cuiva River, south of Cuemba, on the Bié plateau.
IV-98
Photo 4.35: Gallery forest with the occurrence of oil palms (Elaeis guineensis).
The type of open forest known as Panda Forest, already mentioned several times in this study,
should be commented here. Shaw (1947) defines it as an extensive forest of the inner plateau, in
which the baobab does not occur. According to Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970), the Panda Forest is a
dry, thin plateau forest, whose varying definition and circumscribing by the different authors are
somewhat confusing. It is generally treated as a forest, but also as grove or copse subordinated to
the Miombo or synonymous with it. Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970, p. 182) identifies tracts of the
Huambo as being “Panda Woods,” whose forest structure is similar to the tracts referred to in this
report. According to Shaw (1947), the word Panda comes from certain leguminous species of the
Isoberlinia and the Brachystegia genders, which are dominant in extensive areas. These are two of
the main Panda Forest indicators, and thus also of the Miombo (Photo 4.36). One characteristic
noted only on the second field expedition (2007 and 2009) is that the Panda Forest consists of
deciduous species that do not drop their leaves simultaneously (Photo 4.37).
IV-99
Photo 4.36: Tract of Miombo in the vicinity of Capanda.
Photo 4.37: Tract of Panda Forest in the Laúca access region.
IV-100
Similarly to the Panda Forest, the aforementioned Miombo is also considered a particular type of
open forest, grove, or yet a densely wooded savanna, an interpretation that varies from author to
author. According to Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970, p. 147), this is the vernacular term that became
more widely used in the specialized literature to designate woodland with a heavy representation of
the Brachystegia and the Julbernardia, and at times the Berlinia genders 4. For Kindgon (1997),
Miombo is classified under woodland, an intermediary type of vegetation between forest and
savanna.
According to Mistry (2000), the Miombo is one of Africa’s more extensive and uniform vegetation
types, which displays a uniform structure over long tracts. In the area covered by this study,
Combretum and certainly Brachystegia, Julbernardia, and Pterocarpus species, in addition to
plants such as Afzelia quanzensis Welw 5, occur in associations that characterize this type of open
forest (or dense savanna), whose trees reach about 10 meters to 12 meters in the canopy. Miombo
tracts join riparian forests in the region under study, whose ecotone is difficult to distinguish
between one phyto-physiognomic type and another.
Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970) describes numerous Miombo subtypes, which vary regionally
throughout the Angolan territory and receive floristic influences according to their geographical
localization. Criteria such as location (i.e., if they contain elements from the flora of the southern or
the northern part of the country, or periguinean elements), altitude, type of soil, and vertical
structure (trees height) have been taken in consideration in the subdivisions.
For the purposes of this study, though, in which the definition of type is sufficient, expressions such
as Miombo and Panda Forest are treated as synonymous, although the former may conceptually
encompass the latter 6, and the Angolan vernacular phytophysiognomic names will be avoided in
case they could not be confirmed by the two field expeditions.
4
Notice the similarity with Shaw’s concept (1947) of Panda Forest.
A species that bears fruit and particularly highly ornamental red and black seeds on the fringe of a gallery forest,
found on the August expedition.
6
This is a treatment similar to that of the Brazilian cerrado, according to which the Miombo would be the cerrado lato
sensu and the Panda Forest would be cerrado in strict sensu.
5
IV-101
In addition to the forests, and more important than them in terms of areas occupied, the predominant
landscape is formed by humid savannas, now more open, now more closed, interspersed with the
aforementioned forest tracts along water courses. The predominant grasses are Andropogonaceae
(Andropogon spp.) and Paniceas (Panicum spp.) according to Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970), although
other genders also cover considerable tracts of the terrain. According to Shaw (1947), the grassy
stratum in the dry season is highly susceptible to yearly fires.
Classic African continent savannas occur in the region and are in excellent state of conservation. In
many places, a single woody arboreous species dominate the vegetation. As mentioned earlier,
plants such as Piliostigma thonningii (Schumach. and Thonn) Milne-Redh. (BW 5585), in addition
to Brachystegia cf. Glaucescens Burtt. Davy and Hutch. (BW 5623), Coccoloba sp. (BW 5701) and
cf. Julbernardia sp.1 (BW 5779) are examples of specimens found in aggregated, dominant
distribution.
With wide distribution but without being dominant, the conspicuous Cussonia angolensis (Seem.)
Hiern. species, with its rounded frond, is also found in open areas. With denser populations than
the Cussonia angolensis, the Cochlospermum cf. angolense Welw arboreous species also frequently
occurs in the savannas and forest fringes on the Middle Kwanza River.
Another typical plant is the Accacia sp. (BW 5697), always associated with places with higher
grass. On open savannas, the strong characteristic, pleasant scent of the Lippia adoensis Hochst, ex
Walp (BW 5654), a widely distributed species that was in full bloom at the time of the April
expedition, was remarkable. In the dry season, the species has nothing remarkable. It is used by
local populations for medicinal purposes and, according to Gossweiler (1953), its medicinal use is
current in different local populations.
Similarly to the baobab, the Sterculia cf. quinqueloba (Garcke) K. Schum is a clear trunk tree with a
generalized habitat. Although apparently dominant on the savannas, where it is an important flora
element, it may be found in the forest quite close to the river, where the savanna extends to the
riverine strip, as well as in the high borders of a typical gallery forest. Grandvaux-Barbosa (1970, p.
200) describes a vegetation subtype (rupicolous Sterculia vegetation on outcrops) on the basis of
this species, and it is likely that this is the subtype found in Kyangulungo. This species occurs also
in denser savannas.
IV-102
Observed clearly only on the second field expedition in the stretch between the Kyangulungo
sanzala [village] and the Kwanza River, tracts of savanna vegetation typically in the form of Parks
occur. In some places, one can notice even the formation of murundus (i.e., slight concentric
elevations on the terrain), on which woody vegetation concentrates, forming a landscape similar to a
vegetation island, with clean grassy fields around murundus. The savanna-parks seem to be of two
main types: tall arboreous vegetation, forming copses without the occurrence of murundus; and
another type, that might be provisionally called “fields with murundus.” Also there is arborescent
vegetation on the murundus, this does not characterize a “field;” the expression “field with
murundus” intends to stress the terrain rather than the vegetation.
In rustic areas, although some small patches of pure grassy fields in the midst of the savanna
matrix 7 in outcrop areas have been observed, the aforementioned type of rupicolous vegetation on
outcrops occurs. These fields vary from a few square meters in occupied areas (when located on hill
slopes) to some hectares (the case of Kyangulungo), have a very rich flora, possibly with various
endemisms, with plants usually adapted to altitudes above 900 meters, little soil volume, and other
stress conditions. Plants restricted to these locations include the Vellozia, two species of which have
been collected by the April expedition8, as well as Euphorbia grandicornis Goebel, ex N.E.Br.
(Photo 4.38), collected in August for a herbarium. Regarding Angola, Shaw (1947) has indicated
that several Vellozia species populations might be significant in some parts of the country.
7
The preceding example of vegetation among murundus is one of them.
Gossweiler (1953) cited only the Vellozia capillaris Welw, ex Bak., actually a nomen nudum, as the correct name is
Vellozia capillaris (Baker) Baker. Today the most accepted name would be Xerophyta capillaris Baker. Gossweiler
(1953) mentioned that there might be six more Vellozia species in Angola, occurring in altitudes ranging from 100
meters to 2,000 meters.
8
IV-103
Photo 4.38: Rupiculous area in Kyangulungo, where the Euphorbia grandicornis is common.
In the ADA and the AID, the rustic vegetation subject to periodic river flooding in the rainy season,
particularly to the Kwanza River flooding, is treated under the name of Chana (Shaw, 1947). Chana
is a tract of level grassy field on sandy soil. Although there has been no detailed exploration of such
places, Photo 4.39 shows their phyto-physiognomy, which is the area of perambulation by the
mammal megafauna that so well characterizes the African continent. It distinguishes itself for being
essentially grassy vegetation, with the scarce presence of woody and shrubby plants.
Photo 4.39: Tract of chana adjacent to a Kwanza River gallery forest. In the detail, a tract of grassy
field (drained in the dry season), which becomes flooded in the rainy season.
The landscape downstream the dam and near the powerhouse (ADA), popularly known as Pedra de
Laúca, is a place of unique beauty (Photo 4.40). In both the ADA and the AID, the predominance of
savannas has been observed, as has the occurrence of the Accacia welwitschii, a very common
species in the region (Photo 4.41). Note should be taken of the occurrence of various grasses in the
grassy layer, particularly the Andropogon gayanus, the Hyparrhemia sp., the Heteropogon
contortus, the Panicum maximum, and the Brachyaria sp., among others.
IV-104
Photo 4.40: Pedra de Laúca
Photo 4.41: Accacia welsitschii in the ADA.
IV-105
In the proximity of the Kwanza River one can notice the presence of gallery forests, an outstanding
characteristic of valleys and watercourses (Photo 4.42). Terre are also occurrences of species such
as Diospyrus mespiliiformis, Pterocarpus angolensis, Combretum apiculatum, Albizia versicolor, as
well as of shrubs, such as Grewia flavescens and Grewia sp.
Photo 4.42 Area near the caisson construction site.
On the steep rocky banks of difficult access and even in the cracks of exposed rocks in the riverbed,
various species of pteridophytes grow, such as the Aloe sp., the Sanseviera cilindrica, the
Asclepsias sp., and other plants (Photo 4.43).
IV-106
Photo 4.43: Vegetation on steep banks near the area where the dam will be constructed.
Members of the Orchidaceae family are found in various ADA locations, particularly the Eulophia
othoplecta and the Eulophia spp (Photos 4.44 and 4.45).
Photo 4.44: Orchid specimen (Eulophia spp.).
IV-107
Photo 4.45: Orchid specimen (Eulophia othoplecta).
• Results of the Floristic Composition Survey
The collection made by the expeditions totaled 183 herbarium numbers. Also added were the
photographed taxa of those sighted or obtained through information. Table 4.13 shows part of the
autochthonous flora of the Middle Kwanza River region, while Table 4.14 shows the widely
distributed exotic plants found there. The lists on these tables show plants recorded essentially in
the tract of the Laúca AH and surroundings, and a few that were confirmed between the Filomeno
Câmara Bridge and the vicinity of Pungo Andongo.
Table 4.13 shows the family, the gender/species, the habit, and the specimen’s occurrence
environment, and a herbarium code or the criterion used to confirm the taxon’s occurrence in the
area. On these tables are indicated 232 species 9 belonging to 68 families 10 (three of which are
Pteridophytes), a still little expressive number to register the rich flora observed in that region. Of
this total, 36 materials have not had even their family identified, and in some cases there are still
9
Table 4.13 has 245 entries, as in 13 cases the same species was collected more than once, such as the two
herbaceous Apocynaceae with yellow flowers (BW 5650 and 5698) and the Lagenaria cf. sphaerica (Sond.) Naudin, a
ruderal plant collected with flowers (BW 5658) and with fruit (BW 5619).
10
Fabaceae (or Leguminosae) is interpreted as a single family by APG II (BW 2003). Likewise, traditional families, such
as Sterculiaceae and Tiliaceae, are now included in Malvaceae.
IV-108
doubts about them (for instance, the Scrophulariaceae BW 5646). Table 4.14 lists an additional 35
species (included in 23 families 11), which expands the record obtained by the expedition to 267
species. But only 74 the species on Table 4.13 (plus another 26 on Table 4.14) could be classified
down to the species level; this accounts for little more than 30 percent of the Table. There is thus a
great lack of knowledge about the flora of the region under focus, and the sum of taxa of the two
tables is below what it certainly holds, particularly as regards the autochthonous flora (Table 4.14).
It should be noted that the region’s important taxa are already listed, as illustrated by the genders
Afzelia (Fabaceae, Table 4.13), Brachystegia (BW 5623; BW 5722), Cochlospermum (BW 5622),
Cussonia, Erythrina (BW 5717), Julbernardia (BW 5779); (Table 4.14, Pterocarpus, BW 5591),
and Combretum (five species collected – BW 5605, 5608, 5700, 5716, and 5735). All the authors
that address Angola’s and vicinity’s flora (e.g., Shaw, 1947; Gossweiler, 1953; Monteiro, 1967;
Grandvaux-Barbosa, 1970; Mistry, 2000; Palgrave, 2002) emphasize these genders.
Some plants used by local populations are already included, such as the baobab (Adansonia
digitata), whose bark fibers are used for clothing, seeds for medicinal purposes, seeds and leaves for
food (Gossweiler (1953); the oil palm (Elaeis guieneensis), of high nutritional value; the medicinal
plants Lippiaadoensis (Gossweiler, 1953), Strychnos cocculoides, Cycnium adonense, and
Boophone disticha, the latter’s bulb is also used as poison for arrows (Pooley, 1998); in addition to
ictiotoxic plants, such as the Piliostigma thonningii (Schumach. and Thonn.) Milne-Redh. and
Lagenaria (breviflora)Benth. (Machado, 1970). Not to speak of various grass specimens that serve
as natural pasture for cattle, species for timber or fuel, other medicinal plants, and ornamental
plants.
Considering only (Table 4.14), Fabaceae is the most important family, with 38 species entered (29
Leguminosae
Papilioinoideae;
five
Leguminosae
Mimosoideae;
and
four
Leguminosae
Caesalpinioideae), followed by Poaceae (11 species); Malvaceae (9 species); Asteracaeae (seven
species); Lamiaceae (six species); Combretaceae, Euphorbiaceae, Loganiaceae, and Rubiaceae
(five species each), followed by Amaryllidaceae, Apocynaceae, Convolvulaceae, Cyperaceae,
Moraceae, and Solanaceae, with four species each. It strikes the attention how little represented are
the Orchidaceae (three species) and the Myrtaceae (one species).
11
The reduction in the number of families by three in relation to the April report is due to the adoption of the APG II
(2003).
IV-109
In view of the numerous species observed in flower on the two expeditions that could not be
collected, and even sterile plants to which the team had access, a systematic collection program
should be undertaken for a more thorough knowledge of the flora around the Laúca AH.
Given the local phytophysiognomic diversity, with at least 12 natural phytophysiognomic types,
which express a floristic composition pertinent to each type, it is suggested that new occurrence
citations, amplifications in the distribution area, indications of endemisms, and even species new to
science may indeed be revealed by a detailed taxonomic survey in those explorations.
IV-110
Table 4.13. List of autochthonous species recorded during the expeditions – April and August 2008
IV-111
IV-112
IV-113
IV-114
IV-115
IV-116
IV-117
[Legendas para a tabela:
Family
Species
Habit
Environment Code/tab
[A coluna “Family” permanece inalterada, exceto pela palavra “indeterminada”, que deve ser substituída por “not determined” .]
[Na coluna “Species”, a palavra “espécie” deve ser mudada para “Species” e, na sexta linha primeira página , substituir (indeterminada Espécie 19/E1 – folha
plana, harmônica” por:
“not determined Species 19/E1 – plane, harmonious leaf”.
Substituir “pós fogo” por “after fire”
IV-118
Substituir “labelo” por “labellum”
Substituir “Ponte Filomeno Câmara” por “Filomeno Câmara Bridge”
Substituir “inflorescência roxa” por “purple inflorescence”
“próxima a Vellozia sp. 1” por “close to Vellozia sp 1”.
“flor amarela – ponte F. Câmara” = “yellow flower – F. Câmara Bridge”
“fruto alado” = “winged fruit”
“parece Tapura” = “looks like Tapura”
“planta amarela” = “yellow plant”
“parece Orchidaceae = “looks like Orchidaceae”
“parece flor de Styrax. Capanda Ponto 5” = “looks like Styrax flower. Capanda Location 5”
“comum, faixa ciliar” = “common, gallery tract”
“folha oposta” = “opposite leaf”
“lembra Fuchsia” = “recalls Fuchsia”
“parece” = “looks like”
“cipó fruto vermelho” = “liana, red fruit”
“frutão bola” = “large ball fruit”
“flor de cheiro ruim” = “unpleasant scent flower”
“com látex” = “with latex”
“flor branca gamopétala” = “gamopetal white flower”
“amarelinha” = “tiny yellow”
“roxinha” “tiny purple”
“cosmusinho” “tiny cosmos”
“folha comprida – lembra“ = “long leaf – recalls”
“espinhosinha, pós fogo” = “prickly, after fire”
“roxinha, pós fogo” = “tiny purple, after fire”
“rasteirinha” = “tiny creeper”
“pequenina” = “tiny”
“labelo” = “labellum”
“ou Hibiscuspendulatus L.f” = “or Hibiscuspendulatus L.f”
Na 3a. página da Tabela:
Na 14a. linha: substituir “galhos espinhosos – flor globosa” por “prickly branches – globose flower.
Na 15ª. Linha: substituir “galhos espinhosos – flor em espiga” por “prickly branches – flower spike” ]
IV-119
[Legendas para a coluna “Habit”:
Erva = Herb
Árvore = Tree
Arvoreta = Shrub
Liana arbustiva = Shrubby liana
Palm. Arbórea = Arboreous palm
Subarbusto = sub-shrub]
Liana = Liana
Arbusto = Shrub
Trepadeira = Vine
[Legendas para a coluna “Environment”:
Vegetação ribeirinha = Riverine Vegetation
Miombo = Miombo
Borda de mata ciliar = gallery forest fringe
Savana antropizada = Anthropized Savanna
Campo rupestre = Rustic Field
Mata ciliar = Gallery Forest
Mata = Forest
Mata/ area rupestre = Forest/Rustic Area
Mata = Forest
Savanna = Savanna
Mata ciliar/de Galleria = Gallery Forest
Borda de mata ciliar = Gallery forest fringe
Savana, ruderal = Savanna, ruderal]
Mata seca/ Galeria = Dry forest/Gallery
Savana aberta = Open Savanna
Área antrópica (floresta) = Anthropic area (Forest)
Mata ciliar/Campo húmido/Brejo = Gallery Forest/Humid field/Marsh
Savanna arbórea = Shrubby savanna
Ambiente rupestre = Rustic Environment
Ambiente ribeirinho = Riverine environment
IV-120
Savana rala, húmida = Thin, humid savanna
[A 5a. coluna permanece inalterada]
[NOTAS DE RODAPÉ DA TABELA:
Página 4-110:
Here the name Euphorbia conspicuo N.E. Br. has been considered correct, based on Gossweiler (1953, p. 412). Sónia P. Pereira’s work adopts the
epithet Euphorbia pentagona Haw, considered today as synonymous with Euphorbia royleana Boiss, probably an Asian plant (India), not cited for Angola.
Página 4-111:
Flacourtiaceae is not a family considered by APG II (2003); its genders have been distributed as Salicaceae, Achariaceae, and Perisdiscaceae,
particularly the first. Here, solely to help identification, the plant collected (BW 5668) has been designated as Flacourtiaceae, though this taxon has not been
included in the number of families occurring in the Middle Kwanza River.
Página 4-115:
Plants ordered by families (sensu APG II, 2003). BW = B.M.T. Walter et al. collection.
Additional support in Gossweiler (1953) or Palgrave (2002). “Trab. SPP = occurrence recorded in Sónia P. Pereira’s graduation thesis. “Inf. Pes. SPP”
= Occurrence reported by Sónia P. Pereira. “Col. SPP” = collected by Sónia P. Pereira (with photo), kept in Capanda. Photo – photographic record by B. M. T
Walter (E1-April 2008 expedition); E2- August 2008 expedition. Reg. visual = visually attested by M T. Walter.
Environment: “riverine vegetation” includes open savanna and rustic areas, as well as sandy beaches (white sand banks). “Miombo” includes
preferentially plants that occur in a Panda Forest (i.e., open forest or dense savanna), as defined in the August report (second expedition).
Página 4-117:
Occurrence record:
1. Sighting.
2. Sighting, with photo.
3. Personal information by Sónia P. Pereira.
4. Species to be confirmed. Plantio = species cultivated owing to human interest; work site = Capanda village.
IV-121
Table 4.14: List of cultivated and ruderal plants of wide distribution occurring in the middle Kwanza, established the first expedition (April 2008) region
species.
IV-122
IV-123
4.3.9 TERRESTRIAL FAUNA
• Methodological procedures
The purpose of the study was to expand the knowledge about the fauna communities in
the Laúca AH region and the problems associated with the conservation of habitats.
Priority was assigned to this terrestrial vertebrate group in 2007 and 2009. The focus of
the 2013 survey was on reptiles and birds.
The terrestrial fauna survey was done in two phases: gathering of secondary data
(already compiled lists, studies undertaken in the region, visits to zoological collections,
interviews with the population, etc.); and gathering of primary data (capture, direct
sighting, and observation of vestiges, such as nests, footprints, and feces) in both the
rainy and the dry seasons.
The geographical coordinates of the collection locations and the material records were
obtained whenever feasible. In the case of records based on interviews, attempts were
made to situate them in relation to the Kwanza River banks.
Given the diversity and particularities of each group of terrestrial vertebrates, efforts
were made to ensure specific collection and methodologies regarding each group, as
described herein.
 Mammal fauna
The adoption of different methods for inventorying the mammal fauna is explained by
the great morphological, behavioral, and ecologic diversity of the species in this group.
Other than direct capture methods, (described below), use was made of specimens that
had been run over on the roads giving access to the collecting areas, carcasses found on
the field, and skins and skeletons in the possession of local residents.
For small mammalians, transects were established at duly numbered spots, where boxstyle live traps (Sherman traps) were set up on the ground, and on trees whenever
possible. This methodology makes possible the coverage of routes randomly scattered
IV-124
for estimating the abundance of species; it is indicated for surveys, as it captures a larger
number of individuals and species. This was the methodology employed in the 2007 and
2009 surveys.
A series of Sherman traps were set up in three locations, each with 30 traps. At the
runoff measuring site, the traps were set up along the access road, near the Kwanza
River: 12 on grassy spots adjacent to the road a little before the last point accessible by
car (where there is a masonry house). After this point, 18 traps were set up, along the
trail used by hunters and fishermen, on the river bank, and on a slope recently burnt in
various places. This series was set up on August 12 and collected on August 17.
At the “Kyangulungo” location another series of 30 traps was set up in the proximity of
the Kyangulungo village. The traps were placed along the dry bed of a stream that in the
rainy season drains part of the rocky area where rupicolous vegetation grows and is
characteristic of the region. This region is much used by local trappers. This series of
traps was set up on August 13 and collected the following day 14, as it was discovered
that on that day 15 traps had vanished.
The “Porto do Dombo” location, also near Kyangulungo, is situated at the end of a road
recently opened to give access to the Kwanza River at the Dombo Port. Another two
series were set up in this area, each with 15 traps. Several spots along the road had been
burnt. Only on the river bank, where the traps were set up, the vegetation was thriving.
These series were set up on August 13, daily checked, and collected on August 19.
In addition to the data obtained from traps and direct observation, data based on vestiges
of feces and footprints (Photo 4.46) were also compiled.
IV-125
Photo 4.46: Footprint vestiges recorded in the region.
The traps were checked every morning and the captured animals were transferred to
cloth bags to be identified, weighed, have their sex determined and their biometric data
recorded, and photographed. After their handling, the animals were duly labeled to be
deposited in the zoological collection of the National Museum of Natural History or at
the Capanda AH Environmental Laboratory.
As regards medium- and large-size mammals, surveys were done in various selected
areas, in an attempt to undertake direct observation and to search for signs (footprints,
feces, bone remains). Each pertinent sign was georeferenced and photographically
documented, with the use of an object of known dimensions as a scale, and a synthetic
description was made whenever necessary. The records compiled were compared with
data already available in current literature, so as to arrive at a reliable taxonomic
identification.
Bats were captured with 12-meter 36-milimeter mesh mist nets (Photo 4.47) placed in
the region’s representative phytophysiognomies, near water courses, and opened at
IV-126
dusk. The average number of mist nets used in the different collection sites was six,
which covered an area of approximately 50 square meters.
Photo 4.47: Capture of bats with mist nets.
All the collected material was handled according to a standard protocol of
individualized record, with field number, body measurements, tissue withdrawal for
molecular comprehensiveness analysis, and fixation.
Camera traps (DeerCam, “Tigrinus”) were set up in selected locations, using baits as an
allurement. A camera trap was set up at approximately 3.5 meters up a tree, where it
remained from August 15 thru August 19, in a location near the left margin of the road,
where baboons, galagos, and hyraxes had been sighted already on the first day. Four
other camera traps were set up on the Kwanza River left bank, where they remained
from August 15 thru August 19. This technique was also employed on 2012 field visits
for the EIA on the deviation of the river course. This camera trap was set up on the right
bank downstream the tunnel construction site (Photo 4.48).
IV-127
Photo 4.48: Setting up a night vision camera in the ADA.
A camera was setup on a forest island in a Kyangulungo rocky spot, where it was left
from August 13 thru August 19. Three other cameras were set up on the Kwanza River
right bank (in the transition from savanna to gallery forest), where it remained from
August 14 thru August 19.
Immaterial evidence was obtained on a preliminary basis from interviews with military
personnel on duty during visits to collection sites. Evaluation depended on the quality of
the information obtained by the interviewee, as regards essentially the level of
specificity of the taxonomic diversity presented. But the basic criterion applies to the
recognition of the existence of recoverable coincident standards among the
interviewees.
IV-128
Two kinds of interviews were held. One was more informal, without following a
specific protocol, taking advantage of the opportunities for interaction with local
trappers and residents in general, including soldiers on duty in the Middle Kwanza
River region. For the second kind of interview the African Mammals guide (Kingdon,
1997) was used and two basic norms were followed: showing the photos in the guide
that illustrate the species listed for this part of the continent; and carefully avoiding to
elicit positive answers from interviewees. For this work, the interview results were used
only to corroborate the collected material evidence, with particular emphasis on
interviews with local trappers.
For the EIA regarding the river course deviation daytime and nighttime visits were
made to make records based on direct observation, with the help of a flashlight, to check
characteristics described on the occasion of the first surveys and verify the current
condition. These surveys also paid attention to vestiges of certain species for
complementation of the reference situation’s current condition (Photos 4.49, 4.50, and
4.51).
To update this 2013 study, daytime and nighttime visits were made for establishing
records based on direct observation, with the help of flashlights. No sighting of species
of the mammalian fauna occurred in this expedition.
Photo 4.49: Vestiges of the presence of
porcupines.
Photo 4.50: Footprint of young common
duiker (Sylvicapra grimmia).
IV-129
Photo 4.51: Footprint of an aardvark (Orycteropus afer).
 Avifauna
The locations chosen for collection of specimens of the region’s avifauna were the same
selected for collecting specimens of the mammalian fauna and the herpetofauna, in
addition to the daily sightings on the way between the various sampling locations. Three
differentiated sampling methods were adopted for this:
• Direct sighting: identification through direct observation, always in the morning
and at nightfall, during random walks in the region’s representative landscapes,
at the time of the birds’ greatest activity. For this, binoculars and specific
bibliography for field work were employed;
• Indirect records: based on interviews with local residents for confirmation of
some species present; and
• Direct capture: using 12-meter, 36-milimmeter mesh mist nets positioned in
the region’s representative phytophysiognomies. The specimens captured were
photographed (for later confirmation and identification); a record was made of
their biometric data (length of the beak, wing, tarsus, and tail), weight, sex
(whenever possible), molting, and other pertinent information. After these
procedures, the birds were released.
IV-130
For the EIA regarding the deviation of the river course, field visits were undertaken to
check the condition of the habitat and to complete direct observation for updating the
list of species, assigning priority to the ADA.
For this study’s updating in 2013 observation of the fauna was done on four consecutive
days (April 9-12, 2013). In view of the great extension of the area to be covered, but
particularly because of the difficulty of access to many locations for lack of trails, the
decision was made to gather information according to the opportunities. All roads and
trails in the undertaking’s direct influence area were traveled on foot, particularly to
reach places closer to the Kwanza River and to some of its tributaries. Birds were
recorded in all types of habitats and all over the area of the project’s immediate
implementation, either from a 4x4 vehicle or during short walks. Some species were
also recorded at night.
For observation, a Swarovski SLC 10x42 binocular and a Swarovski SD 80 10x50
telescope were used, as well as an Edirol 99 sound system, manual Sony loudspeakers,
and bird recordings available for Angola (Roberts, 1999; Chappuis, 2002; Mills, 2005).
Specialized field guides were used (Van Perlo 1999; Sinclair & Ryan 2002; Dean 2000;
Branch 1998; Marais 1999; Channing 2001; Kingdon 2005), as well as a Canon 7D and
a Canon 5D cameras with a 400mm and 100mm Cannon Macro objectives. Whenever
possible, the recorded animals were photographed.
 Herpetofauna
Initially three types of strategy had been planned for herpetofauna sampling: pitfalls
with drift fences; direct capture on occasional encounters; and sightings. As aluminum
cans were not available for making traps (pitfalls or trapdoors), this technique was
discarded.
Data about the species listed for the region were complemented with research in the
specialized literature in scientific collections deposited at the Luanda Museum of
Natural History and at the Capanda AH Environmental Laboratory. Both collections
IV-131
result from activities for inventorying and recovery of the Capanda AH fauna (between
2001 and 2003).
Although amphibian variations have been recorded on night walks, locomotion
limitations hindered access to specimens. Samplings were thus limited to casual
encounters and to collections already in existence for the region.
Animals that had been run over (Photo 4.52) were photographed and taken into
consideration in this study’s final results. In addition, information was gleaned from
informal interviews with the local population.
IV-132
Photo 4.52: Run over Bits sp, found on the Capanda road.
In complementation of the herpetofauna sampling techniques, random walks were taken
in the daytime, and the ground under dry leaves and fallen tree trunks was scrutinized.
As Angola does not produce immunobiologicals against ophidian accidents, direct
collection of snakes of the Elapidae (spitting and mamba snakes) and Viperidae (vipers)
families was avoided. For identification of the presence of these animals, censuses were
taken with the local populations, and information was gathered during the Capanda AH
construction work.
For Chelonia and Crocodylia, in addition to some large-size lizards (e.g., Varanus spp),
priority was given to visual and photographic identification.
The biometric data of all animals captured were taken down on field logs and fixed with
10% buffered formalin and preserved in alcohol at 40% (amphibian) and 70% (reptiles).
One of the undertaking’s workers, Mr. Henrique Lima, made available to us a
photographic file for the surveys’ updating (2013). This allowed us to confirm the
IV-133
occurrence of some additional species in the area, particularly reptiles. Still in 2013
amphibians were spotted and captured by hand for later identification, whenever
possible. The recording of reptiles presents an additional difficulty, given the elusive
nature of most species, which often hinders their observation and capture. Be that as it
may, some species were observed, while others were recorded on the basis of
consultation of photographic files of the location and field guides.
• Fauna survey results
Under this item are presented the results of the field survey of members of the fauna in
the AAR, the AID, and the ADA. This study shows that the AID region’s mammalian
fauna is quite rich. Although the density of the fauna populations does not seem to be
very high, there are no comparative references for the Angolan Miombo and adjacent
areas. Thus, it is not possible to make consistent statements at this time. The
environment’s support capacity is considerable, as large mammals, both ungulates ad
predators, still inhabit the region. This suggests that the ecologic systems remain
relatively intact in this region.
As regards the threats of extinction, consistently with the UICN listings, most identified
species have been classified under “low risk of extinction,” with extensive geographical
distribution of habitats.
However, it should be noted that the Panthera pardus (leopard) has been classified as
“vulnerable” to extinction; the Hippopotamus amphibious (hippopotamus) as
“vulnerable”; and, among the birds, the Glareola nordmanni as under “critical danger,”
and the Grus carunculatus as also vulnerable.
 Mammals
The identified mammals potentially present in the study area encompass 40 species
belonging to 24 families and 8 orders, as shown in Table 4.15.
IV-134
Table 4.15: Mammalian fauna present in the study area.
Order
Family
Species
Not identified 01
Not identified 01
IV-135
Order
Species
Family
Not identified 01
Not identified 01
Order Tubulidentata
IV-136
Aardvark (Orycteropus afer) footprints (Photo 4.53) and burrows (Photo 4.54) were
found in several places on both banks of the Kwanza River. This species seems to be
relatively frequent in areas where the soil is less rocky, which facilitates the digging of
burrows for shelter. This characteristic thus determines an uneven distribution of the
Orycteropus afer in the Middle Kwanza River region. This is an important species from
the standpoint of conservation, and is little known in Angola.
Photo 4.53: Footprint of an aardvark (Orycteropus afer (left front paw) on the Kwanza
River left bank.
IV-137
Photo 4.54: Aardvark (Orycteropus afer) burrows on the Kwanza River left bank. The
diameter of the camera objective lid (arrow) is 6 centimeters.
IV-138
Order Hyraccoidae
The hyrax (Heterohyrax cf. brucei) is a species recorded on the basis of a considerable
number of sightings of isolated individuals and colonies between the Capanda AH and
the Kwanza River, and on the river’s rocky banks. These animals use a wide range of
habitats, though showing preference for rocky areas, and have daylight habits (Photo
4.55). Some individuals have shown great locomotion skill in the arboreous stratum.
This behavior has been noted at night on the part of individuals on the road connecting
the Capanda AH to Location 5 1, suggesting that a predominantly arboreal form (gender
Dendrohyrax) may also occur in the Kwanza River region.
Photo 4.55: A Hyrax (Heterohyrax cf. brucei) photographed on the left bank of the
Kwanza River near a stretch of steep bank.
1
Location 5 was one of the 2007-2009 field survey locations (sampling coordinates: 9°48’14”S;
15°24’02”E).
IV-139
Order Primate
Some of the primates observed were thick-tailed galago individuals (Otolemur
crassicaudatus) in the Miombo region between the Capanda AH and Location 5 (Photo
4.56). Some individuals (at least three) were sighted in a same area and may have been a
family group (mother and its young), as in Southern African regions August and
September are the reproduction period.
Photo 4.56: Otolemur crassicaudatus individuals photographed near the Capanda
village road/location 5 (on the left) and near the Dombo port (on the right).
A young Cercopithecus (Chlorocebus pygerythrus) was captured by the military (Photo
4.57) in a savanna area in the Kyangulungo region. Another female with young was
recorded by a camera trap in the vicinity of the Dombo port. Several individuals have
been observed on both banks of the Kwanza River, in open savanna areas or even on
river islands or in riparian zones near tracts of discontinuous gallery forests. Several
Chlorocebus species and subspecies are recognized, but information on the Angolan
populations is insufficiently consistent to facilitate comparisons with other African
IV-140
regions where data are more abundant. The recording of young individuals during the
current expedition documents the occurrence of the reproductive season in the region in
the period evaluated, for the Chlorocebus is known for having a synchronized
reproductive peak, with approximately 80% of births occurring within a two- to threemonth interval. Females give birth once a year, and the reproductive period usually
coincides with the beginning of the season, when resources are more abundant.
Photo 4.57: Young Chlorocebus pygerythrus captured in the area by the road that
connects Kyangulungo to the Kwanza River. The smaller photo shows a female with its
young photographed on the Kwanza River right bank, near the Dombo port.
There has been also a daytime record of the yellow baboon (Papio cynocephalus) and
two nighttime records in the area adjacent to the road to the Capanda AH. Five
individuals have been observed also in the Pungo Andongo area (Photo 4.58).
IV-141
Photo 4.58: Papiocynocephalus (yellow baboon) photographed in the rustic area on the
left margin of the road to Capanda village/Location 5.
Order Rondetia
Rodents of the gender Cricetomys are large-sized in the Myomorpha group, weighing
up to three kilograms and attaining 80 centimeters in length, tail included. Four species
are known for the gender and little information is available for Angola, though C.
ansorgei is a form recognized for the Pungo Andongo region. Two of the species
captured in the traps were not identified.
One individual was photographed in a rocky zone on the Kwanza River left bank (Photo
4.59) where hyraxes also occur. One specimen of this gender is preserved at the
Capanda AH Environmental Laboratory. Footprints have been observed on the Kwanza
River left bank (Capanda AH).
IV-142
Photo 4.59: Cricetomys sp. photographed on the Kwanza River left bank, near a steep
rock formation.
One individual of an unidentified species of the Sciuridae family (squirrel family) was
observed on the Kwanza River left bank. However, no further information has been
obtained and there is great need for collecting zoological material for a precise
identification.
There were two sightings of mole-rats (Criptomys sp.) in the vicinity of Location 5.
They were probably moving from one colony to another, as their movements in open
areas are unusual, for these rats are burrowing animals. Signs of the presence of molerats have been observed in the form of mounds of excavated earth in a continuous
pattern, photographically recorded on the Kwanza River left bank (Photo 4.60).
IV-143
Photo 4.60: Burrows of mole-rats on the left bank of the Kwanza River.
The presence of Cape porcupines (Hystrix africaeaustralis) has been recorded on the
basis of the layout of the burrows and footprints system (Photo 4.61). These evidences
of occurrence are abundant on both margins of the Kwanza River, in savanna zones
where soils are deeper and less rocky. No individual has been directly observed, as the
evaluation work was done in the daytime in the areas with greater probability of
occurrence of this species, whose activity is essentially nocturnal.
The greater cane rat (Thryonomys swinderianus) is a relatively common species in open
areas with dense grass (Photos 4.62 and 4.63). It has been sighted in the field in a zone
of gallery vegetation on a left bank tributary of the Kwanza River. A high frequency of
feces has been observed in grassy areas on the Kwanza River left bank. The differences
in the occurrence of these evidences suggest sharp contrast in the abundance of this
species, when the two banks of the river are considered, as he right bank is under a
greater hunting pressure, owing to its easier access.
IV-144
Photo 4.61: Burrows of the Hystrix africaeaustralis (in this case, apparently in search
of food instead of shelter) observed on the right bank of the Kwanza River (Photo on
the left). Footprint (right front paw) observed near a small left bank tributary (Photo on
the right).
Photo 4.62: Thryonomys area on the Kwanza River left bank.
IV-145
Photo 4.63: Thryonomys swinderianus specimen obtained from trappers; and feces
observed on the left bank of the Kwanza River.
Order Lagomorpha
Scrub hares (Lepus lcf. Saxatilis) have been occasionally sighted on the road between
the Capanda AH and Location 5 (bank of the Kwanza River). One particularity of the
individuals sighted, which suggests confirmation of the species, is the brownish stripe
on the top of the head, the black stripe on the upper part of the tail, and ears not as long
as those of the L. capensis. The species, which seems to be common n the region, was
photographed (Photo 4.64) already during the first expedition (April 2008).
Another leporid sighted was possibly a Peolagus, seen on the banks of the Kwanza
River, including in the vicinity of the Capanda AH. The Peolagus is very similar to the
Oryctolaguscuniculus (common rabbit in the wild). However, the O. cuniculus is
restricted to the extreme northwest of the African continent, in the Mediterranean
region.
Hares have been sighted numerous times during nocturnal surveys for this update
(2013), but no species could be identified.
IV-146
Photo 4.64: Lepus cf saxatilis photographed in the study area. The species
characteristics are noticeable (see detail on the Photo), but there is need of confirmation,
given the great Lepus variability on the African continent.
Order Chiroptera
The Nycteris gender is easily distinguishable owing to its unique tail with a
cartilaginous end in the form of a Y or a T. The Nycteris grandis has a fur pattern that
ranges from an orangey red to a creamy brown (Hickey and Dunlop, 2000). It should be
noted that this specific identification is preliminary.
Should this record as N. grandis be confirmed, it will be an actual extension of this
species’s distribution, as today it is only know on the northern border of Angola. Such
confirmation would corroborate the assumptions of Hickey and Dunlop (2000) that this
species considered until now to inhabit preferentially forests can also occur in savanna
areas.
The Hipposideros gender consists of a group of approximately 67 species widely
distributed in Africa, except for a considerable part of the north and of extreme south of
the continent. The little known H. ruber species inhabits savanna regions and
subtropical and tropical forests. In the case of the N. grandis, a taxonomic reevaluation
would be necessary.
IV-147
Order Carnivora
Identification of the serval (Leptailurus serval), a specimen available at the Capanda
AH Environmental Laboratory, has been confirmed by examination of the collected
material. There have been also signs of the presence of a leopard (Panthera pardus) on
the Kwanza River right bank (in the vicinity of the Dombo port). These signs have been
associated with the odor of urine deposited for territory demarcation by a large-size
feline (possibly this species). Comments by local hunters about the frequent occurrence
of leopards in the region and a possible sighting by geologist Rogério Pinto Ribeiro
(Intertechne) in the Caculo-Cabaça AH region point to their occurrence in the region.
Although it is not an easily detected species, its occurrence may still be common in the
Middle Kwanza River region.
Genet individuals (Genetta spp.) have been sighted along the Capanda AH road, in open
grassy savanna between the Dombo port and the Muta/Capanda road. Footprints have
been observed in some places on the left bank of the Kwanza River (Photo 4.65) (09°
49’ 49.86” S; 15° 30’ 53.92” E), and a photo has been taken on the river’s right bank,
near the Dombo port (Photo 4.66).
Photo 4.65: Genet footprints on the left bank of the Kwanza River.
IV-148
Four species are known in Angola and at least three more are expected to be found in
the Middle Kwanza River region. There is an unidentified specimen at the Capanda AH
Environmental Laboratory.
Photo 4.66: Genet photographed on the right bank of the Kwanza River near a gallery
forest in transition to a grassy savanna.
Order Herpestidae
The marsh mongoose (cf. Atilax paludinosus) is a relatively small carnivore (adults
attain little more than 5.0 kilograms), they are normally associated with bodies of water,
where they feed on crustaceans and small vertebrates, such as amphibians. Evidence of
its occurrence (Photo 4.67) has been noticed on the Kwanza River banks, at the
Capanda dam, but the species may be widely distributed. The longish toes are quite
particular, as it is the only herpestide with this characteristic and footprints as large as
those found.
IV-149
The white-tailed mongoose (Ichneumia albicauda) has been photographed (Photo 4.68)
on the Kwanza River’s right bank. Color particularities and overall appearance indicate
that it belongs to this species. This form has wide geographical distribution on the
African continent and a great variety of breeds with distinct variations. A subspecies
(Ichneumia albicauda loandae Thomas, 1904) has been described for Angola, typically
in Pungo Andongo, which makes the Middle Kwanza River a region of particular
interest for understanding this group’s variability on the African continent.
Photo 4.67: cf. Atilax paludinosus footprints seen on the Kwanza River’s left bank.
IV-150
Photo 4.68: Ichneumia albicauda photographed in the vicinity of the Dombo port, on
the Kwanza River’s right bank.
Order Artiodactyla
Vestiges (teeth) of a warthog (Phacochoerus africanus) have been found on the right
bank of the Kwanza River (Dombo port). Several footprints have been spotted in mud
bath areas (dry in August) in a grassy tract near the river’s right bank. One individual
was photographed (Photo 4.69) near the Caculo-Cabaça AH. A trapper interviewed said
that this species is quite common in the region and is frequently trapped with wire
lassoes (several traps of this type were seen in the Kyangulungo region).
IV-151
Photo 4.69: Warthog (Phacochoerus africanus) photographed in the Caculo-Cabaça
AH region.
The presence of the bushpig (Potamochoerus larvatus) was described by a trapper in the
Kyangulungo region. This species differs from the warthog mainly by the dense hairs
on the body, which facilitate identification, in addition to the fact that this form is
expected for the Middle Kwanza River region, consistently with the pertinent literature.
The hairs’ particularity has been underlined by two trappers interviewed; this
information was considered to be reliable, although no individual has been sighted. The
species is much hunted by the regional population as a major source of protein.
The hippopotamus (Hippopotamus amphibious) and its usual vestiges (footprints, trails,
and grazing areas) (Photo 4.70) has been sighted on both banks of the Kwanza River. It
seems to be more common on the river’s left bank. Five individuals have been sighted
at the Capanda AH, and two about 2.0 kilometers downstream from the Dombo port
(Photo 4.71).
The isolated footprints of a forest buffalo (Syncerus caffer) (Photo 4.70) have been seen
on the Kwanza River’s left bank. Isolated footprints may indicate the presence of males,
as females usually live in groups. This species occurs in the area, but it has been heavily
IV-152
hunted by local populations; it is now experiencing a time of recovery, as the conflicts
have ceased and the traffic of war weapons has declined.
IV-153
Photo 4.69: Forest buffalo footprint on the Kwanza River’s left bank.
This is an important species, not only from the great predators’ conservation point of
view, but also as a source food for the populations of the Middle Kwanza River. There
are indications of the occurrence (abundance of footprints and feces) of smaller
antelopes such as bushbuck (Tragelaphus scriptus), duiker (Sylvicapra grimmia), and
blue duiker (Cephalophus monticola). These forms seem to be abundant in areas with
relatively dense vegetation (grassy tracts and zones of transition to gallery forests).
Small antelopes are extremely important for supporting the carnivore populations,
including local human populations that have in them a valuable resource. Signs of the
occurrence of waterbuck (Kobus ellipsiprymnus) have been seen on the right bank of the
Kwanza River; this is reinforced by both footprints and by hunters’ reports. The hairs
of the animal’s posterior (usually white in this species) are used as arrow stabilizers by
hunters of the region. This species must mean an important resource for the region’s
populations, given its size (adult males may weigh up to 270 kilograms) and the
frequent comments about it as a hunting target.
IV-154
 Avifauna
In the study area 92 species of birds, belonging to 43 families, and 17 orders were found
on the field surveys done between 2007 and 2009. They are listed on Table 4.16 below.
Table 4.16: Avifauna recorded in the study area.
Order
Family
IV-155
Species
Order
Family
IV-156
Species
Order
Family
IV-157
Species
Order
Family
IV-158
Species
The field work for this study (2013) identified 82 species, shown on Table 4.17.
Most of the birds recorded in the area were visually observed, except for five species,
whose identification was done only by bird calling. There were seven species whose
identification is considered “probable;” not only it is extremely difficult to identify
them, buy they were sighted only fleetingly, which hindered a more careful analysis. It
was possible to photograph 27% of the bird species recorded (22 out of 82).
In view of the limited observation time, the figures do not adequately reflect the local
ornithological wealth; the survey remained incomplete because it was impossible to
have access to the entire left bank of the Kwanza River, just as it was difficult to explore
the river itself properly.
The region of the project’s implementation has a considerable avifauna wealth, owing
particularly to its condition of transition between the coastal dry savannas that extend
into the hinterland, following the Kwanza River above Cambambe, to the proximity of
some forest ecosystems typical of the Angolan escarpment, but above all to the Miombo
forest biome that covers a large part of the Angolan plateau and is dominant in the area
affected by the project. Moreover, the Kwanza River itself, on a rocky bed, with a
considerable, permanent flow, often set deep between mighty cliffs, contributes to the
existence of quite interesting lacustrine ecosystems and of significant forests on some
slopes. All these factors contribute to the wealth of the area’s biological communities.
Most of the information collected is related to habitats consisting of Miombo savannas,
grassy grazing lands, and some more developed forests next to the Kwanza River or to
its tributaries. However, given the aforementioned conditions, the fluvial areas of the
denser forests are underrepresented, for access and logistic reasons. This limitation is
reflected on the analysis of the list of birds obtained. Accordingly, the number of water
or marsh birds is lower than expected. Similarly, the number of forest birds is far lower
and does not conveniently reflect the number of specimens that must occur in some
dense forest areas that remained inaccessible to us.
As to the structure of the ornithological listing, we may say that it is relatively balanced,
with 57% of the birds belonging to the Order Passeriformes (47 out of 82). It is
IV-159
surprising that so many passerines have been identified, as they are usually smaller and
more difficult to identify.
The absence of species of the Phalacrocoracidae, Anatidae, Rallidae, and Glareolidae
families among those that are not Passeriformes is also surprising, as is the nearly
complete absence of members of the Ardeidae and Ciconidae families, which can be
explained by the impossibility of doing proper surveys along the Kwanza River and by
accidental circumstances.
One of the most relevant ornithological categories in any study is that of the birds of
prey, the predators at the top of the food chain, a good environmental indicator of the
ecosystems’ overall condition. In our case, eight species were recorded, i.e., 10% of the
total, which should be seen as a typical, normal ratio in relatively balanced ecosystems.
Six species considered stand out; they belong to the Accipitridae (including two
vultures) and the Falconidae (two species).
Still as regards those that are not Passeriformes, mention should be made of the
abundance of birds of the Columbidae family, with five species of turtledoves and three
species of nightjar (Caprimulgidae). All of them have been photographed.
As regards the Passeriformes, one should first note the extraordinary wealth of the
Hirundinidae family, of which swallows and kindred birds are examples, and whose
presence is favored by the Kwanza River and the diversity of fluvial habitats and
associated cliffs and savannas. Mention should also be made of the abundance of
members of the Ploceidae family, 13 species of which have been identified; this is not
only extremely relevant but also an indicator of good savanna habitats and an
abundance of grasses, as these birds are essentially grain eaters. On the negative side,
one may point out the poverty of Pycnonotidae, Turdidae, Sylvidae, and Nectarinidae,
of which only from one to three have been recorded. The low representativeness of
these four families may be simply a question of chance, the difficulty of identifying
some of their species, and mainly the impossibility of conveniently exploring the dense
forest and some tracts of riparian habitats.
Some photographed and identified species in the area (shown on Table 4.17) are listed
in Annex VI.
IV-160
There follow some comments on the identified species that are considered to be
relevant, on which basis some conclusions may be drawn about the condition of the
ecosystems in the area.
Table 4.17: Birds recorded by the field survey (2013)
Portuguese name
English name
IV-161
Scientific name
Portuguese name
English name
IV-162
Scientific name
Portuguese name
English name
Scientific
Birds that benefit from human communities
These are birds that usually proliferate in close proximity of human communities and
that benefit directly from human impact on the ecosystem. They may be good indicators
of the degree of degradation of a habitat. Two of these birds have been identified, but
both with low intensity.
IV-163
• Cattle egret (Bubulcus ibis): This is a species usually found where there are
cattle but which also seeks urbanized areas, where it feeds on garbage and debris
left by man. They have been sighted in small flocks on two occasions,
concentrated on trees on the left bank of the Kwanza River, near the dam site.
But its presence still seems to be little significant.
• Pied crow (Corvus albus): This is another species nearly always absent from
pristine habitats. Its presence thus promptly denotes some degree of disturbance.
Only two specimens have been sighted on just one occasion as they flew over
the project’s urban area. Though this species’s presence seems to be little
significant, as in the previous case, it is expected that its numbers will increase.
Birds of prey
There follows a list of some birds of prey recorded, which give an indication of the
environmental condition of the ecosystems:
•
White-head vulture (Trigonoceps occipitalis): This is the only threatened
species recorded in the course of this study, which is classified as vulnerable on
the IUCN Red List. This species has significantly declined in the entire
distribution area, which is a sign of slow reproduction and of sensitiveness to
environmental disturbance. It is thus another good biological marker, indicating
the existence of extensive tracts of miombo forests and savannas not yet much
disturbed by man. One adult and one young have been sighted, both flying high
upstream from the dam, within the project’s direct influence area. The sighting
of both adult and young clearly suggests this species’s nesting in the
undertaking’s area, something worth stressing.
• Palm-nut vulture (Gypohierax angolensis): This is a very common species in
Angola; many specimens were sighted both along the Kwanza River and on the
adjacent savannas. This species is very tolerant to man-made disturbances of the
environment; its abundance in the area is a good environment indicator, possibly
reflecting the wealth of the fluvial ecosystems (Photo 4.72).
IV-164
• African red-necked buzzard (Buteo auguralis): As this is a species usually
associated with the mosaic of dense forests and woods of northern Angola, its
sighting in the area should be stressed (Photo 4.73), as it is a good
environmental indicator, which probably reflects geographical proximity to
North Kwanza forests.
• Peregrine falcon (Falco peregrinus): The sighting of a couple of peregrine
falcons in the dam area is a quite relevant fact as this is a highly emblematic bird
and a top predator. Although it is not listed as a threatened species, it is
extremely sensitive and a prime environmental indicator. The sighting of a
couple strongly suggests the possibility of nesting in the area, probably owing to
the abundance of steep cliffs along the Kwanza River.
Photo 4.72: Palm-nut buzzard.
IV-165
Photo 4.73: Red-necked buzzard.
Endemic birds
The two species below are endemic to Angola, i.e., they do not occur in other countries.
Although many species endemic to Angola are rare or threatened, these two do not raise
particular conservation concerns.
• Red-crested turaco (Tauraco erythrolophus): This bird is quite possibly
Angola’s emblem owing to its uniqueness and beauty. Despite everything, it is
common in the central and northern part of the country, always associated with
escarpment and gallery forests. Abundant on the coastal plain, it is also found in
the northern hinterland along rivers. It may be seen as a good environmental
indicator; its sighting on one of the Kwanza River tributaries upstream from the
dam is worth stressing.
• Red-backed mousebird (Colius castanotus): This is another endemic species,
quite abundant in the western half of the country, which proliferates in both
preserved spaces and in impacted and even urban zones, a reason why it cannot
be considered as a good indicator. It proved quite common in the project’s area.
Other birds
IV-166
There follows a list of some birds whose occurrence or abundance in the project’s site
deserve to be mentioned:
•
Common button quail (Turnix sylvatica): Neither rare nor threatened, this
species is in great abundance in the area. This is surprising, and deserves
mentioning (Photo 4.74). A very elusive species, it was nevertheless sighted
every day, particularly on forest trails upstream from the dam. It is thus a good
indicator of the condition of the area’s grassy savanna.
•
Namaqua dove (Oena capensis): Although not a rare species either, it is
prevalent in desert or semiarid areas. The sighting of some specimens (Photo
4.75) was thus somewhat unexpected. However, it reflects both its migratory,
wandering nature and the proximity of semiarid habitats that extend from the
coastal plain along the Kwanza River to the vicinity of the Dondo.
•
Lesser grey shrike (Lanius minor): Though clearly migratory, this species is
rare or little common in Angola, a reason why the sighting of a specimen near
the project’s urban area should be underlined (Photo 4.76).
Photo 4.74: Common button quail (Turnix sylvatica).
IV-167
Photo 4.75: Female Namaqua dove (Oena capensis).
Photo 4.76: Lesser grey shrike (Lanius minor).
IV-168
 Herpetofauna
Given their sensitiveness to any changes in the environment, amphibians are an
extremely important fauna group. As they depend on water and breathe in and absorb
substances through the skin, they are extremely vulnerable to pollution. They are thus
one of the best environmental indicators, and for this reason their populations should be
monitored.
And yet, localization, observation, and identification of amphibians are very
problematic, owing to their small size and cryptic, seasonal behavior, as well as to the
lack of up-to-date knowledge about them in Angola. In general, the best time to survey
amphibians is the first peak of the rainy season, November-December. Although April
is not the ideal time, it is still possible to gather some information that can be very
useful.
Three amphibian species belonging to three families and 28 reptile species belonging to
13 families and three Orders, as shown in the Table 4.18 below (2007-2009) were
found.
Table 4.18: Herpetofauna occurring in the study area.
Group
Order
Family
Amphibians
Reptiles
IV-169
Species
Group
Order
Family
Species
Ophidea
Unidentified species
It should be noted that some of the species described in the 2013 survey should have
their identification confirmed (See Table 4.19). Be as it may, the doubtful species were
collected and are awaiting conclusive identification. These species are described below:
• Flat-backed toad (Bufo maculatus): This species is very common and widely
distributed in Angola. Several of these toads were spotted along small streams
and tributaries; in one place they were very active and in a reproductive phase.
Two specimens were photographed (Photo 4.77).
IV-170
•
Angolan reed frog (Hyperolius angolensis): A very common species widely
distributed throughout the entire country. It is usually associated with humid,
swampy areas. Several specimens were captured (Photo 4.78) in Kwanza River
tributaries upstream from the dam. We were also able to record their
characteristic sound by the Kwanza River downstream from the dam.
•
Senegal Kassina (Kassina senegalensis): Several specimens of this species
were located on a property near an old quarry by the roadside on the basis of
their quite characteristic call. It is widely distributed in the country in swampy
areas and shallow waters. Owing to its cryptic behavior, it is very difficult to
capture.
•
Natal puddle frog (Phrynobatrachus natalensis): This species is very common
in swamps, ditches, and shallow waters. Several specimens were located on the
Kwanza River banks through their characteristic call.
•
Anchieta’s ridged frog (Ptychadena anchietae): A relatively common species
found in swampy areas in humid savannas or miombo. Several specimens were
captured in the urban area and duly photographed (Photo 4.79).
•
Crowned bullfrog (Hoplobatrachus accipitalis): Relatively uncommon species
and a frightening predator for other amphibians and thus a good environmental
indicator. Several specimens were sighted in temporary puddles, next to trails
downstream from the dam, but no capture was possible.
No threatened amphibian species on the IUCN Red List was found.
IV-171
Photo 4.77: Flat-backed toad.
Photo 4.78: Angolan reed frog.
IV-172
Photo 4.79: Anchieta’s ridged frog.
Table 4.19: Amphibians identified by the environmental survey (2013)
Portuguese name
English name
Scientific name
Reptiles are a major fauna group and their characterization is important in studies such
as this. However, a herpetological survey faces great difficulties, given the species’s
elusive nature, which hinders capture. In addition, there is a lack of publications about
Angola’s reptiles.
Accordingly, the survey was based on chance, in an attempt to identify the maximum
number of species (See Table 4.20). It was also possible to consult Mr. Henrique Lima’s
photographic file, which made possible the identification of some snake species that
occur in the area.
• Leopard tortoise (Geochelone pardalis): A commons species in the entire
country. One specimen was found by workers in the urban area during our stay.
IV-173
•
Puff adder (Bitis arietans): Commonly known as “surucucu,” this poisonous
snake was photographed by Mr. Henrique Lima near the Laúca dockyard.
• Short-snouted grass snake (Psammophis brevirostris): this harmless snake
was also photographed by Mr. Henrique Lima in the Laúca dockyard.
• Black mamba (Dendroaspis polylepis): the infamous and feared black mamba
was also photographed by Mr. Henrique Lima in the project’s urban area.
• African rock python (Python natalensis): commonly known as “jiboia”, this
species was also photographed by Mr. Henrique Lima.
• Skink (Mabuya sp.): a female skink was sighted in one of the cliffs directly
downstream from the dam, but it was not possible to capture or to photograph it;
its identification thus remained incomplete.
• Yellow-throated plated lizard (Gerrhosaurus flavigularis): several specimens
were sighted and photographed on forest trails upstream from the dam (Photo
4.80).
• Black-lined plated lizard (Gerrhosaurus cf. nigrolineatus): one specimen was
photographed (Photo 4.81), but needs confirmation.
• Namibian rock agama (Agama planiceps): several specimens were sighted and
photographed (Photo 4.82) on rocks and cliffs on the right bank of the Kwanza
River.
• Tree agama (Acanthrocercus atricollis): only one specimen was found on a
tree and photographed (4.83).
• Nile crocodile (Crocodylus niloticus): Several photographs taken of this species
by Mr. Henrique Lima in various locations of the Kwanza River were shown to
the team.
No threatened reptile species figuring on the UICN Red List was found.
Table 4.20: Reptiles recorded by the environmental survey (2013).
IV-174
Portuguese name
English name
Photo 4.80: Male yellow-throated plated lizard.
IV-175
Scientific name
Photo 4.81: Black-lined plated lizard.
Photo 4.82: Male Namibian rock agama.
IV-176
Photo 4.83: Tree agama.
4.3.10. AQUATIC FAUNA
 Benthic macroinvertebrates
The benthic macro-invertebrate community, which inhabits the bottom substrate, is
represented by organisms larger than 210 µm, associated with some type of submerged
substrate, such as leaves, rocks, trunks, or sand. Populations coexist and interact among
themselves and with the environment in a given habitat, forming associations of
organisms. These associations’ structure has characteristics such as specific
composition, wealth of species, density, biomass, diversity, and trophic relations among
the individuals. Their dynamics is related to these associations’ temporal organization,
owing to fluctuations in recruiting, abundance of organisms, and efficiency in the recolonization of the substrates after natural or artificial disturbances.
In general they live their entire lifecycle or part of it in the aquatic environment; their
energetic base is debris, particularly of an allochthonous origin. The nature of sediments
IV-177
and the depth of the body of water, coupled with the availability of food and oxygen,
are the main factors on which the communities’ structure and distribution in the
environment are based.
They are important not only because of their role in the food chain but also in
processing allochthonous and autochthonous organic carbon (Fisher and Lihens, 1973;
Petersen et al., 1989), thereby influencing the availability of food for fish and other
vertebrates associated with water courses, such as birds and mammals (Sagar and
Eldon, 1983; Bachman, 1984; Pierce, 1989).
This group has been used as an efficient tool for this environmental diagnostic of rivers.
In temperate regions, environmental quality indexes have been developed on the basis
of data on this community, which have become part of official biomonitoring protocols.
Collections were made along the Kwanza River, where sampling areas were defined
always with a view to the representativeness of the study area (2007-2009). Collection
points were similar to those of limnological studies and of studies on water quality and
fishes, so that parameters can be applied to both projects.
Choice of the equipment for biological collections depended on the sampling location
and the type of locally available infrastructure. Specific nets were used for benthic
organisms, as well as traps.
All biological material collected on the field was placed in a plastic container with 10%
formalin, and then in flasks specific to each of the different taxa, and duly identified and
labeled. Data pertaining to the sampling locations’ environmental parameters
(temperature, dissolved oxygen, conductivity, and transparency of the body of water)
were duly recorded in the field notebook for later analysis.
In the rainy season the water speed hinders the permanence of benthic organisms in the
stretches of rapid flow. At the same time, the margin areas expand, owing to the
widening of the river channel. The shallow margins are usually dry in the dry season, so
that the compacted clayey or sandy soil of poor consistency makes difficult the
colonization of annelids, mollusks, or insect larvae, and offer no shelter or feeding
IV-178
ground for crustaceans. On the other hand, the bank vegetation, being temporarily
flooded, may provide shelter and food for aquatic organisms when the waters’ speed
slows down.
In the dry season the scenario changes to its opposite, giving rise to specific
environments for the development of this particular fauna, especially decapod
crustaceans. None of these organisms was collected live; only the remains of a
crustacean was recorded (Photo 4.84).
Photo 4.84: Carapace of a crustacean typical of the Kwanza River.
Ichthyologic fauna
The purpose of this study is to make a diagnosis of the fish species collected from the
Kwanza River. The fishes were collected during an expedition in the flooding season
(April 2008), and also in 2002 by Hamilton Garboggini dos Santos, the Capanda AH’s
resident biologist. This study has thus served as a preliminary guide for knowing the in
the Middle Kwanza River, and will be used here for providing data on the possible
impact of the Laúca AH from a general perspective.
The ichthyologic specimens were collected at the locations specified below with 3.0 m
and 10-m dragnets, both of 4.0 mm mesh. The 3.0 m net was the one most used, as it
IV-179
was easier to handle in locations of rapid flow and rugged bottom. A dip net about 35
cm x 35 cm was also employed in lentic environments, with slow flows and still waters.
It should be noted that at the time of the field work (April 2008, the end of the rainy
season), the Kwanza River had a voluminous, rapid flow, which hindered access to
many collection points.
All collected specimens were fixed in situ with 10% formalin. To ensure more efficient
fixation, formalin diluted at 10% was applied with a syringe on medium- and largesized fishes (usually more than 12 cm longer than the standard, i.e., from the snout to
the base of the tail fin). The collected specimens were placed in duly labeled plastic
bags, which were then sealed. Later, the specimens were identified and photographed at
the laboratory.
The Caculo-Cabaça location (Photo 4.85) was the westernmost (downstream) visited.
At this point the Kwanza River has lotic characteristics (rapids and strong currents) in
the middle, and lentic (pools and small marginal lagoons) on the margins. As the current
locations were not accessible, the collection effort was done on the right bank.
A small stream measuring 0.5 m at its widest point flows into the Kwanza River at the
sampling location after flowing down a steep slope. The sampling environment is an
area flooded by the river, with some small marginal trees that have their roots
submerged, lagoons, streams, and puddles. The current varied from weak to moderate.
The collection was done in a small marginal lagoon whose depth varied from tens of
centimeters to 2.0 meters, running parallel to the river on the right bank; its width
ranged between 3,0 meters and 4.0 meters and its length was about 15 meters. Rocks
and trunks hampered the dragging of the net (the 3.0 m dragnet was used). The region
has environments favorable to fishes that usually live in lairs (e.g., small and large
pebbles in abundance, rocks, submerged trunks, much shade, etc.). Much effort was
made to catch such fish but none was sighted nor caught, except for one Cichlidae
specimen: a Pharyngochromis cf. schwetzi.
IV-180
Photo 4.85: Marginal environment at the Caculo-Cabaça location.
At the Laúca location on the river’s right bank, at the foot of a steep slope of difficult
access (105-meter high), the Kwanza River takes the form of a small basin on the right
bank, and has calmer waters, like puddles. Trees with submerged trunks indicate that
this environment exists only in the flooding season. Near the bank, the sampling spot
was 2.0-meter deep. Although the location is a sort of pool, there is a reasonable current
very close to the bank. The area had many submerged trunks and rocks, which
hampered the dragging of the small net (3.0 meters). The bottom was muddy, with large
submerged rocks and pebbles.
The species collected were as follows: Cyprinidae (Barbus sp. 1), one specimen;
(Barbus brevidorsalis), three specimens; Poeciliidae (Aplocheilichthys cf. johnstonii),
14 specimens.
The Muta 1-Mata location, also on the river’s right bank, is situated next to a stretch of
steep bank (Photo 4.86). The collection environment is lentic, with strong current a few
meters from the bank. There was also much grass partially submerged on the edge,
giving rise to flooded environments appropriate for sheltering fish. The bottom is
predominantly muddy, with many submerged trunks and large rocks. The sampling
environment was very close to the bank and shallow, about 1.0-meter deep, but a few
IV-181
meters from the bank the depth increased to over 2.0 meters and the current was strong.
Only the small dragnet (3.0 meters was employed).
The species collected at this location were as follows: Cyprinidae - Barbus sp., one
specimen; Barbus sp., five specimens; Alestidae – Brycinus cf. lateralis, one specimen;
Cichlidae – Tilapia rendali, four specimens; Pharyngochromis cf. schwetzi, 9
specimens; Mastacembelidae – Mastacembelus cf. batesii, two specimens; Poeciliidae –
Aplocheilichthys cf. johnstonii, 39 specimens.
The Muta 2-Mata location, a few hundred meters upstream from the Muta 1-Mata
location, is settled into more sheltered and varied areas (Photo 4.87) – a large basin with
partially submersed trees, indicating that this environment is dependent on flooding.
This basin had strong, variable currents. There were many submerged rocks and trunks,
in addition to grass in abundance, and other kinds of vegetation in the water. This
location encompassed two types of micro-environments, where fishes were collected: a
larger basin and a small marginal, still-water lagoon. This lagoon was 3,0-meter wide
and 5-meter long, shallow (less than 1.5-meter deep), with slightly warmer, stagnant
water. Both the 10-meter and the 3.0-meter dragnets were used. The collected species
IV-182
were as follows: Cyprinidae – Barbus sp., one specimen; Labeobarbus marequensis,
one specimen; Cichlidae- Tilapia rendalli, two specimens; Pharyngochromis cf.
schwetzi, two specimens; Poeciliidae - Aplocheilichthys cf. johnstonii, 27 specimens.
Location 5 was easily accessible by the road from Capanda. It is a basin with muddy
bottom, with a submerged plank (used by bathers) (Photo 4.88). The environment had
little current, as it was a reasonably sheltered beach. Some trees were partially
submerged, owing to the flood. There was much vegetation, but the occurrence of
submerged grasses is uncertain. This location was sampled on successive nights and
many catfish were caught.
The species collected were as follows: Schilbeidae – Schilbe cf. bocagii, one specimen;
Mochokidae – Synodontis sp., 31 specimens; Claroteidae - Parauchenoglanis
ngamensis, one specimen; Cyprinidae – Barbus greenwoodi, two specimens; Cichlidae
– Pharyngochromis cf. schwetzi, 17 specimens.
IV-183
Photo 4.88: Sampled marginal environment at the rain gage post.
• Ichthyologic fauna survey results
The list herein included follows the modern classification of the Actinopterygii group,
which encompasses bony fishes (Nelson, 2006) and includes the species collected
during the April 2008 expedition (marked with *) and those collected mainly by
Hamilton Garboggini dos Santos in 2002. This material is kept at the Capanda AH
Environmental Laboratory. It must be noted that the fish specimens recorded in the
literature and that were not collected or examined by the author were not included on
this list. The list farther ahead includes only species collected, examined, and screened
at the Capanda AH.
For identification of fish genders and species, the invaluable Poll monograph (1967) on
Angolan fishes was repeatedly consulted, as well as other more recent works.
Most specimens of the species listed below were captured with gillnetting with meshes
of 30 mm to 40 mm between knots. About 1,200 specimens of fish of the Middle
Kwanza River were examined during the expedition that coincided with the flooding.
Some of these are shown in the photos included here.
IV-184
The number between braces after the species’s name indicates specimens examined, and
may be an approximation in some cases (e.g., Cyprinidae). The designation
“Cyprinidae gen. et spec. indet.” includes hundreds of larger Cyprinidae specimens,
many of which could not be identified as to gender, but approximately ten distinct forms
were recognized at the first screening done at the Capanda AH.
The list below includes 42 species recognized as being different (some provisionally) in
24 genders, with an additional eight possible genders (and at least the same number of
species) yet to be confirmed. These are grouped under “Cyprinidae gen. et spec. indet.”
and “Cichlidae gen, et spec. indet”. A more precise identification of nearly all species
require a more thorough study to determine their specific characteristics, which includes
counting bones and fin rays and scales situated on the lateral line, in addition to Rx for
counting vertebrae in certain cases (e.g., representatives of the Mormyridae family).
The following abbreviations are used: cf. = (Latin confer), to indicate that the species’s
identification is uncertain (e.g., Petrocephalus cf. simus); sp., to indicate species
pending further studies for a more precise identification and which possibly have not
been identified yet (e.g., Labeo sp.1 Barbus sp.2).
Some relevant characteristics of identified species are presented here. Cyprinidae and
Cichlidae groups have not been addressed; in general, only species but also genders) of
doubtful identification. In the following paragraphs, “bone” refers to a rigid structure,
usually sharp, serrated or not or not, that may form the anterior part of pectoral, dorsal,
and anal fins. The word “ray” refers to a more flexible structure, which may be
segmented or distally forked, found in all fins (even when one bone or more are also
found). The listed characters are diagnosed together and do not mean an affirmation
about the possible monophylia of the species under scrutiny.
IV-185
Chart 4.1: Ichtyofauna list. OSTEICHTHYES
IV-186
IV-187
Order Osteoglossiforms
IV-188
The Mormyridae, popularly known as “elephant fish” is formed by fresh water fishes of
the Order Osteoglossiforms. It is one of Africa’s most diversified freshwater families,
with about 18 genders and 201 species (Nelson, 2006). Mormyridae may generate (in
organs located at the caudal peduncle) and interpret weak electric currents used for
communication, predatory activity, and to detect predators. It is believed that they can
build nests for keeping their fecundated eggs, but little is known about their
reproductive physiology. In general, fishes of this family are more active at night;
during the day many prefer to remain hidden in the vegetation on river banks, in lentic
environments, while others frequent environments with stronger currents and rocky
bottoms. Some inhabit higher water, while others prefer the bottom. They feed on
invertebrates and small fishes (Skelton, 2001).
The only specimen of Petrocephalus cf. Simus examined from the Kwanza River is very
similar to Petrocephalus simus, a species recognized by the following characteristics
(Hopkins et al., 2007): fusiform body, laterally compressed, very small subterminal
mouth, olphactory organs close to each other, the posterior located very close to the
eye; small, bicuspid teeth in a single row in each jaw, with 8-14 upper teeth and 16-22
lower teeth; large eyes (at 23%-30% of the body height); dorsal fin with two nonsegmented rays and 19-28 segmented rays; the pre-dorsal distance is almost equal to the
pre-anal distance; anal fin with one nonsegmented ray and 26-32 segmented rays;
caudal peduncle narrower in the anterior part; 36-44 scales disposed on the lateral line
and 10-16 parallel rows of scales below the lateral line; markedly forked caudal fin;
dark brown color (in preservative), without conspicuous marks.
The Marcusenius dundoensis, according to Poll (1967) an Boden et al. (1997), is
characterized by a slightly oval body; laterally compressed; small, terminal mouth, with
a roundish subterminal anterior projection; small, bicuspid teeth in a single row in each
jaw, with five upper and six lower teeth; dorsal fin with 20-23 rays; anal fin with 26-30
rays; anal fin originating before the dorsal fin; dorsal fin ending before the anal fin;
eight circumpeduncular scales; 51-61 scales disposed on the lateral line; forked caudal
fin; caudal peduncle narrower in the anterior part; brown color (in preservative); a
darker, narrow vertical bar between the dorsal and the anal fins; and equally darker head
and caudal peduncle.
IV-189
Ten specimens of a Marcusenius species very similar to M. moorii (previously known
as M. lambouri) were caught in the Kwanza River. This species’s description, based on
Boden et al. (1997) and Hopkins et al. (2007) is as follows: slightly oval, laterally
compressed body; small, terminal mouth projected forward owing to a submentonian
extension; small, bicuspid teeth in a single row in each jaw, with five upper and six
lower teeth; relatively small eyes (eye length: 12.9%-15.6% of the length of the head;
17-24 rays in the dorsal fin; 24-33 rays in the anal fin; anal fin originating before the
origin of the dorsal fin (by a distance equivalent to 3-4 rays); eight circumpeduncular
scales; 37-45 scales disposed on the lateral line; relatively small forked caudal fin;
caudal peduncle narrower in the anterior part; dark brown color (in preservative), with a
darker vertical bar between the dorsal and the anal fins.
A single specimen of Marcusenius (Photo 4.89), closely resembling the M. stanleyanus,
was caught, although this identification is provisional, still pending more thorough
studies.
Photo 4.89: Marcusenius cf. stanleyanus (measuring about 20 centimeters)
According to Poll (1967), this species has slightly oval, laterally compressed, and
relatively tall body; terminal mouth nearly at the same height as the eyes and with welldeveloped sumentoniana projection; relatively large dorsal cephalic region in relation to
the eyes ; small bicuspid teeth in a single row in each jaw, with 5-7 upper and 8-9 lower
teeth; dorsal fin with 28-33 rays; anal fin with 38-42 rays; anal fin originating before the
origin of the dorsal fin and terminating after the dorsal fin; 78-84 scales on the lateral
line; caudal peduncle narrower in the anterior part; dark brown color (in preservative),
IV-190
with slightly darker shades on the head’s dorsal region, below the dorsal fin, and on the
caudal peduncle.
Order Gonorynchiformes
The species of the Kneridade occur exclusively in fresh waters of Africa. This family
consists of four or five genders and 30 species (Nelson 2006). The gender Parakneria
encompasses relatively small species, but with larger sizes in the family, measuring up
to a standard 15-cm length. Opercular organs are absent in both sexes in Parakneria (in
Kneria they help the male remain adjacent to the female during reproduction. Little is
known about reproduction in this family, and practically nothing about the Parakneria.
About 12 species are recognized as valid for this gender. They are rheofile fish of
flowing waters, which feed on Diatomaceae and algae scratched off rocks.
According to Poll (1967), the Parakneria cf. Vilhenae (Photo 4.90) is described as
follows: elongated, fusiform, not very tall body, with widened, flattened ventral surface;
ventral mouth, in slit form; relatively straight lateral line; origin of the dorsal fin
anterior to the origin of the pelvic fins; three bone spines in the dorsal fin, followed by
eight rays; anal fin closer to the caudal fin than to the pelvic fins; three bone spines in
the anal fin, followed by 5-6 rays; 16-18 rays in the pectoral fins; pelvic fins with nine
rays; caudal fin with 19 rays; minute scales, 73-82 of which on the lateral line; color of
the fixed material: brown with large, dark, not well-defined blotches on the flanks and at
the base of the caudal fin.
The five specimens caught in the Middle Kwanza River, of a single species, resemble
the P. vilhenae, but this identification needs confirmation, as these specimens may be
actually P. marmorata.
IV-191
Photo 4.90: Parakneria cf. Vilhenae.
Order Cypriniformes
The Cyprinidae consists of about 321 genders and 3,260 species (Nelson, 2006). It is
the most diversified family of fresh water fishes. It has economic importance, as it is the
fish most caught and most consumed by the riverine populations of the Middle Kwanza
River, especially near the Dondo. Its general biology is quite varied and complex, with
neofílicas, benthic species of still waters, with feeding preferences that range from
predators of the top of the food chain to algae scratched off rocks.
There are many reproductive strategies in this family. Some species have more
elaborate reproductive strategies in terms of laying of eggs and caring for them, but all
species reproduce by scattering their eggs, which are extremely fecundated, and without
parental custody (De Weirdt et al., 2007).
The captures made indicate that the Cyprinids make up the most diversified and
abundant fish group also on the Middle Kwanza River. The diversity of species in this
family in this river in relation to the other fish groups is greater than it was expected.
Many species and even genders have not been accurately identified. Thus, several taxa
included in the aforementioned list as “Cyprinidae gen. et spec. indet” and many
species distinct from Barbus, listed as Barbus sp., and some Labeo, Labeobarbus, and
possibly Varicorhinus are still unidentified.
IV-192
The Raimas cf. christyi (Photo 4.91) is recognized according to Poll (1967) by the
following characteristics: fusiform, low, and laterally compressed body; large oblique
mouth extending to the eyes’ posterior limit; relatively large eyes; three spines in the
dorsal fin, followed by 7-9 rays; relatively long anal fin with three spines followed by
13-15 rays; caudal fin with 19-21 rays; 49-51 scales on the lateral line; brownish color
in the fixed material, with 11-15 longitudinal, more or less elongated spots on the flanks
and a circular spot on the caudal peduncle. This identification needs confirmation. The
species is abundant in the Middle Kwanza River.
The Barbus brevidorsalis, also abundant in the Middle Kwanza River, was identified by
Poll (1967) and by Skelton (2001) by the following characteristics: relatively short, tall
body; slightly oblique mouth; absence of barbels or a pair of vestigial barbels in larger
individuals; relatively large scales; 24-27 scales on the median horizontal line on the
flanks; lateral line restricted to only a few anterior scales; dorsal fin with three nonforked rays and seven forked rays; anal fin with about 24 rays; a wide horizontal band
on the flanks and a dark, roundish spot around the caudal peduncle.
IV-193
Photo 4.91: Specimens of the order Cypriniformes: A) Raimas cf. christyi; B) -H)
different species of the gender Barbus.
The Barbus greenwoodi species, according to Poll (1967), has the following
characteristics: relatively elongated body; terminal, non-inclined mouth; two pairs of
barbels, of which the posterior is more developed; relatively large scales forming a
series 30 on the lateral line; relatively long dorsal fin with three non-forked and nine
forked rays; anal fin with three non-forked and six forked rays; forked anal fin, with
about 22 rays; small dark spots on the lateral line, forming a more or less complete
series extending nearly to the caudal peduncle, where there is a larger and darker oval
spot, and an elongated spot at the base of the anal fin, as well as another elongated, oval
spot above the pectoral fin and under the dorsal fin; the color may vary with the dark
spots’ location.
The Barbus cf. radiatussp. is relatively abundant on the Middle Kwanza River.
According to Poll (1967) and Skelton (2001), this species is recognized by the
following characteristics: relatively thin body; terminal, slightly oblique mouth; two
pairs of very small oral barbells; apparent sensorial channels in the head and facies;
relatively large scales in a series of 24-29 on the lateral line; complete lateral line;
relatively tall dorsal fin with three non-forked and nine forked rays; relatively small anal
fin with three non-forked en five forked rays; dorsal and pectoral fins starting on the
same vertical line; forked caudal fin with about 21 rays; darker dorsal color, with a dark
horizontal line starting in the snout, passing over the eye and continuing over the lateral
line, without conspicuous spots.
The Labeo species included here is very similar to the L. annectens (Photo 4.92), a
species originally described for Cameroon, but widely distributed in western Africa,
especially in the Congo basin (Poll, 1967; Skelton, 2001; Tchibwabwa, 2007). These
authors describe this species thus: markedly, elongated, tubular body; elongated head
with eyes in a posterior position; not very large eyes, positioned laterally and dorsally;
snout with an accentuated groove and a small fleshy projection at the extremity;
granular nodules on the head and snout; thick lips, particularly the superior lip; large
scales; 35-38 scales on the lateral line; complete lateral line; robust dorsal fin with a
concave superior border with 9-10 forked nodes; anal fin with six forked rays; anal
IV-194
operculum located somewhat distant from the origin of the anal fin; dark chestnut color
(in preservative), somewhat darker dorsally, with a dark horizontal strip in smaller
individuals.
The Labeobarbus marequensis species attains relatively large sizes (50-centimeter
length standard and weighs up to 6.0 kilograms). It has been described by Poll (1967)
and Skelton (2001) as having a relatively elongated, not very tall body; not very large
eyes; subterminal, slightly oblique mouth, which varies somewhat among individuals;
two pairs of barbels separated by a gap, the posterior barbel being the most developed;
large scales, with 27-33 scales on the lateral line; complete lateral line; not very large
dorsal fin with four non-forked and 8-10 forked rays; not very large anal fin, with three
non-forked and five forked rays; forked caudal fin; pectoral and pelvic fins not very
large; uniform color, without significant spots in adults, but in a darker shade in the
head and dorsum; in live specimens the color is described as changing from greenish to
yellowish and as being more intense dorsally.
Photo 4.92: Labeo cf. annectens (A, B) and Labeobarbus marequensis (C).
Order Characiformes
IV-195
The species of the Alestidae family are relatively common in African rivers. The family
encompasses 18 genders and 110 species (Nelson 2006). Many species form schools
and may migrate upstream to reproduce. They are usually omnivorous. In many species
the male has a modified anal fin to direct the semen deposition during reproduction. The
eggs are affixed on floating nests or marginal vegetation.
The numerous specimens of Brycinus collected are very similar to B. lateralis, better
known in the Congo and Zambezi Rivers’ basins. According to Poll (1967) and Skelton
(2001), this species may be identified by the following characteristics: fusiform,
laterally compressed body; small terminal mouth with two rows of sharp teeth in each
jaw; relatively tall and short dorsal fin, with two non-segmented rays and eight
segmented rays situated in the middle of the dorsal region, more or less on the pelvic
vertical; anal fin with three non-segmented and 15-16 segmented rays; anal fin with
significant sexual dimorphism (this fin is larger and curved in males); relatively large
scales, with 30-33 scales on the lateral line; brownish or orangey color (in preservative),
with a thin, dark horizontal band on the lateral line and a significant oval spot in the
caudal peduncle.
The only specimens of the gender Rhabdalestes collected may be tentatively identified
as R. Rhodesiensis (Photo 4.93). According to Poll (1967), this species has a fusiform,
laterally flattened and relatively thin body; small terminal mouth, with the jaw
projecting somewhat forward; multi-cuspid teeth in a single row in each jaw, with 6-8
upper and eight lower teeth. Dorsal fin with two non-segmented and 7-9 segmented
rays, in a posterior position in relation to the pelvic fins; relatively long anal fin, with
two or three non-segmented and 16-19 segmented rays; males with convex anal and
females with concave anal; brownish or orangey color (without preservative), with a
dark, thin stripe on the lateral line, and an oval spot on the caudal peduncle and a small
horizontal spot above the anal fin.
IV-196
Photo 4.93: Brycinus cf. lateralis (A and B); and Rhabdalestes cf. rhodensiensis
(C).
The Hepsetus odoe (Photo 4.94), with wide distribution in the rivers of western and
southern Africa, is easily identified. It inhabits calmer, deep waters in canals or flooding
lagoons. The young prefer marginal environments to hide in the vegetation. A
carnivorous species, it is a predator of the top of the chain food. Couples are paired for
reproduction and prefer to affix their eggs to floating vegetation nests in lagoons and
calm waters. Adults protect the incubated eggs in the nests. The young remain
associated with the nests in the early metamorphose stages (Skelton, 2001).
According to Paugy (2007), some of their characteristics are as follows: a fusiform,
elongated and straight body, but not very tall; well-developed terminal mouth
extending from the top the snout to the eye level; flat top of the head; developed eyes,
reaching 1/6-1/8 of the lead’s length; dorsal fin posterior to the pelvic fins, with two
spines and 7-9 rays; anal fin with 2-3 spines and nine rays; adipose fin; well-developed,
forked caudal fin; 45-49 vertebrae; darker color on the dorsal region and lighter in the
belly (in preservative), with at least three wide, dark horizontal bands on the head, and
IV-197
vertical spots on the flanks, plus numerous dark spots on the fins. This large-size
species measures up to 50 cm standard length.
Photo 4.94: Hepsetus odoe.
Order Siluriforms
Fishes of the Amphilidae family are very conspicuous catfish, as their body is
attenuated, usually small, benthic, and rheophilic, that prefer rocky substrates. There are
about 12 genders and 66 species (Nelson, 2006). Most of them feed by scrapping algae
off rocks and hard substrates. Almost nothing is known about their reproduction.
The two specimens of the Doumea angolensis (Photo 4.95) caught are minute and
unfortunately are not very well preserved. According to Poll (1967), this species may be
identified by a relatively small head, with a longer snout than the post-orbital cranial
roof; a relatively elongated body; three pairs of short barbels, the longest being the
internal mandible’s; relatively tall dorsal fin with one spine and seven rays; adipose
lower fin, long rather than tall, equidistant from the dorsal and the caudal fins; caudal
fin with the inferior lobe slightly longer than the superior; relatively elongated anal fin
located closer to the pelvic fins than to the caudal fin, with three spines and six rays;
pelvic fin with one well-developed, thick spine and five forked rays; very large pectoral
fin with an equally well-developed spine and 11 rays; dark chestnut color (in
preservative), darker dorsally and lighter in the belly, with diffuse spots on the dorsum,
at the base of the pelvic fin and on the head, with not well-defined stripes on the fins.
IV-198
Photo 4.95: Doumea angolensis.
Fishes of the Claroteidae family, according to Nelson (2006), are classified into seven
genders and 59 species. These species prefer rocky or slow waters where there is
vegetation and shade. They feed preferentially on invertebrates and on fish. Details on
their reproductive biology are unknown, but some members lay few, relatively large
eggs, which may suggest parental care (Skelton, 2001).
According to Poll (1967) and Skelton (2001), the Parauchenoglanis ngamensis (Photo
4.96 A) has a relatively large, flat head; three pairs of barbels with robust bases, the
mandible barbels being the most developed; relatively thick lips; small, thin teeth set on
a rectangular dorsal and a ventral plate; dorsal fin with a strong, robust spine and seven
segmented rays; spine in the pectoral fins serrated on the interior borders and well
developed; anal fin with four to five non-segmented rays and eight-nine segmented
rays; adipose, well-developed, elongated fin; yellowish or light brown dorsum and
flanks and white belly; circular spots on five-seven vertical bands on the flanks; fins
with dark spots, usually smaller than or the same size as the eyes.
The only specimen of the gender Chrysichthys resembles a C. delhezi (Photo 4.96),
which, according to Poll (1967), is identified by a relatively large, flat head; large eyes;
large mouth with thick lips; four pairs of thin barbels, the longer of which is the
maxillary; dorsal fin with one spine and six soft rays; adipose, little developed fin
situated closer to the caudal fin than to the dorsal fin; well-developed anal fin with 1113 rays; robust, moderately forked caudal fin; more or less equidistant ventral fins of
similar size; grayish color (in preservative), dorsally darker, without conspicuous spots.
IV-199
Photo 4.96: Parauchenoglanis ngamensis (A) and Chrysichthys cf. delhezi (B).
The Mochokidade is the largest family in terms of number of species of African
catfishes, with about ten genders and 180 species (Nelson, 2006). Some genders
(Synodontis) inhabit stagnant waters rich in vegetation, while others (Chiloglanis) live
in environments with stronger currents. It prefers small invertebrates as food, but may
also scratch algae off hard substrates. Almost nothing is known about their
reproduction, except that fecundation is external and the deposited eggs probably do not
have parental protection.
The collected Synodontis species (Photo 4.97 A) does not seem to be the same reported
for the major basins near the Kwanza River (e.g., Congo, Okavango/Zambezi), such as
the S. zambeziensis, the S. nigrospottus and the S. macrostigma (Skelton, 2006). In
general, it resembles rather the S. nigrospottus, but differs from it at least in color. The
species collected in the Middle Kwanza River has the following characteristics:
relatively flat head; robust eyes; three pairs of barbels, of which the maxillary is the
longest, while the mandibular two are branched; pointed humeral process; dorsal fin
with robust serrated spine followed by six rays, with a quite visible prolongation of the
IV-200
first ray; anal fin with nine rays; adipose anal fin originating almost on the same
vertical line; relatively robust anal fin; forked caudal fin with about 30 rays; brown
dorsal color, ventrally lighter (yellowish) with large, darker spots and spots on the
flanks and small circular spots (more or less the same size as the eyes) on the fins.
The only Chiloglanis specimen collected (Photo 4.79B) needs to be studied in more
detail to confirm whether it belongs to the C. lukugae species. Poll (1967) characterized
this species as having flat head; relatively small eyes; three pairs of short barbels;
medium-size anterior dorsal fin with one spine and five rays; adipose fin situated closer
to the caudal than to the dorsal fin and much longer and tall; forked caudal fin; welldeveloped anal fin, larger than the pelvic fins, with three short spines and six-seven
rays; pectoral fin with one thin spine and nine rays; pelvic fins with one thin spine and
seven rays, situated closer to the anal fin than to the pectoral fins; brown color (in
preservative), with large, lighter spots on the dorsum, head, and flanks, and darker spots
on the fins, particularly on the caudal fins, which have two better defined spots.
Photo 4.97: Synodontis sp. (A) and Chiloglanis cf. lukugae (B).
The Shilbeidade has about 20 genders and 34 families (Nelson, 2006). It consists of
catfishes, which are active swimmers and inhabit the central waters. They may form
schools and are more active at night. They are carnivorous. The eggs are usually
IV-201
deposited on floating vegetation on the margins of the river. They are economically
important.
The many collected specimens of this species probably belong to the S. bocagii (Photo
4.98), the only member of the gender recorded on the lower Kwanza River (De Vos,
1995). This author identified this species as follows: flat head somewhat rectangular as
compared with the dorsum and relatively small; posterior nostrils close together; four
pairs of barbels, the longest being the external maxillary; relatively long spines in the
pectoral and dorsal fins; pectoral spine, slightly serrated on the internal border; dorsal
fin with one spine and six rays; anal fin with 43-53 rays; small adipose fin, always
present; dorsal chestnut color and lighter ventral shade, with a significant humeral spot
and another at the center of the caudal fin.
Photo 4.98: Schilbe cf. Bocagii.
The Clariidae are catfish of economic significance (especially Clarias), which attain
large sizes in general (there are records of specimens weighing 59 kilograms). Currently
14 genders and 90 species are recognized as valid (Nelson, 2006). Accessory organs
(subbranchial organ) permit this species of the family to survive for long periods out of
IV-202
water. Most of the species are omnivorous; many feed on actively fishes and even on
other vertebrates. Many may migrate upstream to reproduce, but may also reproduce in
lagoons with stiller waters. Some species lay eggs that fix themselves onto submerged
roots and trunks.
The collected specimens of this gender may be considered with some assurance to be C.
ngamensis. According to Poll (1967), Teugels (1986), and Skelton (2001), this species
may be identified by the following characteristics: robust, fleshy body; flat, elongated
head; well-developed eyes; four pairs of barbels; dorsal fin with 56-66 rays; anal fin
with 50-58 rays; a small adipose fin or crest; caudal fin clearly separated from the dorsal
and anal fins; relatively small pectoral and caudal fins; pectoral fin with a spine,
serrated only externally; well-developed suprabranchial organ; dorsal grayish color and
white belly.
The species Clariallabes platyprosopus (Photo 4.99B), according to Skelton (2001), is
characterized by a wide, flat head, with robust cheeks; small eyes close to the nostrils;
four pairs of barbels, the external maxillary being the longest, reaching the head; dorsal
fin with 73-82 rays, originating behind the pectoral fins; anal fin with 56-63 rays; caudal
fin not continuous with the dorsal or anal fin; reduced suprabranchial organ; small,
roundish pectoral fins with one fin serrated on both borders; dark color almost on the
entire body, but dorsally darker, with exception of the area anterior to the pelvic fins.
Photo 4.99: Clariasngamensis (A) and Clariallabes platyprosopos (B).
IV-203
Order Perciformes
The fishes of Cichilidae family have different forms of incubating their fecundated eggs
and many different reproductive and trophic strategies (Stiassny et al., 2007). There are
two basic kinds of parental care of the offspring: oral incubation (which involves
polygamy, and only the female incubates the eggs) and incubation in nests formed in the
substrate (usually involves monogamy and the males also care for the eggs). In general,
they are omnivorous.
According to Nelson (2006), this family has 112 genders and 1,350 species. During the
expeditions to the Middle Kwanza River 200 specimens of this family were collected.
Many individuals could not be identified as to gender. Two groups of species may
belong to unidentified genders “Cichilidae gen. et spec. indet. 1 and 2,” in the listing
shown) and three probably Oreochromis specimens were also collected, but their
identification is very imprecise, requiring further data.
Another Pharyngochromis family may have been collected, different of the species
identified as Pharyngochromis cf. schwetzi addressed further ahead. Thus, these groups
whose identification is very uncertain have not been treated in detail, although they are
also included on the list.
The Serranochromis specimens collected (Photo 4.A) resemble the S. angusticeps, and,
according to Poll (1967, Skelton 2001), may be identified by the following
characteristics: robust head and body; head indented above the eyes; large mouth almost
reaching behind the eyes, and oblique; 23-24 scales on the superior lateral line and 1517 on the inferior lateral line; dorsal fin with 13-16 spines and 14-17 non-segmented
rays; anal fin with 11-13 non-segmented rays; vivid color when alive, with numerous
reddish spots on the head and the fins; long vertical bars on the flanks and cephalic bars
starting from the eyes in a radiating pattern; dark brown color (in preservative), lighter
on the belly, with faded vertical bars and spots of a less defined and less vivid color.
The Tilapia rendalli (Photo 4.B), a quite common species in the Kwanza River, may be
recognized by the following characteristics (Poll, 1967; Skelton, 2001): relatively tall
IV-204
body; convex head; dorsal fin with 14-16 rays and 12-13 rays; anal fin with three rays
and 9-10 rays; 28-32 scales on the lateral line; dark brown color (in preservative) with
6-7 darker, somewhat faded vertical bars; a large, though diffuse spot on the operculum;
small round spots on the fins, at times forming horizontal bands; lighter, little reddish
ventral color.
The species Pharyngochromis cf. schwetzi (Photo 4.C) is very abundant in the Middle
Kwanza River, but its identification is still uncertain. It is possible that another species
of this gender was collected during the expeditions, but a more thorough study is
needed. The collected specimens resemble the P. schwetzi, which may be identified by
the following characteristics, according to Poll (1967): a not very tall body; relatively
large eyes; thick, slightly oblique lips; numerous bicuspid teeth on the external row and
tricuspid on the internal row; relatively tall dorsal fin, with 15 spines and nine rays; anal
fin with three spines and nine rays; 20 scales on the superior lateral line and 12 on the
inferior lateral line; vivid color (in life), golden or yellowish on the dorsum, the head,
and the flanks, and lighter on the belly, with numerous small, orangey and reddish spots
(smaller than the eyes) on the fins and flanks.
IV-205
Photo 4.100: Serranochromis cf. angusticeps (A); Tilapia rendalli (B); and
Pharyngochromis cf. schwetzi. (C).
Order Synbranchiformes
The Mastacembelidae family consists of about five genders and 73 species (Nelson,
2006), which inhabit a great variety of environments. Many prefer the rivers’ marginal
vegetation (some may even bury themselves in the riverbed). They are carnivores. Little
is known about their reproduction.
Identification of the species Mastacembelidae is very difficult, and the identification of
the M. cf. batesii (Photo 4.101) is only provisional. Poll (1967) points to the following
characteristics:, eel-like body; snout anteriorly projected, prominent but not as much as
in other species of the gender, and projecting slightly downward in its anterior
extremity; triangular head as seen from above; small, rounded pectoral fins; 31-32
spines preceding the dorsal fin, the anterior ones being the smallest; dorsal fin with 7590 rays, originating near the median line and continuous with the caudal and anal fins;
two spines precede the anal fin ventrally; 15-16 scales arranged between the lateral line
and the dorsal fin; dark chestnut color on the dorsum and yellow color on the belly;
irregular, interrupted dorsal spots; brown horizontal bands o the head and the
operculum; dorsal, caudal, and anal fins with a pattern of irregular vertical bars.
IV-206
Photo 4.101: Mastacembelus cf. batesii.
Order Cyprinodontiformes
The Poecilid family is currently represented by 37 genders and 304 species (Nelson,
2006). These fishes are popular with aquarists. Many members of this family are
characterized by internal fecundation. They lay their eggs on marginal or floating
vegetation. The eggs of the species collected in the Middle Kwanza River are not
resistant to the dry period (differently from the eggs of annual fishes, which are closely
related to the collected gender). In general, the members of this family occupy river
banks, hidden in the vegetation in calmer waters. They feed mainly on insects that
inhabit the water surface.
The species Aplocheilichthys cf. johnstonii collected (in abundance) may actually
belong to a new species of this gender; the identification as being possibly A. johnstonii
(Photo 4.102) is provisional, pending further studies. The diagnostic presented here was
taken from Poll (1967) and Skelton (2001): tubular body, a little flattened dorsally,
more robust in males than in females; small terminal mouth turned upward; relatively
large eyes; dorsal fin in an anterior position, preceding the origin of the anal fin; dorsal
fin with 6-8 rays; anal fin with 11-15 rays; anal fin showing sexual dimorphism, with
males having a much longer fin than females; caudal fin also much longer in males; 2732 relatively large scales arranged into a horizontal band (the lateral line is limited to
IV-207
the head); caudal peduncle is twice as long as it is tall; color also indicating sexual
dimorphism, with males displaying more vivid colors, with a bluish bar (in life) on the
dorsal, caudal, and anal fins and with numerous small, round spots forming broken
bands on male fins; yellowish dorsum, lighter ventral shade, with a bluish horizontal
band at the height of the lateral line; dark top of the head, with a horizontal band
passing through the eye. Some authors recognize this species as Micropanchax.
IV-208
Photo 4.102: Aplocheilichthys cf. johnstonii.
• General observations
The preceding list of species shows that there is a great variation among fishes of the
Cyprinidae family, the most diversified in the idle Middle Kwanza River. As a rule,
these fishes are detritvorous or omnivorous, and provide a food source for carnivorous
fishes (such as the Alestid Hepsetus), thus being an important element of the food chain.
Other predators include the catfish Clarias ngamensis, the largest catfish found in the
river, which differs from the smaller catfishes for being a voracious carnivore.
However, most of the species listed would fall into the lowest ranges of the food chain
(i.e., they are herbivorous and detritvorous species).
Most of the individuals collected are young, but already metamorphosed specimens,
with the exception of the Mastacembelids and the Cyprinodontids. This was to be
expected, as the expedition’s collecting work was done on the river’s margins and in
IV-209
lentic environments, such as pools and small marginal lagoons, where typically young
individuals concentrate (many species deposit their eggs in the margins). The
Mastacembelids and the Cyprinodontids spend their entire life cycle among submerged
vegetation. The Poecilid Aplocheilichthys cf. johnstonii, however, are small-sized fishes
that live in areas flooded according to the flood cycle.
Another aspect to be considered is the endemism of species in the Middle Kwanza
River, as yet not very well known. As regards possibly migratory species, the Middle
Kwanza River has already suffered a strong impact from the Capanda AH and the
Cambambe AH dams, situated, respectively, upstream and downstream from the Laúca
AH. Migrating fishes cannot overcome these barriers. Migratory species include at least
members of the families Alestidae, Cyprinidae, and Clariidae.
4.4. ANTHROPIC ENVIRONMENT
4.4.1. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURE
For the diagnostic of the Direct Influence Area and the Directly Affected Area, in
addition to secondary data gathering, the same procedures that were indicated for the
Regional Coverage Area and the Indirect Influence Area were employed. The most
thorough field work was done in 2009 and included visits to the municipalities and
communes, where administrative authorities were interviewed.
For the EIA on the deviation of the river course (2012) members of the villages affected
by the undertaking were contacted and interviewed within a radius of 25 kilometers
downstream the river. The objective was to secure information on current living
conditions of the local populations. The quantitative and qualitative procedures
followed for this study were as follows:
•
Interviews with key sources of information, such as the Adjunct Communal
Administrator of São Pedro da Quilemba, and the village Sobas [local traditional
village leaders];
•
Determination of the number of social initiatives in the AID;
IV-210
•
Preparation of guides for individual interviews with Municipal and Communal
Administrators and with focal groups in the communities;
•
Interviews with focal resident groups in the localities close to the project.
•
Walks, direct observation, and recording of images (photographs were taken of
homes, croplands, work tools, fruit trees, etc.), and the geographical coordinates
of the studied locations were determined (GPS);
•
Visit to the Libolo municipality (South Kwanza), where the Municipal and
Communal Administrators of Quissongo and Cabuta were interviewed;
•
Visit to the Mussende municipality (also in South Kwanza), where the
communities of Kissaquina and Bangwangwa were studied, localities were
observed, and the Municipal Administrator was interviewed;
•
Visit to the Cacuso municipality (Malanje), where in addition to interviews with
the Municipal and Communal Administrator of Pungo Andongo, the
communities situated along the Capanda-Dondo road were studied in the
undertaking’s indirect influence area, as they are at a quite high altitude in
relation to the Kwanza River; and
•
For updating the study and stressing the deviation of the river course, visits were
made to the villages of Nhangue Ya Pepe and Ndala Ngola, Dumbo Ya Pepe,
and Kibenda, which are located within 15 kilometers downstream from the
undertaking’s site. AID localities situated within a radius upstream from the
deviation of the river course were not considered, under the assumption that
these populations will not be affected; and
•
Visit to the Communal Administration of Quilemba.
For the social survey regarding the EIA on the river course deviation (2012), the work
consisted first in the preparation of guides for information gathering, the gathering
process proper, and analysis and treatment of the information obtained. In the first phase
of information gathering, the focus was centered on the municipalities of Libolo and
Mussende (South Kwanza), Cacuso (Malanje), and Cambambe (North Kwanza),
particularly on some communities that will be directly or indirectly affected by the
project. The second phase, which consisted in technical updating, visits were made to
the villages of Nhangue Ya Pepe, Ndala Ngola, Dumbo Ya Pepe, Kibenda, and Muta.
IV-211
The first surveys done (2007-2009) faced limitations related to insufficient, little
reliable information on the part of institutions, which varied greatly from source to
source. Thus, figures pertaining to the provinces are skewed, both as to quantity and
quality, and should be taken with reservation.
IV-212
The methodology adopted sought to systematize the study of this diagnostic, so as to arrive at an
analysis that identified the relation between demographic variables and qualitative data, and thus
establish interfaces in the socioeconomic and anthropologic domains. Figure 4.16 shows the
municipalities, communes, and sanzalas encompassed by the AII along the EN 322 road
Coordinates System
GCS WGS 1984
Dalum WGS 1984
Units: Graus
Village
Farm
Cemetery
Kwanza River
DATE: MAY 2013
Figure 4.16: Map of the Anthropic Environment – Territorial Organization – Indirect Influence
Area.
For the diagnostic of the direct influence area for this study (2013), in addition to the procedures for
gathering secondary data for the regional coverage area, field work was also done, including visits
to municipalities and communes, where administrative authorities were interviewed and heard.
Members of the villages and localities situated upstream and downstream from the Laúca AH dam
were also contacted and interviewed, within a distance of up to 43 kilometers from the project. To
secure information on the current living conditions of the local populations, a brochure and a form
for registration and commentaries (Annexes III and IV) were distributed do participants, with
IV-213
images and text illustrating the localization of the Laúca Project and its main aspects (Photos 4.103
and 4.104).
Photo 4.103: Social team’s visit to villages in influence areas.
Photo 4.104: Distribution and reading of the information brochure.
IV-214
Quantitative and qualitative procedures for this study and for surveying the terrain combined the
following techniques:
• Individual interviews with key sources of information, such as the Cacuso Municipal
Administrator and village Sobas;
• Interviews with specific groups of localities near the project; and
• Cross-country walks, direct observation, and photograph record of properties (homes,
croplands, and farms), work implements, trees, etc.; and determination of the geographical
coordinates of the studied locations with the use of GPS.
Information gathering in the localities took place May 8-12, 2013, and adopted as samples the
communities located within up to 43 kilometers upstream and up to 25 kilometers downstream from
the project, as mentioned in Chapter 1 (influence areas).
An assessment was also undertaken of some provincial and local socioeconomic aspects, for a
better comprehension of the context, including demographic figures, institutional and cultural
aspects, main social and economic activities, employment and unemployment, family income, legal
land tenure, relation to the river in the direct influence and the directly affected areas.
4.4.2. CURRENT SITUATION
•
Villages’ Social Organization
The villages studied are under the direction of traditional authorities structured as established by the
Government: Heads, Associate Heads, Sobas, Associate Sobas, and Sekulos. Although the
Traditional Authorities Statute has not been approved yet, their role as intermediaries between the
Government and other State powers and the populations is unquestionable. In addition to the
“official” traditional authorities, other informal leaders are found in the villages, including the
notables of the communities, usually elders that as a rule form part of the Mbanza. Other leaders
that cannot be bypassed are the MPLA leaders, the representatives of churches (catechists, pastors,
and deacons), the healers, and the more influential teachers. The services provided by the Municipal
Administrations of Cacuso and Cambambe to the citizens are usually very limited, and consist
IV-215
mainly, other than inservices in the health and educational areas, in the access to farming inputs, the
issuing of residence certificates and of opinions for obtaining land for agricultural purposes, vaccine
certificates, notary services 1 (birth records, identity cards, certificates, and authorization for
informal trade, among other documents). This situation is the same as in 2012.
•
Demography
Currently available demographic data are little reliable and extremely varied. According to the
information gathered from the populations studied, total population is estimated at 1,014
inhabitants. The 2012 survey estimated the total population at 273, not including the inhabitants of
the villages in the South Kwanza province, consisting of the “Ambundu” ethnolinguistic group.
Table 4.21: Number of inhabitants per village studied (2013).
Children
Adults
Villages
Men
1
Men
Seniors
Woman
Woman
Seniors
This service is provided only at the Chief Municipality.
IV-216
Total
Boys
Girls
Total
Total
Geral
Adults
Villages
Men
Men
Seniors
Woman
Children
Woman
Seniors
Total
Boys
Girls
Total
Total
Geral
The number of inhabitants per village is much lower than the average in other regions of the
country. As Table 4.21 shows, only four villages have more than 100 inhabitants. Those with the
largest population are Dala Kiosa, with 261; Calombe, with 153; Nhangue Ya Pepe, with 123; and
Ngola Ndala, with 108. Those with the smallest number of inhabitants are Kiringe, Cassula,
Kibenda, and Dumbo Ya Pepe, with eight inhabitants each.
However, there are different data on population increase and decrease in the villages in relation to
November 2012. In some, the population has decreased owing to the beginning of classes, as many
school age children had to leave for the city to attend school. In some cases, as in Ngola Ndala and
Muta, the population increased because these villages are close to the project and offer better living
conditions, having attracted young people waiting for employment in the Laúca AH.
•
Living conditions
Living conditions in the villages studied are very precarious owing to the lack of basic
infrastructure, such as water supply, basic sanitation, and electric power, as well as to the scarceness
and precariousness of health and education services, the lack of a transportation system, and an
absolute lack of employment and productive activities.
A major part of the population does not have an identity document, a significant datum, as this
document is essential for an individual’s access to institutions and for obtaining employment.
•
Health
Most of the villages lack medical services or medication, leading the population to resort with
greater frequency to the Dondo Municipal Hospital and to Cacuso, as is the case of the village of
Kibenda. In many cases, people resort to medicinal plants and herbs harvested in the vicinity. The
IV-217
main diseases are malaria, diarrhea, urinary infections, and conjunctivitis; there is no record of HIV
or AIDS.
Villages on the left bank of the Kwanza River (Calombe, Bangwangwa, and Kissaquina Sul) resort
to the Libolo Municipal Hospital and to the Caculo Regional Hospital.
The village of Ngola Ndala has a health center with 20 beds (Photo 4.105) and lodgings for a nurse,
financed by the farmer Manuel Vicente. This center is abandoned for lack of doctors and nurses.
According to witnesses in the community, the medical center will soon come under the
management of ODEBRECHT.
Photo 4.105: The abandoned health center in Ngola Ndala.
In addition to the abovementioned diseases, the sleeping sickness is also a reason of concern for the
local authorities; some cases of this disease have been recorded in the village of Ngola Ndala. The
use of medicinal herbs for treating diseases is widespread, and is common in all the villages visited.
Usually these medicinal herbs and plants are picked in the surrounding woods or are cultivated by
the residents. Delivery is done by traditional midwives in all the villages studied.
• Education
IV-218
There are no schools in most villages; and when they do exist, they are in an advanced state of
degradation.
Table 4.22: Access to school, and schooling level per village.
Villages
Access to School
Schooling level
Women are forced to leave the village for the
city so that the children may attend school.
Kibenda
Children attend school in the village of Nhangue
ya Pepe, approximately 4.0 kilometers away.
Only one adult can read and
write at a 4th grade level.
It has a school built 60 years ago, now in a poor
state of conservation.
Kyangulungo
Children are forced to go to the village of The highest schooling level in
Kissaquina to attend school. The teacher is the the village is 6th grade.
village “Regedor” who teaches in Kissaquina,
owing to the local school conditions.
Kirinje
There are no school-age children.
All villagers are illiterate.
The village has two schools: one with six
classrooms and no teachers; and one with one
classroom, built in colonial times and now
Muta
abandoned. In 2012 the Cacuso Municipal
Administration had designated a teacher, who
The highest schooling level in
the village is 4th grade.
taught from 1st to 4th grades, but he left, for
reasons the villagers ignore.
Cassula
The village has no school.
All villagers are illiterate.
The village has one school and one teacher who
teaches three classes in the morning (1st and 2nd
Nhangue Ya
Pepe
grades together); and one in the afternoon (3rd The highest schooling level in
grade). The school was built by a farmer, José the village is 3rd grade.
da Fisga. Fourth grade pupils are forced to stay
in Dondo or in Luanda to attend school.
Kassakina
The village has no school. Children attend
IV-219
Villages
Access to School
Schooling level
classes in the chapel of the Evangelical church.
The district Regedor is the teacher, who teaches
from 1rst to 3rd grade. Fourth grade students
have to live in the Cacuso Municipalities and in
the Dondo village.
Dumbo Ya
The village has no school.
Villagers are illiterate.
Pepe
Primary school children attend school, from 1st
to 3rd grade, in the neighboring village of
Ngola Ndala
Nhangue Ya Pepe, at a school built by the The highest schooling level in
farmer José Fisga. Fourth grade students have to the community is 6th grade.
live in the Dondo Municipalities and Luanda to
attend school.
Dala Kiosa
Children attend school in the chapel of the
Evangelical church.
the community is 6th grade.
Primary school children attend school in the
Calombe
Jango built by the Libolo Municipal
Administration
Bangwangwa
Kissaquina
Sul
Children attend school up to 3rd grade in the
neighboring village of Caxinga.
Children do not attend school, as there is no
Most of the population is
local school and the closest one is about 20
illiterate and the highest
kilometers away.
schooling level is 4th grade.
The school system in the villages is deficient and does not attend all school age children and youths.
Of the ten communities studied, only Nhangue Ya Pepe and Muta have schools, and only the
Nhange Ya Pepe School is in operation. The Muta school has no teacher. In Kissaquina and Dala
Kiosa children attend school in a church.
Owing to the lack of schools and teachers in most villages, children study up to fourth grade and
then are forced to live in cities or other villages, particularly in Dondo and Cacuso. This has caused
IV-220
economic destabilization, as parents or those responsible for the children’s education have to outlay
large sums, including for food, for the children’s upkeep. Another issue that deserves attention is
the fact that there are only three teachers in the villages studied in the Laúca Project region. One of
these teachers lives in one of the villages, while the other two live in Dondo and in Cacuso.
The Calombe teacher has his permanent residence in the headquarters of the Kissongo Commune
and travels every day to Calombe, where he teaches from 1st to 3rd grade. Some of the Kissaquina
children have to live in Calombe to attend school.
•
Housing
In all villages houses are made of adobe with a plate roof (Photo 4.106), blocks covered with
luzalite and/or mud, as specified on Table 4.23.
Table 4.23: Types and number of homes per village.
Villages
Kibenda
Adobe with
plate roof
6
Type and number of houses
Blocks with
mud house
luzalite roof
1
12
Total
17
Kyangulungo
14
1
3
18
Kirinje
5
-
2
7
Muta
22
1
2
26
Cassula
Nhangue Ya
Pepe
9
2
3
14
34
1
3
38
Kissaquina
24
1
5
30
Dumbo Ya
Pepe
4
2
-
6
IV-221
Observations
Located on the
two sides of the
national
highway
connecting
Dondo/Cacuso.
Located on the
two sides of the
national
highway
connecting
Dondo/Cacuso.
Located on the
two sides of the
national
highway
connecting
Dondo/Cacuso.
Adobe with
plate roof
29
41
Villages
Ndala Ngola
Dala Kiosa
Type and number of houses
Blocks with
mud house
luzalite roof
3
1
5
7
Total
33
53
Calombe
27
3
11
41
Bangwangwa
11
0
2
13
Kissaquina
Sul
5
0
17
22
Total
Observations
Located on the
two sides of the
shortcut road
connecting
Kissongo to
Kissaquina.
The houses do
not include
kitchens, which
are built behind
the large houses.
Two of the
houses in the
village are
abandoned.
318
According to the information obtained, no houses have an official document (CISA, title, or title to
land for construction).
Photo 4.106: Houses in Kissaquina.
•
Water, Electric Power, and Basic Sanitation
IV-222
The seats of the Cacuso and Cambambe Municipalities have running water. No village studied has
access to potable water, and depends essentially on rivers and LAGOONS in their vicinity.
Table 4.24: Access to potable water in the villages.
Access
Villages
Kibenda
Kyangulungo
Kirinje
Muta
Cassula
Rivers
Ganda River 400 meters from
the village
Kassela River about 500 meters
from houses
Teteje River
-
Kissaquina
Kaluage and Canganga Rivers
Dumbo Ya Pepe
-
Ngola Ndala
-
Dala Kiosa
Calombe
Cacuso and Kibulu Rivers
Mouiza River (indirectly)
Luinga River about 1.0
kilometer from the village
Luinga River with access by
the bridge located less than 200
meters
Kissaquina Sul
-
Lagoons about 500 meters from
the village
Ngola River about 1,000
meters from the village
Teteje River and some Lagoons
less than 500 meters from
houses
Nhange Ya Pepe
Bangwangwa
Lagoon
Lagoons less than 100 meters
from houses
from the houses
from the houses
River lagoons
-
In the villages studied there is no sanitation, and no treatment of house garbage. Garbage is thrown
out in the village surroundings and when it accumulates it is burned. In some cases it is buried in
holes made when dirt is dug out for making adobes for house construction.
A fact worthy mentioning is the reutilization of solid waste. In the villages studied the population
reuses plastic bottles and cans (from soft drinks, beer, sausage, butter, edible oil, etc.) as containers.
As to latrines, usually and for cultural questions, unprivileged families seem little inclined to use
them, relieving themselves in the open air. Until five years ago, imperatives related to habit and
IV-223
ancestral taboos caused a certain resistance to the use of latrines. None of the concerns and
complaints expressed by the population had to do with the building of latrines.
No village population has access to electric power; gas oil is used for lighting, and avery small
number of families have their own generators: four in Kibenda; three in Kyangulungo, including the
Soba family; two in Kirinje; seven in Muta; four in Cassula; five in Nhangue Ya Pepe; five in
Kassaquina; one in Ndumbo Ya Pepe; five in Ngola Ndala; eight in Calombe; three in
Bangwangwa; and two in Kissaquina Sul.
•
Transportation
There is no regular public transportation system serving the communes. The populations travel on
foot, covering great distances, rarely making use of private taxi or candongas.
The candongas are private vehicles that circulate irregularly on the Capanda AH-Dondo road or
between Laúca and Cacuso. As the only means of transportation available, they charge too high a
tariff for the residents’ purchasing power.
•
Local productive structure
Most of the populations have in agriculture their main economic activity; and a very small number
of young men work on the Laúca project or on local farms (Table 4.25).
Table 4.25: Number of people employed on the Laúca Project or on farms
IV-224
Number of young men
Villages
Laúca
Farms
The populations of the villages on the left bank devote themselves exclusively to working on the
field, hunting, and fishing. To earn some money, they sell some farm products, but much of this
production is wasted for lack of an outlet.
In nearly all villages most young men have registered for employment on the Laúca Project more
than three months ago, particularly young men from Dala Kiosa (30) and Kissaquina (20), and are
awaiting word from Odebrecht.
The villages’ production system consists exclusively in subsistence farming, with the utilization of
rudimentary, extremely low productivity techniques, and in occasional sales of surplus and of fruit.
The main crops are traditional products, such as manioc, the families’ basic food, squash, cowpeas,
and in some cases garlic and onions. The small plots are located at some distance from the villages,
to protect them from the goats, which are raised lose near the homes. The burning practice is widely
used to prepare the land for cultivation.
Two farms belonging to Kissaquina residents are located 12 kilometers from the village, right next
to the margin of the Kwanza River. These farms belong to the Boy brothers; they are productive
farms that employ young people from the region (Photo 4.107). Each of these farms has 2.0
IV-225
hectares. The oldest farm (Ze Boy’s) produces mainly maize, sweet potato, and manioc, and has
many buyers for its products in Cacuso and Malanje. The Jackson Boy farm has not yet had its first
harvest (according to the environmental consultant). In addition to the aforementioned products, one
should mention potatoes, bananas, and peanuts.
Photo 4.107: Irrigation system on the Jackson Boy farm.
IV-226
Photo 4.108: Crops on the Ze Boy farm.
As to animal husbandry, all families in the villages raise small animals, such as goats, pigs, hens,
and rabbits. The average number of animals per family is four to five. In the Nhangue Ya Pepe
village this average climbs to eight animals. Bovines are scarce; only nine families have heads of
cattle: two in Kyangulungo; six in Muta; and one in Kissaquina.
Hunting and fishing are exclusively male activities. As to fishing, according to the local population,
the Kwanza River has a wealth of fish species, the most common of which are cacusso, catfish, and
russombo, but distance from the river makes fishing difficult. Thus, when they go fishing, the men
remain several days on the banks, bringing back the dry fish in baskets called muhamba.
On the banks of the Kwanza River there are some straw shacks that belong to some 25 fishermen,
who live there with their families. These families are from the Kissaquina village (Photo 4.109).
Nearly all families in the villages sell some kind of farm product or fish from the Kwanza River
(Kyangulungo, Muta, Nhangue Ya Pepe, and Kissaquina) to ensure family income. Those who
work on the Laúca Project or on the farms draw a monthly salary of 10-15 kwanzas.
IV-227
Photo 4.109: Fishing community from the Kissaquina village.
Surplus farm products are often sold by the roadside and, if there is transportation, on the Dondo or
Cacuso popular markets. There are also some intermediaries, truck or pickup truck owners that
collect the products from the roadside to sell in Luanda. With such earnings, families buy salt,
sugar, clothing, and school and hygiene materials in the nearest towns, particularly in Dondo and
Cacuso. Many families gather múcua [baobab fruit] to sell by the roadside; this fruit is used for
making beverages or ice cream. In addition, the fabrication of coal on the savanna surrounding the
villages is a significant source of income complementation for some families. In the Ngola Ndala
and the Dala Kiosa villages, there are some food and beverage shops that may also cater to residents
from neighboring villages.
•
Support organizations
There are no nongovernmental organizations to support the rural communities. In Ngola Ndala and
Nhangue Ya Pepe there are some small initiatives for the establishment of traditional farming
cooperatives. These small associations operate this way, according to an interviewee: “a group of
people work together on a common tract of land, with responsibilities individually assigned, with a
view to achieve a good collective harvest, which is sold, and the sale product is distributed among
the group members.”
• Land use
IV-228
The role of the regular authorities in land management is directly related to the system of social
representation and use of partnerships. In the villages studied, this role consists in:
 Guaranteeing the right of each community member to own land for farming;
 Guaranteeing to members who absent themselves from the community their right to
cultivate and maintain their residence when they intend to come back, a right extended to
their legitimate heirs;
 Granting land to non-natives, provided they are interested in building their homes and
cultivating the land; and
 Organizing burnings for hunting purposes.
Access to land is obtained by a request to the Soba (in the case of non-natives). All members of the
villages, including women, have their own plot of land to work on, according to the customary
right; widows may inherit land from their husbands.
•
Religion
In a large part of the villages the predominant religion is Methodism, with the exception of
Kissaquina, where the predominant religion is the Evangelical. The Kyangulungo population
attends Sunday worship services in Kissaquina. Kirinje and Muta residents attend morning services
in the village of Muta.
In the Calombe and Kissaquina Sul villages there is no church. In the Bangwangwa village the
population is predominantly Catholic.
•
Culture, crafts, and leisure
The villagers share cultural habits, holding a celebration during the yearly cleaning of the Sobas’
cemetery, popularly known as Jindambo and considered a sacred place.
Table 4.26: Cemetery localization in relation to the villages and the Laúca Project
Villages
Kibenda
Kyangulungo
Kirinje
Muta
Cemetery location
30 meters from the village
Just a few meters from the village
In the area known as “fuxi-ya-lemba,” about 3.0 kilometers from the
Laúca Project and 6.0 kilometers from the Kwanza River
A few meters from the village
IV-229
Villages
Cassula
Nhangue Ya Pepe
Kissaquina
Dumbo Ya Pepe
Ngola Ndala
Dala Kiosa
Calombe
Bangwangwa
Kissaquina Sul
Cemetery location
A few meters from the village
7.0 kilometers from the Kwanza River (9o44’254”; 15o16’9.67”; 967meter altitude). Te old Jindambu is located on the margin of the Kwanza
River, about 1,000 meters from the fishermen settlement, across from
Kissaquina, Kwanza Sul. To reach the cemetery on the other side one
must cross the river by canoe, barge, or go by land, through Libolo,
Kwanza Sul.
About 200 meters from the village
On the left margin of the road
About 8.0 kilometers from the Kwanza River. There are sacred places
located in the quarry, where six great Sobas are buried (six stone tombs).
About 3.0 kilometers from the village
The Sobas’ cemetery is the same as the general population’s and is
located about 100 meters from the houses.
The ancient cemetery is located on the slope of a hill, less than 500
meters from the Kwanza River, at the same distance from the Luinga
River, and at about 1.5 kilometers from the Ze Boy farm. Eleven Soba
generations are buried in this cemetery.
A mass on the cemetery of the Nhangue Ya Pepe is also celebrated each year in memory of the
missionaries buried there.
Crafts are not practiced in all the villages for lack of clients. The villages where they are still
practiced are as follows: Kibenda, where older people make baskets, wood mortar-and-pestles,
washing boards, and clay cooking pots; Nhangue Ya Pepe and Ngola Ndala, where clay cooking
pots, palm-leaves mats, and baskets are made.
Not all villages have spaces for leisure. Those that do are: Kyangulungo, Muta, Nhangue Ya Pepe,
Kassaquina, and Ngola Dala, which have soccer fields. In Muta, Nhangue Ya Pepe, the young men
assemble on Sundays to play friendly matches with neighboring communities. Calombe also has a
soccer field, where friendly matches are also played on Sundays with neighboring communities,
particularly with the Kissongo Commune on Sundays.
4.4.3. RESULTS OF INTERVIEWS IN THE VILLAGES
The social survey was based on interviews with the population of villages located within 25
kilometers downstream and 43 kilometers upstream from the Laúca Project. The objective was to
give the parties interested in and affected by the Project an opportunity to learn about it, its potential
IV-230
impacts, and the recommended mitigation measures to improve its implementation, as part of the
process of analysis of the study under way.
Local authorities, including traditional authorities, have been informed of the construction of the
future Laúca Dam, although they claim that some details are insufficient. The population in general
also knows about the dam to be built, but demand more information regarding a possible
improvement of their living conditions.
•
Expectations
The population is pleased with the Project because, in addition to creating jobs for the young
people, it will lead to many social projects for the welfare of the entire population of the area. There
is expectation that the Project will bring in electric power.
As one interviewee said,
We have neither schools nor health services, which has caused people to abandon their villages.
With this project we will have water and schools, in addition to other social projects; and we do
believe that in a few years we will have those people back.
The possibility of employment in the construction work and in the structures that will support it,
and of access to services the Laúca AH will bring in, such as medical care, education, potable
water, civil records (for the issuing of the identity card that is indispensable for getting a job),
farming support, transportation, and trade—all of this forms parts of the expectations expressed by
participants.
•
Concerns
There is some skepticism about Odebrecht’s discharging its social responsibilities, having in view
the experience related to the construction of the Capanda Dam.
One Kyangulungo interviewee made the following comment:
The project is welcome, as it will bring development to our region, although when the Odebrecht
was in Capanda, other than the water it provided for the population, it did nothing else related to
its social responsibility. I would like to know if in Laúca the Odebrecht will fulfill what it promised
when it was in Capanda?.
IV-231
There is also dissatisfaction over whether young people’s access to jobs in the Laúca Project will be
harmed by the hiring of young people from other places, as well as over the access criteria such as
the requirement of an identity card, as the majority of them face financial difficulties for obtaining
it. They also allege the payment of bribes to get a job.
In all villages there were comments similar to the following:
How does Odebrecht plan to solve the problem of access to jobs for the young people from this
village, as there have been so many complaints? Many young people do not have an identity card;
can’t the voter’s registration card serve? How to get information about the job vacancies at the
enterprise?
The Kyangulungo Soba made the following remark:
The village young people call me names because most of the neighboring villages have managed to
get jobs with the Laúca Project, differently from several young people from my village.
Some of the young people said that they want to work on the Laúca Project:
We spend most of the time at the gate of the Laúca Project in search of a job. We have submitted
the documents at the gate of the Laúca Project about four months ago and so far we have not been
called.
For 15,000 kwanzas you can get a job with the Laúca Project. Some of the village young men area
trying to make some money to be able to join the Laúca Project labor market. There is a network of
national workers on the project that accept money in exchange for a job. (Joaquim João, a resident)
Most of the village young people have a low level of schooling; they have already submitted all the
documents for getting a job at Laúca but they are still waiting to hear from the ODEBRECHT
people. The village young people have had enough of this. Can’t the voter’s registration card be
enough? (Nhangue Ya Pepe village)
In terms of the economically active population, Kissaquina is better off than the other villages in the
region; it should be given priority in hiring, as its young people have some professional skill and
some of them have already worked on the Capanda Project. (Kassakina village)
IV-232
Some have also expressed concern over the possible flooding of some villages and localities owing
to the dam reservoir, as is the case of the Kassakina cemetery, the Sobas’ cemetery, and the
makeshift village set up by the fishermen of Kissaquina, Kyangulungo, and Muta on the margin of
the Kwanza River; some crops of the Boy family; as well as over the question of crossing to the
other bank of the Kwanza River to reach
Kissaquina and Bangwangwa.
Which mechanism does the Project have to solve the situation of the Kissaquina cemetery, which
will be flooded when the river overflows?
We are concerned over the possibility that in the future the floods in the rainy season will flood the
makeshift village the Kassaquina fishermen have set up on the bank of the Kwanza River.
With the construction of the Laúca dam, the coffee and palm tree plantations near the Laúca Stone
will disappear, as that is a place from where the Odebrecht will certainly extract material for the
dam’s construction. (Nhangue Ya Pepe village)
I am concerned over the farming activity I am developing here in the region. I have given jobs to
seven young people from the village and the farm is now beginning to produce something. Today
one speaks of the Laúca Dam construction and, as one might expect, after it is finished, when heavy
rains fall, the water will flood my farm. From whom shall I claim for any damage that might result
from the dam’s flooding? (Kassakina village farmer)
We are worried because our village is bounded in the north by the Capanda dam and in the south
by the Laúca dam. In case of heavy rains, when they open the Capanda floodgates the fish
disappear, owing to the oscillation in the volume of the Kwanza River. With the construction of the
Laúca Dam, the situation will get worse, because when the heavy rains will fall in the region, the
flooding may reach the cemetery where our ancestors are buried, not to speak of the one across the
Kwanza River. (Kassakina village)
Some express concern over the felling of trees in the areas where material is to be extracted for the
dam construction and over the fact that the area where the river course will be deviated was a
battlefield between the peoples of the north and of the south at the time of King Ngola Kiluange
IV-233
…a ritual should be performed to pacify the spirits of the ancestors that lost their lives in that very
place. (Cassula village)
The population is worried about the rumors of a possible transfer of the populations to other
localities and the loss of their old croplands located in the area of the Laúca Project. Fourteen
people in the village complained about the loss of their crops. They also worry about the connection
with the populations that live across the river.
Will the Odebrecht or the Government build a bridge in the area of the Kassakina port to facilitate
the crossing of the river?
Our village is located near the Laúca Project and a little farther are the coffee, palm, and banana
plantations. We have seen some people connected with the Project wandering in that area and some
heavy machinery extracting material near the abandoned crops since the beginning of the Project.
Will those responsible for the Laúca Project meet with the population to inform us about the
Project, as at the time of demining? Also, will the Project force the transfer of our village to other
localities? (Nhangue Ya Pepe and Kissaquina villages)
We have relatives across the Kwanza River and use the area where the fishermen community is
located for crossing the river to the other side. With the construction of the Laúca Project and the
coming of the rains the river flow will increase and this will make it impossible for us to cross to the
other side of the river. (Kissaquina Soba)
The villagers are also worried about the aquatic fauna. They believe that with the construction of
the dam many aquatic species may disappear or be forced to migrate to other, safer zones.
In the past there were hippopotamuses, alligators, and other large-size animals such as lions,
warthogs, and even antelopes. Today, because of the presence of humans and the noise of the
machines, many species are disappearing from the region. (Kissaquina villager)
One interviewee commented that:
IV-234
This year, owing to the drought that plagued our region, we have not been able to catch fish as we
used to three years ago. Also, with the construction of the Capanda dam, the quantity of fish caught
decreased considerably, owing to the oscillation of the flow, and with the construction of the
LaúcaD, this situation will worsen even more. (Ngola Ndala village)
Mr. Ngunza Canhanga, the Soba of the Kissaquina Sul village, said:
We agree with these two dams because we are too isolated. If they pave the road, people will be
able to sell their products. When we have much rain, the flooding waters cover the Luinga River
Bridge, which often hinders the crossing over to Calulo. With the construction of the Laúca Dam,
we are absolutely sure that our houses will disappear with the flooding caused by the rains, but all
this because of the dam. This does not worry us too much, because if this happens we can move to
another, safer place. Our great worry is about the Malombes or Jindambus located on the banks of
the Kwanza and the Luinga Rivers, as according to the culture of the Kissaquina land, they cannot
be moved. So, what is to be done? Would the Laúca Project engineers have techniques for
protecting that place? Building a protecting wall, perhaps, as one way to prevent the place from
being submerged?
We cannot move the Malombes, nor can we trade jobs or any other project for the removal of the
Malombes; that place is very sacred; one cannot go there any old way. At the time of the war, that
place served as a refuge for the Kissaquina villagers and the UNITA never set foot there; and those
who dared to go there without the presence of the Soba got lost on the way, that is, they never
managed to see the way to reach it. This is why we insist that this situation should be duly analyzed,
with much care. (Benzina Jerónimo, a Kissaquina Sul villager).
We need water and electricity and jobs; we have to find a solution that will ensure some stability
between the population and the Laúca Project. I believe that if there is no negligence on the part of
the Laúca Project, we will be able to sort out this situation. (Josefa Serafim, Kissaquina Sul
villager)
We are worried because these last days it has been said that the Project will force the resettlement
of the village population. Can Mr. SF tell us where we will be relocated and what conditions the
ODEBRECHT or the Government will guarantee for us, and what will be the situation of the lands,
IV-235
as our croplands and the cemetery of our Sobas and other ancestors are also located in this small
space of our territory? (Domingos Matos, Kissaquina Sul villager)
Mr. André Júlio, the Adjunct Soba of the Calombe village said:
We have little information about the Laúca Project. We have practical examples of our experience
with the Odebrecht in Capanda. Before the construction of the Capanda Dam, the promise given by
the Odebrecht people was that as soon as the production of electric power started, priority for
supplying electricity would be given the population near the project – in this case, the Dala Kiosa
and the Kissaquina Norte villages. To this day, that promise has not been fulfilled… We are not
worried about the flooding; we are worried about the Jindambu of our ancestors, of our Kissaquina
brethren… The population can move anywhere, but the Malombes can’t. Thus, the need to study
this question carefully.
The elderly of the Calombe village are very worried and defensive about the Malombes of the
Kissaquina village, which will be swallowed up by the floods caused by the rains. They advise
those responsible for the project to visit the place to see the problem for themselves and find
strategies for negotiating with that region’s traditional authorities. In their view, this is not a
question for the Kissaquina village population, but for the villages located in that area; and this
begins to worry the population located in the project’s area.
We have never had anyone come to our village to talk about the Laúca Project; not even the
Kissongo Communal Administrator spoke officially about the dam. Today, from you we are getting
more detailed information about the Laúca Project. Can you tell us how stands the situation of
employment for the young people of our village? Will they, if they don’t have an ID, have a chance
of getting a job on the project? (Luís António, a Calombe villager)
An issue that worries the Calombe villagers is the bridge over the Mbuiza River (09o58’336”; 15o
9”661”; altitude, 1,045 meters). Although they are at a higher altitude than the flooding area, the
population says that that is the only place for reaching Kissaquina and other villages of the
Mussende Municipality and also villages on the Dondo-Cacuso road.
The Bangwangwa population has doubts about the implementation of the project. It says that it had
great expectations in relation to the Capanda Project, and today there is no point in talking about
expectations related to the Laúca Project, as the enterprise responsible for it is the Odebrecht.
IV-236
The Laúca Project is going to benefit and at the same harm the population that uses the Kwanza
River as a survival basis, particularly the fishermen. In terms of benefits, it will bring development
to the country. What will happen to the question of crossing over, that is, to Kissaquina North, Dala
Kiosa, where we have our relatives? (Anacleto Agostinho, Bangwangwa village)
We have our croplands on the banks of the Luinga River and believe that the construction of the
Laúca Dam and the floods caused by the rains will damage our crops, as the river flow will
increase. Who will pay for the damages? (Aníbal Neto, Bangwangwa village)
4.4.4. RESULTS OF INTERVIEWS WITH THE COMMUNAL
ADMINISTRATIONS
São Pedro da Quilemba
At a meeting with the Adjunct Communal Administrator to apprise him of the interviews with the
villagers, he listed some a series of concerns and expectations.
•
Expectations
 With the deviation of the course of the Kwanza River, in case there is a great
flood, the villages will be spared from the flood; and
 In addition to jobs, which are already a reality, the project will provide several
basic services for the localities near the project.
•
Concerns
 With the construction of the Capanda Dam, the flow downstream from the dam
considerably reduced the capture of fish; and with the construction of the Laúca Dam
the situation will become even worse and make the fishermen of the riverine areas
become jobless. How does the Project look at this question?
 Is concerned with the defense of the protection of flora, fauna. Odebrecht, for the
diversion of the river certainly will drop some natural trees without replacement
hypothesis;
IV-237
 Getting an ID remains a problem in the region. As a rule, the population, including
the elderly, does not have a birth certificate. To enter the birth of a child into the
records, the Conservadoria Civil requires a birth certificate from the parents; in many
cases this is not possible because no family member has ever had such a document.
Cacuso
A meeting was held with the Cacuso Municipal Administrator to inform him of the interview
results. He also expressed some concerns and expectations.
•
Main expectations
 The project is going to create job opportunities for the young people and give origin
to social projects. The Laúca Project is also going to encourage the improvement of
agricultural production in the communities, and this will contribute to the
development of the Angolan economy.
•
Main concerns and complaints
 The population’s complaints have already been presented in the preceding. Except
for the employment question, the populations are collaborating, and even those that
might have to be relocated will listen to our appeal, because they are aware that this
is a Government, not an Odebrecht project, which will bring development to the
region.
 It is important that the technical people involved in the Project learn a little about
the culture of the populations that live near it, so that they won’t run roughshod over
traditional elements of those people.”
 The Kissaquina fishing community by the river will be submerged by the floods
caused by the rains. Also, the Boy family farms, in the same type of location, will
have the same fate, not to speak of the old cemetery where the Sobas of the two
Kissaquinas are buried.”
 The Administration is also concerned about the protection of the flora and the fauna,
as well as with the felling of native trees that will not be replaced, and the fleeing of
IV-238
the animals toward safer areas, because of the human presence and the noise of the
machinery.
4.4.5. CONCLUSIONS
The living conditions of the villages’ populations are very precarious, owing to the lack of basic
infrastructure, such as water supply, basic sanitation, and electric power, as well as to the scarceness
and precariousness of infrastructure in the areas of health care and education, to the lack of a public
transportation system, and the absolute lack of jobs and productive activities to support the families.
The fact that a large part of the population (including the young people) does not have an identity
card is an important issue, as this document is fundamental for an individual to become covered by
the institutions and to obtain employment.
Local authorities, including traditional authorities, and the general population are informed about
the Laúca Project. But they want more information, and want to be informed on a continuous basis.
Some hold a favorable opinion about the Project and thus have high expectations of improvement in
their living conditions. They expect first employment for the young people on the construction and
for them to continue to be connected with the undertaking, not only in respect of the Laúca Dam but
also of the economic and social activities planned or that may be encouraged in areas such as trade,
education, and health, among others. In the second place, there are many expectations, especially
because this is the third dam to be built on the Middle Kwanza River, and the second within the
Cacuso Municipality. Expectations are mixed with some concerns and complaints.
The situation of the farms and the fishermen’s settlement has already been addressed. It should
deserve double attention as this is a concern on the part of the Cacuso Municipal Administrator, the
Kissaquina Soba, and of other villages and some inhabitants. Moreover, one should not ignore the
concerns expressed in relation to cultural aspects of these villages, especially in relation to the
Sobas’ cemetery and the hunter’s tomb, a subject frequently brought up during all visits.
Concerns are centered on the negative environmental changes, which reflect on human life in the
region. Interviewees were much worried about the Project’s implementation, owing to the presence
of some expatriate workers in the different phases, which may increase prostitution in that area.
IV-239
The populations see the social survey and the interviews as something positive, as the only means to
make their opinions reach those responsible for the Laúca Project. The question of employment
opportunities for the young people and the construction of infrastructure as a social responsibility of
Odebrecht’s were issues brought up in all the villages visited, with the obtaining of employment
being the main concern.
The majority of the population is aware that there will be no flooding of villages, with exception of
the Kissaquina, Nhangue Ya Pepe, and Kirinje villages, which are worried about this, as explained
in previous chapters.
With respect to the dissemination and intensity of the interviews, we have the following suggestions
and recommendations:
•
The Odebrecht should set up social promoters in the villages for the effective
dissemination of information about the deviation of the river course project, as some
people lack knowledge about the subject in a planned, continuous way.
•
Greater use should be made of the local radio, the distribution of brochures, and the
affixing of advertisement posters at the end of streets, as well as the setting up of
large-size billboards or bulletin boards to post publicity materials regularly.
Table 4.27 below sums up the main aspects of the socioeconomic survey and the interviews in the
areas affected by the Laúca Project.
Table 4.27: Summary of the relevant socioeconomic aspects.
Influence Area
Locality
Main Aspects
o In this area are located the Sobas
IV-240
Influence Area
Locality
Main Aspects
Cemetery (Kissaqina Sul), the
fishermen’s village, and the two farms
(Kissaquina) that will be flooded with
Directly Affected
Area
the filling of the Laúca AH reservoir.
Kissaquina village and
o These villages should be resettled and
Kissaquina Sul village
the cemetery should be transferred to a
safe area; this will require contacts
with the representatives of these
communities to define the resettlement
form and location;
o The population is worried about the
resettlement, afraid that it will lose
access to its resources, particularly its
agricultural resources;
o The village Soba is not happy with the
flooding of the sacred cemetery.
• These areas located along the main
Village:
• Dumbo Ya Pepe
road have working-age young people ,
• Nhangue Ya Pepe
who wish to work on the Laúca
• Ndala Ngola
Project. But often their employment
Direct Influence
• Kibenda
need is not met.
Area
• Kirinje
• A great majority of the population
• Cassula
does not have an ID, which makes it
• Muta
difficult to join the Project.
• Kyangulungo
• These communities require special
• Kissaquina
attention from future social projects to
• Dala Dosa
be developed in the area.
• The cemetery of the Kirinje village is
(Dombo)
• Calombe
located in a risk area, susceptible to
• Bangwangwa
flooding during the Kwanza River’s
flood season. The village Soba does
IV-241
Influence Area
Locality
Main Aspects
not agree with the Project and says that
the area has to be submitted to a
spiritual cleansing.
Municipalities:
Indirect Influence
• Cambambe
• People may be hired in these areas,
Area
• Libolo
where materials needed for dockyard
• Mussende
construction may also be obtained.
• Cacuso
All the population of the villages visited and heard expressed appreciation for the Laúca Project and
has great expectations for improved quality of life. The health, education, and basic sanitation
conditions are precarious in all villages. Thus, both the project’s proponent and its executor should
plan actions and social plans in these areas for the population. These will be further discussed in
Chapter 6.
IV-242
CHAPTER 5
IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND
MITIGATION MEASURES
V-1
CONTENTS
5. IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES ........................................................... 3
5.1. METHODOLOGY CONSIDERATIONS.................................................................................................. 3
5.2. IMPACT IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................... 5
5.2.1. Planning Phase......................................................................................................................................... 5
5.2.2. Implementation Phase ............................................................................................................................. 7
5.2.3. Operation Phase ....................................................................................................................................... 8
5.3. IMPACT ANALYSIS ................................................................................................................................ 8
5.3.1. Planning Phase......................................................................................................................................... 8
5.3.2. Implementation Phase ........................................................................................................................... 10
5.3.3. Operation Phase ..................................................................................................................................... 30
5.3.4. Work Conclusion Phase......................................................................................................................... 39
5.4. PROGNOSES ........................................................................................................................................... 45
5.4.1. Without The Enterprise ......................................................................................................................... 45
5.4.2. With The Enterprise .............................................................................................................................. 45
List of Table
TABLE 5.1: CRITERIA AND ASSESSMENT OF POTENTIAL IMPACTS
TABLE 5.2: INTERACTION MATRIX OF THE LAÚCA HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT’S EIA.
TABLE 5.3: IMPACT ANALYSIS OF THE LAÚCA DAM CONSTRUCTION EIA.
V-2
5. IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION MEASURES
This chapter describes the methodology used in the assessment of the potential impacts environmental
resulting from anthropic changes applied to the environment and to the social-economic means as a result of
the Laúca dam construction activities, within the territorial limits of the provinces of Malanje, Kwanza North
and Kwanza South.
5.1. METHODOLOGY CONSIDERATIONS
The analysis of the potential impacts and environmental risks arising from the Laúca dam construction was
carried out in a multi and interdisciplinary way based on the diagnoses submitted for the studied area (in the
several influence areas of the project), presented in Chapter 4 of this study, as well as the proposed enterprise
activities presented in Chapter 2. This chapter emphasizes the directly affected and direct incidence areas
defined in Chapter 1, pursuant the Executive Decree no. 92/12 of March 1st.
Therefore, a comprehensive approach took place covering all the involved aspects and their possible
interactions, so no potential impact regarding the enterprise implementation and operation phases was left
without consideration.
The analysis covered the enterprise actions capable of generating potential environmental and socialeconomic impacts; the preparation of an impact interaction matrix and the qualification and assessment of
the identified impacts.
The generating actions are directly related to the enterprise’s planning, implementation and operation
activities, and in order to identify the impacts it is necessary to analyze the power plant characteristics.
After the definition of the impact generation factors, an interaction matrix was prepared, which has as basic
structure the components of two sets of variables: the necessary actions for the dam implementation and
operation and the environmental components, regarding the physical, biotic and social-economic means,
which can suffer the effects of these actions. By means of this matrix it is possible to associate the impacts
on the studied means with their generating actions.
After this, an individual assessment of the impacts was carried seeking their qualification and, when
possible, their quantification. After the potential impact assessment was concluded, it was possible to
establish mitigation measures and configure the necessary environmental programs to be implemented by the
entrepreneur, which will ensure that the undesirable damages to the social-environmental means are
V-3
corrected, compensated or prevented. Additionally, actions intended to boost the positive impacts will be
defined, as a means to leverage the region’s social-economic development and to bring benefits to the
population.
For the assessment of the Laúca dam’s potential environmental and social-economic impacts, the criteria
presented in Table 5.1 were adopted, which will be transcribed to the impact identification matrix, when all
impacts will be described in an individual way.
Table 5.1: Criteria and Assessment of Potential Impacts
Classification
Phase
Criterion
Phase of the enterprise
implementation when the potential
impact takes place
Nature
Impact effects
Form
Assess how the impact takes place
Duration
Persistence time of the impact
Reversibility
Coverage
Magnitude
Importance
Assesses the capacity of the mean to
return to its natural state after the end
of the impact generation action,
considering the mitigation measures
Places where the impact effects are
felt
Refers to the transformation intensity
of the impacted environmental factor
regarding the preexisting situation
Interference degree of the
environmental impact over different
environmental factors
Qualification
Planning
Implementation
Operation
Positive
Negative
Undetermined
Direct impact, resulting from an
action
Indirect impact
Permanent
Cyclic
Temporary
Irreversible
Reversible
Global (exceed the AH limits,
the impacts take place in a
specially disseminated way)
Regional (the impact also
reflects in the AH)
Localized (its occurrence area is
very clear and restricted to the
AID and ADA)
High
Medium
Low
High
Medium
Low
The generating actions are indicated for each impact and also the respective measures to be adopted for their
mitigation/correction or leverage (for positive impacts). The adoption of such measures was deemed
adequate in time and space, according to the importance, intensity and duration of each one. Similarly, the
compensatory measures were identified in the case of potential impacts with no possible mitigation or those
actions that have their compliance mandatory by law.
V-4
5.2. IMPACT IDENTIFICATION
Table 5.2 presents the matrix resulting from the interaction among the potential impacts studied for the
Laúca dam project. The potential impacts were quantified according to the project phases (planning,
implementation and operation) and identified by means of acronyms to provide a better understanding.
The first phase of the enterprise that corresponds to the project planning consists on carrying out the
activities related to viability and the planning of the actions necessary for its implementation, including the
environmental studies that resulted in the preparation of the present document.
In the building of the interaction matrix acronyms were used according to the impacted means and
environmental process. Therefore, for the processes related to the physical means, the letter F was adopted,
followed by A for water, Ar for air and S for soil; the letter B is used for the biotic mean, followed by the
letters corresponding to the processes related to the vegetation cover (V), land fauna (FT) and water fauna
(FA); and finally, letter A was adopted for the anthropic mean, followed by the letters P (population), E
(economy), OT (land classification) and PMI (historic, cultural and archeological assets).
5.2.1. PLANNING PHASE
The first phase of any project corresponds to that of planning. It consists in carrying out the activities related
to the viability study and to the planning of the necessary actions for their implementation, including the
environmental studies that have originated the present document. The interactions identified in this phase
were:
•
Physical, biotic and anthropic means: increase in the technical-scientific knowledge about the
region under the environmental and social-economic points of view, with the formation of important
collections associated to an information bank and photographic registers of the influence areas
studied (FA1, FAr1, FS1, BV1, BFT1, BFA1, AE1 AOT1 and APMI1).
•
Anthropic means: creation of expectations within the population due to the news published about
the enterprise during the performance of the environmental studies, particularly those related to
employment offer, improvement of living conditions and social-economic leverage (AP1).
V-5
Table 5.2: Interaction Matrix of the Laúca Hydroelectric Power Plant’s EIA.
Enterprise
Phases
Actions
Water
Air
Soil
Planning
Execution of studies
Labor hiring
Implementation of the workers
village and the work quarters
Readequacy and/or expansion of
the region’s system access
Transport
of
materials
and
equipment to the work quarters
Mine
exploration
for
civil
construction and the formation of
the desired area.
Excavation for the foundation and
power house, penstocks, ducts and
water intake
River deviation, construction of
cofferdams, and civil works
Cleaning of the reservoir areas
Labor demobilization
Reservoir filling
Dam operation
FA1
-
FAr1
-
FS1
-
Biotic Means
Vegetation
Cover
BV1
-
-
-
FS3
BV3
BFT3
-
FAr4
FS4
BV4
-
FAr5
-
FA6
FAr6
FA7
Implementation
Operation
Physical Means
AP1
AP2
Anthropic Means
Territorial
Economy
legislation
AE1
AOT1
AE2
AOT2
-
-
-
-
APMI3
BFT4
-
AP4
AE4
AOT4
APMI4
-
BFT5
-
AP5
AE5
-
-
FS6
BV6
BFT6
-
AP6
-
-
APMI6
FAr7
FS7
BV7
BFT7
BFA7
-
-
-
APMI7
FA8
FAr8
FS8
-
BFT8
BFA8
-
-
-
APMI8
FA11
FA12
FAr9
FAr11
-
FS9
FS11
FS12
BV9
BV11
BV12
BFT9
BFT10
BFT11
BFT12
BFA11
BFA12
AP9
AP10
AP11
AP12
AE9
AE10
AE11
AE12
AOT10
AOT11
-
APMI9
APMI11
-
V-6
Land
fauna
BFT1
BFT2
Water
fauna
BFA1
BFA2
Population
Assets
APMI1
-
5.2.2. IMPLEMENTATION PHASE
The enterprise implementation phase considers the period since the labor hiring until the reservoir
filling, passing through the necessary work adequacy activities, construction of accesses, work
quarters, etc. The interactions identified in this phase were:
• Physical means: loss of soils (FS3, FS4, FS6, FS7, FS8 and FS11); risk of triggering or
increasing erosive processes and landscape changes (FS6, FS7 and FS9); soil compacting
(FS5); instability of the river bank slopes (FS8); changes in the water table and possible
changes in the soil dynamics (induced seismicity) and loss of large land extensions (FS11);
generation of dust, noise and gas emissions (FAr2, FAr4, FAr5, FAr6, FAr7, FAr8, FAr9
and Far11); possible climatic changes and changes in the local hydrologic balance (FAr11);
changes in the water flow and quality (FA2, FA6, FA7, FA8 and FA11).
• Biotic means: suppression of the vegetation with the consequent loss of vegetation
individuals and species and the loss and fragmentation of habitats (BV3, BV4, BV6 and
BV7); loss of the natural and genetic assets and of vegetation individuals (BV9); changes in
the vegetation communities bordering the reservoir (BV11); fauna disturbances (death
and/or frightening) (BFT3, BFT4, BFT5, BFT6, BFT7, BFT8, BFT9 and BFT10); water
fauna disturbances and risk of fish deaths (BFA7 and BFA8); changes in the reservoir’s fish
fauna composition and structure and in the hydrobiologic communities (BFA11); changes in
animal communities due to the reservoir filling (FAT11).
•
Anthropic means: increase in the population’s anxiety due to the desire of being hired
(AP2); changes in the population dynamics (AP4); risk of accidents with the local
population (AP5 and AP6); disturbance in the local population’s extraction activity, in
addition to increased risks to its health (AP9, AP10 and AP11); leverage of the local and
regional economy (AE2); shipping feasibility of the local production (AE4); increase in the local
income due to the availability of timber (AE9); generation of pressure over the local and regional,
social and economic infrastructure (AOT2 and AOT3); increase in the leverage of the land use and
occupation process (AOT4); risk of losing the archeological assets (APMI3, APMI4, APMI6,
APMI7 and APMI8); risk of losing the local population’s sacred sites (APMI9 and APMI11);
V-7
reduction of the social, economic and territorial leverage started with as works (AP10, AE10 and
AOT10) and changes in the access dynamics between the two river banks (AP11 and AOT11).
5.2.3. OPERATION PHASE
With the enterprise operation the following interferences are expected:
•
Physical means: changes in the water quality upstream and downstream of the reservoir (FA12).
Gas generation and emission (FAr12). Depleting of the reservoir, thus causing changes in the soil
close to the margins of the future reservoir (FS12).
•
Biotic means: risk of fauna disturbance downstream (BFA12) and changes in the biotic communities
in the reservoir depletion zone (BV12 and BFT12).
•
Anthropic means: higher energy offer, making viable the country’s social and economic
development, resulting in a higher quality of life for the national population (AP12 and AE12).
5.3. IMPACT ANALYSIS
For the assessment of the environmental impacts caused by the construction of the future Laúca dam, the
criteria presented in Table 5.1 were adopted, which results are described below, individually and at the end
of the present item, summarized in Table 5.3.
The generating actions are indicated for each impact, followed by the respective recommended mitigation
measures, whose adoption was deemed adequate, in time and space, according to importance, intensity and
duration of each one. Similarly, compensation measures were identified in the case of impacts with no
possible mitigation and leverage measures for positive impacts.
5.3.1. PLANNING PHASE
5.3.1.1. GENERATION OF EXPECTATIONS IN THE LOCAL POPULATION
Generating action: Direct contact of the study teams with the local population.
Description: The expectations of the population regarding the enterprise are a result of a set of factors,
among which are the initial actions regarding the enterprise, as the technical studies and the first news about
it in the region.
V-8
The local population’s anxiety, caused by the contact with the technical teams during the field work visits
conducted for the engineering projects and the environmental studies, has contributed to increase the
expectations, mainly in the villages situated in the ADA and the AID. Such expectations or apprehensions
can be either negative or positive. According to the interviews carried out, they are related to the hope by
part of the population of finding jobs during the implementation phase of the enterprise and of ending their
present isolation by getting in contact with all the social and economical dynamics that will be introduced
during this period, as well as the possibility of having electric power in a near future.
Some local authorities have demonstrated good acceptance of the enterprise implementation, believing in the
perspectives of economic and social development for the region, resulting from the existence of such a large
dam construction project and, at medium term, the benefits of its operation.
As unemployment is one of the main economic problems in the region, the generation of work places is seen
with great expectation by part of the population, mainly by the younger people that are eager for jobs. This
fact was acknowledged in the cities of Malange, N´Dalatando, Dondo and Lucala, where the young people
asked about the enterprise and about the necessary procedures to find jobs in the construction works. In all
the villages interviewed and heard, this concern was also found, although a difficulty was also found, which
is the lack of the interested people’s identity cards, a fact that prevents the hiring.
Part of the non-qualified labor, necessary for the enterprise works, can be found by hiring the population in
the ADA and AID villages, provide they are duly trained to perform the necessary activities, since they
consist of traditional peasants, totally unqualified for the functions that will be offered in the enterprise
implementation and operation.
As mentioned above, the lack of an identity card is another problem that affects almost all the people living
in the AID, making their hiring impossible. The issuing of this document demands a slow and costly process
that, combined with the destitute conditions of the population, makes it very difficult. There is an expectation
that Odebrecht, together with the governmental authorities, will help the population to solve this problem.
The generation of expectations can be considered of a negative nature when it is related to the
implementation of the project and to changes in the population’s way of life, particularly the rural one, and
positive, when associated to the perspective of offering new jobs due to the construction works, the offer of
energy and improvements in the economy.
V-9
Assessment: Takes place in the planning and implementation phases, and has a negative impact effect
resulting from the anxiety that it causes on the population due to the disclosing of inadequate information,
making difficult a clear understanding about the new situation and bringing many uncertainties that are;
direct; temporary, because it is only present during the implementation phase; reversible, because with the
hiring the negative expectations tend to subside, affecting not only the ADA and AID population, but also
has some global significance due to the high national unemployment rate. It is of high magnitude and great
importance because the possibility of hiring local labor is a unique opportunity for its social and regional
insertion, as the population residing in the AII and the AAR also suffer the consequences of unemployment.
Measures to be adopted: Social communication plan, to be implemented by the entrepreneur to make the
enterprise implementation clear to the community and fulfill the community’s demand for the disclosure of
the selection criteria, in addition to the local population’s qualification actions so it may participate in the
enterprise implementation, whether directly or indirectly.
5.3.1.2. INCREASE OF THE TECHNICAL–SCIENTIFIC KNOWLEDGE ABOUT THE
REGION
Generating action: Development of environmental studies and engineering projects for the areas under the
influence of the dam construction.
Description: The environmental studies about the enterprise’s areas of influence, as well as the engineering
works, will contribute to increase the technical–scientific knowledge of the medium section of the Kwanza
River basin, generating important diagnoses, sometimes unheard of, about the same.
Assessment: This is a positive; direct; permanent; irreversible; global influence impact; with high magnitude
and great importance, regarding the present scarcity of general data.
Measures to be adopted: In order to leverage them, the announcement of the studies carried out is
recommended, together with the promotion of events, the publication of the study results and making the
information available to the public.
5.3.2. IMPLEMENTATION PHASE
5.3.2.1. WORKPLACE GENERATION
Generating action: Labor hiring.
V-10
Description: For the enterprise construction, around 4,000 workplaces will be made directly available. With
the leverage of the local economy, more employment opportunities will show-up in an indirect way
regarding the enterprise. Based on the Brazilian experience, the number of indirect workplaces generated by
the execution works in the implementation of hydroelectric enterprises may reach 2.5 times the number of
direct employment, in the present case representing approximately 10,000 workplaces in activities
supporting the construction actions, as those of services for the workers directly hired.
Assessment: This is a positive, direct, temporary, reversible, localized impact, with great importance and
high magnitude.
Measures to be adopted: A professional insertion effort shall be prepared and implemented by the
entrepreneur for the local population, including professional qualification, which shall be widely announced
in the social communication plan, moreover for the ADA and AID population.
Since the important problem of lack of documentation in the AID population was revealed, with a negative
effect on the possibility of employment for the population directly affected by the enterprise, citizen support
actions could be carried out to make possible the issuing of identity cards for the ADA and AID population,
together with the local administration.
5.3.2.2. GENERATION OF POPULATION MIGRATION
Generating action: Labor hiring.
Description: The disclosure of the hiring of labor for the enterprise implementation will generate
expectations in the entire AAR population, mainly in the ADA, AID and AII, due to the possibilities of
finding jobs and income, stimulating the migration to the ADA and the AID, in higher number than the
workplaces offered.
Based on the precarious quality of living conditions observed in the affected population and the almost
inexistent basic minimum support for the social infrastructure, it is possible to declare that the conditions
shall become worse for the local inhabitants and will not be better for the migrants.
Assessment: This is a negative impact, because it will overload the precarious local social infrastructure,
whether temporary or permanent, because the possibility of establishing homes, even after the end of the
works, will prevail strongly precisely in the city do Dondo; localized influence; high magnitude and great
importance.
V-11
Measures to be adopted: Social communication plan, informing the population of the AII/AAR cities and
the ADA villages about the exact labor-hiring conditions, the number of workplaces available, the regional
living conditions, etc. The adoption of education actions for the interested population is also recommended,
specifically to fulfill the indirect jobs that will show-up, as well as to support the implementation of the
necessary basic infrastructure.
5.3.2.3. ECONOMIC LEVERAGE
Generating action: Increase in the circulation of vehicles and people due to the works.
Description: The Laúca dam construction shall stimulate the local economy, mainly with respect to the
increase in demand for services and products by the workers, even if almost all the supplies have to come
from Luanda.
Therefore, the employment offer and the new work opportunities shall attract new investments, even if they
are small, generating the circulation of goods and income.
In this context, the city of Dondo, that already receives the impacts of the Cambambe dam elevation works,
will be the main focus, since it has commercial and service establishments that fulfill the existing present
demand. This economic leverage will take place as a result from the migration of the population seeking
employment and income opportunities.
The villages along the Capanda dam road that connects to Dondo shall also start to offer services and market
products, although in small scale and more suited to the food sector, to fulfill the needs of these migrants and
workers. This is already a reality as it was ascertained by social research.
The strongest influences of the economic leverage will occur in the short and medium terms, having their
peak in the enterprise implementation phase and then receding in the operation phase.
Assessment: This is a positive, indirect, temporary, reversible impact, with local influence, with higher
reflections in Dondo, of high magnitude and great importance.
Measures to be adopted: To ensure the optimization of the benefits from the stimulation of the economic
dynamics for the local population, actions shall be adopted to boost the generated benefits, as qualification
and training for the production of goods and services, etc., having entrepreneurship in mind, in order to
V-12
qualify it for income generation, thus strengthening the social tissue and the local economy, so the economic
leverage will acquire a long-lasting effect.
5.3.2.4. INCREASE IN THE PRESSURE OVER THE LOCAL INFRASTRUCTURE
Generating action: Increase in the circulation of vehicles and people due to the works.
Description: The circulation of vehicles and people engaged in the enterprise works, as well as the increase
in the flow of the population attracted by them, will generate a demand for social equipment to face the more
specific assistance to health and safety problems, and the infrastructure of accesses, communication and
environmental sanitation. In this context, the city of Dondo shall receive the higher pressure, but also in the
“sanzalas”, the population’s quality of life shall suffer as a consequence this pressure.
The precarious health network in the region counts with few assistance stations in some “sanzalas”, lacking
adequate equipment and trained professionals. The Dondo Municipal Hospital has 60 internment beds, a
capacity already occupied, since it receives patients from three provinces. It is important to point out that
malaria is endemic in this region, with seasons of high incidence of the disease.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, temporary, reversible and local impact. It is of high magnitude and
great importance due to the lack of proportion between the allocated contingent and the lack of existing
infrastructure capacity to meet the local demand.
Measures to be adopted: Actions that support the territorial arrangement of the city of Dondo, as well as to
the ADA and AID, communities, shall ensure that these will guarantee the local conditions, incorporating the
benefits arising from the process.
5.3.2.5. INCREASE IN DWELLING DEMAND
Generating action: Population migration.
Description: As with the infrastructure, the demand for new dwellings will also suffer strong pressure. The
inadequacy of the already existing houses and deficiencies in the urban structure in the areas of influence
may become a serious social problem, with the possibility of disorganized occupation on the strips along the
road and on the slopes. The spontaneous density increase foreseen will turn the problems more serious due to
the lack of basic sanitation, garbage collection and public safety.
V-13
Assessment: This is a negative, indirect, temporary, because it will prevail only in the implementation phase,
localized impact, with medium magnitude and importance.
Measures to be adopted: The social communication plan that informs the affected population about the
exact labor-hiring conditions, the number of workplaces available, the regional dwelling conditions, etc.,
must be efficient, thus, preventing the arrival of a large number of workers that cannot be incorporated to the
works. Additionally, support actions shall be implemented for the population that unavoidably will migrate
to the ADA and the AID attracted by the opportunities that the enterprise will provide, to make the
communities capable of arranging the necessary basic infrastructure.
5.3.2.6. TIMBER GENERATION
Generating action: Deforesting of the areas of dam construction, living quarters, work quarters and
accesses, supporting and cleaning infrastructure in the reservoir area.
Description: The construction area deforesting will make available a great quantity of timber that can be
offered to the village population, because charcoal is the main energy source used by such population, and
the surplus production can be marketed.
Assessment: This is a positive, direct, temporary and localized impact, with low magnitude because it can
generate income for a few families being, therefore, of low importance.
Measures to be adopted: Announcement actions and the planning and organization of the cut timber
transfer to the village dwellers. This material will be collected by Odebrecht for use in the work quarters and
also used in the production of saw dust for emergency Kits (oily residue spills). Some of this material will be
mixed, but passing first by a crusher.
5.3.2.7. RISK OF HARMING THE LOCAL POPULATION’S SOCIAL STRUCTURE
Generating action: Increase in the circulation of vehicles and people as a result of the works.
Description: The population migration may promote a relatively delicate social impact, because the villages
are formed by family organizations governed by a traditional authority (soba), with peculiar rules and habits,
linked to community structures formed by small groups. The flow of foreign people will certainly interfere
on this organization, affecting its way of life and habits.
V-14
The strong neighborhood and family relationships, which is an important factor that reflects positively on the
social structure, can be affected. This impact may generate uncertainty and even contempt, mainly in the
villages closer to the enterprise.
The population’s concern is that with the increase of expatriates an increase in prostitution will also take
place in the areas affected by the enterprise.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct impact, because it is the result from the contact with migrants, and a
permanent one, because the change in habits and behaviors are irreversible, localized and of medium
magnitude and medium importance.
Measures to be adopted: In order to mitigate this impact, the social communication plan will take actions
intended for the ADA and AID communities, including previous information about the expected migration
perspectives and its consequences, in order to reduce the population’s uncertainties before the arrival of the
future workers. Additionally, the ADA and AID population will be benefited by specific qualifying actions
that will include, in addition to the technical aspects that favor the formation intended for income generation,
orientations regarding the relationship with the workers, activities intended to value local habits and
behaviors, development of a calendar for traditional cultural activities and support to the promotion of events
that value the local culture, effectively promoting an improvement in the local population’s quality of life.
5.3.2.8. INCREASE IN THE RISK OF ACCIDENTS
Generating action: Increase in the circulation of vehicles and people as a result of the works.
Description: The increase in the traffic of heavy vehicles on the road that connects the Capanda AH to the
city of Dondo, the main access way to the enterprise’s work quarters, is a concern factor due to the presence
in the villages along the road. Most of these villages are located besides the road, half of the times with
occupation on both sides of the road, thus creating the need for constant people crossing and the constant
presence of animals on the road. Some villages were closed with fences, but the presence of animals is
constant (goats on the road) and people as well.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct and permanent impact, because once the works are finished, there will
still be the traffic of workers to the plants, from the ADA and AID. It is irreversible, of high magnitude and
medium importance.
Measures to be adopted: Application of preventive measures together with the village populations, and the
implementation of signaling and safety elements on the roads, as adequate speed reducers, in addition to
V-15
social communication actions and the formation of the drivers engaged in the works, including periodic
recycling, the monitoring of risk situations caused by them and an infraction penalty system, intended to
guarantee the safety and the life of the people living in the villages adjacent to the road.
5.3.2.9. INCREASE IN THE INCIDENCE OF DISEASES
Generating action: Increase in the circulation of vehicles and people
Description: The migratory flow and the precarious basic sanitation conditions, added to the environmental
changes due to the works, will bring favorable conditions for the proliferation of vectors and pathogenic
agents. In this context, it is important to point out that malaria is the main disease in the region, making it the
main internment reason in Dondo’s Municipal Hospital and the main cause of death in the AAR.
The sleep disease (Trypanossoma brucei) is another infirmity that concerns the local authorities therefore the
region is now under epidemiologic surveillance, with the capture of the Tsé-Tsé fly (Glossina) that transmits
the disease being made. According to the administration of the São Pedro da Quilemba community, in an
interview carried out in August 2008, 20 cases of the disease were recorded, placing the community under
alert status, because in recent years no cases of the disease were registered.
Due to the almost absence of basic sanitation and the precarious situation of the health infrastructure and the
rapid population growth caused by the expected migration, there is also the possibility of the increase of
water-transmission diseases, as cholera, a problem that already affect the region, mainly in the rainy periods,
and infectious and parasite diseases that affect mainly children.
Another situation to be considered is the fact of the increase in Sexually Transmitted Diseases (DST), with
the risk of the increase in contamination by AIDS.
The increase in respiratory diseases can also be increased by the intense vehicle traffic in Dondo and the
villages, caused by particles in suspension and dust, and the emission of polluting gases into the air, affecting
mainly children and aged people (population more sensible).
It is important to consider the possibility of increase in the cases psychosocial disturbances in the population
due to the generation of expectations and eventual social conflicts that may arise to the arrival of migrants.
Assessment: This is a negative, indirect, local, temporary and irreversible impact, with high magnitude, due
to the epidemiologic character and the risk to public health, and is of great importance.
V-16
Measures to be adopted: The support actions for the AID communities shall instruct the population with
respect to the cares regarding basic and environmental sanitation, the identification and elimination vector
concentrations, in addition to the intensification of the epidemiologic actions, improvement in the health
system, improving and increasing the care capacity in the hospitals and health centers, specially in Dondo
and the ADA and AID villages. Actions for the announcement of preventive measures, holding of orientation
and information lectures for the communities, shall also be carried out within the social communication plan
context.
As this situation is of extreme importance and considering that the high circulation of workers in the region
may increase the risk of the occurrence of the sleep disease cases, it would be important to intensify the
entomologic studies in the region to establish the degree of risk for its occurrence. The use of repellants and
insecticides in the lodging is also recommended.
5.3.2.10. OCCURRENCE OF OCCUPATIONAL ACCIDENTS
Generating action: Construction of the enterprise in different phases.
Description: Due to its magnitude and complexity, the enterprise implementation works will involve
thousands of people and will require many specialties in different areas. Therefore, the risks of accidents
associated to the type of work required is significant and involves, besides occupational risks, the risk of
accidents with poisonous animals and many others. It must be pointed out, having in view the significant
number of workers involved, that the existence of alcohol and drug consumption is a real possibility and is
an intensification factor for the risk of accidents in the work environment.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, temporary impact, with localized effect, reversible, not being possible
to estimate magnitude and importance.
Measures to be adopted: Permanent actions for worker formation shall be implemented, with preventive
and corrective character, linked to occupational health and safety, including periodic recycling. The company
shall provide and make the workers aware of the use of personal protection equipment.
5.3.2.11. RESETTLING OF THE FISHERMEN VILLAGE OF KISSAQUINA
Generating action: Reservoir filling.
V-17
Description: The area of the fishermen village of Kissaquina, in the South Kwanza province, will be totally
flooded by the filling of the Laúca dam reservoir. Close to the Kwanza River banks, there are some straw
houses belonging to around 25 fishermen that live in this place together with their families.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, localized and irreversible impact, with high magnitude
because it will change the way of life of the affected families, having great importance.
Measures to be adopted: On the community resettling, actions to define the settling’s place and territorial
project with the participation of the community, of the implementation of the complete infrastructure (water,
sewage, adequately prepared place for residue disposal, accesses) shall be implemented to promote the
improvement of the dwellers’ quality of life.
5.3.2.12. RESETTLING OF PLANTATIONS AND FARMS
Description: There are two farms in the village, belonging to the Kissaquina village dwellers and located at
approximately 12 km from the village on the Kwanza River’s right bank. Such farms belong to the Jackson
and Zé Boy brothers and are only a few meters from the Kwanza River bank. The farms are productive and
employ young people in the region. Most of the products sold, specifically manioc, sweet potatoes and corn,
are delivered to customers in Cacuso and Malanje.
On the Kwanza River left bank, in the Kissaquina South village, on the banks of the Luinga River, there are
around six (6) plantations with areas between 0.5 a 1 hectare. These will be flooded by the filling of the
reservoir. The owners of these plantations and farms showed concern with the filling of the reservoir and
with losing their production, which is important for their subsistence and as an income source.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, localized, irreversible impact, with high magnitude,
because it will affect the way of life of the families involved, and is of great importance.
Measures to be adopted: On the farm resettling, actions to define the settling’s place and territorial project
shall be implemented with the participation of the parties involved, together with the implementation of the
basic infrastructure (water, sewage, adequately prepared residue disposal place), shall be implemented to
promote the improvement of the dwellers’ quality of life. The farms should be located in fertile soil and close
to the river to provide easy access to irrigation water. If this is not possible, means for irrigation and water
supply to the farm in an adequate and sufficient manner shall be implemented.
V-18
5.3.2.13. RESETTLING OF THE SOBA CEMETERY
Description: The Kissaquina South’s sacred cemetery located on the left bank, where 11 Sobas of the
Kissaquina village are buried, is located on the Laúca dam flooded reservoir area. As this place is considered
a sacred site by the entire population of the Ambundu tribe, involving rituals and symbology still strong
among the communities, it will be necessary to provide its resettling, regarding the pre-established measures,
in order to comply with certain local traditions and habits. It is important to point out that the Soba of the
Kissaquina village did not favor the flooding. The community suggests that the elderly people from the two
villages and others from the neighboring villages are contacted to find a solution.
The population keeps the habit of holding a party during the annual cleaning of the soba cemetery, locally
known as “Jindambu” and located at approximately 7 Km from the Kwanza River. The old Jindambu still
exists and is located on the Kwanza River left bank. To reach the cemetery site it is necessary to cross the
river by canoe and flatboat, or by the land way passing by Libolo-Kwanza South. It is important to point out
that the old cemetery called Jindambu stays at approximately 1,000 meters from the fishermen district.
The Kirinji village soba cemetery still exists, located on the right bank at approximately 6 Km from the
Kwanza River bank, in the Fuxi Ya Lemba zone. This one could be on a risk area that will be subject to
flooding in case the reservoir is full. Due to access difficulties, it was not possible to reach the place and
therefore it was not possible to determine exactly this possibility. The Soba of the Kirinji village showed his
agreement with the possible resettling of the cemetery, provide their traditions are followed and the
purification rituals carried out. Another concern raised by the participants during the meeting is connected to
the place where the first village hunter was buried. According to the population’s reports the first hunter of
the Kirinji village was buried at approximately 1 km to the north of the place where the Laúca project work
quarters is located. The place could not be visited by the social survey team.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent and irreversible impact, of high magnitude, because it will
interfere in the community’s beliefs and religion, therefore of great importance.
Measures to be adopted: The resettling of the sacred cemetery shall be carried out through actions that call
for the participation of the community and the soba because these are sacred soils defined by the local
authorities, with respect to the entire transfer rituals in order to minimize any type of conflict with the
population.
5.3.2.14. RISK OF LOOSING ACCESS TO THE VILLAGES
V-19
Description: In the Kissaquina South village there is a bridge that connects the village to the pastures, which
is normally flooded by the floods of March and April, and is located in a zone that will be subject to
permanent inundation with the filling of the reservoir. The village population also crosses the Kwanza River
(through the access to the Kissaquina fishermen village) to visit their families in the villages of Kissaquina
and Dala Kiosa. In the Calombe village there is also a bridge over the Luinga River that will also be subject
to permanent inundation.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, irreversible and permanent impact, and it is not possible to estimate
its magnitude and importance.
Measures to be adopted: Recovery of the affected areas through the construction of new accesses
connecting the right and left banks. New surveys shall be carried out in the villages to confirm the problems
with the accesses and verify whether they can be used for displacement between the villages.
5.3.2.15. RISK OF LOOSING ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES
Generating action: Installation of the work quarters, works supporting the dam construction, deforesting
and cleaning of the reservoir area, formation of the reservoir.
Description: The dam implementation works and the formation of the reservoirs will affect old human
settlings and sacred areas. As there is no ethnological study and neither the identification of possible areas
with archeological interest, the implementation process of the works will possibly find important sites and
artifacts for the reconstruction of Angola’s history.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, irreversible and permanent impact, and it is not possible to estimate
its magnitude and importance.
Measures to be adopted: Identification and rescue of archeological sites and sending of the materials found
to museums and institutions capable of classifying them for later study.
5.3.2.16. LANDSCAPE CHANGES
Generating action: Formation of the reservoir
V-20
Description: With the formation of the reservoir changes in the local landscape will take place, with the
transformation of the running water environment into a still water environment, loss of rapids and possible
changes in the vegetation cover, when a new ecosystem situation will prevail.
Assessment:
This is a negative, direct and permanent impact, with irreversible character, localized
influence, high magnitude and great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Recovery of the degraded areas and environmental compensation, focused on the
recovery of equivalent areas.
5.3.2.17. SOIL CHANGES
Generating action: Implementation of access roads, land cleaning, other structures supporting the works
and the formation of the reservoir.
Description: This impact, arising from the implementation of the supporting infrastructure, consists in the
turning the soil impermeable due to compacting and covering with another type of material with the purpose
of creating a regular soil with good resistance, making it unsuitable as substrate for the development of
vegetation and water absorption.
With the formation of the reservoir, more important impacts will affect the soil, because of the total
inundation of the soil in these areas and, consequently, it definitive loss. It is not possible to establish either
preventive or corrective measures for this impact. Changes in the soil characteristics due to the elevation of
the water table must also be considered, causing the formation of humid and flooded zones, which can
modify or render impossible its utilization in farming.
According to the enterprise’s technical characteristics, with reservoir level fluctuations according to the local
seasons and power generation demands, it is possible that the soil in the reservoir banks, in the depletion
zone, will be subject to cyclic changes.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, irreversible, localized impact, with medium magnitude
and great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Implementation of monitoring programs for the lack of stability on the shore and
marginal slopes, recovery of degraded areas and hydro-geologic monitoring, which can provide important
information to minimize the impacts.
V-21
5.3.2.18. CHANGES IN WATER TURBIDITY
Generating action: River deviation and dam construction.
Description: Modifications in the slope shapes caused by earth movements (borrowing of materials and
deposit areas for surplus materials), which have caused changes in the slopes, the mechanic disaggregation of
soils and slopes, as well as the removal the vegetation cover, will intensify the material transport processes,
with the possibility of river aggradation and changes on the fluvial dynamics.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, cyclic, reversible, localized impact, with medium magnitude and
medium importance.
Measures to be adopted: Implementation of environmental actions to the works intended to reduce the
entrance of sediments into the river, besides monitoring the water quality to minimize the consequences,
including aggradation.
5.3.2.19. RISK OF INDUCING EROSIVE PROCESSES
Generating action: Execution of cuts, landfills, underground and open air excavations, cleaning and
deforesting in the construction and reservoir areas.
Description: The erosive processes are started and/or intensified by morphologic land changes that result
from activities associated to the enterprise implementation, as well as to cyclic environmental phenomena.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, temporary, reversible, localized impact, with medium magnitude and
importance.
Measures to be adopted: Adoption of measures during the works that minimize the areas to be deforested
out of the reservoir area, restricting them to the minimum necessary areas for building the infrastructure,
with the purpose of preventing the intensification of the erosive processes. After the conclusion of the
infrastructure works, the areas shall be recovered and measures shall be taken to prevent erosion. The
degraded areas shall be recovered (soil and vegetation) with permanent maintenance.
V-22
Engineering techniques shall be adopted for the containment of slopes and prevention of erosive processes,
as works of superficial draining conduction. Additionally, the adoption of monitoring in places that favor the
starting of erosive processes is recommended, for the implementation of the necessary preventive measures.
5.3.2.20. ELEVATION OF THE WATER TABLE
Description: The filling of the reservoir triggers changes on the base level, starting changes and the
redistribution of hydraulic gradients and elevating the water level.
This change may bring an increase in the aquifer productivity, which increases the availability of
underground water in the areas closer to the reservoir. However, this condition depends on the type of
underground aquifer found in the ADA and the AID, because the type of rock substrate interferes directly on
the underground flows.
Another possible effect resulting from the water table elevation is the pollution of the underground aquifers
due to the presence of septic tanks, cemeteries or other contamination sources of anthropic origin.
Another group of effects originated by the water table elevation refer to changes on the soil conditions. This
is an important impact having in view that it presents a significant magnitude, and there is no possibility of
establishing corrective or preventive measures. Depending on the pedology characteristics, such changes
may render impossible the use of the affected soil for farming. Another important change refers to changes in
the composition of the marginal forests, because some vegetal species cannot stand the water table elevation,
what may lead to their death and replacement for species adapted to the new humidity conditions.
Assessment: The water table elevation effects are ambiguous regarding their nature, since they will benefit
the creation of shallow aquifers, increasing the water availability for the population, depending on the type of
existing aquifers. On the other side, its effects are negative when one considers the possibility of the
formation of humid and flooded areas, thus interfering with the soil characteristics. The impact is direct;
permanent; irreversible; with regional influence and medium magnitude and importance.
Measures to be adopted: Actions of monitoring the water table elevation and the quality of the underground
water shall be conducted, to verify eventual negative effects and encourage corrective measures, as well as
increasing the benefits. Cleaning and decontamination of the reservoir area (septic tanks, cemetery and
plantations).
5.3.2.21. CHANGES IN LIMNOLOGY CHARACTERISTICS AND WATER QUALITY
Generating action: Reservoir filling
V-23
Description: The formation of reservoirs normally brings impacts to the water quality, of which the most
important are related to the inundation of the vegetation on the reservoir area and the further degradation of
the phytomass. This phenomenon is related to several processes of physical, chemical and biological nature.
The excessive presence of vegetal biomass in the aquatic means releases organic compounds and nutrients
that, when decomposed may bring changes to the reservoir’s water, as color, turbidity and eutrophication.
The chemical and biological oxidation of organic compounds can also create the consumption of the
dissolved oxygen available in the water, and may also generate anaerobiosis conditions (absence of dissolved
oxygen). These areas with absence of oxygen are more developed in the deeper layers, where there is no
more incidence of solar light.
Impacts on the water quality may occur, not only in the reservoir area, but also in the first sections of the
Kwanza River, downstream of the dam axis. The first impact occurs during the filling phase and is
significant just after the filling of the reservoir, periods in which there is the incorporation and
biodegradation of the flooded biomass and the consequent release of nutrients and organic compounds that
may bring significant impacts to the aquatic species.
The water quality in the downstream section is conditioned to the levels and characteristics observed on the
reservoir body, mainly in the portion of the reservoir located close to the axis. Starting on this point and
proceeding downstream, a progressive recovery of the dissolved oxygen levels shall be observed, which will
be promoted by the natural reaeration and the consequent drop in the CBO rates. After this transition phase
(which cannot be estimated), the dissolved oxygen levels shall be reestablished within the natural limits that
are normally observed in this water body.
In the incoming flows that form the reservoir, due to the newly established hydrodynamic balance, the
occurrence of an eutrophication process may be favored, with a magnitude that will be conditioned to the
residence times and the concentration of nutrients present in the liquid mean.
The inundation of the vegetation area also contributes to this impact, causing the consumption of the oxygen
dissolved in the water used to feed the biochemical reactions associated to the decomposition of the
underwater organic matter, which may affect the aquatic life, particularly the development of fish. The most
critical phase of this impact can be considered temporary, which is the decomposition process of the more
easily degradable phytomass that takes around 30 days, after this period, the remaining timber material
presents a slow decomposition that is not more critical for the water quality. However, the water quality will
have its characteristics permanently modified.
V-24
Assessment: This is a negative impact directly caused by the formation of the reservoir. Its magnitude is
high and of great importance, however, it can be controlled and monitored through preventive measures.
Measures to be adopted: The mathematic modeling of the water quality must be carried out to be used as
basis for the selective removal of the phytomass existing in the area of the future reservoir, and also in the
forecasting of the future reservoir’s water quality characteristics, as well as the possible influence of the
bottom discharger. As a complement, the water quality monitoring (before and after of the reservoir
formation) and the limnology follow-up shall be carried out since the start of the filling, in order to validate
the modeling and detect, in a timely manner for correction, eventual deviations regarding the foreseen
behavior.
5.3.2.22. LOSS OF NATIVE VEGETATION
Generating action: Implementation of the work quarters and other supporting structures, and the formation
of the reservoir.
Description: The work quarters implementation area and the one that will be flooded by the reservoir, will
represent the loss of native vegetation individuals, reducing the local vegetation’s genetic pool. The
diagnosis has not revealed the existence of rare species, either threatened or in danger of extinction, however,
the possibility that such species exist cannot be dismissed.
Additionally, the loss of vegetation area, with the subsequent elimination of the habitats used by the fauna,
which is forced to move to adjacent areas, is another consequence of this impact.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct and permanent impact, the loss of individuals is irreversible. It
presents localized influence, high magnitude and great importance.
On the other side, the loss of area in the work quarters and in other supporting infrastructure is reversible, by
applying the measures foreseen in the degraded area recovery program.
Measures to be adopted: Consist of compensation measures foreseen in the flora conservation program,
like the execution of the area’s flower and forest inventory that seeks the definition of the priority species for
germoplasm rescue (seeds, seedlings and other propagation structures), and the assessment of the existing
timber potential ; planning of the removal of the species for an ex situ conservation, thus ensuring the
maintenance of the genetic asset of species with potential commercial and medicinal value, implementation
V-25
of seedling beds and the recomposing of degraded areas with native essences. The implementation of the
Degraded Area Recovery Plan is of paramount importance.
5.3.2.23. CHANGE IN THE ICHTHYOFAUNA MIGRATION FLOW
Generating action: Dam construction.
Description: The river deviation has an impact on the fish species that make great displacements during the
reproduction season, which coincides with the high water season, a stimulating event. Therefore, in the rainy
period, such fish, also called reophylic, migrate upstream, while their gonads are reaching maturity. When
arriving to the upper and more favorable river regions, the fish finally spawn. With the river deviation, the
annual reproductive cycle of these species is affected by the restriction or impediment of these displacements
and even the change of the place for spawning and mating.
In the specific case of the enterprise under study, part of the impact was already consolidated by the
construction of the Cambambe dam, downstream of the works and of the upstream Capanda dam that already
regulates the Kwanza River natural flow in the area being studied. However, during field expeditions, some
migratory species were collected and, therefore, this change must be considered in the implementation of the
river deviation and, with additional data, in the dam construction phase.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, irreversible, regional impact, with high magnitude and
great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Execution of an ichthyofauna inventory in the medium Kwanza River basin and
the limnology and water quality monitoring, including the immediately downstream tributaries.
5.3.2.24. CHANGE IN THE VEGETATION COMMUNITIES AT THE RESERVOIR
MARGINS
Description: With the water level elevation up to places with essentially non-hydromorphic characteristics
and the consequent water table elevation, changes in the physical and biological conditions of these
environments will take place. The more perceptible change, on the long term, will be the structural
modification of the vegetation communities found in the areas around the reservoir. This change will occur
mainly due to the different adaptation capacity of the vegetation species living there. The species with higher
V-26
adaptation capacity to different environments will suffer less or can even be favored, while others will have
their survival and natural regeneration conditions restricted. This condition will result in the change of the
original vegetation community structure. With respect to changes in the flower composition, it is likely that
some species may extinguish locally while other new ones may establish. It is worth pointing out that
structural and flower modifications shall occur only on a narrow strip along the reservoir margins.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, irreversible, localized impact, with high magnitude and
great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Consist of compensation measures, like the execution of the area’s flower
inventory for the definition of the priority species for germoplasm rescue (seeds, seedlings and other
propagation structures).
5.3.2.25. REDUCTION IN HABITAT DIVERSITY AND SIZE
Generating action: Suppression of the native vegetation.
Description: The removal of the native vegetation represents an area reduction and the loss of specific
habitats for the land fauna species in the region. It is not possible to assess the adequacy of the displacement
of the individuals of some species to neighboring areas, where there still are similar habitats, due to the lack
of specific studies. Additionally, the reduction in the native vegetation cover will affect the flow of species in
the affected ecosystems, thus creating a possible unbalance in their populations due to the reduction of
genetic exchange.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, irreversible, localized impact, with medium magnitude
and importance.
Measures to be adopted: There are no mitigation measures for this impact. Flora inventory and fauna
monitoring actions shall be carried out.
5.3.2.26. LOSS OF INDIVIDUALS AND LAND AND BIRD FAUNA DISPLACEMENT
Generating action: Civil works, displacement of machines and people, loss of habitats and filling of the
reservoir.
V-27
Description: The presence of a higher number of people in the work quarters area, deforesting and sound
pollution are factors that induce the local fauna to a displacement to areas away from the works. Such
displacement will cause changes in the reception areas due to the competition for shelter and food. Birds and
mammals tend to displace to closer vegetation formations, but, therefore, they shall cross open areas where
they can easily predated. The displacement of other fauna components that constitute the nutrition basis of
amphibians and reptiles, as insects and small mammals, determines the dispersion of different species of
serpents and lizards.
As a consequence, the displacement of animals due to the filling of the reservoir will take place, when many
of them, mainly birds and mammals, will be capable of escaping the advancing waters, seeking shelter in
areas still emerged. However, as these areas will be soon occupied by their own animal population, a super
population situation may occur, creating a more intense than normal competition among them.
Among other consequences we can point out that small mammals with restricted living areas and short flying
birds, reptiles and amphibians will have difficulties to accomplish the displacement to the more distant
remaining areas.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, temporary, irreversible, regional impact, with high magnitude and
great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Consist of compensation measures, like the execution of a fauna inventory in the
area to define the priority species for rescue, when necessary, and monitoring.
5.3.2.27. INCREASE IN THE RISK OF ACCIDENTS WITH POISONOUS ANIMALS
Generating action: Displacement of the land fauna and habitat invasion by workers.
Description: As a result of animal displacements and the frequent presence of people in the area, a higher
number of encounters with poisonous animals is expected, mainly ophidians. In such occasions, the contact
of these animals with the local human population and the consequent accidents may occur.
In addition to displacements caused by environmental changes during the construction, the filling of the
reservoir may cause the retreat of poisonous animals to higher grounds, which can favor the accidents
involving them.
Assessment: This is a negative, indirect, temporary, reversible, localized impact, with low magnitude and
great importance.
V-28
Measures to be adopted: Social communication actions and worker orientation, with warning about the
problem and the risks of accidents. For the treatment of eventual accidents, besides establishing an
agreement with institutions that produce the anti-ophidian serum, an infrastructure must be created to ensure
the adequate storage of this material and increase the stored volume in the local health care facilities, also
human resources must be qualified to perform the treatment.
5.3.2.28. RISK OF FISH DEATH
Generating action: Downstream water depletion during the filling and in the reservoir area due to changes
in the water quality.
Description: The water falling on the spillway and/or the pressure in the turbines results in gaseous
saturation in the areas adjacent to the dam, hydraulic turbulence and/or high pressures. In consequence, there
is the possibility of fish death caused by gaseous embolism and by predators attracted by injured fish. During
the reservoir formation period, a reduction in the dissolved oxygen may still occur and, therefore, bring death
to the less resistant species in this new situation.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, temporary, irreversible, localized impact, with high magnitude and
great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Implementation of a barrier system, ichthyofauna monitoring and either the
transport to the river of the fish captured in the downstream section of the cofferdam, during the
construction, or leaving them in place for scientific studies.
In order to avoid significant water quality changes during the filling phase, the removal of the vegetation
indicated in the modeling shall be carried out to prevent reduction in the oxygen levels.
5.3.2.29. CHANGE IN THE ICHTHYOFAUNA MIGRATION FLOW
Generating action: Dam construction.
Description: The dam construction interrupts the routes of the migratory fish species and reduces the river
flow speed in the reservoir area. These species make displacements for food or for reproduction, stimulated
by the high water season. Therefore, in the rainy period, these fish species, called reophilic, migrate upstream
while their gonads mature. When they reach the upper and more favorable regions of the river, the finally
V-29
spawn. Therefore, the annual reproduction cycle of these species is affected by the restriction or impediment
of such displacements.
Additionally, the downstream river flow regulation will reduce the flooding peaks and the necessary stimulus
for the fish displacement from downstream to upstream.
In the specific case of the Laúca enterprise, part of the impact already was already consolidated by the
construction of the Cambambe dam, downstream, and the Capanda dam upstream, which already regulate the
natural Kwanza River flow in the area under study.
The existence these dams without transposition mechanisms has isolated ichthyofauna populations, however,
there is not sufficient knowledge about the situation of these fish populations within the area of influence of
the proposed enterprise. During the field expeditions, some migratory species were collected, so this change
cannot be dismissed.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, irreversible, regional impact, with high magnitude and
great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Execution of an ichthyofauna inventory in the medium Kwanza River basin and
the limnology and water quality monitoring, also in the immediately downstream tributaries.
5.3.3. OPERATION PHASE
5.3.3.1. RETENTION OF SEDIMENTS
Generating action: Formation of the reservoir
Description: The reservoirs act as sedimentation basins due to the reduction of the water flow speed. The
sediments deposit in an irregular way along the reservoir, so in the reservoir entrance the coarser and heavier
are deposited while the finer sediments proceed downstream, being deposited in the same measure as the
water speed subsides. The deposition of these sediments means a significant reduction in the reservoir’s
water storage capacity and may compromise the enterprise’s operation and service life.
V-30
Sediment retention may bring important consequences, as operation difficulties, adverse effects on the
equipment performance and the intensification of the slow water effects, with the gradual elevation of the
water level in the region upstream from the reservoir. In the case of the Laúca dam, changes in the water
level will be attenuated by the existence of the Capanda dam that retains the major part of the sediments
originated in the high Kwanza River, and is capable to regulate the flows. However, considering that the
retention capacity along the reservoir is estimated in 94.6%, it can be forecast that little sediment will be
made available upstream.
V-31
Assessment: Of a negative nature, the impact is direct, permanent, localized and irreversible, and shall take
place after the filling. Its magnitude and importance are low, having in view that there are no tributaries of
great importance in the section between the Laúca AH and the Capanda AH, as well as because of the
characteristics of the land use and the Kwanza River waters. However, only hydro-sedimentology studies
may provide the exact dimensions and the importance of this impact.
Measures to be adopted: The amplitude of this impact will be sized during the continuation of the hydrosedimentology studies that will detect the need or not to take direct control actions, as the dredging of the
sandy sediment. The bottom discharger may collaborate in reducing the sediment build-up in the reservoir
area.
5.3.3.2. CHANGE IN THE HYDRAULIC BALANCE AND CLIMATE CHANGES
Generating action: Formation of the reservoir.
Description: The atmosphere and the climate have interaction with liquid bodies, whether of sweet water or
oceans. In the case of reservoirs, this interaction takes place mainly through the evaporation process.
Therefore, there is the possibility that climate changes originated by the formation of reservoirs will
influence the micro-climate around the reservoir. The formation of clouds by the water droplets produced by
the Kwanza River rapids can be observed. Some change in the rain regime may happen due to the dam
construction on the river. The total annual rainfall will not undergo significant changes, because the impacts
on the micro-climate will be limited to the immediate reservoir surroundings.
Effects on the regional climate are not likely, because the macro-scale atmospheric systems that control the
climate in the medium Kwanza River have their origin in very distant areas. Eventually, the regional changes
that might occur will be based on the combined effect of the future enterprise with the existing Capanda AH
and Cambambe AH.
Temperature is the climatic element with the highest potential to undergo changes resulting from the
formation of reservoir, due to an effect very similar to that exerted by the sea on sea shore regions. This
change shall spread up to the upper part of the limit layer, mainly in the same direction that the wind blows.
Therefore, a reduction in the daily, monthly and annual thermal range may occur. The light reflection on the
water surface will increase.
Changes in the circulation pattern and in the local wind may occur, since there will be a significant change in
the valley region with the reservoir construction.
V-32
In global terms, the reservoir will act as an emission source of small quantities of greenhouse gases,
particularly methane and carbon dioxide.
Assessment: This is a negative, indirect, permanent impact, with irreversible character. The major effects
will be local, on the bottom of the valleys. The magnitude and importance are low.
Measures to be adopted: Implementation of rainfall and meteorological stations in the direct influence area,
for a continuous follow-up of the climatic conditions.
5.3.3.3. PROLIFERATION OF AQUATIC MACROPHYTES
Generating action: Formation of the reservoir (transformation of the lotic environments into semi-lentic or
lentic and longer water residence time).
Description: With the formation of the reservoir, a considerable increase in the water’s nutrient contents
may take place due to the lixiviation of the flooded soil and the decomposition of the flooded land
vegetation. Such nutrients encourage the growth of the aquatic macrophytes. Although they present great
ecologic importance, their excessive growth may compromise the multiple uses of the aquatic ecosystems
and obstruct the water entrance flow into the dam turbines, thus causing water quality problems.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, temporary, reversible, localized impact, with low magnitude and
medium importance.
Measures to be adopted: Control of the processes that may lead to the eutrophication of the reservoir, as the
use of the soil in its surroundings, thus, preventing the appearance of pollution sources with nutrient
concentration above the water body’s absorption capacity; water quality monitoring.
5.3.3.4. CHANGE IN THE BENTHONIC DYNAMICS
Description: The structure of the benthonic macro-invertebrate community in the enterprise’s area of
influence is subject to changes due to the formation of the reservoir, with the suppression of rapids and high
oxygen content environments, as well as by the reduction of the downstream flow.
V-33
The ecosystem degradation, promoting the development of undesirable species as the aquatic macrophytes
and the growth of aquatic plants in the reservoir area, may create favorable places for the proliferation of
vectors with medical-sanitary importance.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, irreversible, localized impact with medium magnitude
and medium importance.
Measures to be adopted: Integrated monitoring action of the water, health and vector control.
5.3.3.5. CHANGE IN THE DOWNSTREAM AQUATIC ORGANISM COMMUNITIES
Generating action: Reduction in the river flow.
Description: The flow reduction brings changes in flow, temperature and the water’s chemical composition,
and the retention of solids and nutrients, leading to several limnological changes, which can affect the
aquatic fauna in this section of the river. The retention of material in suspension in the reservoir changes the
nutrient distribution downstream. Additionally, the reduction and regulation of the water flow may cause the
formation of ponds that, with the temperature elevation and the reduction of dissolved oxygen may generate
the death of fish and of macro-invertebrates retained in such ponds by drying or predation.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, local, irreversible impact, with medium magnitude and
great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Integrated monitoring actions of the water and ichthyofauna, in addition to the
maintenance of the minimum ecologic flow that guarantees the ecosystem reproduction.
5.3.3.6. RISK OF INCREASE IN DISEASE VECTORS
Generating action: Formation of humid and swamp areas.
Description: With the filling of the reservoir the formation of humid and swamp areas will occur. The
appearance of these areas creates a favorable environment for the reproduction of disease vectors.
V-34
Assessment: This is a negative, direct impact, with temporary duration, regional coverage and reversible. Its
magnitude is low, having in view that the affected areas are not occupied. The importance is high because
the proliferation of vectors can trigger the increase in the cases of malaria and sleep disease.
Measures to be adopted: Survey, monitoring and intervention in these flooded areas as part of the vector
and disease control program.
5.3.3.7. INSTABILITY AND EROSION OF MARGINAL SLOPES
Generating action: Formation of the reservoir and plant operation
Description: The dam construction and the filling of the reservoir will cause modifications in the
topographic characteristics of the area directly affected and, consequently, in the acting geomorphologic
processes.
The action of winds, waves and water level variations in the reservoir margins is an important factor for the
development of the abrasion margins, where, depending on the slope characteristics and the type of soil and
vegetation, gravitational processes may be favored.
Downstream of the dam, the river regime suffers modifications due to the artificial control of the liquid
discharges, leading to changes in the fluvial processes, as cuts in the bed, erosion of the margins and
downstream deposition, which can reach long distances. These impacts are normally perceived in the
medium and long terms.
During the plant operation, the erosion of the unprotected margins may take place due to the water level
oscillation and waves, also considering the depletion of 50 m foreseen in the project. There is also the
possibility of instability in the slopes with higher declivity.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct and irreversible impact, acting permanently around the enterprise. Its
magnitude and importance are medium.
Measures to be adopted: Identification and qualification of the critical areas (by mapping the areas that are
susceptible to erosion) for monitoring and the adoption of preventive solutions of stabilization and protection
of slopes and marginal areas.
V-35
Additionally, with the purpose of mitigating and, mainly, preventing the mentioned impacts, it is
recommended that after the conclusion of the works, the degraded areas shall be refilled with soil and
vegetation and be subject to permanent maintenance. The reservoir margins shall be refilled with vegetation
in order to attenuate the impacts of the reservoir waves.
5.3.3.8. INDUCED SEISMICITY
Generating action: Mine exploration, use of explosives, excavations and formation of the reservoir.
Description: The possibility of the occurrence of seismic waves results from the use of explosives for the
exploration of mines for the dam construction, underground excavations and the formation of the reservoir.
In the first case, the result is “artificial” seismic waves having reduced impact significance; the other is
“natural” seismic waves, although they are induced by the reservoir and present high significance as
potential impacts.
The area where the enterprise is located is a region of deep fractures that reflect on the landscape
morphology. Tectonic activity, although rare, was already recorded on the site. Magnitudes of 4.4 and 4.8
were observed in 1968 and 1976, respectively, and were associated to intense seismic activity in 1914, with
magnitude of 6.54 in the MSK-64 scale.
There is no consensus about the causes, epicenter localization or forecasting methods regarding induced
seismicity. The own problem of the classification of eventual shocks or tremors related to massive
engineering works, as seismic ones, has no consensus, although most of the technicians in the area consider
them as so.
Induced seismicity is usually associated to large reservoirs, but it has been also reported in a significant
number of small works. Hydroelectric power plants were the first type of engineering works where effects on
the earth’s crust were detected, and where induced seismicity was associated to stress modifications due to
the formation of reservoirs.
Whether through a clear seismic effect, or due to the elevation of the hydrostatic pressure on the reservoir
walls and bottom, generating the superficial accommodation of layers, or due to small displacements related
to soil collapse, that is the rearrangement of particles due to the filling, the appearance or the intensification
of tremors and shocks constitutes an impact already reported in several situations and environments in the
world.
V-36
In general, every reservoir is capable of generating seismic waves, but their intensity reach destructive
effects only eventually. The maximum magnitude and intensity values due to the filling of the reservoir must
not exceed the region‘s natural seismicity levels.
Assessment: This is a potential impact of negative and indirect nature, with the possibility of occurrence
during the construction, the filling of the reservoir or in the operation phase. It has a local influence with
temporary duration and irreversible effect. It presents medium to low magnitude, varying with the tremor
intensity, and medium importance because of the possibility of affecting the population and the axes.
Measures to be adopted: Artificial seismic waves will certainly occur and can be mitigated by the
introduction of the usual controlled explosion techniques, natural waves are not certain and their mitigation
is very difficult. Since seismic tremors get out of control and are difficult to forecast, seismic monitoring
shall be developed to record eventual induced seismic activity due to the filling of the reservoir and the
repair of any damage that may result from such activity.
5.3.3.9. THERMAL STRATIFICATION OF THE RESERVOIR
Description: The onset of thermal stratification normally occurs more easily in very deep reservoirs. The
stratification results in the formation of water mass layers with different temperatures and densities. In the
deeper reservoir layer, called hypolimnion, the water has the worst quality, and may reach anaerobiosis
under the most critical conditions, with the consequent release of methane and hydrogen sulfide. In the
epilimnion, the dissolved oxygen concentrations of are relatively higher, and aerobic-type reactions and good
quality water prevails.
Assessment: This is a negative, direct, permanent, irreversible, localized impact, with high magnitude and
great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Execution of stratification studies that will allow the preparation of
recommendations that will guide the power plant operation, seeking the mitigation of this potential impact.
5.3.3.10. CHANGE IN THE ICHTHYOFAUNA COMPOSITION
V-37
Generating action: Modification of the fluvial regime from lotic to semi-lentic and lentic.
Description: This change leads to a significant modification in the aquatic communities, not only in the
ichthyofauna, with an expected depletion in the population of reophlic species and those adapted to fast
flows, and with relative implementation in the communities adapted to the lentic regimes. The elimination of
the lotic environments, with the consequent increase in lentic areas, brings changes in the ichthyofauna
richness and abundance.
A drastic change in the local hydrological regime frequently causes dramatic changes in the niches available
to the aquatic communities. The drop in the water flow speed leads to a higher deposition of particles, which
normally causes the gradual change of the substrate with a natural increase in the deposition of finer
sediments. Therefore, many reproduction and feeding sites are eliminated, bringing changes in the
structuring and dynamics of the communities.
Aspects related to the feeding tactics get changed and the increase of some species may occur, as those that
choose substrates, for example, while others, as those that practice the active hunting of moving benthonic
macro-invertebrates.
Certain species in the Kwanza River that are already found naturally in environments with lentic
characteristics, will find in the future reservoir the ideal conditions to accomplish their life cycles. From the
species that live mainly in lotic environments, those having great ecological value are those that have the
greater possibilities of surviving and prospering in reservoirs. On the other side, populations of the typically
reophilic fish species, shall decline in the region to be occupied by the reservoir. Other species, although not
migratory, but adapted to the lotic conditions, can also suffer reduction in their population.
Assessment: This is a potential impact of negative, direct, permanent, irreversible and regional nature, with
high magnitude and great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Ichthyofauna monitoring and studies of the upstream water courses, with the
purpose of establishing a fauna conservation area (aquatic reserve) in the tributaries of this section and
guarantee possible alternate routes for the migratory fish.
5.3.3.11. BENEFITS TO THE COUNTRY
Generating action: Power generation with the construction of the Laúca dam.
V-38
Description: The country is presently undergoing a strong economic transition and the revitalization of
sectors that remained paralyzed during decades. In this context, the construction of the dam is of extreme
importance to give sequence to the power generation necessary to meet the demand that is starting to grow,
both to boost the industrial sector and too supply the population that still depends on the use of biomass as
the main energy source.
Assessment: This is a positive, direct, permanent impact, with national influence (global), high magnitude
and great importance.
Measures to be adopted: Because it is a positive impact, no measures are foreseen.
5.3.4. WORK CONCLUSION PHASE
5.3.4.1. GENERATION OF EXPECTATIONS AND UNCERTAINTIES
Generating action: End of the construction works in the dam, filling of the reservoir and labor
demobilization.
Description: Despite the temporary nature of the hiring, the end of the works generate expectations and
uncertainties in the local and the migrant population, mainly because new employment opportunities will be
scarce, due to the high unemployment rate prevailing in the region, worsened by the lack of specific
programs for transferring the workers.
As the regional market does not offer many employment options, it is likely that part of these migrants will
return to their places of origin. At the same time, with the demobilization, the workers coming from the ADA
and AID villages will probably return to the unemployment situation existing before the beginning of the
enterprise.
This impact will bring the increase of the unemployment rate in the region and probably the slowing of the
local economy, mainly in the city of Dondo, with the consequent reduction in the family income, followed
by the increase in poverty.
The exit of the workers will cause the reduction of the demand for goods and services, leading to an
economic retreat and the closing of commercial establishments.
V-39
Assessment: This is a negative impact, because it will bring unemployment, with temporary duration and
local influence. It is irreversible and of medium magnitude because part of the migrants will return to their
places of origin, therefore this impact is considered of medium importance because it may result in the
possibility of redirecting to other works, having in mind that some workers will have acquired their first
professional qualification.
Measures to be adopted: Social communication actions, and the establishment of agreements with other
enterprises in the region, which will stimulate and make possible the recruitment or redirecting of the
available labor.
V-40
Table 5.3: Impact Analysis of the Laúca dam construction EIA.
Increase in the
technical-scientific
knowledge about
the region
P
Studies and
projects
MA
Workplace
generation
I
Hiring of
labor
MA
Population
migration
I
Hiring of
labor
MA
Leverage of the
local economy
I
Increase in the
pressure over the
local infrastructure
I
Increase in the
demand for
housing
Risk of socialcultural destructuring
Increase in the risk
of accidents
Increase in
the income
and in the
circulation
of people
and vehicles
Population
migration/ec
onomic
leverage
MA
MA
MA
I
Population
migration
MA
I
Increase in
people
circulation
MA
I
Circulation
of people
and vehicles
MA
Influence
Magnitude
Importance
D
T
R
G
A
G
Social communication
and support actions to
the local population
P
D
P
I
G
A
G
Availability of the
generated knowledge
P
D
T
R
L
A
G
N
I
T/P
R
L
A
G
P
I
T
R
L
A
G
Support actions to the
local population and to
the city of Dondo
N
D
T
R
L
A
G
Support actions to the
local population and to
the city of Dondo
N
I
T
R
L
M
M
N
D
P
I
L
M
M
N
D
P
I
L
A
M
V-41
Global
/Regional
/Localized
N
Reversible
/Irreversible
Great/Mediu
m/Small
P/I
Reversibility
High /
Medium /Low
Generation of
expectations in the
local population
Direct
contact of
the study
teams with
the local
population
Duration
Permanent
/Cyclic
/Temporary
Causing
Agent
Form
Direct
/Indirect
Planning/
Implementation/
Operation/
Conclusion
Nature
Positive/Nega
tive/Undeter
mined
Description
Reception Mean
MF
(physical),
MB (biotic)
and MA
(anthropic)
Phase
Measures to be
adopted
the local population and
to the city of Dondo
the Nlocal population
the local population and
worker training
Occurrence of
occupational
accidents
Resettling of the
Kissaquina
village
Resettling of the
Soba cemetery
Resettling of the
fishermen village
Population
migration/
Filling of
the reservoir
I
Civil works
I
Filling of
the reservoir
I
I
Filling of
the reservoir
Filling of
the reservoir
Filling of
the reservoir
MA
MA
MA
MA
Influence
Global
/Regional
/Localized
Reversible
/Irreversible
Permanent
/Cyclic
/Temporary
Reversibility
Magnitude
Importance
Great/Mediu
m/Small
I
Duration
Direct
/Indirect
Causing
Agent
Form
High /
Medium /Low
Increase in the
incidence of
diseases
Planning/
Implementation/
Operation/
Conclusion
Nature
Positive/Nega
tive/Undeter
mined
Description
Reception Mean
MF
(physical),
MB (biotic)
and MA
(anthropic)
Phase
A
M
Measures to be
adopted
N
I
T
I
L
N
D
T
R
L
N
D
P
I
L
A
G
N
D
P
I
L
A
G
Resettling
Worker training
Resettling of the
Sanzala
MA
N
D
P
I
L
A
G
Resettling of the
fishermen village
MA
N
D
P
I
L
A
G
Resettling of farms
Rescue of the material
found
Resettling of farms
I
Risk of losing
archeological and
historic sites
I
Filling of
the reservoir
MA
N
D
P
I
L
--
--
Landscape changes
I
Filling of
the reservoir
MF/MA
N
D
P
I
L
A
G
Changes in the
ichthyofauna
migratory flow
I
Dam
construction
MB
N
D
P
I
R
A
G
MA
P
D
T
I
L
B
P
MB
N
D
T
I
R
A
G
Fauna inventory and
fauna handling and
monitoring
Generation of
timber material
I
Loss of individuals
and land fauna
displacement
I
Deforesting
of the
reservoir
and the
work
quarters area
Civil works
(circulation
of
people and
vehicles)
and
formation of
the reservoir
V-42
Recovery of degraded
areas and environmental
compensation
Inventory and
monitoring of the
ichthyofauna and water
quality monitoring
Importance
Great/Mediu
m/Small
Magnitude
High /
Medium /Low
Influence
Global
/Regional
/Localized
Reversibility
Reversible
/Irreversible
Duration
Permanent
/Cyclic
/Temporary
Causing
Agent
Form
Direct
/Indirect
Planning/
Implementation/
Operation/
Conclusion
Nature
Positive/Nega
tive/Undeter
mined
Description
Reception Mean
MF
(physical),
MB (biotic)
and MA
(anthropic)
Phase
Measures to be
adopted
Sediment retention
O
Formation
of the
reservoir
MF
N
D
P
I
L
-
-
Hydro-sedimentology
studies
Changes in the
hydrologic balance
and climate
changes
O
Formation
of the
reservoir
MF
N
I
P
I
L
P
B
Climate monitoring
Proliferation of
macrophytes
Change in the
benthonic
dynamics
Changes in the
downstream
aquatic organism
communities
Risk of the
increase of disease
transmission
vectors
Unstable
conditions and
erosion in the
marginal slopes
O
Transformat
ion of the
aquatic
environment
MA
N
D
T
R
L
B
M
Control of processes
that can lead to the
euthrophication of the
reservoir, control of
pollution sources with
nutrient concentration
above the absorption
capacity of the water
body, cleaning of the
reservoir and water
quality monitoring
O
Formation
of the
reservoir
MB
N
D
P
I
L
M
M
Water monitoring and
vector control
O
Formation
of the
reservoir
MB
N
D
P
I
L
M
M
Maintenance of the
minimum ecologic flow,
water and ichthyofauna
monitoring
O
Formation
of the
reservoir
MA
N
D
T
R
R
A
M
Vector control
O
Formation
of the
reservoir
M
Mapping of the areas
susceptible to erosive
processes, control and
monitoring of marginal
slopes, recovery of
degraded areas
MF
N
D
P
V-43
I
L
M
Importance
Great/Medium/Small
Mine
exploration and
formation of
the reservoir
MF
N
I
T
I
L
M
B
Seismologic
monitoring
Change in the
ichthyofauna
composition in
the reservoir
area
O
formation of
the reservoir
MB
N
D
P
I
R
A
G
Ichthyofauna
monitoring
Measures to be
adopted
Magnitude
High / Medium /Low
O
Reversibility
/Irreversible
Induced
seismicity
Permanent /Cyclic
Causing Agent
Form
Direct /Indirect
Phase
Planning/Implementation/
Operation/Conclusion
Reception Mean
MF (physical), MB
(biotic) and MA
(anthropic)
Nature
Description
Global /Regional
Positive/Negative/Und
etermined
Thermal
stratification of
the reservoir
O
formation of
the reservoir
MF
N
D
P
I
L
A
G
Studies about
stratification, water
quality modeling and
water quality
monitoring
Stimulation for
the increase of
the local
farming
production
O
formation of
the reservoir
MA
P
D
P
R
R
A
G
Support actions for
the local community
Benefits to the
country
O
Hydroelectric
power
generation
MA
P
D
P
I
G
A
G
Without measures
E
Labor
demobilization
M
Social
communication and
agreements to support
the unemployed
population
Generation of
expectations
and
uncertainties
MA
N
D
V-44
T
I
L
M
5.4. PROGNOSES
As shown above, two alternatives for the definition of the environmental prognosis were analyzed, the first
one without the enterprise and the second with the enterprise.
5.4.1. WITHOUT THE ENTERPRISE
The overall trend is that the social-economic conditions of the municipalities inside the enterprise insertion
area will remain as they were in the medium and long terms. The opening process, the improvement of the
access infrastructure and the future energy production and transmission shall encourage the implementation
of several projects of farming and industrial nature in the medium Kwanza River basin. The appearance of
agro-industrial hubs with the purpose of making Angola a self-sufficient country concerning food is a bet of
the Government of Angola.
However, this process shall concentrate in the Malanje / Cacuso / Dondo / Luanda axis, whereas the Dondo /
Capanda AH axis will remain the present situation, out of the development dynamics and the accelerated
development process now in progress in Angola.
Therefore, the village populations shall continue their survival based on subsistence farming and extraction
activities, following the present pattern and worsened by the fleeing of young people in the search for better
opportunities and education. Due to the many social emergencies present in the country and the lack of
human and material resources, in the short and medium terms little will be accomplished in terms of the
implementation of infrastructure and social equipment intended to improve the living conditions of this
population.
With respect to the biotic mean, in a prospective picture, it can also be stated that it will remain stable, with
the continuation of hunting for survival and illegal, as well as the execution of land burning for several
purposes and charcoal production. Probably, the fauna will continue its slow recovery process after the war
period.
5.4.2. WITH THE ENTERPRISE
The implementation of this enterprise in the medium Kwanza will create leverage in the region under the
social-economic point of view, affecting essentially the population of the municipalities and villages in the
areas of influence analyzed in this study. The most significant aspects will be the following:
• Generation of doubts and expectations in the population surrounding the project site;
V-45
• Increase in the local attractiveness and the consequent increase of the population seeking employment
opportunities;
• Offer of fixed and temporary employment in the enterprise’s implementation and operation phases, with
the creation of income generation opportunities and the development of small businesses.
The approximate number of workers in the so-called “peak period of the works” will be of approximately
3,700 people, totaling around 5,800 workers, including the direct and indirect services (support,
administrative, laboratories, etc.). This peak is foreseen to take place between the 2nd and 3rd year of the dam
construction, approximately in the month of October 2015.
The arrival of such a contingent of workers, added to the migrants and to the busy traffic of vehicles and
cargo, will cause potential impacts on the way of life and on the social structure of the villages, a fact that
will possibly give way to some conflicts and tensions, should the measures for process accommodation and
strengthening of the community social structure in the surrounding villages are not taken.
Once the construction period has passed, the retreat of the process will take place, possibly bringing negative
consequences to the region, should measures and specific cares are not taken when the works are
demobilized.
With respect to the physical mean, to the geologic and geomorphologic and water quality characteristics, the
foreseen impacts are predominantly associated to the enterprise implementation phase, due to the
transformations arising from excavations and explosions in the Kwanza River banks and bed, and the filling
of the reservoir as well.
With respect to the biotic mean, the enterprise implementation will affect the original vegetation areas, with
the loss of vegetation species and habitats. The vegetation suppression will affect the fauna, due to the forced
displacement of animals. The aquatic fauna will also suffer with the changes on the mean, with the likely
reduction and/or disappearance of some species. The bird fauna will be affected during the period of the
bank slope explosions and excavations, where a great number of swallow individuals and other species are
found, being this place used for mating and nest making. The potential impacts will have priority and are
related to the filling of reservoir.
V-46
CHAPTER 6
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS
VI-1
CONTENTS
6. Environmental Management Programs ..................................................................................... 5
6.1. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING PLAN ................................................ 6
6.1.1. JUSTIFICATION ............................................................................................................................ 6
6.1.2. OBJECTIVES.................................................................................................................................. 6
6.1.3. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 6
6.2. SOCIAL COMMUNICATION PROGRAM ......................................................................................... 7
6.2.1. JUSTIFICATION ............................................................................................................................ 7
6.2.2. OBJECTIVES.................................................................................................................................. 8
6.2.3. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURE ........................................................................................... 9
6.3. ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION PROGRAM................................................................................. 9
6.3.1. JUSTIFICATION .......................................................................................................................... 10
6.3.2. OBJECTIVES................................................................................................................................ 11
6.3.3. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURES ....................................................................................... 12
6.4. PROGRAMS SUPPORTING THE WORKS ...................................................................................... 14
6.4.1. CONSTRUCTION’S ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAM ............................................................ 14
6.4.2. MARGINAL HILLSIDE AND SLOPE DESTABILIZATION MONITORING PROGRAM
6.4.3. COMMUNITY RESETTLEMENT PROGRAM.............................................................. 25
6.4.4. ARCHEOLOGY HERITAGE PROTECTION PROGRAM ............................................ 30
6.4.5. DEGRADED AREA RECOVERY PROGRAM .............................................................. 32
6.5. SOCIO-ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAMS ....................................................................... 37
6.5.1. COMMUNITY SUPPORT PROGRAM IN THE DIRECT AREA OF INFLUENCE .... 37
6.6. MONITORING AND CONTROL PROGRAMS ................................................................ 38
6.6.1. CLIMATE MONITORING PROGRAM .......................................................................... 38
6.6.2. SEISMOLOGICAL MONITORING PROGRAM ........................................................... 39
6.6.3. HYDROGEOLOGICAL MONITORING PROGRAM .................................................... 40
6.6.4. LIMNOLOGY, WATER QUALITY, AND SEDIMENT MODELING AND MONITORING
PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................. 42
VI-2
23
6.6.5. ICHTHYOFAUNA INVENTORY AND MONITORING PROGRAM .......................... 45
6.6.6. FLORA CONSERVATION PROGRAM ......................................................................... 48
6.6.7. TERRESTRIAL FAUNA CONSERVATION PROGRAM ............................................. 55
6.6.8. VECTOR CONTROL PROGRAM................................................................................... 69
Abbreviations
List of Figures
FIGURE 6.1: ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAMS
PROPOSED FOR THE LAÚCA DAM EIA
FIGURE 6.2: PROPOSED SEEDLING DISTRIBUTION IN THE FIELD FOR THE
VEGETATION RECOVERY PLANTATION IN THE CONSTRUCTION AREAS
FIGURE 6.3: FLOWCHART OF THE RESCUE ACTIONS OF THE FLORA CONSERVATION
PROGRAM
List of Tables
TABLE 6.1: MINIMUM SUGGESTED AREA FOR THE INSTALLATION OF THE WORK
QUARTERS HEALTHCARE FACILITIES FOR THE LAÚCA PROJECT
TABLE 6.2: MAIN TYPES DE MEASURES TO BE ADOPTED FOR THE LAÚCA PROJECT
VI-3
Abbreviations
AAR
Regional Influence Area
ADA
Directly Affected Area
AID
Direct Influence Area
AII
Indirect Influence Area
AH
Hydroelectric Power Plant
BCR
Concrete Compacted with Roll
CNRF
National Center for Phytogenetic Resources of Angola
CCD
Convention for Fight against Desertification
CDB
Convention on Biological Diversity
DEC.
Decree
EFB
Rock Construction with Concrete Coating
EIA
ENE
National Energy Company
FAO
United Nations Organization for Food and Agriculture
GAMEK
Office for the Medium Kwanza Power Plant
LBA
Environment Basis Act
LBRA
Aquatic Biological Resources Act
LGT
General Labor Act
LOTU
Territorial Arrangement and Urbanism Act
MINAGRI Ministry of Agriculture
MINAMB Ministry of the Environment
NBSAP
National Strategy and Action Plan for Biodiversity
OIT
OP
OMS
World Health Organization
SADC
Community for Southern Africa Development
SEA
State Secretariat for Water
SONEFE National Society for Study and Financing of Overseas Enterprises
TIRFAA
International Treaty on Phytogenetic Resources for Food and Agriculture
ZCIT
Intertropical Convergence Zone
VI-4
6. Environmental Management Programs
The plans presented in this chapter have the purpose to preventing, minimizing or compensating the
potential impacts of the Laúca AH project. These impacts were previously identified in Chapter 5 of
this study, which also contains the recommended mitigation or compensatory measures for the
same.
The mentioned plans and programs follow a specific organizational structure, as shown in Figure
6.1 below.
Figure 6.1: Organizational Structure of the Environmental Programs Proposed for the Laúca Dam
EIA.
Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan
Social Communication
Program
Programs for Support to
the Works
Construction Environment
Environmental Education
Program
Social- Environmental
Programs
Support to the AID
Communities
Slope instability
monitoring
Community resettling
Rescue of archeological
assets
Recovery of degraded
areas
Monitoring and Control
Programs
Climate-related
Seismological
Hydro-geological
Limnology and Water
Quality
Ichthyofauna
Flora
Land fauna
Vectors
The structure above is headed by the Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan that will
carry out the coordination of the inter-institutional actions necessary for the good functioning of the
other programs. The follow-up of the actions foreseen for all the other environmental programs will
be carried out by means of this plan, keeping integrated the different agents that will be responsible
for its implantation.
The Social Communication and Environmental Education Programs will act as the axes from which
the information flow and the actions that will be implemented by the other company environmental
programs will be spread all over the proposed enterprise, thus ensuring the communication between
the entrepreneur, the public agencies involved and the population in general.
VI-5
The implementation and development of these programs are the responsibility of the entrepreneur
who, when carrying out the programmed actions, will be benefited by the lower expenditures in the
implementation and operation phases, thanks to the control of the significant environmental
elements and, moreover, due to less conflicts with the population and communities either affected
or involved by the enterprise.
The application of these environmental programs will also count with the participation, whenever
possible, of the country’s universities and research institutions, so the information and data in this
report will be published and used in other researches in order to benefit the population.
6.1. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING PLAN
6.1.1. JUSTIFICATION
The enterprise implementation requires a management structure that guarantees that the execution
of the environmental programs will be conducted in an adequate and integrated manner. To this
end, the Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan shall establish efficient mechanisms to
guarantee the execution and control of all planned activities in all the environmental programs, and
the adequate execution of the enterprise works, during both the implementation and operation
phases.
This Plan will define a management structure that will ensure that the environmental protection
measures established in the EIA are correctly implemented, and that will make feasible the followup of the implementation of the environmental programs not directly associated to the works, thus
providing a better integration among the different agents, companies, consultants and public and
private institutions involved in the process.
6.1.2. OBJECTIVES
6.1.2.1. GENERAL OBJECTIVES
This plan for the management of the other programs has as main purpose to guarantee the
elimination, mitigation or compensation of the environmental impacts foreseen in the surveys and
studies that were conducted.
6.1.2.2. SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES
•
•
•
•
Promote the development of the environmental programs;
Mitigate or prevent the interferences generated by the works;
Promote the integration among the proposed programs;
Signature of agreements for carrying out the environmental programs.
As activities that compose this Plan are, briefly, the following:
VI-6
• Allow permanent communication with the people responsible for the development of the
environmental programs foreseen in the present study;
• Promote the integration of the professionals involved in the preparation and execution of the
programs;
• Plan the development of the necessary activities for the program implementation;
• Follow-up and access the results of the program implementation;
• Review and adequate to the proposed activities/actions, when necessary;
• Follow-up the works and issue periodic progress reports;
• Coordinate the compliance with the environmental license restrictions;
• Develop a schedule that integrates all programs;
• Issue periodic monitoring and follow-up reports.
6.2. SOCIAL COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
The Social Communication Program is a very important support tool for the relationship between
the people responsible for the implementation of the works and the other environmental programs,
and the several social segments affected and/or holding stakes in the enterprise. This Program
guides the negotiation procedures that shall be placed in practice together with the discussions that
will follow the work programming, and that will extend during the whole dam implementation and
operation period. It implies in the creation of efficient information communication channels
regarding the announcement of the environmental and social interest projects and programs
foreseen in this study.
The Program will be directed to the AID communities, traditional authorities, municipal
representatives and neighboring communities, and can also cover the population of the closest
cities, thus contributing for the reduction of uncertainties and doubts related to the enterprise
implementation.
It is worth pointing out that the actions foreseen shall also benefit the population from the cities and
communities that may be attracted by the announcement of the works and, consequently, by the
announcement of the workplaces that will be made available.
The communities from the villages located on the side of the road that connects the city of Dondo to
Laúca will be affected by the traffic of vehicles and people involved in the works, which will have
access to the work quarters through a road that runs between the villages of Dumbo ya Pepe and
Muta in the south direction. Some people in the Kissaquina village will be directly affected by the
formation of the Laúca dam.
The population in these villages still favors the works because they expect to be hired for paid
workplaces, even when it was ascertained that, when the survey was carried out in the communities,
not all will have this desire fulfilled. This hope is already creating expectations in the population
and, if there is not an efficient communication mechanism regarding the availability and the form of
hiring, such expectations tend to transform into anxiety, and can generate significant population
displacements, with all the negative consequences inherent to them.
VI-7
In addition to the absence of professional qualification, the majority of the people do not have
identity cards. This problem must be discussed, to make possible the hiring of the local labor,
because identification is fundamental for the hiring by the contractors.
Another important expectation of the local population is the improvement in living conditions,
infrastructure, services, as well as accesses and roads. Therefore, in addition to information about
the works and the workplaces available, the information about and the participation of the
communities in other environmental programs also require permanent communication with the
village populations. Actions for the formation of the population are foreseen, as described in the
Environmental Education Program, which will benefit them and, in order to accomplish their
purposes, they will require much effort by the people responsible toward involving the
communities.
In the case of the affected population in the village of Kissaquina (farms and the fishermen village),
which shall be resettled, the Program will develop specific communication and follow-up actions
for each preparation phase intended for the resettling, which must include the sacred site that exists
there.
The village sobas will act as permanent contacts with the people executing this Program and the
Administrators of the Pungo Andongo and São Pedro da Quilemba communities, to which the sobas
report, and will also participate through the established instruments. This process shall be
comprehensive since the beginning of the works, in order to guarantee the inclusion of all the
people during the project, in all its phases, since the construction of the river deviation tunnels
(already in progress) until the dam construction, the purpose of this report.
6.2.2. OBJECTIVES
6.2.2.1. GENERAL OBJECTIVES
O main purpose of the Program is to establish communication channels that will allow a permanent
flow of information about the enterprise and its implementation and operation, as well as about the
associated programs that shall be implemented in the region. The purpose of this Program is to
mitigate the impacts regarding the creation of expectations in the population due to employment
generation and the implementation of structural improvements in the ADA and AID communities. It
will also allow to keeping the population informed about the implementation process of the social
and environmental programs foreseen in this document and others developed under the contractor’s
initiative.
The Communication Program also seeks to provide information and orientation regarding the
demobilization phase of the works, when the number of workplaces fall and, consequently, the
economic activities associated to them will be significantly reduced.
• Keep the population correctly informed about the enterprise, the project characteristics, its
impacts and the programs proposed to mitigate them, thus avoiding divergent information from
the several agents;
• Minimize the population suspicions and uncertainty with respect to the enterprise;
VI-8
• Prevent information distortions making it more transparent;
• Promote the local population’s involvement in specific programs, as a way to make their
implementation more efficient, following-up and continuing the necessary actions;
• Allow the affected population to manifest its expectations, apprehensions and problems related
to the execution of the works and the assessment of the procedures adopted to mitigate their
potential impacts, by opening a permanent dialog channel;
• Approximate the relationship between the entrepreneur and the several social sectors affected
and interested in the enterprise; and
• Carry out institutional articulation between the entrepreneur, the contractor, the local institutions,
the church and NGO’s.
6.2.3. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURE
This Program shall explain to the village population the project characteristics, the period foreseen
for the dam construction and the filling of the reservoir, the work phases, the foreseen impacts and
as measures attempted to mitigate or compensate them; therefore, it shall be permanent and
maintained after the demobilization das works and the beginning of the Laúca AH operation,
providing assistance to the displacement of the temporary workers within the enterprise area.
The target public for this program includes the village population living and working in farms in the
region (this means all the villages visited and heard in the EIA); AII’s institutional agencies;
enterprise workers; and recently arrived immigrants from several parts of the world. The villages
capable of supplying localized work force along the road will also be included, specifically
Kissaquina, Ngola Ndala, Kibenda, Nhangue Ya Pepe, Kibenda, Kirinji, Cassula, Kiangulungo,
Dumbo Ya Pepe and Dala Kiosa.
As activities composing this program are:
• Formation of the team responsible for the program implementation;
• Creation of the reference center;
• Organization of the relevant information about the enterprise characteristics and the
environmental measures proposed for the mitigation of the impacts that can be generated by the
same;
• Selection and production of the material that will convey the information about the enterprise,
according to each target public defined, as well as the definition of the strategies for this
announcement;
• Publishing of the enterprise characteristics, the environmental studies and the work schedule;
• Holding meetings with the sobas to discuss the general guidelines of this Program, with
emphasis on the ADA and AID communities;
• Distribution of the information and illustrative material about the soba activities;
• Assistance to the ADA and AID villages for the issuing of the identity documents;
• Elaboration of bulletins and strategies for insertion into the media of information to the AAR and
AII, regarding the actual demand for workplaces, in order to prevent migratory movements to the
enterprise region.
6.3. ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION PROGRAM
VI-9
The environmental education is considered part of a comprehensive participation process, where the
environmental problems affecting individuals and communities are highlighted, seeking the
establishment of a balanced and, above all, healthy family environment. The main point to be dealt
with in the environmental education processes is the focus on the building of attitudes and values.
To be effective, an environmental education program shall promote, besides the knowledge about
the social, environmental and health problems and dynamics, the mastering of procedures, the
development of attitudes and the building of values. These are the necessary conditions for the
training carried out to will be able to generate health and adequate ways of relationship with the
environment. Another fundamental aspect is related to the knowledge about the local socialenvironmental reality. Therefore, the region where the people live shall be the subject and context
of the work, so the environmental problems can be effectively solved.
Among the several definitions of environment, this work holds as premise that the environment is
the set of (physical, biological, political, social-cultural and economical) conditions involving living
beings in a certain place, allowing their survival. And among these living beings are, logically, the
human societies.
The basis of the Environmental Education Program for the dam project’s areas of influence here
presented, considers that the environment comprises the relation between the human beings and
their mean, in an intrinsic way, and seeks to stimulate the development of sustainable alternatives
for the activities of the communities living there, also providing solutions for the serious social and
environmental problems which they presently face, as well as to promote the minimization of the
negative effects arising from the enterprise implementation and the leverage of its positive
consequences.
This population contingent that shall be attracted to the AID will exert pressure on both the
environment (local fauna and flora) and the population (on its culture, health and its production
means) and also over the local infrastructure, already very deficient.
Disturbances as accidental fire, illegal hunting and environmental degradation can be avoided under
the correct orientation and inspection of the appropriate agencies. Therefore, it is necessary a
program that clarifies the workers about the cares with the environment, specially regarding
hunting, fishing and its importance for the neighboring communities, about the need for respect
with the community culture, about the risks inherent to sexual relationships and the precautions to
be taken.
However, as important as the worker awareness, is that of the local population and the immigrants,
since they will be directly affected in its living conditions, already very precarious. Therefore, the
Environmental Education Program that will cover economic, social-cultural and of health problems,
shall be split into two sub-programs, with specific methodologies: one intended for the construction
workers and another for schools, churches and the local population.
Another important feature of this program is to warn the target public about possible risks involving
fauna elements, specifically wild and poisonous animals, or those that transmit diseases, and how to
avoid them.
VI-10
6.3.2. OBJECTIVES
6.3.2.1. GENERAL OBJECTIVE
The Environmental Education Program has as main purpose taking relevant formation and
information to the ADA and AID population and to the enterprise workers, seeking the
improvement of their quality of life and the environment preservation.
The program actions intend to mitigate impacts such as the risk of accidents (outside and inside the
works), health risks, as the transmission of sexually transmissible diseases (Sexually transmissible
diseases – STDs, HIV/SIDA and others), valorization of the community relationships and the
sociability and orientation with respect to the social relations, taking into account the arrival of
migrants, etc.
The purposes of the Environmental Education Program for workers are the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create awareness in the workers about adequate environmental procedures with respect to the
works, the health and safety and to the relationship with the neighboring communities;
Create awareness in the workers about the seriousness of prostitution, particularly the infantile
kind;
Warn and create awareness in the workers about possible disease transmission vectors, with
emphasis on the risk of STDs and forms of prevention;
Provide adequate knowledge to the workers about a possibility of the occurrence of accidents
involving the environment and their own safety;
Warn about the possibility of accidents with poisonous animals and a need to use protective
equipment;
Warning about the risk of fire, indicating the most common causes of such accidents, and
orientation about the measures to be adopted;
Guide the workers, during the enterprise operation, by means of adequate signaling and
inspection, about the dangers of accidental fire and the legal provisions that forbid hunting and
govern fishing;
Create sensibility and awareness in the workers regarding the importance of protecting wild
life, giving emphasis to illegal hunting and the sanctions foreseen in the legislation in force in
the country;
Create sensibility and awareness in the workers about environmentally adequate procedures
related to the works, the health and safety and to the relationship with the neighboring
communities;
Guide the workers about the behavior to be adopted with respect to the local cultural
characteristics, in order to promote their valorization and establish absolute respect to them;
The purposes of the Environmental Education Program for the population are:
• Contribute to the prevention and minimization of the environmental and social impacts arising
from the enterprise;
VI-11
• Inform the population about the foreseen environmental changes and the mitigation and
compensation measures to be implemented;
• Create sensibility in the population about the importance of the conservation and recovery of the
environment;
• Integrate and turn compatible several project actions involving environmental education;
• Carry out a general diagnosis of the environmental domestic, sanitary and health conditions,
seeking the development of appropriate prevention and orientation campaigns about the possible
disease transmission vectors, with emphasis on the STDs, and how to avoid them;
• Spread knowledge and techniques that contribute for the improvement of the environmental
conditions around the residences and districts;
• Spread techniques that stimulate the sustainable use of natural resources and income generation;
• Guide the population, during the enterprise operation, by means of adequate signaling and
inspection, about the dangers of accidental fire and the legal provisions that forbid hunting and
govern fishing.
In order to accomplish the purposes established in this Program, which will assist both the workers
engaged in the works and the local population, a coordination structure will be established, as
follows:
• Formation of the team responsible for implementation and technical support team;
• Definition of the technical structure necessary for the program implementation (specific space,
infrastructure, equipment and supplies);
• Establishing of a training/formation methodology for the different themes to be covered in the
courses;
• Preparation of the lecture program, recycling periodicity, definition of the use of media
(television and radio, among others) and the creation of basic materials as leaflets, posters,
didactic material for schools, audiovisual material, etc.;
• Monitoring of the results obtained, re-adequacy and updating of the program themes;
• Establishment of partnerships with governmental entities and NGOs, whenever necessary and
possible, to make possible the optimization of the program results.
6.3.3.1. WORKERS
Periodic formation actions will be carried out, composed by lectures and other interactive activities
for the workers, intended to present and discuss the Workers’ Behavior Code and the environmental
standards and construction techniques adopted in the enterprise.
The worker orientation and formation program will start already during the integration of the
worker by the contractor, just after the hiring of each group, before starting their activities in the
works, and will include periodic recycling, when specific activities and actions will be carried out
should problems be identified during the works.
Didactic posters will be prepared and posted in the lodging building and around the works, with
clarifications about the region (for example, map with the Kwanza River path, indicating the
existing species shall not be hunted, the localization of the villages, medicinal plants, the road
system and the work quarters and workshop location), information about the Ambundu culture,
information about STD prevention, etc.
VI-12
A monthly report shall be prepared by the monitor, about the registered notifications and the way
they were dealt with, whether through interviews, warnings or other disciplinary measures.
The actions here foreseen will be taken as support and with complete integration with the formation
planning established in the Construction Environmental Program.
6.3.3.2. POPULATION
The educational activities have the purpose of introducing and strengthening the environmental
preservation notions and increasing the quality of life of the families by disclosing relevant
information about the region and the technical assistance to the communities, intending the
improvement of the farming activities in a sustainable manner.
Several activities will be carried out seeking the spreading of domestic economy knowledge and
techniques; maintenance of health and family hygiene; improvement of adequate environmental
conditions in the residence surroundings (construction, maintenance and cleaning of septic tanks,
appropriate disposal and launching of residential waste, etc.) and the valuation of local experiences.
Such actions will be carried out as far as possible in a participative way, integrated to the
communities, always promoting their actual involvement in the program, thus incrementing their
results. In principle, the following themes will be considered:
• Identification of the main problems and the potential local social-environmental advantages;
• Identification of the effects and consequences (positive and negative) of the enterprise in the
region;
• Presentation of technologies and sustainable and alternative uses of the natural resources seeking
the improvement of the environment and the population’s quality of life; better practices
regarding construction, sanitation, etc.;
• Health protection and prevention against disease transmission, being the main focus on STDs,
AIDS, endemic diseases, and diseases associated to water distribution and family health and
hygiene.
In addition to these basic themes, new themes to be developed together with the communities can
be introduced during the program, whenever relevant.
Formation actions seeking the qualification of teachers and monitors will also be carried out,
covering environmental problems in the schools attended by the ADA and AID population.
Together with the formation, specific didactic material will be provided for the teaching of activities
associated to environmental education, where priority is given to the importance of healthy
environments for the quality of life of the people and environmental preservation, focusing the local
reality.
Specialized centers can be created for the qualification of spreading agents in some strategic
villages, as a way of leveraging and spreading the program results.
VI-13
6.4. PROGRAMS SUPPORTING THE WORKS
6.4.1. CONSTRUCTION’S ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAM
6.4.1.1. JUSTIFICATION
The region where the Laúca dam will be built, in the medium Kwanza, had lived an economic and
demographic depletion due to the war, like other regions in the country. A significant population
contingent will be attracted to the area in the search for new employment and income opportunities
and will exert pressure on the local environment.
The fact that traditional populations living in the neighborhood use the mean where they live as
raw-material source that is collected for consumption and sale, in addition to complementing the
food supply, makes even more important the preservation of the existing natural resources. For this
reason, efficient environmental control actions shall be established, which will take place during the
entire period of the works.
Therefore, some preventive practices as, for example, the adoption of environmental criteria for
selecting the areas for the implementation of the work quarters, the storage of the organic soil
removed for the installation of the work quarters, or the establishment of the Worker Behavior
Code, can reduce significantly the impacts caused by the works on the environment and the local
population. Previous measures intend to prevent or reduce the environmental impacts, in addition to
turn economically feasible the later recovery posterior of the area used and its integration to the new
landscape.
On the other side, regarding the workers, besides concerns about their relationship with the local
communities, additional cares with their work, hygiene and health conditions shall be part of the
work quarters installation program, with respect to the improvement of the quality of life and wellbeing of the employed population, as well as also avoiding damages to the surrounding
communities.
The worker’s village (administrative work quarters) shall offer lodging, nutrition, health services,
water supply services, treatment of effluents and solid residues, leisure equipment, recreation and
cultural entertainment to the workers. This policy intends to reduce the anthropic pressure exerted
by the workers’ contingent on the environment that will receive the works.
In the case of the dam construction project, several impacts are foreseen during the construction
phase, capable of generating degradation phenomena, which result from the following actions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cleaning of the land and removal of the existing vegetation;
Earthmoving for the installation of the work quarters;
Cuts and landfill for the implementation of the access ways;
Mine exploration for the obtainment of construction materials;
General excavations;
Intense traffic of heavy machines on the area and the surroundings;
Use of the installations by thousands of people, during a long period;
VI-14
• Explosive detonation for slope excavations.
Such actions configure a considerable and quick intervention on the region where they take place.
And they would leave consequences after the implementation, if an environmental control program
were not adopted. Respect for the implementation region and its natural resources is, therefore, the
justification of this program.
6.4.1.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objectives
This program seeks to provide technical elements to make the works feasible with the lowest
environmental cost possible and, after this, value the landscape aspects around the dam and work
quarters’ construction. It shall provide the contractor with all the environmental criteria to be
followed during the several construction phases and, to the workers, the standards for an
environmentally correct behavior.
Specific Objectives
The program has the specific purposes of mitigating the impacts arising from the starting and/or
increment in the incidence of erosive processes on the soil; landscape changes; vegetation
suppression in the civil works and work quarters area; atmospheric emissions and noises produced
by vehicle engines; utilization of heavy machinery and the use of explosives, causing stress on the
population; emission of effluents.
6.4.1.3. METHODOLOGICAL PROCEDURES
The development of the environmental control program in the construction phase foresee the
following activities:
• Analysis of the basic project’s technical and execution specifications regarding the aspects of the
works that may bring environmental risks;
• Installation, operation and demobilization of work quarters:
o Susceptibility to erosive processes;
o Soils subject to physical instability;
o Jagged topography;
o Floods and inundations;
o Water table surfacing;
o Proximity of areas with vegetation in good condition;
o Forms of soil use and occupation, according to the legislation in force;
o Hours for the works and vehicle movement;
o Signaling system;
o Water supply;
o Sanitary sewage;
o Collection and disposal of solid and liquid residues;
o Procedures for labor mobilization control;
o Traffic of machines and equipment;
o Healthcare and occupational medicine facilities;
o Occupational safety;
VI-15
o
Work quarters demobilization, taking environmental rehabilitation into account;
• Opening of access roads:
o Susceptibility to erosive processes;
o Soils subject to physical instability;
o Strict purpose for the normal operation of the equipment running on them;
o Specific drainage system;
o Special characteristics for the road design and execution;
o Interference in the sacred places of the traditional communities.
• Land deforesting and cleaning:
o Criteria and special cares for deforesting and land cleaning in the work quarters area.
• Installation and exploration of mine, borrowing areas and disposal areas:
o Removal and storage of the fertile soil layer;
o Terrace building;
o Declivity reducing;
o Soil management and compacting;
o Drainage orientation;
o Vegetation recovery.
• Earthmoving services:
o Geologic and geotechnical factors;
o Vegetation cover;
o Drainage;
o Noise generation, where applicable;
o Interference with the roadway system;
o Risk of accidents and running of machines and equipment;
o Excavations;
o Boulder removal;
o Superficial drainage system;
o Material transport.
• Operation of machines and equipment:
o Generation of effluents from the fueling, washing and maintenance of machines and
equipment (fuel, oil, grease, etc.);
o Noise generation (when applicable);
o Generation of particulates;
o Movement of machines and equipment;
o Signaling devices for the operation;
o Risk of accidents.
6.4.1.4. INFORMATION COLLECTION
The collection of information about the work quarters and its installations, the number of workers
and living place, labor health (to size the healthcare facilities), place of extraction and quantity of
VI-16
construction materials, land use and occupation in the work quarters area, need and design of access
ways, foreseen movement of machines and equipment.
6.4.1.5. PREPARATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL CRITERIA AND GUIDELINES
FOR THE EXECUTION OF THE WORKS
Twelve aspects were identified in the enterprise implementation that are environmentally affected:
drainage; geotechnical actions and earthmoving; design of roads and access ways; water supply;
domestic and industrial sewage draining; garbage, residue collection and disposal; traffic, signaling
and operation of machines and equipment; deforesting and vegetation recovery; sound pollution;
labor mobilization; hygiene and health; soil use and occupation. Regarding each one of these
aspects, criteria and guidelines that shall guide the contractor will be developed.
6.4.1.6. WORK QUARTERS
The work quarters shall include buildings for administration and services; warehouse; canteen;
healthcare facilities; vehicle washing and oil change station; crushing center, concrete center; yard
for rock, sand, crushed stone, gravel and surplus material storage; yard for steelwork and premolded pieces; carpentry; locker rooms, toilets, watch station and parking lot.
All discharge points from the flow of soil channels and drains shall receive protection against
erosion, using crushed stone layers, and grass or energy dissipation boxes. In the cases where the
transport of sediments is likely, retention boxes for solids shall be foreseen, which will receive
periodic maintenance. In case of steep declivity, channels shall be built in the shape of stairs, with
intermediate dissipation boxes if necessary. In no case, the rainwater drainage systems and the
sanitary drainage systems shall be interconnected; these shall have their own drainage systems.
Regardless of the requirement for an absolute separator system, oil and grease separation boxes
shall be foreseen in the drainage network, in strategic points along the system before the final
disposal, so the water originated from the washing of machines and vehicles will collected and
separated.
Flat platforms that favor water ponds shall always be avoided by guaranteeing a minimum declivity
of 1% to 2% in any place within the works. As theses are temporary installations, the work quarters
may use simplified drainage systems, therefore dismissing sophisticated works in concrete, as
discharges and others of a permanent nature. The occurrence of erosion or sediment transport to
water springs and reception trenches shall be avoided. Additionally, the work quarters drainage
shall be equipped with structures that stand the traffic of machines and equipment.
With respect to earthmoving services, the environmental criteria refer mainly to the mandatory
inclusion, in the planning and execution of these services, of prevention techniques against erosion,
of the maintenance of the implemented protection systems and the monitoring of their efficiency.
Additionally, the area for any earthmoving service that might be carried out on the work quarters
shall be subject to a future recovery program for degraded areas, where the separate removal,
transport and appropriate storage will be necessary, including a program for the future reutilization
of the material removed from the land’s fertile layer. The contractor will be responsible for
conserving the material characteristics until the moment of reutilization.
VI-17
The internal circulation accesses between the several work quarters elements shall be kept under in
permanent traffic conditions for the construction, erection and inspection equipment and vehicles,
until the conclusion of the works.
In the specific case of the warehouse areas for the open air material storage, the land shall not
undergo earthmoving, the shallow vegetation will be conserved and only the existing shrubs will be
removed. The storage of the material shall be made over metallic or wood blocks to avoid direct
contact of the material with the soil.
In order to guarantee an adequate water supply to the work quarters, special cares shall be taken
against contamination. In case any chemical product is used for treatment or disinfection, its storage
and handling shall be made in a safe way and by trained people, thus preventing risks to people,
animals and the environment.
For oil, grease and other contaminant materials, separation and accumulation tanks shall be
foreseen, in addition to adequate removal procedures. The effluents resulting from an eventual
treatment process shall be directed to the industrial sewage system, in this case required. The whole
supply system shall be protected against contamination, particularly water tanks and wells, by
choosing an adequate localization, fences, elevation, etc. Treatment of domestic effluents in septic
tanks shall be foreseen in the work quarters. The use of open air trenches or tanks without adequate
cover is not allowed.
Residue management shall cover the work quarters and all of its installations, including the
temporary ports for access and assistance to the both margins of the works and, as far as possible,
using the same area should there be the need to store the residues. Detailed information about
residue management is presented in Attachment IV –Residue Management Plan.
The collection, transport and final disposal of residues shall be carried out in adequate ways and
places. All residues produced in the work quarters and other places of the works shall be frequently
collected, in order to prevent odors or the proliferation of insects, mainly the tsé-tsé fly. Food waste
and empty bottles shall be totally removed from the drums, and no disposal of residues will be
allowed in field areas.
The industrial residues that will be generated during the Laúca dam construction activities shall be
subject to mandatory management in terms of collection, disposal and adequate destination.
Residues so classified exist only in the Brazilian legislation; the best solution is to call them
industrial residues that shall be stored in an isolated place, covered and with impermeable floor, so,
in case of leaks, no infiltration will occur with the possibility of contaminating the soil.
Additionally, a concrete dike shall be built around the hall (nave), so any spill would not reach the
external environment.
Oil and grease shall be placed in cylindrical containers or similar recipients, in PVC or PP, and kept
hermetically closed. Such recipients shall be provided with labels attached to a visible place on their
walls, with a text indicating their contents.
Used oil can be delivered to third parties to be re-refined for use in less demanding processes.
Should this service not be available in Angola, the industrial residues will be sent to an industrial
landfill or to a duly licensed incineration unit. However, continuity shall be given to the permanent
VI-18
maintenance procedures of vehicles to prevent their oil from leaking and its excessive consumption,
as well as keeping hygiene in the workshop installations, by in no case disposing the residues on the
atmosphere, soil and water springs.
The final destination of the residues will depend on the possibility of reutilization, reprocessing or
recycling carried out by third parties, duly licensed or authorized by the appropriate environmental
control offices, or of delivery to a licensed receptor for final disposal, whether by means of a
controlled industrial landfill, co-processing or thermal destruction.
The local population will have priority in hiring. Therefore, the workers will able to keep their
homes, thus reducing the concentration of the contingents of foreign population in the region and
the consequent social and sanitary problems.
All workers shall be vaccinated against yellow fever, tetanus and other diseases endemic in the
region. The contractor shall carry out the vaccination upon the hiring medical examination of the
employees, in addition to preventive campaigns against sexually transmissible diseases, ingestion of
contaminated water and accidents with poisonous animals, as foreseen in the social communication
and environmental education programs.
The employees shall be oriented regarding the procedures for the utilization of the canteen,
healthcare facilities and the overall work quarters area and, also, regarding their displacement,
consumption and leisure, in order to reduce relationship problems with the local population.
The hiring procedures and the later demobilization of workers shall be informed to the community
as part of the Social Communication Program. In the same way, the institutions participating in the
forum to be created, as well as the communities, shall be informed about all events scheduled for
the construction phase.
Where necessary, food should be stored in facilities subject to permanent cleaning and refrigerated,
in the case of perishable food. Screens and protective screens should be used to prevent access by
animals and insects. Dining hall facilities should include screens, ventilation systems, and a
sufficient number of restrooms with adequate capacity. Transport of meals into the field should be
accomplished, when necessary, in sterilized airtight containers.
The medical unit for treatment of illnesses, injuries, and accidents should include the following
facilities and offer adequate space for workers, as per the table below (Table 6.1).
Table 6.1: Minimum Recommended Area for Ambulatory Facilities at the Project Work Site
Facilities
Area (m2)
Waiting Room
16
Immunization Room
9
Examination Room
9
Pantry, Utilities, and Cleaning Supplies
4
Medical Bandage, Sterilization, and Pharmaceutical Supply Room
9
Public Restroom
2
Employee Restroom
2
Total
51
VI-19
The Environmental Construction Program will include the establishment of an Internal Accident
Prevention Committee (CIPA) at the project site, training for first responders, and tracking and
follow-up of endemic diseases.
Health and safety education measures will be provided to address the following issues: traffic
safety; prevention and control of infectious diseases and parasites; smoking and alcohol
consumption controls; prevention of accidents involving poisonous animals; prevention of physical,
chemical, and biological workplace risks; and use of Individual Protective Gear (IPG).
6.4.1.7. ACCESS HIGHWAYS AND ROADS
All access roads should be executed, preferentially, for their specific designated purpose. However,
access roads may be shared or reconfigured for use by local communities, provided the pertinent
safety measures are met. The removal of vegetation to open access highways and roads constitutes a
significant environmental impact with indirect repercussions on local wildlife, water resources, and
soil structures. As such, special attention should be given to the strategies adopted, with a view to
attenuating the corresponding impacts on the ecosystem.
All protective elements and structures required for the supervision and safety of access road use
should be executed and specified in the project’s executive design. The vertical and horizontal
project designs for access roads should minimize environmental disruptions, with a view to
facilitating drainage and preventing unnecessary erosion or deforestation.
When possible, access roads should follow the contours of the terrain, circumventing these
smoothly where necessary. In cases in which it is not possible to avoid steep inclines, stone or
gravel covering should be used to facilitate traffic flow and prevent erosion. Intersecting slopes
should be included on platforms and shoulders to ensure proper drainage of roadways. The
execution of new access roads or modification of existing roadways should incorporate
accompanying drainage systems to prevent erosion. All cut or fill slopes should be drained by
means of pipes using steps or terraces and energy dissipation boxes, when required.
The contours of existing roadways executed for tunnel excavation activities will be adapted to the
characteristics of the pertinent construction equipment and dam project design. This process may
require earth-moving services.
To reduce or eliminate the possibility of environmental degradation arising from earth-moving
services executed for purposes of the construction and adaptation of access roadways and routes, all
project design criteria governing access road drainage systems and the respective cuts or landfills to
be avoided must be strictly applied during the planning stage and by virtue of the geological and
geotechnical characteristics of the region’s soils and their susceptibility to erosion. All cut or fill
slopes designed and scaled to the pertinent stability criteria adopted in the project must be protected
by grass (recovery of vegetation) immediately upon completion of the respective earth-moving
services.
Existing access roadways that intersect areas subject to flooding and were improperly executed
must be modified, with a view to re-establishing the natural conditions of the drainage network
through implementation, for example, of storm drains, galleries, cross bridges, etc. Access roadway
VI-20
pavement should be maintained so as to ensure the continuous flow of construction and assembly
equipment and vehicles, as well as privately owned vehicles used by local residents.
All permanent signage required for the safety and operation of the Laúca Hydroelectric Unit will be
executed in accordance with the executive project design. During the construction phase, signage
should be installed at all locations that intersect with local communities or are situated near these,
ensuring traffic stops where necessary and the safety of pedestrians in relation to the flow of heavy
vehicles, trucks, etc. Additional safety measures may be adopted in relation to traffic and signage in
areas located near villages. Heavy machinery and equipment operators must adhere to appropriate
traffic measures in areas of high risk for humans and wildlife.
In the light of the characteristics of the region of the dam project, the transportation of workers on
flatbed trucks is prohibited. All workers must be transported in automobiles or vans. The project
executor must establish rules, with a view to minimizing the harm caused to the environment by
heavy vehicle traffic, preventing unnecessary destruction of roadside vegetation and barring the
discharge or disposal of materials or substances such as fuel, oil, parts, or components in the
surrounding countryside.
Any damages caused by human, vehicle, or other traffic to roadways, crossings, or other existing
resources, including crop fields and additional community property, must be compensated and
repaired by the project executor. Repairs should be executed immediately in the case of accidental
and unnecessary damage to ongoing work or during regular maintenance, in the case of damage to
roadways and other resources affected by normal heavy use during work activities.
Appropriate speed limits should be enforced at crossings, with a view to preventing accidents of any
type involving project personnel or others. The project executor will be responsible for preventing
accidents and adopting the respective safety measures, which will be subject to periodic inspection.
6.4.1.8. LOAN AREAS AND EXCESS MATERIAL STORAGE FACILITIES
Earth-moving services for implementation and development of loan areas must be properly planned
to prevent erosion during use and subsequent recovery.
Techniques must be adopted during use and control of loan areas that give priority to moderate
declivities, terracing between excavation banks, and vegetation recovery on slopes following
completion of services.
All slopes generated in loan and excess material disposal areas must be adequately protected from
erosion caused by runoff until permanent recovery of these areas.
Upon conclusion of construction on the hydroelectric units, all excavated slopes in the area must be
protected with crawling vegetation or shrubs, in accordance with the degraded area recovery
subprogram set forth in the plant conservation program. In disposal areas, all other excavated
material deriving from surface soil rich in organic material should be distributed and preserved (not
used). Basic structures may be used for temporary facilities, although appropriate measures should
be taken to prevent sediment carriage to nearby water courses and waterways.
With respect to earth-moving services, the environmental criteria refer principally to the mandatory
inclusion of planning and execution of the related services, erosion control techniques, maintenance
systems for implemented protection systems, and monitoring of those systems. In addition, if earthmoving services are performed in areas located at a distance from the project site and the
construction site, these services should be encompassed in a future degraded area recovery program,
VI-21
providing for removal, transport, and proper storage, separately, and for future reuse of the removed
fertile sediment.
6.4.1.9. JOINT WORK BETWEEN THE ENGINEERING AND ENVIRONMENTAL
UNITS
The environmental criteria and guidelines cited above and those founded on consolidated technical
specifications and environmental plant construction experiences in other countries should be
discussed by the engineering and construction units and adopted by mutual agreement. During
execution of the project, experts in the environmental and engineering areas should engage in
ongoing monitoring and follow-up and maintain continuous exchanges, with a view to minimizing
the attendant environmental impacts to the extent possible.
6.4.1.10. INCLUSION OF ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES IN PROJECT
CONTRACTS
Once the technical specifications of the project contracts have been prepared with the inclusion of
the respective environmental criteria and guidelines, these will serve as a code of conduct for all
project developers.
6.4.1.11. DEVELOPMENT OF A WORKER CODE OF CONDUCT
The objective of the code of conduct is to safeguard the health and hygiene of workers and, by
extension, local communities, and the environmental conditions of the project work site and
surrounding areas. It should include the rules below, which should be disseminated and
incorporated in the training measures provided for in the communication and education programs
described in this report.
• All workers must undergo a physical exam and receive the required vaccinations at the time
of hiring;
• Appropriate conduct will be expected during transfer from project lodging facilities to the
work site to ensure the peace and quiet of local communities;
• Water from rivers or streams may not be used for individual consumption;
• All waste generated at the work site or dining hall facilities must be disposed of in
appropriate containers;
• Restrooms must be used appropriately to ensure proper hygiene;
• Under no circumstances may trees be cut down by individual initiative without the
authorization of the responsible party;
• Under no circumstances will hunting or collection of wildlife be permitted, nor the
collection of local plant species;
• Drivers of heavy machinery and equipment must adhere strictly to the established itineraries.
The operational procedures set forth in this program must be incorporated in the project work
contracts to ensure the price quotes submitted by proponents include the recommended
environmental precautions.
VI-22
6.4.2. MARGINAL HILLSIDE AND SLOPE DESTABILIZATION MONITORING
PROGRAM
Based on their specific characteristics, hillsides located along the banks of the reservoir may be
subject to instability due to interventions in the area, including erosion and landslides. This
possibility raises the need for implementation of a hillside monitoring and containment program.
Saturation of soil and rock due to filling of the reservoir is yet another factor underlying the
instability of hillsides, due to increased demand on solid or rocky ground (neutral pressures), thus
reducing resistance. Generally, in granite areas erosion processes predominate due to greater soil
thickness, low density of plant coverage, and lower fracturing of granite, while in metasedimentary
rocky domains conditions are more favorable to the movement of large masses and boulder blocks.
The destabilization of marginal hillsides is related to erosion, which at the time of the formation and
operation of the reservoir are reactive, primarily as a consequence of the removal of plant cover.
The occurrence of water “surges” and lapping of waves on reservoir banks are the principal causes
of erosion and are capable of forming ravines and gullies, in particular along the reservoir bank.
These effects, in conjunction with the partial submersion of hillsides, may cause landslides due to
saturation of the soil and subsoil.
Filling of the reservoir during the implementation phase will elevate the hydraulic loads on the
margins, temporarily creating water flows from the reservoir toward hillsides that will be
progressively submerged until complete filling of the reservoir. Reduced resistance to shearing of
the soil due to saturation generated by vertical hydrostatic thrust in lower sections of submerged
hillsides and elimination of surface cohesion will cause deterioration of hillside stability and
increase the potential for movement of large masses and erosion.
These phenomena are exacerbated or minimized based on the declivity of the area. The problem is
more severe on steep hillsides and those marked by soil use and occupation, as removal of natural
vegetation cover is a contributing factor to erosion processes.
Detailed mapping of those areas susceptible to erosion and landslides will enable proper channeling
of mitigation measures to contain marginal hillsides around the reservoir.
Hillsides may also be destabilized due to explosions and drilling activities in connection with dam
construction. Work performed during construction should aim to minimize land and rock slides and
prevent accidents.
6.4.2.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objectives
The specific objective of the program is to mitigate impacts arising from erosion on marginal
hillsides of the reservoir through monitoring and prevention, through the containment of hillside
destabilization and erosion processes, in order to ensure, above all, the safety and useful life of the
VI-23
reservoir, as there are virtually no constructions along the margins requiring protection for
foundations or other types of interventions.
An additional objective of the relocation of access roads is the application of controls on the
physical environment in connection with soil movement during implementation.
Specific Objectives
• To map and monitor areas susceptible to erosion;
• To train specialized human resources in Angola to ensure continuity of the academic and
scientific research in connection with the monitoring programs;
• To contribute to planning of direct intervention measures, with a view to protecting hillsides
from erosion.
The Program involves the following activities:
• To contract a technical team for implementation;
• To map areas susceptible to erosion;
• To execute field research, install instruments, and conduct laboratory tests;
• To perform photo-interpretation and geological-geotechnical mapping, follow up field
research studies, and interpret the respective results;
• To assess the stability of hillsides and scope of control and containment solutions;
• To assess protection measures against superficial laminar erosion, deep erosion, and lapping
of waves against tunnels;
• To monitor stability conditions and erosion along the margins and hillsides used for
construction of the dam, in addition to elevation of groundwater and corresponding
variations during filling.
Geological and geotechnical description encompasses the use of information collected in the
inventory and specification phases plus the following activities:
• Photo-interpretation;
• Field mapping and execution of manual augur surveys, inspection pits, and percussion
surveys, with a view to identifying the pertinent geological-geotechnical features;
• Execution of laboratory tests to determine the geotechnical characteristics of the
representative materials for the various soil and rock types;
VI-24
• Topographical marks installed to control materials subject to instability;
• Determination of critical areas and their respective order according to a specific priority
scale.
The frequency of installed reading instruments varies over time and should be determined following
geological and geotechnical mapping and description. In the event of heavy rainfall, inspection of
the pertinent stability and erosion conditions is recommended.
6.4.3. COMMUNITY RESETTLEMENT PROGRAM
A portion of the village of Kissaquina (on the left bank of the river), Kwanza Sul, is located in the
Laúca Hydroelectric Unit reservoir flooding area. According to residents, the territory occupied by
the population of Kissaquina encompasses a vast area delimited by the Kwanza River to the north,
the Serra M’Bango Mountains to the southeast, and the Serra de Cassango mountains to the
northeast. The community is divided by the Kwanza River, occupying areas on both banks. It is
important to understand the Kissaquina people’s view of territoriality, as this factor is critical for
establishing the parameters applied to select a new territorial area for settlement and identify a
solution with the smallest impact possible on the community following transfer to another location.
Based on the social surveys and public consultations conducted with the population, two productive
farms occupying approximately 2 hectares were identified, each owned by the Boy brothers. The
farms employ youth in the region. A fishing village is located 12 km from Kissaquina, in an area
inhabited by 25 individuals and occupied, further, by a soba cemetery. In addition, the habits and
cultural expressions directly tied to the target territory will be affected.
Inhabitants circulate in an extensive area, principally for purposes of hunting. Territorial borders are
based on natural features of the landscape, among them hills, streams, and plains. According to Mr.
Luis N’golombole (Personal Communication 2009), territorial limits between the communities are
respected by the sobas and are established on the basis of areas used by their ancestors. It is
important to underscore that the sobas and hunters interred in the forest are considered guardians of
the respective territories, who ensure fruitful hunts and protect current hunters.
Kissaquina soba Mr. Casimiro António, located near highway EM 322, reports having relatives of
the former village of Kissaquina on the left bank of the Kwanza River. The population uses the
fishing settlement’s access to the river for crossings. The village is a typically rural settlement, with
plantations arranged radially from a central core of rudimentary adobe and wattle and daub huts
distributed outward, extending to a cemetery housing sobas and their malombes located on a
hillside near the Kwanza River. The cemetery will be flooded by the reservoir. The village soba on
the left bank (Mr. Ngunza Canhanga) is opposed to flooding of the cemetery, as is the other soba of
Kissaquina, and has requested that alternatives be found to prevent the removal of the interred.
There is no basic infrastructure or essential public utility equipment, including schools or health
clinics, in Kissaquina or in the majority of villages consulted. There are no water or electric power
supply services either, and local populations live in significant poverty.
VI-25
Based on this setting, the interviews held as part of the human environment analysis set out in the
study revealed that the local population was supportive and had positive expectations with respect
to resettlement, by moving them closer to the river, and the potential benefits and improvements to
quality of life, as described above.
The key challenges reported by local residents are the lack of transportation, schools, health care
facilities, and jobs. Very view local residents have birth registrations or identification cars. With
regard to their expectations in connection with the project, they point to the possibility of less
isolation, access to schools, health care, and the opportunity to sell their surplus farm production.
In this light, to ensure the welfare of local residents and preservation of the cultural and
archeological heritage of the area, the resettlement of some Kissaquina residents will be guided by a
detailed resettlement program, which will encompass the basic needs of the population identified
for resettlement during implementation of the new site and adhere to the rituals demanded by local
leaders for the proper removal and relocation of the sacred soba cemetery.
6.4.3.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objectives
The specific objective of the community resettlement program is to mitigate impacts arising from
the resettlement of potentially affected populations (including Kissaquina); crop fields and the
fishing settlement; the village sacred soba cemetery on the left bank; and the destruction of
potential archeological and historical sites.
Specific Objectives
• To develop alternatives for a new physical and spatial organization of the Kissaquina village
population subject to removal from its current areas of utilization and occupation;
• To identify new farmland areas (crop fields);
• To promote a new territorial organization accompanied with basic infrastructure and access
structures;
• To supply new social equipment – education and health;
• To introduce enhanced techniques and procedures for the construction of new traditional
dwellings;
• To promote environmental education and coordination with other specific programs
designed for the area;
• To implement technical training programs for affected populations; and
• To stimulate and instruct local groups on strategies for increasing household income,
including best practices of agricultural production.
The principles of the program center on ensuring the target population:
VI-26
• Equivalent or better standards of living than that registered prior to implementation of the
project;
• Access to registered property, natural resources, and basic services (potable water,
sanitation, infrastructure, education, and health);
• Full recovery of losses arising from challenges encountered during the transition process,
that is, difficulties arising from resettlement;
• Recovery of the social networks of project affected populations;
• Recovery of job opportunities;
• Recovery of production capacity;
• Access to economic and social development activities;
• Direct benefits for project affected populations;
• Customary rights fully recognized and fairly compensated;
• Ensuring the resettlement process includes compensation through land for land swaps;
• Consent of project affected populations for resettlement and compensation measures;
• Acceptance, where applicable, by the host community.
The program is organized based on technical guidelines and methods capable of enabling
development of the project, which take into account the socio-cultural, economic, and
environmental factors of the target communities.
In this light, the program will encompass solutions for the community’s new spatial organization,
supplying the area with basic infrastructure, new dwellings, and the necessary social equipment.
With a view to mitigating project impacts, the program will also adopt mechanisms for community
participation, promoting environmental education and technical training for inhabitants, with a view
to boosting household incomes.
Based on the physical and spatial diagnostic analysis and study of the current settlement,
formulation of the project stages for the new settlement will be executed. To this end, the program
will need to determine the selection criteria for the new site, preferably one near the existing
settlement chosen with the collaboration of community residents, followed by development of an
intervention program and a basic and executive project design for the new area. As part of the
selection process, meeting and consultations should be held with government officials and cultural
representatives of the Kissaquina villages.
VI-27
The work will proceed methodically in sequential and consecutive stages for purposes of planning
and direct and indirect analyses, and encompass the consolidation of information on the occupied
area and the new settlement area. Subsequently, the content analyzed by the project team and noted
by the project executor will guide the procedures for management of families and households and
occupation of the new area.
The analyses of the research studies will be consolidated in a single product, in which the respective
sources and methods adopted will be set, formalizing submission of the document in digital and
print format (texts, graphic materials, tables, illustrations, and others) and the Specifications of the
resettlement projects.
In this light, development of the program will proceed methodologically and be organized into
specific stages and moments, as follows:
Stage I
1. Mobilization of the Work Team
Objectives: to determine the bases for organizing the respective work and structuring a project
management plan to guide execution and control of the project, in addition to facilitating
communications between stakeholders.
Activities: to hold expert meetings for the purpose of setting out the project management plan with
an accompanying organization chart, schedule of activities, and qualification structure of local
technicians for the pertinent territorial organization policy planning activities, as well as specifying
additional contracts and/or agreements with related entities executed by the government and its
policymaking bodies.
2. Coordination
Objectives: to establish priorities with the local Chieftancy, which serves as the Kissaquina
government authority’s political representative and has primary responsibility for forging ties with
other government bodies, academic institutions, and NGOs to ensure the success of the work
conducted.
Activities: to develop a registry of sectoral entities and other representative bodies; to prepare a
document with basic inputs for the project executor.
Stage II
1. Strategic Prospecting
Objectives: to confirm the territorial delimitations of Kissaquina as a whole, the areas occupied by
the farms, fishing village, and cemetery, identifying the relevant physical and territorial features and
determining the scope of the program.
Activities: to perform technical and scientific anthropological, socioeconomic, and environmental
studies on the territorial organization of the related spaces; to collect official information on the
communities within the respective Chieftancy; to prepare a physical and territorial registry
VI-28
(altimetry and planimetric surveys) of the current settlements and develop a document with the
necessary cartographic bases; to execute a detailed population survey; to establish a work schedule;
to hold meetings with sobas and residents.
2. Mobilization of Sectoral Bodies and Local Leaders
Objectives: to disseminate the work to technical staff of the relevant sectoral bodies and the village
of Kissaquina.
Activities: to organize direct and indirect meetings between participating stakeholders and
executing personnel; to monitor all work stages.
Stage III
1. Description of Human Occupation
Objectives: to describe the forms of human occupation and distribution of dwellings and to
establish the parameters for selecting the new settlement area.
Activities: to prepare technical reports and thematic cartographic bases, detailing how the soil is
appropriated by residents, the predominant types of dwellings, water supply characteristics,
sanitation and sewage related issues, and others.
2. Prospective Analysis
Objectives: to identify and list the principal physical and spatial challenges found in Kissaquina
and describe the territorial resources in the area, with a view to ensuring these features and elements
transferred to the new settlement.
Activities: to systematize and classify the community’s principal challenges, developing future
scenarios to guide implementation of the new rural settlement.
3. Selection of Resettlement Area
Objectives: to determine the areas where project affected populations will be resettled.
Activities: to select resettlement areas through consideration of the characteristics of the
populations subject to resettlement and the impacts on the host community. Selection of
resettlement areas should consider the pertinent environmental aspects, preventing impacts in
relation to:
• Infrastructure development;
• Increased population density in host area;
• Pressures on natural resources and ecologically sensitive areas.
An environmental impact survey of the host community should be performed. The study should
consider the capacity of the areas targeted for resettlement to support the populations affected by
resettlement (host and resettled communities).
VI-29
4. Development of a Project for the New Settlement Area
Objectives: to outline the project guidelines based on data collected in prior studies.
Activities: to determine the physical and spatial organization of the new sites established for
Kissaquina fishing village and the two farms; to determine the territorial analysis procedures
employed to select alternative sites; to prepare preliminary studies for each thematic project,
incorporating the pertinent illustrations, tables, graphic materials, and other components; to align
the respective proposals with the expectations of residents and government representatives.
5. Development of the Preliminary Project and Basic Project
Objectives: to adapt the set of proposals listed in the preliminary studies to the new project stages.
Activities: to develop the preliminary project and basic project, including the alternative water
supply, sewage, runoff drainage, road system, public lighting and electric power, and waste disposal
solutions adopted; to develop environmental education procedures with the residents of Kissaquina,
with a view to ensuring adequate use of the new settlement’s proposed infrastructure.
6. Development of the Executive Project
Objectives: to develop the executive project, including detailed description of the alternatives
adopted for water supply, sewage, runoff drainage, road systems, public lighting and electric power,
and waste disposal, adapting these as necessary; to incorporate the respective specifications, graphic
materials, and budgets in the projects.
Activities: to prepare the final report, namely the Community Resettlement Program, accompanied
by the executive project and respective appendices.
During execution of the work, the identification of alternative engineering solutions is
recommended to ensure preservation of the malombes located along the territorial boundaries of
Kissaquina. In addition, a landscaping project should be included within the program’s scope as part
of the natural landscape conservation project.
7. Monitoring and Evaluation
The Resettlement Plan should be evaluated based on fulfillment of the respective obligations and
agreements, with a view to ascertaining the social and economic conditions of the resettled and host
populations.
Qualitative and quantitative indicators will be established to assess these conditions at critical
intervals, as determined according to the status of the project’s general execution. A date will be set
for final evaluation upon completion of the plan, specifically defined as the moment when the
projected standards of living are expected to have been achieved.
6.4.4. ARCHEOLOGY HERITAGE PROTECTION PROGRAM
VI-30
The regions in which the access points from the road connecting the city of Dondo to the project
site and the respective construction and work sites are located lie within an area inhabited by
traditional communities for thousands of years.
The archeological sources reveal the presence of human beings in the Middle Kwanza River Basin
in the Stone and Iron Ages, while other anthropological and historical evidence points to areas
dating to the Kingdom of N’dongo in the 16th and 17th centuries. There is the possibility that
remains of this human presence could be found in archeological sites subject to impact and/or
destruction by the movement of heavy machinery, soil, and rocks, excavations, and construction of
the coffer-dams and the principal dam, which could submerge as of yet undiscovered archeological
sites of substantial value to Angolan history.
Based on these sources, there is the possibility archeological sites from different periods could be
discovered containing polished stone and ceramic tools and artifacts from the Stone and Iron Ages,
in addition to remaining evidence of human settlements, markets, fishing encampments, etc. from
the N’dongo kingdom period, factors justifying the proposed archeological investigations and
recovery efforts.
6.4.4.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objectives
To perform an archeological study in dam construction areas prior to the respective earth-moving,
rock removal, and excavation phases. In the event archeological sites are discovered in the area, the
studies will enable the preservation of archeological heritage sites before completion of the
construction work and filling of the reservoir.
Specific Objectives
• To identify and analyze archeological and paleontological sites in the Directly Affected Area
of the Project;
• To document and preserve archeological and paleontological material found in the area prior
to authorizing the commencement of construction work in the target locations.
• Designated expert team designated to conduct studies;
• Perform cartographic analysis of the area and reconnaissance of the project site and areas
subject to flooding using orthophotography, with a view to verifying implementation of the
required encampments, construction sites, and other structures necessary for dam
construction;
VI-31
• Hold consultations with the jurisdictional authorities in Angola on the pertinent procedures,
specifically: Ministry of the Environment, Ministry of Culture, and National Museum of
Anthropology;
• Maintain contacts with the consultants on the environmental and engineering studies, for the
purpose of obtaining the necessary clarifications, such as, e.g., the geological team;
• Develop a program work plan for submission for review by the jurisdictional authorities,
where necessary;
• Prepare the required field study infrastructure;
• Execute the survey campaigns;
• Document the field studies with photographic entries and records;
• Perform laboratory analyses of materials collected at excavation sites;
• Interpret data and draft technical specification for the pertinent mediating bodies;
• Prepare publication for the National Museum of Anthropology.
6.4.5. DEGRADED AREA RECOVERY PROGRAM
The implementation of construction sites, loan areas, excess material storage depots, access ways,
and some marginal areas along the future reservoir will cause environmental degradation, causing
harm to local vegetation, soil deterioration, erosion, and silting of waterways and reduced aquifer
recharging.
As such, planning of recovery measures in degraded areas during project construction phases is
essential, both during use of these in the construction period and recovery following exploitation of
the respective areas.
6.4.5.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objective
To establish a program for the recovery of areas degraded by virtue of project activities, including
temporary protection during the respective construction work and permanent recovery following
implementation of the Laúca Hydroelectric Unit.
Specific Objectives
• To identify and map priority replanting areas using criteria in connection with the selection
of existing vegetation coverage, soil use, susceptibility of local soils to erosion, and
pertinent factors relating to the tunnel operation system;
VI-32
• To determine the recommended plant species and optimal planting techniques and methods;
• To specify the criteria for the recovery of loan areas and others degraded by construction
work, taking into account soil conditions, the characteristics of the terrain, and adaptation of
the plant species introduced in the area.
Initially, surveys will be performed on the areas targeted for intervention, recording, to this end,
information on the location and pertinent descriptions, the type of intervention executed, description
of soil use, status of natural regeneration, and identification of erosion processes. The information is
necessary to determine the scope of the required conservation measures.
The type of management system adopted in the area must be determined based on three
recommended lines of action, specifically:
• Recovery of vegetation: this measure should be adopted in areas without the capacity for
natural regeneration but which, by virtue of their location, are conducive to connecting
autochthonous vegetation fragments. The recovery of vegetation may be aimed at the
formation of ecological corridors to enable the movement of wildlife and gene flows
between populations. Similarly, this effort may be aimed more simply at the natural
landscape, an important factor for human settlement, consisting of revitalizing areas near
local settlements and work sites;
• Enrichment: areas with the capacity for natural regeneration should be enriched through the
introduction of native species to attract pollinators and seed dispersers, with a view to
boosting the area’s biodiversity;
• Natural Regeneration: in areas with a solid capacity for natural recovery, presenting resprouters and seedling and seed banks in sufficient quantity to eliminate the respective
degradation factors.
Following identification of the areas and determination of the management strategy, the study will
then indicate the measures recommended for each stage of the construction project. Error! The
reference source was not identified. Below, the key implementation measures recommended are
summarized.
Table 6.2: Principal measures adopted for the Laúca Dam project.
Measures
Characteristics
Measures Implemented
Outcome
Registers results following
Planting of grasses and establishment of plant
Use
vegetation
cover forage legumes. Planting of vegetation cover. Prevents
Biological
capacity to protect against native bush and tree degradation
in
a
erosion in initial phases
species in mixed cultures
sustainable manner over
the long term
VI-33
Measures
Characteristics
Measures Implemented
Use
constructions Construction of drainage
Physical (containment structures) to and
runoff
channels,
slow degradation
protective wall structure,
and other measures
Use a combination of the
two
measures
above,
Planting of grasses and
Pysical- through which the physical
forage legumes. Planting
Biological measures are employed,
with cushion system
preferably,
with
the
adoption of biodegradable
materials
Outcome
Immediately
reverses
degradation. Provides for
emergency prevention of
degradation
Immediately
reverses
problem, but does not
prevent
degradation.
Intermediate solution
The implementation stages for the program’s principal activities are described below.
• Identification and Delimitation of Area:
This stage involves precise identification and scaling of areas subject to recovery. Based on this, the
quantities of required native species seeds and seedlings will be determined and include grasses and
forage legumes, where necessary.
• Preparing the Terrain:
In this stage, the primary measures for preparing the terrain are specified, including:
o reshaping of terrain and/or manual smoothing of slopes: prepare the terrain to lay
groundwork for introduction of plant cover;
o implementation of “cushions”: introduce vegetation tiles to reverse degradation process;
o implementation of channels: channels will serve to divert drainage from runoff and
containment structures;
o soil collection and analysis: the analysis is the basis for the recommendations on corrective
and fertilization measures (Lemos and Santos, 1984).
• Species Selection:
For purposes of vegetation recovery, species selection should encompass, above all, the intensive
use of pioneer plants, with a view to the rapid formation of a canopy and the premature ageing of
leaves, with the accompanying formation of litter or debris, so as to provide immediate protection to
the soil and foster the survival of species in different stages of succession. Plants in other stages of
their life cycle should also be used in the proposed model.
For enrichment of the remaining material and recomposition of the respective areas, essential native
species recovered from project affected areas will be used, thereby ensuring the use of
VI-34
autochthonous species to reconstitute the natural ecosystem and reestablish the region’s original
phytophysiognomy.
Species selection should take into account adaptability and growth rates in humid and/or dry
environments, the rate of propagation and production of important fruits and berries for local
ichthyofauna and avifauna, so as to contribute to the successful planting and rapid establishment of
plant species.
In this light, the current physical and chemical conditions of the soil in which the respective plant
species will be planted must be considered; the largest possible number of species should be planted
to stimulate diversity; combinations of fast growing species (pioneer plants) and slower growing
plant species (secondary and climax plants) should be used; species capable of attracting wildlife
should be employed; and species adapted to each specific soil condition should be planted.
• Implementation of vegetation:
Implementation of vegetation cover in locations used to supply materials employed in the project or
degraded by virtue of the project encompass the following:
o grass tiles: in locations where immediate recovering of soil is required and in locations in
which the terrain’s declivity limits the planting of species using seeds/seedlings;
o dispersal of grass and forage legume seeds: planting of some species will be performed
through the dispersal of seeds in 1-5 cm deep grooves arranged in contours and separated by
a distance of approximately 1.5 m between grooves;
o native species seedlings: this activity will be performed in locations marked by
brush/arboreal vegetation suppression, in locations without restriction on the establishment
of arboreal species. The distribution of species based on a vegetation succession model
(Figure 6.2) is proposed. Recovery of vegetation in affected areas is accomplished by
inducing vegetation succession through a combination of species of different ecological
succession groups (Budowski 1965, 1970; Gomez-Pompa, 1971; Denslow, 1980;
Carpanezzi et al., 1990; Ibama, 1990; Cetesb, 1992; Rodrigues et al., 1992; Kageyamaet al.,
1992, 1994; Crestana et al., 1993; Rodrigues e Gandolfi, 1993; Ferreti, 1995; Cordovil-Silva
e Walter, 1997; Corrêa e Melo-Filho, 1998). Planting of species groups will be conducted
simultaneously in the field using seedlings.
VI-35
Figure 6.2: Proposed distribution of seedlings for planting of recovery vegetation in affected areas
Legend:
3, metros = 3.0 meters
1,5 metros = 1.5 meters
Legenda:
Legend
- Pioneiras = Pioneer Plants
- Secundárias = Secondary Plants
- Clímax =
Climax Plants
• Maintenance and Monitoring:
Following implementation and establishment of seedlings, a number of measures will be required to
ensure their full development, with a view to contributing to the project’s success. Similarly, the
physical measures implemented to halt/reverse erosion processes should be tracked until the related
problems are effectively resolved. The respective measures are set out below:
o Monitoring and control of erosion processes (aimed at interventions and reviews of the
proposed methodology);
o Cropland measures (soil correction, maintenance fertilization, pest and disease controls);
o Replanting of failed areas and densified planting.
VI-36
6.5. SOCIO-ENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAMS
6.5.1. COMMUNITY SUPPORT PROGRAM IN THE DIRECT AREA OF
INFLUENCE
As discussed above, the villages located on the road connecting the Capanda Hydroelectric Unit and
the city of Dondo to the Laúca hydroelectric facility project sites will be subject to a number of
adverse impacts arising from the increased flow of light and heavy vehicles, the arrival of migrants
in search of work, and others. However, residents in these villages will also benefit from positive
impacts, namely job opportunities and improved living conditions by virtue of the measures
prescribed in the environmental programs laid out in this study and greater economic dynamism
generated by the project.
The expected impacts on the local socioeconomic and demographic dynamics justifies the
implementation of a support program for resident communities along the main road used during
project execution, with a view to mitigating the projected adverse impacts and leveraging the
opportunities for better living conditions arising from the project.
6.5.1.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objectives
The program is aimed at supporting, restructuring, and strengthening village communities through
new measures to boost and build capacity in local farm and artisanal production activities and
worker training to meet the region’s new demands.
Specific Objectives
• To provide guidance and support to the participation of social groups in the implementation
of basic sanitation and sewage systems;
• To provide guidance to the introduction of new techniques and procedures to enhance and
stimulate farm production on small plots;
• To support capacity building for workers with a view to ushering in new economic and
social dynamics in villages;
• To stimulate diversified farm production for consumption in a sustainable manner;
• To stimulate sustainable fishing activities;
• To support the organization of local farmers, with a view to enabling surplus farm
production and subsequent sale;
• To increase the production of domestic and artisanal goods for sale;
VI-37
• To present alternatives for improvements in nutrition;
• To stimulate and incorporate social groups in formal and environmental education programs;
• To train local workers in civil construction activities;
• To strengthen cultural, sport, and recreational/leisure expressions and activities;
• To introduce personal hygiene and care practices by stimulating cleaning of physical spaces.
Based on the findings on living conditions and production arising from the socioeconomic surveys,
and supplemented by analyses prepared within the scope of the Environmental Education and
Public Relations Program, the curricula for course and training programs offered to communities
will be developed and the respective needs in connection with infrastructure, support materials, and
inputs identified.
The measures and activities provided for in this program will be executed through a coordinated
effort with the Environmental and Public Relations Programs.
6.6. MONITORING AND CONTROL PROGRAMS
6.6.1. CLIMATE MONITORING PROGRAM
A real assessment of climate change is only possible by comparing conditions prior to and
following completion of the project. The primary recommendation involves the implementation of
temperature and rainfall and meteorological stations prior to filling of the reservoir, given the small
number of stations in the region.
Implementation prior to the project will supply a series of data on the phase prior to locking of the
reservoir for subsequent comparison with data collected during the operational phase, with a view
to identifying climate changes in the transition period. In addition to tracking potential changes to
the micro-climate and the local climate, this measure will allow for studies on local climate effects
on the reservoir.
In addition to micro-climate observations, meteorological stations are useful for modeling climate
interactions in the ecosystem, such as recording wind action, an important factor for determining the
thermal and erosion instability of a reservoir and consequent recycling of nutrients and vertical
distribution of phytoplankton and zooplankton. In this light, implementation of automatic
meteorological stations is recommended at the Laúca Dam.
6.6.1.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objective
VI-38
To monitor the potential impacts of changes in water balance and climate change.
Specific Objectives
• To assess potential climate changes arising from filling of the reservoir;
• To offer contributions to impact studies on the respective changes, as well as the
development of climate and environment interaction models.
The program provides for the following activities:
• Contracting of expert personnel for program implementation;
• Description of program actions;
• Acquisition and installation of the meteorological and temperature and rainfall stations;
• Monitoring and interpretation of results.
Preferably, analysis of the data should be performed jointly with the National Institute of
Hydrometeorology and Geophysics of Angola (INAMET).
Temperature and rainfall stations or micro-meteorology stations should be installed in areas near the
reservoir at variable distances, preferably in the vicinity of the Laúca Hydroelectric Unit. Other sites
will be chosen according to the local relief at distances of not more than 5 km from the reservoir,
based on accessibility.
The automatic station installed at the Laúca Dam should include a data acquisition system, in
addition to temperature, humidity, wind, atmospheric pressure, rainfall, solar radiations, and soil
temperature sensors, and, if possible, temperature gauges for water in the area of the future
reservoir.
6.6.2. SEISMOLOGICAL MONITORING PROGRAM
The project reservoir areas are located in a region with a history of seismic activity resulting from
two deep regional fault lines. The studies on the Capanda Hydroelectric Unit indicated that the
region is an area of natural seismic activity warranting attention. Records register a magnitude 6.54
earthquake and two smaller magnitude 4 to 6 tremblers in the area in 1914. In 1968 and 1976, two
additional seismic events were recorded, a magnitude 4.4 and 4.8 trembler, respectively.
6.6.2.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objective
VI-39
The objective of the seismological monitoring station is to monitor the potential impacts of induced
seismic activity.
Specific Objectives
The objective of the seismological monitoring is to assess natural and induced seismic activity in
the reservoir’s area of influence, beginning at least one year prior to closing off of the reservoir and
extending for an additional two years or more during operation of the unit. The purpose is to allow
for a comparative analysis of seismic activity prior to and following filling of the reservoir, with a
view to assessing the existence of impacts by virtue of the reservoir’s implementation, in addition to
providing guidance on the adoption of future procedures.
The program is also aimed at detecting the occurrence of induced seismic events, obtaining a
correlation between seismic activities and the geological and tectonic features of the area and
determining respective epicenters, intensity, magnitudes, seismic acceleration, and area of
influence.
The program provides for the following activities:
• Contract expert staff personnel for implementation;
• Perform a detailed description of the monitoring program and specifications;
• Acquire and install a seismographic station; and
• Track the program and interpret results.
Seismic activity should be monitored continuously through seismographs. Fire excavations at the
Laúca Dam construction site and other locations within the area of influence of the future reservoir
should be monitored and recorded.
A seismograph station equipped with a recorder, seismometer, and data radio-transmission
equipment should be installed in a selected location and housed in a protected facility. Operation of
the station will require a technician to perform periodic maintenance on the equipment and collect
data generated by the seismographs, in the case of equipment without radio-transmission systems.
Data analyses will be performed on a bimonthly basis. According to the results of the initial
analyses, the need for installing addition seismographic stations will be determined for the purpose
of locating the epicenters of seismic events.
6.6.3. HYDROGEOLOGICAL MONITORING PROGRAM
Changes in groundwater levels due to formation of the reservoir are important and require more
precise description of the projected impacts, and may correspond to increased productivity of
VI-40
aquifers, the formation of humid and flooded areas, increased susceptibility, and destabilization and
erosion of marginal hillsides.
The variety of impacts caused by a rise in groundwater levels has an ambiguous effect, at times
positive, at times adverse. In both cases, the factors and parameters influencing changes in
groundwater levels and confined aquifers vary considerably, as do the initial conditions. In this
light, hydrogeological monitoring enables planning of preventive and mitigation measures, adverse
impacts, and strategies for leveraging positive impacts.
6.6.3.2. OBJECTIVES
The objective of the program is to monitor, control, and mitigate the impacts arising from a rise in
groundwater levels, retention of sediments, and formation of humid and flooded zones.
The program involves the following measures:
• Formation of team;
• Detailed description of monitoring program measures;
• Detailed study of existing aquifers in project areas of influence;
• Determination of monitoring points;
• Measurement of levels, collection of samples, and analysis of underground water;
• Field research and measurement facilities;
• Monitoring of results interpretation program.
For purposes measuring the depth of water levels, monitoring wells should be drilled at the
locations indicated in the program description. The depths should be converted into absolute levels
to obtain the pontentiometric surface of the free aquifer and confined areas. Surveys executed for
the implementation of piezometers will be performed for sample collection and geological,
geotechnical, and hydrogeological description of crossed materials and, further, determination of
parameters such as hydraulic conductivity.
The frequency of water level readings adheres to different patterns according to the project phase.
During the construction phase, bimonthly readings must be performed at least. Two months prior to
filling of the reservoir through two months following filling of the reservoir, readings should be
executed every two weeks. In the operational phase, bimonthly readings should be resumed for a
period of at least two years. After this, monitoring may be performed on a six-month basis.
In addition, sample collections and analysis of water drawn from the monitoring wells should be
performed on a six-month basis in the construction and operational phases and monthly during the
six-month period designated for filling of the reservoir.
VI-41
In locations with underground water designated for human consumption, sample collection and
analyses should be conducted of the parameters established to determine water potability, as listed
below: aspect, smell, color, turbidity of the water, dry residues, pH, alkalinity, presence of
hydroxides, carbonates, and bicarbonates, total hardness, oxygen consumed, ammoniac nitrogen,
albuminoids and nitrous, iron, chloride, fluoride, arsenic, copper, lead, zinc, barium, selenium,
manganese, cadmium, chrome VI, cyanide, organic waste, and microbiological characteristics.
Other parameters may be included in the program description.
6.6.4. LIMNOLOGY, WATER QUALITY, AND SEDIMENT MODELING AND
MONITORING PROGRAM
Implementation of the project will cause a number of changes to the aquatic environment in the
Kwanza River region due to the transition from a lotic regime to a lentic regime. These changes are
expected to be similar to those occurring during implementation of the Capanda Hydroelectric Unit,
given the similarities between the two reservoirs.
The environmental analysis performed in this study indicated that the waters are naturally low in
nutrient content, clear, and pH neutral, for the most part. Samples collected immediately
downstream from the Capanda Hydroelectric Unit reveal low nitrogen levels, a product of the
reservoir’s trophic stability and the absence of farming activities and urban areas in the vicinity.
Phosphate analyses suggest the presence of phosphorous on the reservoir bottom. In addition, 0.05
mg/L of sulfate was detected, indicating an anaerobic environment, in which phosphorous dissolves
in the water column. Transferred downstream by turbines or, where applicable, discharges from the
bottom, phosphorous has the potential to cause eutrophication, for which preventive measures
should be adopted.
In addition, the area targeted for flooding includes sections of vegetation coverage. The selective
and partial removal of existing phytomass should be performed in the area of the reservoir to
prevent significant water quality issues, primarily during and immediately following filling of the
reservoir.
In this light, water quality models should be executed to simulate the various vegetation removal
scenarios. In addition, mathematical models will serve to forecast water quality during operation of
the reservoir, identifying with greater precision potential problems and critical regions and
contributing to determination of water quality monitoring locations. Mathematical models may also
be used to project thermal stratification phenomena in the reservoir.
Following the pertinent modeling activities, a program should be established to monitor water
quality, as provided by Odebrecht, prior to and following formation of the reservoir and for the
purpose of contributing to the adoption of preventive, mitigation, and/or offset measures. Physical,
chemical, and biotic data will be analyzed (phytoplankton and zooplankton). The samples collected
will contribute to the studies performed during the environmental analysis, enhancing knowledge
and understanding of the factors impacting on the dynamics of water quality, including the presence
of fecal coliforms, chlorophyll, oxygen, ammonia, phosphorous sediments, temperature, water
VI-42
turbidity, and others. The study of these parameters will contribute to managing water quality in the
reservoir.
6.6.4.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objectives
The objective of the program is to describe through mathematical models and monitoring of the
limnological behavior of the Kwanza River waters and those of its principal tributaries prior to
damming, nutrient balances, trophic potential and thermal stratification, and anoxia of the planned
reservoir, in addition to assessing the respective physical and chemical conditions and temporal
variations, bacteriological conditions, and hydrobiology of the waterway, as well as the
transportation of sediments. Further, the program includes studies upstream from the Capanda
Hydroelectric Unit due to its direct impact on areas of the proposed project.
Specific Objectives
The specific objectives of the program are to monitor and mitigate the impacts arising from changes
in local limnological characteristics and water quality, both upstream and downstream from the
project, due to changes in the river’s lotic characteristics; increased water turbidity; flooding of land
vegetation on the river’s margins, accelerating the deterioration of aquatic systems; stratification of
the reservoir; changes in communities of aquatic organisms downstream from the dam, potential
proliferation of aquatic macrophytes, and retention of sediments in the reservoir.
Based on the results obtained from the field surveys conducted for purposes of the environmental
studies, in conjunction with previous experiences of this nature, the program was divided into four
distinctive stages:
Stage 1: Mathematical Hydrodynamics and Water Quality Modeling During and Following
Filling of Reservoir
Mathematical modeling tools are the most modern method for providing forecasts on future
environments. The following modeling analyses are recommended for the reservoir:
• Water quality modeling during filling of the reservoir based on the various scenarios of
vegetation removal, with a view to selecting those areas in which the related activities
should be prioritized;
• Hydrodynamic modeling to study the thermal stratification of the reservoir and identify
potential areas of greater stagnation susceptible to eutrophication processes and sediment
deposits;
• Water quality modeling of the reservoir and downstream sections;
VI-43
• Stratification models will take into account all the relevant parameters of the phenomenon,
including: incident solar radiation and wind speed, in addition to inherent parameters of the
reservoir in connection with geometry, air and water temperatures, and flow velocity, etc.
• Water quality models may contribute to the re-selection of locations within the reservoir
identified for monitoring.
Stages 2 and 3: Monitoring Before and During Construction
The recommended monitoring program should be initiated immediately following environmental
licensing with bimonthly samples. Water samples should be collected in locations at least 1 meter in
depth and with current flows. Backwater deposits without water flow or inverted water flow should
be avoided. The points previously established in the EIA should be employed. Monitoring should
follow the existing Odebrecht water monitoring plan.
Stage 4 and 5: Monitoring During and Following Filling of the Reservoir
This procedure refers to the stage in which the respective impacts occur due to changes in the
aquatic environment. As such, more detailed monitoring is required, initially at smaller time
intervals, with a view to creating a database for future analyses. Therefore, during filling of the
reservoir and in subsequent months, samples should be taken on a monthly basis, followed by
bimonthly samples the following year, and, finally, quarterly samples beginning the third year
following filling of the reservoir.
Monitoring measures at the future reservoir, as well as maintenance of the collection points at the
Capanda Dam, should be ongoing and permanent.
• Sampling strategies
The same field survey protocol should be adopted for all the stages described in the program,
specifically:
o During collection, the pertinent environmental data should be entered in a log and the data
supplied via a multi-parametric probe: water temperature, dissolved oxygen, and
conductivity;
o The pH and turbidity parameters should be submitted to a sensor calibration evaluation
before beginning routine recording of the respective readings;
o The water samples may be stored in previously washed and labeled water bottles, which
should be completely submerged to avoid the interference of supernatants; and
o Backwater deposit areas should be avoided and preference given to areas of running water,
as these more accurately describe the fluvial environment. Following collection, all samples
should be cooled and stored in coolers packed with ice through delivery to the laboratory,
where they should be stored in refrigerators until processing of the analyses, which will be
executed within a period of up to 24 hours.
VI-44
For purposes of collection and biological analyses of phytoplankton and zooplankton, the
procedures below should be adopted:
• In the case of quantitative phytoplankton samples, 200 mL of raw water should be collected
using a 25 μm mesh net and set in 2 mL of formaldehyde;
• For quantitative zooplankton samples, 100 L of water should be filtered through a 68 μm
mesh net, resulting in a 200 mL sample and set in 20 mL of formaldehyde;
• Qualitative samples should be filtered to enable more precise identification of organisms;
• Nets may be arranged against the river current and placed in position for approximately 3
minutes. Filtered matter should be set according to the procedure described for quantitative
analysis samples; and
• Plankton samples may be stored in 300 mL water bottles. The volume limit, however,
should be demarcated, with a view to ensuring the preservative dosage level is adequate.
6.6.5. ICHTHYOFAUNA INVENTORY AND MONITORING PROGRAM
Implementation of an artificial lake environment by damming of the Kwanza River will cause
changes to the composition of ichthyofauna, as the system will be transformed from a lotic to a
lentic regime in some areas, thus altering environmental conditions.
The original composition of fish fauna in the Kwanza River was modified by implementation of the
Cambambe and Capanda plants, facilities located on the Kwanza River downstream and upstream,
respectively, from the proposed Laúca Hydroelectric Unit. In this light, Cambambe and Capanda
created irreversible artificial obstacles to the flow of migratory species on the Kwanza.
The original ichthyofauna of the Kwanza River is virtually unknown. The only available
information is a descriptive and scientific summary of fish fauna in Angola (Poll, M., 1967,
Contribution à la faune ichthyologique de l'Angola). However, the work is both outdated and
principally addresses fish fauna in the Congo River Basin and Cubango/Zambeze complex, which
flow north and southeast, respectively. Fish species on the Kwanza River and other coastal basins,
which flow primarily west, were only studied partially by Max Poll.
The Middle Kwanza River Basin presents a fit geographic profile, which cuts through the valley
without major tributaries along the middle and high sections and with a substantial number of lotic
environments, among them rapids. This profile suggests some degree of endemism, which although
not necessarily threatened by the implementation of an additional dam warrants scientific attention.
With a view to establishing protection measures for fish communities in the Kwanza River Basin
from impacts caused by construction of the project, a series of actions should be adopted, beginning
with an inventory of the Middle Kwanza River Basin through an extensive ichthyofauna collection
and monitoring program.
VI-45
6.6.5.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objective
The principal objective of the program is to describe the ichthyofauna, in particular those specimens
occurring in direct areas of influence, including organisms present in the principal tributaries. This
description should include a detailed comparison of the composition of ichthyofauna prior to and
following implementation of the dam. The program also includes ichthyofauna monitoring studies
during filling of the reservoir and operation of the project.
Specific Objectives
• To supplement existing data and prepare a comprehensive diagnostic analysis on the
diversity of the ichthyofauna in the Middle Kwanza River Basin and describe the status of
conservation in the current setting, that is, prior to implementation of the project;
• To identify reproductive (migratory periods) and feeding (diet) habits of ichthyofauna in the
Middle Kwanza River Basin region;
• To understand fishing activities in the project area;
• To identify the potential impacts to ichthyofauna arising from implementation of the
projects in the construction and operational phases alike;
• To rescue fish species trapped in pools during construction of the dam and filling of the
lake;
• To recommend mitigation measures capable of minimizing potential impacts on
ichthyofauna caused by the project, proposing, to this end, conservation, monitoring, and
management programs for local ichthyofauna;
• To train specialized human resources in Angola for the purpose of giving continuity to the
academic and scientific research arising from collection and monitoring programs, in
addition to the long-term ichthyofauna programs.
6.6.5.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objective
The principal objective of the program is to describe the ichthyofauna, in particular those specimens
occurring in direct areas of influence, including organisms present in the principal tributaries. This
description should include a detailed comparison of the composition of ichthyofauna prior to and
following implementation of the dam. The program also includes ichthyofauna monitoring studies
during filling of the reservoir and operation of the project.
Specific Objectives
VI-46
• Complementary existing data and develop a diagnosis, as complete as possible, on the
diversity of the fish fauna of the Middle Rio Kwanza and elucidate their conservation status
in the current scenario, ie, prior to implementation of the project;
• Identify reproductive aspects (breeding seasons and species
• migratory) and food (diet) of fish populations of the middle river Kwanza;
• Understand the fishing activity in the project area;
• Identify potential fish populations derived from the implementation of the projects impacts,
both in steps of works or the operator;
• Rescue the fish eventually retained in pools during the construction of the dam and filling of
the lake,
• Suggest mitigation measures that may mitigate the potential impacts on fish populations
arising from the development, proposing conservation programs, monitoring and
management of local fish fauna;
• To train specialized human resources in Angola, both to give
• continue the academic and scientific studies in the field of collection and monitoring
programs, and for continuing to own programs relating to fish populations in the long term.
The ichthyofauna Inventory and Monitoring Program should be constituted in different work stages,
encompassing the following activities:
• Implementation of the data collection data for representative data of the fish communities in
the direct area of influence of the units, with a view to understanding the population
dynamics of the respective communities and the biological cycles of species potentially
most affected by the dam;
• Monitoring of the principal tributaries of the Kwanza River drainage basin;
• Assessment and implementation of the measures necessary to save fish species during dam
operations and filling of the reservoir, conducting follow-ups of changes in fish
communities due to potential environmental impacts;
• Monitoring of the population dynamics of fish communities in the first three years following
filling of the reservoir, with a view to contributing to the implementation of an ichthyofauna
management program.
The field work in the Middle Kwanza River Basin region should be conducted through four
campaigns/year in stages prior to, during, and following formation of the reservoir and under
differing flow conditions in the dry and rainy season alike, with a view to analyzing potential
temporal variations. The field work will include the sample points subject to earlier study, as well as
other points, where different micro-environments are identified in Middle Kwanza River Basin
areas subject to the direct influence of the project, both upstream and downstream from the dam
site.
All the typical micro-environments found in the region will be subject to sampling, to the extent
possible, including streams, rapids, pools, leaves, sands, large river beds, etc., for the purpose of
VI-47
identifying the preferred habitats of different species and collecting the largest possible number of
species. Further, other points may be added, the pertinent river access ways to which will be opened
prior to the campaigns. The precise location of the points may change during the field campaigns
according to the respective assessments of the technical team.
The different types of environments should be photographed and, subsequently, recorded and
correlated with the type of sample ichthyofauna. In addition, a brief description of the collection
locations should be prepared, setting out the respective vegetation cover, submerged vegetation,
river bed structure, and characteristics of the margin, etc.
Collection will be executed, for the most part, during daylight hours. However, on some occasions
collection may be performed at night for the specific purpose of capturing ichthyofauna known to
be primarily nocturnal, such as members of the Siluriform order (catfish and bottom fish) and the
Mormyridae family (electric fish), two highly diversified groups well represented in the Middle
Kwanza River Basin region.
The specimens collected will be immediately fixed in loco in 10% formaldehyde and transferred to
70% ethanol, if possible, following a minimum period of 48 hours.
Small muscle tissue samples may be removed from specific individuals for future molecular
analyses. These will be placed directly in alcohol, without being set in formaldehyde, into
Eppendorf containers. Prior to fixing of the material, the sample may be sorted in the field, in order
to facilitate identification with the assistance of natural coloring (for example, fish species of the
Cichlidae family). Relatively small materials with intense coloring or markings will be
photographed in an aquarium at the collection site while still alive.
More precise identification of species should be performed in laboratory based on the pertinent
literature and comparative analyses of materials and matter held in scientific collections of
institutions in other countries.
6.6.6. FLORA CONSERVATION PROGRAM
The diversity of plant species in the region, determined by the initial studies to be extensive,
associated to the fact that formation of the reservoir will submerge species that may be necessary
for future use, constitutes the primary justification for adopting effective flora conservation
measures. It is important to note that genotypes of the flooded species may not be found in
remaining populations, whether around the lake or in another location within their distribution
areas. As such, the impacting agent (suppression of vegetation) will cause genetic erosion. These
factors can be partially minimized and, in certain cases, reversed, by recovery measures and
subsequent conservation efforts ex situ.
In addition to establishing effective measures, the program will allow for the generation of critical
data, both for scientific knowledge in Angola and the sustainable development of the Middle
Kwanza River Basin region. Expanded knowledge of the most relevant species identified for
conservation, their reproductive capacities, distribution, and restructuring aimed at protection of
marginal areas are significant factors of the program as well.
6.6.6.2. OBJECTIVES
VI-48
The general objective of the program is to mitigate the impacts arising from suppression of the
vegetation at the construction site and project site; suppression of native vegetation, with the
consequent loss of genetic variability of plant species; and disruption of communities in marginal
areas of the reservoir.
The program is aimed at minimizing the impact of project implementation on local vegetation and
flora through the identification of plant species and recovery and conservation of the germplasm of
those species identified as priorities. Safeguarding of these species can serve to guarantee the
genetic integrity of species in the environment subject to disruption.
An additional specific objective of the program is to train specialized human resources in Angola
for the purposes of ensuring the continuity of academic and scientific research work.
Based the results obtained during the field studies conducted for the environmental studies, the
program was divided into four stages:
Stage 1: Complement and Enrich Floristic Composition Surveys in the Area of Influence
The floristic composition survey is aimed at complementing and consolidating the knowledge and
identification of plant species in the region to prioritize, through development of as comprehensive
a check list as possible, those designated for recovery.
This study serves as the basis for the full impacted plant conservation plan, to the extent that very
little is known about the local vegetation. The preliminary studies indicate that the region is home to
a rich plant endowment, both in terms of species diversity and phytophysiognomies. The results of
this stage will guide the entire recovery process and the final destination of the collected
germplasm.
The following criteria should be adopted for the floristic survey:
• Collection of fertile botanical material (flower and/or fruit), performed through random
walks in representative areas of each phytophysiognomy identified (at least 12 types of
principal vegetation), in the largest possible number of each, along all sections of the
reservoir;
• Along each section (to be determined), collect all vascular species observed with
reproductive material, the dry season (cacimbo) and rainy season at least;
• Collect specimens of arboreal shrub, and herbaceous species, including epiphytes, palms,
vines, and aquatic macrophytes;
• Subdivide field teams during the expedition by type of stratum, each responsible for
collection activities in the arboreal stratum, the shrub stratum, or the herbaceous stratum.
The division may also be defined by phytophysiognomies (one in forest environments and
another in savanna and wilds cape environments).
VI-49
The material collected in the field should be placed in plastic bags or submitted to preliminary
preservation, that is placed directly in sealed field presses. These should be inserted in sheets of
newspaper specifically numbered for each botanical specimen collected. The preservation process
continues in the laboratory, where the collected samples are transferred to field ovens. After drying
the specimens (following one or two days in the field oven), these should be prepared for final
delivery (herbarium).
Detailed data on each collected specimen, including preliminary identification (botanical family,
scientific name, and/or common name, the type of material collected (exicatas, germplasm), growth
patterns (tree, bush, grass), morphological aspects of floral or reproductive samples (colors, size,
etc.), the general environment and location of collection, type of substrate, location, relative
frequency in the population, and other relevant information, should be entered in a field log (Walter
and Cavalcanti, 2005b).
Preserved and dried materials should be deposited in the Luanda Herbarium, where permanent
identification may be accomplished through consultations in the specialized literature or
comparative analyses with specimens deposited in the facility. Duplicates of these specimens may
be sent to experts in the different taxonomy groups (principally in Brazil), a step that should ensure
accurate determination.
If possible, efforts should be made to perform phytosociological studies as a supplement to the
floristic survey, with a view to generating quantitative data on the respective species. This
information is highly useful for developing the priority species recovery list. In these cases, the
surveys should compare the same phytophysiognomy within and outside the reservoir area, for the
purposes of comparing data on the concentration, presence/absence of given populations of species
in the reservoir area. For the different formations (forest, savanna, and field), differentiated survey
methods are used, most for plant species in the arboreal stratum.
Stage 2: Recovery of the Germplasm of Priority Species
Recovery of germplasm, or the recovery of plants, means intensive and selective collection along
the entire stretch of the future reservoir of plant matter identified as a priority of conservation
efforts. The collection process focuses on seeds, seedlings, stems, tubers, fruits, etc. of the largest
possible number of individuals in each population based on a previously determined strategy to
ensure careful and proper preservation of the material obtained.
By virtue of the high expected number of plant species in the region, it is not possible or feasible to
recover germplasm from all taxons in the area, principally due to difficulties in connection with the
conservation of these. The related problems include the absence of techniques and scientific
knowledge on the species in question, including their potential uses, in addition to the unavailability
of adequate areas or locations for effect conservation ex situ of the recovered plant matter.
In contrast to the recovery of wildlife, which occurs basically from the time filling of the reservoir
(lakes) begins, the recovery of plant species must commence far in advance.
A plant recovery program centers all the flora in a given area (in this case, the reservoir
implementation area) and not simply on vegetation capable of serving as a potential source of
timber and firewood. Rather, the flora of an impacted area is a potential source of useful genes,
VI-50
which would otherwise be lost in the absence of identification and collection efforts. While the
recovery of plants may not provide any economic or financial return, at least in the short and
medium terms, it unquestionably offers an ecological return, and one capable of generating
economic or financial returns (through farming improvement programs, for example) in the long
term.
In conjunction with this background overview, a number of practical questions warrant
consideration as well:
• Which species should be recovered?
• How can the target species be adequately conserved?
• Where should it (they) be conserved?
• Are there established methods for adopting adequate conservation ex situ of the selected
species?
• What is the status of the species in terms of conservation priority?
• What are the criteria for executing the recovery of a species to the detriment of another?
• What is the installed capacity for minimizing the loss of genes?
Taking into account these issues and given that species are not all equally important for humanity
(see Bond, 1994; Lawton and Brown, 1994; Maxted et al., 1997), it is necessary to prioritize those
that offer value to agriculture or forestry activities, defined as “genetic resources” (i.e. “genetic
material with true value or potential”), provided these species can be properly preserved ex situ.
Germplasm recovery measures should be implemented in an integrated manner with the Angolan
National Center for Phytogenetic Recources (Centro Nacional de Recursos Fitogenéticos de Angola
– CNRF). The institute’s purpose is the conservation of genetic plant resources with potential use as
nutritional, agricultural, industrial, health, and construction purposes or as ornamental plants. The
entity initiated its activities in 1991 and currently operates a genetic bank with more than 3,000
germplasm samples of local plant varieties collected from almost every province in Angola.
Figure 6.3 sets out a flow chart of the measures and ends for recovered germplasm, as provided for
in the pertinent flora recovery and conservation actions
VI-51
Figure 6.3: Flow chart of recovery measures undertaken as part of the flora conservation plan
Parameters for entering species on the priority recovery list
As discussed above, it is important to prioritize species that should be targeted for recovery within
the larger list of plants set out in the floristic survey.
To this end, parameters should be established to serve as species selection criteria.
The parameters on which plant recovery will be based are laid out below, including, subsequently,
the priority levels in which each species (or taxon) should be classified. At the end of each
parameter, some brief comments are offered.
• Species of economic and/or research value: this group includes forest, medicinal, fruit,
ornamental, forage, and other species, as well as all those belonging to groups which are of
interest to human beings. They encompass plants classified as “phytogenetic resources” (i.e.
plants with current or potential socioeconomic value, which are or could be used as food or
in agro-forestry activities;
• Species with an organized system of Germplasm Banks, that is, guaranteed conservation:
these should be operated through a system headed by Angola’s CNRF. They include,
preferentially, species with seeds presenting orthodox behavior and those with recalcitrant
behavior preserved at the CNRF;
• Species with populations concentrated in the reservoir area: based on the floristic surveys,
species of interest to local populations concentrated in the flooded area will be observed and
recorded, for the purpose of prioritizing these in relation to others distributed outside the
reservoir area or distributed in both areas (within and outside the reservoir area);
• River plant species (forests, savannas, etc.): these correspond to the phytophysiognomies
most affected by the hydroelectric reservoir. Species recovered in these communities may be
utilized for repopulating degraded areas and specific sections along the margins;
VI-52
• Species for the recovery of degraded areas: botanical matter should be recovered for this
purpose and sent to the seedling greenhouse implemented in the region. The procedure
includes the collection of grasses and forage legumes used as part of the respective
conservation measures;
• Endemic and/or endangered species: in the event endemic species are identified in reservoir
area, these should be prioritized to ensure perpetuation of the species. The same applies to
endangered species threatened by predatory exploitation (timber extraction for firewood,
etc.) or imminent extinction; and
• Species with more than one aptitude: innumerable species may be classified in more than
one group of interest, with the potential for use as forest and medicinal, fruit, and
ornamental plants, etc. These species will receive special attention within the framework of
the pertinent recovery measures.
In addition to the parameters above, the species targeted for recovery are classified by priority level,
a procedure aimed at contributing to the measures and decisions adopted in the field. When two or
more species on the priority recovery list are located and there is not sufficient time to execute
widespread collection, the recovery efforts taken in relation to one species or another will be based
on the following priority levels:
• Level 1: Species classified in this level must meet one or more of two of the three first
parameters;
• Level 2: The species must meet at least two parameters; and
• Level 3: The species fall under only one parameter.
After determining the species identified for recovery and establishing the selection sites to be
explored (where collection is to be performed), the collection sampling strategies should be
specified (the quantity to be collected). The key challenge here is to determine the strategies
professionals responsible for collection activities should adopt to obtain the largest quantity
possible of genetic variation with the smallest number of samples (Walter and Cavalcanti, 2005a).
As there will be very little or no information on the genetic populations of the species identified for
recovery, the following guideline criteria should be adopted:
• Collect individuals randomly at each site with separate samples from the various microenvironments (phytophysiognomical changes, different soils, etc.), provide the site is
heterogeneous;
• Sufficient seed or vegetation samples for planting, with a view to representing each original
plant through potential duplicates;
• Conserve genetic variability of cross-pollinated species, perform extensive and casual seed
collection in each population, with small samples of each plant, yet an equal number, or
approximately equal number, per plant, of the largest number of populations possible;
VI-53
• Conserve the genetic variability of autogamous species, perform extensive and casual
collection of each population, with large samples of each plant, of the largest number of
populations possible; and
• Accelerate conservation/improvement programs; perform abundant material from plants
considered elite specimens, with a view, to the extent possible, to representing these in the
sample through collection of vegetation matter.
Given the difficulties of putting the criteria above into practice, Walter and Cavalcanti (2005a)
suggest that it is more important to perform samples on the largest number of locations
(sites/populations) possible than to sample the theoretically ideal number of plants per location,
with the largest samples possible.
Seeds and other propagules (stems, seedlings, etc.) should be collected prior to filling of the
reservoir and referred to conservation programs ex situ, including re-composition efforts in
marginal areas of the future reservoir.
To ensure recovery truly meets the prescribed protection objectives, Angola’s CNRF should be
directly involved, undertaking to ensure conservation of the collected matters.
For species that reproduce through seeds, the major part of the priority list prepared on the basis of
the floristic analysis, during execution of the corresponding services, species should be immediately
collected if the plant is in the fruit maturation stage. Fruiting periods are variable from one species
to another and, within the same species, between populations and in different years, a factor that
should be considered in the respective strategies as well.
During execution of field activities, a form should be completed with individual data on each access
collected form (passport information), where access is understood as a sample population or live
matter sample representative of an individual or various individuals of a population. More
generally, according to Valois et al. (1996), it is any individual record of a germplasm collection
(e.g. seedling, manioc, etc.). In other words, the idea centers on collecting an additional access per
species. Preferably, the larger the number of accesses, the more effective the recovery efforts.
Collected seeds, therefore, should be forwarded to the receiving unit, specifically the seedling
greenhouse located at the project site or to CNRF, ensuring these are duly identified.
For purposes of handling of the material following the respective post-harvest measures, seeds
should be placed in appropriate packaging, duly labeled and delivered to their final destination.
Species that reproduce through underground structures or cuttings should be recovered and
immediately replanted in pre-established areas (outside the reservoir area or in the seedling
greenhouse), with a view to ensuring successful replanting. Recovered species should not be
transported to other locations where transplanting may occur in conditions other than those in the
original location. The recovery of cuttings should be performed for woody species with the ability
to take hold. In addition, the biological characteristics of individuals/populations at the time of
recovery, such as phenological state and age, are factors which may interfere in the ability of the
respective propagules to take hold.
VI-54
Stage 3: Implementation of Seedling Greenhouse
A seedling greenhouse is the convergence point for a variety of measures encompassing the Flora
Conservation Program, in particular for landscape reconstitution projects. The production of a large
quantity of high quality and robust seedlings will be necessary through use of the best technical
standards possible, as ensured through a careful seed collection, processing, conservation, and
reproduction strategy.
In this stage, seedlings may be produce initially in the Capanda Hydroelectric Unit greenhouse,
which has capacity for meeting a minimum demand. However, depending on the recovery
program’s progress and results, expansion of the greenhouse should be planned to ensure it is
equipped to meet the larger volume of collected germplasm provided for under the program.
6.6.7. TERRESTRIAL FAUNA CONSERVATION PROGRAM
Human activity in natural environments, including the construction and operation of hydroelectric
unit results, inevitably, in disruptions in the physical continuity of green areas. This fragmentation
can reduce biodiversity at the local and regional level, to the extent habitats are eliminated and the
genic flow of populations disrupted and increase the deleterious effects of competition and other
types of adverse interactions within environmental fragments.
In addition, the construction of hydroelectric units is invariably criticized in regard to the
effectiveness of fauna rescue operations, especially due to the fact that the respective activities are
costly and do not offset the cost of losses arising from the filling of reservoirs. Moreover, those
saved from flooding arrive to release sites with significant stress levels and are often unable to
survive in the face of predators, competitors, and parasites in their new habitats.
Despite questionable results, it is possible to establish an appropriate rescue methodology, apply
that methodology, and track the results in detail. In this light, it is important to maintain a basic
team composed of researchers during all program stages. In addition to ensuring optimization of the
works and use of the corresponding data in scientific publications, this fosters greater participation
by educational/research institutions in the long term.
To adopt an intervention strategy in the communities, including the rescue and release of wildlife, it
is important to bear in mind that there is no single ideal methodology to resolve problems stemming
from the filling of reservoirs. It is first necessary to have primary data in hand and test the
respective methodologies, verifying their consequences on a small scale, prior to selecting the
intervention strategy.
Precise knowledge of regional fauna is the starting gate for execution of any conservation project.
This knowledge is essential to ascertain the structure and dynamics of populations and to estimate
the potential risks of the filling reservoirs on fauna. These studies represent the basis for enabling
rescue operations or any other type of management activity.
Therefore, execution of a fauna conservation program, if well structured, will not only mitigate the
impact on populations, but can contribute to enhancing the knowledge of Angolan fauna.
VI-55
6.6.7.2. OBJECTIVES
The objective of the program is to mitigate the impacts arising from a reduction in diversity and the
size of habitats, affecting the stability of ecosystems; the displacement of terrestrial fauna to
adjacent areas; the increase in accident risks involving poisonous animals; and changes in hunting
activities.
The program was divided into three distinct stages for purposes of meeting the specific general
objectives below. In the fauna inventory compensation stage:
• To undertake an intense sampling effort, with a view to supplementing the inventory so as to
contribute to rescue and monitoring activities.
In the fauna rescue operation stage:
• To execute an operation based on the scientific use of collected matter, contributing data
capable of bolstering the knowledge of local fauna;
• To manage additional data for basic research in regard to the systematic, biogeography, and
ecology of communities through the assembly of specialized collections associated to
museums, including collections of frozen tissues, chromosome slides, stomach content of
specific groups, and visual databases;
• To manage quantitative fauna data on lost habitats that could be used for the adoption of
relevant decisions on areas affected by the filling of reservoirs and applied to other regions;
• To assemble zoo collections with all identified entities, with high resolution of ecological
location data for all selected groups.
In the fauna monitoring stage:
• To perform field surveys to monitor species or groups of biological indicators studied in the
previous phase of the diagnostic analysis, in particular herpetofauna, avifauna, and
mastofauna;
• To conduct field surveys to monitor densely populated wildlife areas, subject to natural
displacement and/or targeted for induced displacement through release;
• To incentivize and stimulate studies to monitor biodiversity based on two key focal points:
potential areas of dense fauna concentration and relevant questions involving more detailed
analysis of one of the respective study indicators, specifically herpetofauna, avifauna, and
mastofauna; and
• To assign priority to endangered species and those of special interest for purposes of rescue,
marking, and release, as set out in the diagnostic analysis, with a view to continuous
monitoring;
VI-56
• To train specialized human resources in Angola, in order to ensure continuation of the
academic and scientific studies undertaken in connection with the collection and monitoring
programs.
The program was divided into three separate stages based on the field surveys conducted for the
environmental studies and similar previous experiences:
Stage 1: Supplementing Wildlife Inventory
This activity will involve intense sampling efforts, with a view to supplementing the inventory and
contributing to rescue and monitoring of wildlife populations using qualitative and quantitative
data. The studies will be performed through specifically positioned sampling sites, in an effort to
cover the various plant formations in the region.
The survey will employ capture techniques (based on the specific methodology indicated for each
species), in addition to common methods for the detection of species in the field, and wildlife
observation techniques based on the use of binoculars, identification of vocalizations, and other
indirect evidence (feces and prints/tracks). For all specimens collected removed from the
transect/collection areas, basic data on habitat use, biometry, location, and feeding habits will be
recorded (for the purpose of facilitating comparative studies) and maintained as museum specimens.
The collection will serve to constitute a new primary data bank for the entire inventory study (and,
by extension, of the corresponding wildlife rescue activities). For purposes of this stage, collection
of specimens of the following taxonomical groups will be executed:
Arthropods
Special attention will be given to the following groups:
• Diptera (flies and mosquitoes): the creation of artificial reservoirs provides ideal
environments for the proliferation of insects, including potential disease transmitters, among
them malaria and sleeping sickness. In addition, workers hired or who may be hired for the
project may be disease carriers. As such, identifying the presence of vectors in the region,
composition studies, and measures to combat these diseases is critical;
• Hymenoptera (ants): a dominant social insect group in the region. Its widespread
distribution, relatively high abundance at the local level, the richness of species, and the
relative ease with which specimens can be baited or trapped render the group a good
ecological indicator for biological diversity studies in areas on which there is little
information; and
• Arachnid: special attention will be given to the Araneae and Scoprionid Order (animals with
potential medical value).
Capture of Arthropods in general will be accomplished using illuminated “Malaise” and “Moerike”
pitfall traps, with containers and hunting bags, in addition to searches in rocky areas and random
collections. Captured animals will be preserved in 70% alcohol solution.
VI-57
In the case of glossina, traps will be distributed at 200 m intervals in areas of heavy vegetation,
military outposts, and locations inhabited by civilian population, hung on bushes and trees at a
height of 50 cm above ground level. Capture of glossina will be preserved through desiccation in
70% alcohol solution and sent to the Institute for the Prevention and Control of Typanosomiasis
(Instituto de Combate e Controlo das Tripanossomíases).
Aquatic Macroinvertebrates
The community at the water-sediment interface is constituted by a vast range of taxonomical
groups. This community most accurately reflects environmental conditions due to its limited
capacity for movement and the fact that individuals live in direct contact with the substrate. In
addition, the community exercises an important role in the food chain, contributing to the
processing of allochthonous and autochthonous organic carbon, influencing, in this way, the food
supply for fish and bird species.
For purposes of the inventory, collections will be performed in the Kwanza River and its principal
tributaries, with the assistance of a vessel and an Eckman bottom sampler or nets and traps.
Herptofauna
Little is known about amphibians and reptiles. The gaps in existing knowledge on the diversity and
distribution of species can be explained by their nocturnal and fossorial habits, rendering collection
difficult. Adequate samples of herptofauna is only possible through intensive collection in different
habitats and in different periods of the year and the use of specific collection methods. The
herptofauna inventory will be based on pitfall trapping and drift fence methods (50 collection
stations, each with four buckets arranged in a Y shape) and active searches in the soil, under leaves,
and in and under fallen tree trunks.
Avifauna
The diversity of phytophysiognomies in the region is the result of a rich species of avifauna.
Samples will be performed with mist nets, identification through direct observation, vocalization,
and photographs.
Mammals
The justification for performing an inventory of this group rests on the same grounds as those
invoked for recording the region’s herptofauna and avifauna, namely that large species collections
in series associated to ecological data, tissue, ectoparasites and endo-parasites, etc. will provide for
significant advances in the existing knowledge and understanding of Angola’s biodiversity. The
use of different methods for mammalian fauna derives from the wide morphological, behavioral,
and ecological diversity of species in this group:
• Small non-flying mammals: capture will be accomplished using two distinct methods: pitfall
traps and live traps;
VI-58
• Flying mammals: bat fauna will also be evaluated using direct methods. Specifically, mist
nets and traps will be used along potential corridors of bat movement (trails located in the
forest and along rivers); and
• Medium and large mammals: the inventory for this group will not require trapping. These
animals will be recorded primarily through indirect methods, including: census surveys
based on prints/tracks, feces, shelters, and marks, in addition to interviews with local
inhabitants. Direct methods will be employed, such as census surveys and stakeouts, in
addition to photography traps in pre-established locations where indirect evidence of
wildlife is found.
Stage 2: Fauna Rescue Operation
• Databank
With a view to optimizing use of biological matter and rescue data, development of the following
databanks will be incentivized:
o Visual: photographic documentation of rescue activities;
o Tissue: tissue (blood, heart, liver, stomach, intestines, kidneys, and skeletal muscle) will be
extracted from various specimens of each species for the purpose of ensuring material for
cytogenetic, genetic, biochemistry, and immunogenetic, and other research projects
conducted by universities; and
o General databanks: on all aspects of collection, identification, management, and referral
activities in connection with collected specimens.
• Principles of rescue activities
o Coordination by a trained team to direct and optimize the related work;
o Collection of wildlife restricted to reservoir area during filling;
o Sorting, taxonomical identification, sex determination, recording, biometry, and appropriate
referral of rescued wildlife;
o Tagging, release, and monitoring during rescue of endangered species or species deemed of
particular value to predetermined fields;
o Collection of biological material for reviewed and approved research projects and/or tissue,
parasite, venom, etc. databanks; and
o Packing and delivery to requesting institutions qualified and eligible for the receipt and
curatorship of biological material.
VI-59
Rescue should be qualitatively and quantitatively selective, with a view to conserving rare and
endangered species (subject to capture), preserving of genetic variability, and ensuring use of fauna
for scientific ends.
Implementation Stages
• Pre-Rescue
This refers to the period prior to filling of the reservoir. General activities include monitoring and
follow-up by deforestation teams and organization and formation of collection teams responsible for
rescue efforts. In this phase, collection methods will follow the inventory, with a view to assisting
the assembly of the infrastructure required for rescue procedures and ensuring proper functioning
before filling of the reservoir.
• Rescue
Rational rescue is based on examples from previous projects, with a view to avoiding errors and
improving upon positive aspects. Special precautions should be taken with social groups (primates)
and when holding and caging animals subject to significant stress (rodents and deer). The regional
fauna indicates a large number of medium- and small-sized mammals. These groups should receive
differentiated treatment to prevent unnecessary losses. A total of 6 vessels will be used, divided into
4 teams (two vessels will serve as emergency support, meal transport, and ferry units). Crews will
be made up of 1 biologist, 1 pilot, and 2 rescuers.
• Downstream Monitoring
During the fauna rescue period, monitoring of downstream conditions on the Kwanza River will be
performed along sections with reduced flow, with a view to locating and rescuing animals that have
been weakened or are confined to locations in which their survival is jeopardized. Fauna groups
directly affected by adverse impacts on this section of the river, in addition to ichthyofauna, should
be given proper attention: benthic invertebrates, amphibians, reptiles (in particular turtles and
crocodiles), and aquatic and semi-aquatic mammals.
For downstream monitoring of fauna, the following coverage areas are included:
• Fluvial (along sections in which conditions enable access or navigation);
• Terrestrial, in 4x4 vehicles or on foot.
Monitoring actions will be conducted every 2 days and may be adjusted according to downstream
conditions and to enhance estimates regarding the presence of threatened wildlife. A team
composed of one biologist and three assistants will be deployed for this activity.
• Rescue Support Camp
For purposes of fauna rescue operations, a well equipped support camp is a key component to
ensure the success of the related activities and the delivery of biological material to its final
destination (release and referral for scientific research).
VI-60
Internal areas (internal quarantine): these will accommodate reptiles, amphibians, arthropods, birds,
small mammals, and newborn wildlife in general. Wood and steel shelves will be installed for
purposes of storing wildlife holding containers. Industrial containers of three sizes are used (small
for vivarium animals such as mice, medium for rat-size specimens, and large for wildlife such as
guinea pigs or rabbits). Some cages will include lighting to provide heat topoikilothermic animals
and young individuals.
The strategy of the support camp is to retain wildlife the minimum time necessary, ensuring transfer
to the final destination as quickly as possible.
• Sorting and Management of Wildlife
Following rescue, the cages containing wildlife will be taken to the quarantine sorting room. Each
rescued animal will receive a numbered tag on which the scientific name, common name, date of
entry, and origin of the species is entered. In addition, the dated should be recorded in the sequential
log. The identification tag will accompany the animal to its final destination: release, delivery to an
institution, or taxidermy. The procedure will avoid the duplication of registries as each previously
numbered tag will correspond to a single animal. Following the sort process, wildlife will be
submitted to different treatment based on their taxonomical group. Reptiles, amphibians,
arthropods, and birds will be place in quarantine until delivery to the interested institutions. Birds
not included on request lists will be tagged and released.
In the case of mammals, the following procedure will be employed: wildlife will be anesthetized
with Ketalar (ketamine hydrochloride) or Ketalar + Rompum (ketamine hydrochloride + xylazine)
and taken to the processing room for weighing, temperature verification, and biometric
measurements: length of head-body, length of tail, length of front and rear extremities, length of
internal and external portions of ears. Following measurement, animals will be marked for
individual identification to ensure monitoring following release. In some cases, in addition to
biometrics wildlife will be submitted to detailed examinations for research purposes, according to
demand and the protocols established on the basis of the specific interests of research institutions
accredited to participate in the related investigations. Following processing, mammals will be
referred for release or placed in quarantine through delivery to the respective institutions.
Mammals will undergo physical examinations and maintained in quarantine for a period of 1 to 7
days, in a majority of cases, or weeks, in the case of young individuals or wildlife with small
abrasions and cuts. Wildlife presenting difficulties in accepting food will be held in quarantine for a
longer period. In the case of reptiles, amphibians, and arthropods, the average stay in quarantine
will be two weeks.
• Release
For wildlife groups selected for release, the following marking systems will be used:
o Hair dye: mammals may be marked on the back with hair dye that contrasts with their
natural color;
o Numbered rings or ringlets; and
VI-61
o Radio-telemetry receivers and transmitters, with transmitters of various sizes and
specifications provided to accommodate different species of wildlife.
• Feeding Wildlife
In general feeding of wildlife held in quarantine follows the specific recommendations for animals
maintained in confinement, specifically:
o Primates: fruits, such as, bananas, pineapples, oranges, mangos, and guava. In some cases,
dog food, milk, honey, infant formula, and bananas may included. This mixture is well
accepted by both adults and young individuals;
o Small mammals: pineapple, carrots, beets, and dog food. In the case of wild rodents, species
should be fed pelletized rat food;
o Carnivores: raw meat. In the case of canids, diets should be supplemented with fruit and
other items;
o Artiodactyla: species should be held in quarantine for only brief periods due to susceptibility
to high “stress” levels, principally deer. As such, these animals should be referred for release
or another purpose as quickly as possible;
o Birds: rarely rescued during filling of reservoirs. In the case of sporadic capture, specimens
will be addressed on a case-by-case basis.
• Management of Offspring and Young Individuals
Offspring or young individuals rejected by their mothers or rescued alone will be placed in cages
equipped with heat lamps to ensure an average temperature of 36-38° C. Offspring or young
individuals should be fed diluted condensed milk, soy milk, infant formula, and/or mashed banana
in intervals of 4 to 6 hours. Various institutions will be contacted for purposes of receiving young
wildlife, as these individuals cannot be released.
• Veterinary Care
In general, the incidence of animals requiring special care in quarantine is relatively low. The
principal occurrences include abrasions/cuts and some fractures arising from rescue procedures or
struggles or confrontations with other wildlife. Small sutures and bandages will be used to treat
wounds caused during rescue operations. In these cases, animals will be maintained for care and
observation, followed by release or transfer to interested institutions.
• Taxidermy
Wildlife found dead or those in good condition that die during rescue or quarantine will be entered
and forwarded for taxidermy. In the case of animals transferred to scientific collections, the skin
(filling or stretching), cranium, and, in some cases, skeleton will be prepared.
VI-62
• Health issues during care and handling
Handling of wild animals should include attention to the potential dissemination of diseases and
parasites. Wild animals are potentially dangerous to personnel engaged in their handling and care
due to the risk of bites or scratches capable of transmitting viruses or infections. The attendant risks
should be carefully considered. In addition to avoiding bites or scratches, professionals tasked with
handling animals should protect themselves from fluids such as saliva, urine, and feces and, in
particular, direct contact with blood. Parasites and pathogens may be present in these transmission
channels.
A recognized protocol of good practices and techniques adopted by distinguished institutions
should be employed to ensure safe and competent performance of routine tasks.
• Transfer of biological material
Learning/research institutions will be contacted for purposes of receiving biological material
deriving from the respective activities. Each institution will be asked to complete a form listing the
degree of interest, the quantity of material sought, special observations, and the end uses of the
corresponding material.
Each request will be signed by a responsible lead professional with whom all subsequent contacts
will be made. Requests will be evaluated and met to the extent possible, depending on the quantities
of biological specimens rescued and the pre-established criteria for transfer of biological materials.
Each institution will be asked to provide the respective manner of participation, whether through
receipt of materials and/or direct participation in rescue activities.
Stage 3: Fauna Monitoring
The fauna monitoring project will run for a period of 30 months. This will provide sufficient time
for monitoring dense populations, test hypotheses regarding the likelihood of populations returning
to normal levels, and, further, contributing technical and scientific means for the conservation of
habitats and fauna in areas surrounding the reservoir.
Monitoring activities will begin six months prior to filling of the reservoir (designation of release
and biological indicator areas) and intensified during rescue activities. As such, every rescued
animal released into the wild will be tagged and monitored within the project scope.
To this end, the respective activities are subdivided into three stages:
o pre-filling phase: 3 campaigns will be conducted over a period of 15 days to identify critical
points in habitats similar to those targeted for flooding, where natural wildlife populations
will concentrate due to displacement caused by filling of the reservoir or wild animal
releases;
o filling phase: monthly campaigns running 10 days for the purposes of tracking the effects of
filling of the reservoir on animal populations and release activities in connection with
rescued individuals; and
VI-63
o post-filling phase: monitoring of dense population concentrations and follow up of
processes.
• Biological Indicator Concept
The use of biological indicator species to assess and monitor biological processes in ecosystems is a
practice that dates to the early part of this century. The concept has been widely developed in the
intervening years as a pollution control measure in rivers and lakes. The indicator species concept is
based on the use of species present in the community and subject to man-made impacts currently or
in the past. The value of indicator species may be due to their intolerance to degraded conditions,
rendering them the first to disappear following a man-made impact, or to their tolerance for the
modified conditions generated by the respective impact.
Knowledge of the nature of the interaction between the presence and/or abundance of a given
species in relation to the type of impact generated may serve as an indicator. Impacts caused by
human action trigger changes in the nature of the relationship between species in a community.
Based on this, groups or sets of indicator species can be expected to define the status of the system
in respect of the current impact. In this light, it is extremely important to understand the effects of
impact factors at the species, population, and community level previously. As such, the following
criteria will be used for objective selection of biological indicator species:
o Biological indicators should be stenotypes or sensitive, with limited variability response to
the impact factor or factors, such that a change in abundance relative to the species serves as
an indicator of the habitat’s condition;
o Biological indicators must be year round residents of the habitat;
o Biological indicators should be easy to monitor;
o Biological indicators should present short generation times, thereby ensuring the population
varies quickly when exposed to environmental factors; and
o Biological indicators must be abundant to ensure variability in population size is of a
sufficient magnitude to respond to the respective environmental impacts.
The first criteria relates to the concept of key species and guilds, referring to species whose
presence a series of other species depends on directly or indirectly. The key species may not be the
most abundant, but its effect is greater than expected based on its abundance.
The concept of guilds is similar to the idea of biological indicators, with the exception that the
respective indicators are transformed into indicator guilds. Indicator guilds respond in similar
fashion to impact factors. For purposes of monitoring and assessing man-made impacts, biological
indicators, key species, and indicator guilds should be employed separately.
• Proposed Measures
1. Monitoring of Herpetofauna (Community Structure)
VI-64
The purpose of this study is to examine the hypothesis that local anuran and lizard communities will
be subject to modifications in their composition and structure by virtue of filling of the reservoir,
due specifically to the loss of forest habitats and little or no representation outside the reservoir
areas.
Modifications in species structure are also expected due to population concentrations (both in open
and forest areas around the reservoir), selective effects on reproduction, and greater or lesser
capacity of species to colonize and adapt to the new environmental setting created by filling of the
reservoir.
Monitoring of herpetofauna will contribute to the collection of information on the effects of
reservoir formations on the composition, abundance, and structure of local communities. Field
research will further allow for a more substantiated assessment of the routine methods and activities
adopted for purposes of monitoring the corresponding organisms, as well as recommended
adjustments.
• Objectives:
o To determine the composition of anuran and lizard communities in areas around the
reservoir, comparing these with the data obtained during the diagnostic analysis phase;
o To determine the relative abundance of the species detected in surrounding areas, comparing
the results with the data obtained during the diagnostic analysis;
o To identify potential changes in population density levels in terms of reproduction and
movement standards for selected anuran and reptile species in areas adjacent to the
reservoir;
o To assess the degree of re-adaptation of selected reptile species to the habitats into which
they are reintroduced following the fauna rescue stage.
• Methodology
The traditional method employed in herpetofauna inventories is based on recording “all
occurrences.” The use of pitfall traps, in conjunction with marking-recapture techniques, will
provide estimates on population densities, in addition to demographic parameters and standards for
using the space.
For the marking-recapture studies on both lizards and anurans, a digit cutting technique will be
used, based on the schematics and recommendations in Donnely et. al (1994). Larger individuals
(see Varanus spp.) obtained during rescue should be released after registering the respective
biometric and individual marking data, with a view to tracking their movements, attachment to
release sites, and condition factors, when relocated.
2. Monitoring of Transferred Mammals
The impacts of flooding on fauna range from the loss of habitats to death by drowning and
population densification resulting from the expulsion of individuals previously residing in the
flooded area. There is little scientific data quantifying these impacts on terrestrial fauna.
VI-65
Various translocation projects have been conducted, many successfully, others less so. A large
portion of the work was aimed at reintroducing endangered species, such as the white rhinoceros
(Player, 1967) and the gray wolf (Fritts et al., 1984). This project strives in a similar manner to
monitor the re-adaptation of adult wildlife living in the wild to new habitats, by virtue of the filling
of the reservoir. Given that the fauna targeted for relocation will derive from the same region into
which individuals will be released, re-adaptation will merely involve the process for establishing a
new habitat in release sites or contiguous areas.
The monitoring actions for relocated fauna will be divided into two stages:
2.1. Primate Monitoring
• Objectives
o To verify the degree of re-adaptation of primates subject to rescue and relocation to new
areas, in addition to the obtainment of other ecological data. Evaluation of the re-adaptation
process will be accomplished principally through observations during search operations and
the obtainment of food resources, shelters, and territorial expansion;
o To evaluate the survival of transported wildlife, the maintenance or failure of study groups
to maintain their social structures and their re-adaptation to release sites and the distribution
of their food resources; and
o To generate data for the conservation area survey on the biology of local species and the
inherent difficulties and challenges of studying these in the wild.
• Methodology
During rescue and following filling of the reservoir, groups of each primate species found in the
area should be monitored through radio-telemetry techniques for a period of 24 months. Tracking of
groups should be conducted for 10 days/month. Upon each encounter with released groups the
following should be registered:
o Location and time of encounter;
o Head count of animals and confirmation as to whether they all belong to the original group.
In the event of death, determine probable causes;
o Verify natural state of each individual. To draw conclusions on this component without the
recapture of animals, the following must be observed: condition of fur; confidence in
displacement; and signs of weight loss; and
o Enter ecological data such as: height (vegetation stratum) in which the troop is found; for
use of food sources, record the specific plant species and food item.
• Measures prior to release:
VI-66
o Groups designated for release should maintain the same social structure and composition
identified prior to rescue, with preference given to groups with young individuals. In
previous studies on reintroduction, groups with more cohesive structures demonstrated
greater success in adapting to release (Passamani et al., 1997);
o At least one individual from each group should be equipped with a radio telemetry device.
Preference should be given to the adult male;
o In placing the collar on individuals, each animal should be sedated via an intramuscular
injection, weighed, and fitted with an appropriate Telonic transmitter. Weighing and other
biometric measures should be executed on all individuals of the groups targeted for
translocation;
o The tails of both the animal on which the transmitting device is fitted and the remaining
members of the group should be dyed with Nyenzol. The purpose of the markings will be to
distinguish males from females (proximal and distal portion of the tail respectively) and
between members of different groups of the same species (thigh and rib areas). This
procedure will enable verification of the dispersal of translocated group members to resident
groups or vice versa; and
o Following the respective procedures, animals should be observed for a period of four to ten
days or as necessary for confirmation of their adaptation to the transmitters. This stage is
necessary to ensure recapture of animals is not required later in the event due to discomfort
with the devices.
• Measures following release:
o Following release, food should be provided in feeders, principally for frugivores. As
adaptation to the release site is observed, food will be removed gradually. This procedure is
necessary to the extent previous studies revealed that more than 20% of animal deaths
following release is due to starvation (Passamani et al., 1997);
o Animals must be observed systematically over time to verify if wounds form or emerge and
the radio-transmitters are in good working order.
2.2. Monitoring of Medium- and Large-Sized Wildlife
• Objectives:
o To estimate the population density of medium- and large-sized mammal species, with an
emphasis on carnivores and track changes in density arising from translocation and
movement of animals displaced by the reservoir;
o To track the daily movements of core carnivore species and describe variations in the
patterns identified by virtue of filling of the reservoir;
o To track medium- and large-sized core mammal species transferred as part of the rescue
operation and to assess the success of the respective translocations through survival criteria
and settling of the target individuals in transfer areas.
VI-67
• Methodology
Tomahawk traps will be distributed throughout the study area and baited with pieces of cooked
chicken (to enhancing the odor), for the purposes of capturing carnivores. Daily inspections of the
traps will be performed on a daily basis. Captured animals will be sedated, measured, tagged with
ear tabs and fitted with a radio-transmitter collar, and released after recovery from the effects of the
sedation. Tracking by radio-telemetry will be performed daily and the locations determined by
triangulation of the respective lines of sight. Individuals will be selected, among the rescued
animals designated for transfer, for purposes of radio-telemetry tracking, in accordance with the
procedures above.
Visual census surveys will be performed four to six times per week (half the total at night, half the
total during daylight hours). Pre-established transects will be covered by motor vehicle with two
observers (each verifying one side of the transect. With each visualization, the species, group size
(where applicable), and the perpendicular distance of the animal(s) from the transect will be
recorded. The population density estimated will be performed using the DISTANCE program
(Buckland et al., 1993). In addition, areas will be selected for tracking census surveys. Tracks will
be identified and counted and evaluated for possible changes in mammal population density.
3. Monitoring of Birds
Formation of reservoirs with water diverted by damming of rivers modifies the natural environment
and can create “archipelagos” with dynamics very similar to the theory of Islands of Biogeography
postulated by MacArthur and Wilson (1967). However, a majority of the studies performed using
biogeography involve the composition of species (richness) and not the processes underpinning the
respective specific compositions, such that the results are applied to the conservation of island
environments in fragmented landscapes and the design of natural reserves (Diamond, 1975; Wilson
and Willis, 1975).
The response of bird species may vary according to fragmentation of the environment; populations
may increase, remain unchanged, decline, or disappear (Hass and Cavalcanti, 1998). The different
responses of bird communities to fragmentation processes may be associated to the ecological
requirements of the respective species, such as, for example, natural rarity (Karr, 1990), body size
(Karr, 1990), fertility rates (Sieving e Karr, 1997), and survival (Karr, 1982a, b).
• Objective
To describe the responses of bird communities to the loss and reduction of habitats arising from
formation of the reservoir, addressing, to this end, the following questions:
o How does the displacement of populations dependent on forest formations operate?
o How are resident populations affected by reductions in their living areas?
o How do guilds reorganize in the face of isolation, fragmentation, and habitat reduction
processes?
VI-68
• Methodology
Planning of experiments will be described by four specific methodologies.
o Ornithological nets: capture of birds (Karr, 1981a) at different water elevations. Three points
will be selected for the placement of nets, the first at water level and the other two at higher
elevations. At each sample point, 20 mist nets arranged in sequential order will be placed for
a period of five days. For each captured bird, the respective biometric information will be
entered and a metallic or colored tab fitted on captured individuals;
o Census points: (Karr 1981b; Bibby et al. 1993) at three different contour lines. Each census
survey will consist of visual or vocal recording of birds, entry of the species, the number of
individuals, the distance from the respective researcher, and the stratum utilized by the bird.
Each point should be sampled for a period of 20 minutes in the early hours of the day. Bird
vocalizations will be recorded by a professional audio recorder (Sony TCE 500);
o Sampling: opportunistics of avifauna, with a view to describing bird communities in the
region;
o Tracking of tagged birds: through binoculars for the determination of bird habitats in the
study area. For each entry, the species, stratum utilized, and behavior (feeding, vocalization,
etc.) will be recorded. The living areas of species are determined through the Minimum
Polygon Convex Method.
6.6.8. VECTOR CONTROL PROGRAM
Angola is a tropical country with a high incidence of endemic diseases. The principal endemic
diseases identified at the National Conference on Major Endemic Diseases in Angola
(February/2000) were malaria, tuberculosis, HIV/ADIS, sleeping sickness, leprosy, and
schistosomiasis.
Of the six endemic diseases above, three are parasitosis transmitted by invertebrate vectors with life
cycles closely tied to lentic aquatic environments, including backwater areas and lakes. In this light,
damming of the river’s water by coffer-dams, in conjunction with the temporary increase in human
populations due to the construction project, could have significant adverse impacts on local public
health.
Among the potential endemic diseases which could be exacerbated by the project, malaria warrants
special attention, to the extent it already represents a serious public health challenge in Angola.
According to WHO’s 2006 annual report, approximately 3.5 million cases were registered in that
year, while an additional 3 million were reported in 2010. The number of malaria cases resulting in
death reveal a gradual decline as of 2001. The peak year was 2003, when 38,598 malaria-related
deaths were reported. This total fell to 9,812 in 2007 and to approximately 6,000 is 2010.
VI-69
Given the lack of specific studies in this area, additional vectors to those identified above may exist
in the region. As such, a vector proliferation monitoring and control program is necessary to ensure
the health of project personnel as well as the local population.
6.6.8.2. OBJECTIVES
General Objective
The program is intended to mitigate the following impacts: the formation of humid and flooded
areas; changes in the population dynamics of benthic macroinvertebrate species; overloading of
existing health, sanitation, education, and safety infrastructure; health effects arising from the
establishment of propitious conditions for the proliferation of water-borne disease vectors.
Specific Objectives
• To identify and monitor vector populations in the project area of influence;
• To prevent the installation and exacerbation of water-borne vectors in habitats at support
infrastructure sites and main project construction sites;
• To control vector populations with a view to preventing potential epidemiological outbreaks;
• To contribute to and supplement public health and environmental, socio-cultural, and health
education measures by providing support to disease prevention and control efforts
.
To fulfill its objectives and implement mitigating or offset measures in response to forecast impacts,
the following measures should be executed through the program:
• To train and build capacity of teams with primary responsibility for implementing the
program;
• To conduct a survey of the vectors present in the area of influence, with a view to providing
the necessary contributions to the program’s action plans. The survey should be performed
periodically as a means for monitoring the vector populations and the detecting possible
vectors that may have not been identified in previous studies;
• To perform periodic inspections of support infrastructure points, the project’s key works,
and residential clusters in the vicinity, in an effort to identify possible vector hot spots and
breeding sites and eradicate them. Special importance should be given to areas modified by
human occupation through the accumulation of standing water and waste;
• To perform surveys in the Directly Affected Area at natural aquatic, shallow, and lentic
points; in degraded forest environments, areas of well formation, and aquatic plant deposits;
and in abandoned areas modified by humans, for the purpose of assessing the formation
VI-70
vector breeding sites. For the examination of environments, the pertinent measures should
be adopted to ensure these area do not become vector proliferation hotspots;
• To engage with the fauna conservation program for the purpose of providing the entities
with primary responsibility for the epidemiological surveys in the region systematic
biological data on captured wild animals with endemic diseases;
• To prepare presentations and informational material consistent with the relevant public
health and environmental education, socio-cultural, and health programs so as to raise
awareness among workers and local populations on diseases and the respective preventive
measures;
• Where necessary, to conduct vector population controls using the most appropriate
methodology on a case-by-case basis (insecticides, molluscicides, biological controls, etc.).
VI-71
CHAPTER 7
CONCLUSION
VII-1
7. CONCLUSION
Angola continues to require electric power sources to foster national development, both to supply
the industrial sector and individual alike, given the inability of the current production system to
meet demand. The maximum initial forecast demand for 2009 in the North System was
approximately 520 MW, while peak consumption in Luanda in April 2009, between the hours of
5:00 p.m. and 11:00 p.m., was 678 MW. Supply, however, was limited to 520 MW of full load
delivery with the remaining 158 MW met only partially through a rotating system powered by
thermoelectric sources.
The Kwanza River Basin has the largest energy generating capacity of Angola’s 48 basins;
currently, the two hydroelectric plants that supply the North System generate 700 MW, specifically
the Cambambe Dam, with an installed capacity of 180 MW, and the Capanda Dam, at 520 MW. To
boost energy production in the Basin, dam-raising work on the Cambambe facility is underway and
additional hydroelectric projects are planned between Capanda and Cambambe. Of these, the
furthest along to date is the Laúca Dam project.
Data from the Ministry of Energy and Water indicate that the estimated capacity of the entire
Kwanza River Basin is 6,780 MW, with guaranteed energy supplies of 26,200 GWh. Based on this
scenario, studies were prepared providing for the construction of an additional seven (7)
hydroelectric units downstream from the Capanda Dam and upstream from the Cambambe Dam.
The Laúca Dam, one of the projects encompassed in the studies, will be located at kilometer 307.5
of the Kwanza River in a narrow S-shaped valley surrounded by vertical walls rising more than 100
meters, characterized by rapids and a natural fall of approximately 100 meters running 2 kilometers.
The facility will have an installed capacity of 2,070 MW to will supply the North System. In the
coming ten years, the Angolan Government plans to interconnect the energy production system,
specifically the North, Central, and South Systems.
VII-2
In compliance with the applicable Angolan environmental laws, the project proponent, the Kwanza
Environmental Development Office (Gabinete de Aproveitamento do Médio Kwanza – GAMEK),
through Odebrecht (the company charged with the respective river diversion work and construction
of the dam), contracted Holísticos and Intertechne to prepare an Environmental Impact Assessment.
A vast body of bibliographic research and technical field surveys was performed, with a view to
producing an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) consistent with the Laúca Dam
implementation project located on the boundary line between Malanje, Kwanza Norte, and Kwanza
Sul provinces. The results of the EIA reveal highly complex socio-environmental characteristics
deriving from the project’s location, nature, and scope.
From a strictly environmental standpoint (physical and biotic environments), the project affected
areas (subject to direct physical impacts from the project) are situated in locations on which scarce
scientific information and studies is available, with limited reference data, rendering, as such, the
technical work performed for this study of great value. Therefore, this report will serve as a
reference for new projects planned and implemented in the region, in particular those developed
along the Middle Kwanza River.
The surveys of the physical and biotic environments revealed the existence of significant
environmental diversity in the region (in particular ichthyofauna, herptofauna, and avifauna) and
that despite the absence of any endangered species or of any requiring a high degree of
environmental protection, the species identified in the project area are important for maintaining the
region’s environmental balance. The proposed environmental plans offer research and monitoring
strategies capable of supporting the consolidation of a body of technical information on the
project’s implementation area that could be used subsequently to record the ecological systems
arrayed along the Kwanza River.
The Environmental Impact Assessment includes, in addition, an exhaustive program of
consultations and interviews with communities in the Project Affected Areas (Áreas Directamente
Afectadas – ADA) and Areas of Direct Influence (Áreas de Influência Directa – AID), enabling
deeper understanding of the local populations and their habits and customs, in addition to the
opportunity to foster a closer relationship between the project and surrounding communities.
VII-3
Further, this process enables the collection of information on the expectations and concerns of local
populations in regard to the project, in particular connection to job opportunities and improved
living standards.
The field studies did not identify any man-made pressures on the region’s natural resources,
including local water resources, as no significant population centers are located in the Project
Affected Area (Área Directamente Afectada – ADA) or the Area of Direct Influence (Área de
Influência Directa – AID). The areas potentially affected by flooding of the reservoir in the ADA
include the Village of Kissaquina, a fishing settlement, and two cemeteries (one on the left bank and
one on the right bank of the river). Natural resource consumption in the area is limited to
subsistence communities engaged in hunting and fishing activities and small-scale farming.
From a social standpoint, the bibliographic studies and surveys revealed, in addition to analyses of
the current condition of local populations conducted in the project’s area of influence (in particular,
the ADA and AID), the development strong, rich, and enduring cultural ties and habits and customs
over the past 20 years. Additionally, a fragile social setting was observed with respect to living
conditions, associated primarily to precarious housing and the direct dependence on natural
resources as virtually the sole source of income and subsistence.
Based on the environmental analysis presented in the study, it was possible to outline the current
socio-environmental realities of the project area and, above all, delimit effective control and
monitoring plans and, in addition, offsets for the negative impacts identified. Of particular
importance in this context is the development of an appropriate Resettlement Plan for project
affected communities by virtue of flooding of the reservoir. The Resettlement Plan must include
procedures for the physical resettlement of individuals and for addressing issues in connection with
dwellings and means of subsistence affected or lost due to the project. As such, detailed studies
should be conducted of the potential scenarios, as well as consultations with project affected
populations, with a view to forging agreement between the parties on resettlement.
It is essential that the related projects generate the expected benefits with the minimum possible
adverse impacts from an environmental and social standpoint alike. To this end, strict fulfillment of
the proposed mitigation measures will be required to ensure the safety of workers and local
VII-4
communities, in addition to the protection of the environment and the surrounding areas. With this
in mind, an Environmental Management Program is presented for the dam construction and
operation phases. The Program sets out a series of subprograms for various aspects of the project,
the most important of which are the support to project work, support to local communities, wildlife
and plant conservation, and degraded area recovery programs. The project support program is
accompanied by a Waste Management Plan, prepared pursuant to the requirements of the Waste
Management Regulation (Presidential Decree No. 190/12).
As described in the previous sections, in general the adverse impacts underscored in this document
can be mitigated and/or prevented, provided the proposed mitigation measures set forth in this
document are fulfilled and the good practices of environmental management and the environmental
management programs specified in this Environmental Impact Assessment are applied.
From an economic and social standpoint, and taking into account the country’s energy needs, it is
important to underline that the project has an important role in diversifying Angola’s energy grid
and strengthening the national economy, while falling within the scope of the country’s Executive
Program for the Energy Sector (Programa Executivo do Sector de Energia).
The project’s construction and operational phases will employ cutting-edge technology and
equipment. In this light, the selected technological option is the most appropriate, as the project will
also apply good practices of construction for hydroelectric projects.
Based on the results set out in the pressures and impacts matrixes, the projected adverse impacts of
the project, and the concrete measures adopted to minimize or mitigate these, the plans should be
followed by the project proponent and executor, as recommended in this document. The applicable
domestic legislation, compliance with which is mandatory, should be implemented during the
construction and operational phases of the Laúca Dam.
In the light of the environmental and social impacts identified in the Environmental Impact
Assessment and based on proper application of the respective mitigation measures and monitoring
plan, construction of the dam is deemed feasible from an environmental and social standpoint and
highly relevant from an economic perspective.
VII-5
CHAPTER 8
BIBLIOGRAPHY
VIII-1
8. Bibliography
VIII-2
Estudo de Impacte Ambiental do Projecto de Construção da Barragem de Laúca
8. Bibliografia
Agência Internacional de Energia AIE (International Energy Agency), site. 2006. Disponível
em: http://www.iea.org/. Acesso em Julho de 2008.
ALMEIDA, J.P. Angola, Espaço Singular no Contexto Africano. Asteriskos, v.1/2, p.263-271,
2006.
Angiosperm Phylogeny Group II -APG II. An update of the Angiosperm Phylogeny Group
classification for the orders and families of flowering plants: APG II. Botanical Journal of the
Linnean Society. London, v.141, n.4, p.399-436, 2003.
ARCHER, M. Singularidades dum País Distante. In: Cadernos Coloniais n° 11. Lisboa: Editorial
Cosmos, s/d.
Atlas National Geographic. África, Angola. Ed. Abril, São Paulo, 2008.
AUSTIN, M.P.; CUNNINGHAM, R.B.; & FLEMMING, R.B. 1983. New approaches to direct
gradient analysis using environmental scales and statitiscal curve-fitting procedures.
Vegetation, p.55: 11-27.
AZEVEDO, A.L., REFEGA, A.A.G., SOUSA, E.C., PORTAS, C.A.N., VILHENA, M.A.L., MARQUES,
M.N., LOURO de SÁ, V.H. (1972). Caracterização Sumária das Condições Ambientais de
Angola. Universidade de Luanda. Nova Lisboa. 106p.
BACHMAN, R. 1894. Foraging behavior of free-raging wild and hatchey brown trout in a
stream. Transaction of the American Fishery Society, p.113: 1-32
BARBOSA, L.A.G. (1970). Carta Fitogeográfica de Angola. Instituto de Investigação Científica
de Angola. Luanda. 323p.
Capítulo 8 – Bibliografia
8-1
VIII-3
BÄRTELS, A. Guia de plantas tropicais: plantas ornamentais, plantas úteis, frutos exóticos.
Rio de Janeiro: Lexikon, 2007. 379p. il. (tradução de Cecília B. V. Soares).
BIODIVERSITY & THE OIL AND GAS INDUSTRY: CENTRAL AND WEST AFRICA WORKSHOP.
Estratégia e Plano de Acção Nacionais para Biodiversidade (NBSAP). Disponível em:
http://www.ipieca.org/activities/biodiversity/downloads/workshops/sept_05/Vladimir_Russ
o_Port.pdf. Acesso em 29/09/2008, 2005.
BOCAGE, J.V. BARBOSA DU, 1890. Mammifères d'Angola et du Congo. J. Sci. Math. Phys.
Nat. 2(2): 1-32.
BODEN, G, TEUGELS, G & HOPKINS, CC. 1997. A systematic review of the large-scaled
Marcusenius
with
description
of
a
new
species
from
Cameroon
(Tleostei;
Osteoglossomorpha; Mormyridae). J. Nat. Hist. 31: 1645-1682.
BOLETIM Demográfico n° 9; Projecção da população do País por províncias e grupos
quinquenais de idade para o período 1985/2010; INE, Luanda.
BRENAN, J.P.M. Some aspects of the phytogeography of Tropical Africa. Annals of the
Missouri Botanical Garden. v.65, p.437-478, 1978.
BRUAND, Y. Arquitetura contemporânea no Brasil. São Paulo: editora Perspectiva, 2003.
CALADO, J. C. A Emergência do Empresariado em Angola – Motivações e Expectativas.
Lisboa: Pé de Página Editores, 1998.
CÂMARA
PORTUGUESA
DE
COMERCIO
DO
BRASIL.
18.09.06.
Disponível
em:
<http://www.camaraportuguesa.com.br/>. Acesso em Setembro 2008.
8-2
VIII-4
CAVALCANTI, T.B. (Ed.) Fundamentos para a Coleta de Germoplasma Vegetal. Brasília:
Embrapa Recursos Genéticos e Biotecnologia, 2005. p.681-702.
CAVALCANTI, T.B; BUENO, P.C & RODRIGUES, P. 1998. Levantamento Florístico e Resgate de
Germoplasma no Aproveitamento Hidrelétrico de Corumbá: Relatório Final. EMBRAPACENARGEN, Brasília, DF. 113p.
CAVAZZI I, 1965, p. 196 in COELHO, Virgilio. Mémoire de Dea. Sorbonne, 1988, p. 26
CENTRO DE ESTUDOS E INVESTIGAÇÃO CIENTÍFICA DA UNIVERSIDADE CATÓLICA DE ANGOLA
- CEIC/UCAN. Relatório Energia em Angola 2011. Luanda,2011.
CLARK, J. D. A Pré-história de África. Ed. Verbo, Lisboa, 1973
COELHO, A. (2001). Lei de Bases do Ambiente Anotada. Faculdade de Direito da
Universidade Agostinho Neto. Luanda. 450p.
COELHO, V. Mémoire de Dea. Sorbonne, 1988, p. 21
CONSULADO
GERAL
DE
ANGOLA.
Infraestrutura.
Disponível
em:
<http://www.consuladodeangola.org/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=20&la
ng=french>. Acesso em: 29/09/2008.
COSTA, WJEM. 2002. Peixes Anuais Brasileiros: Diversidade e Conservação. Curitiba. Editora
da Universidade Federal do Paraná. 238p.
CRAWFORD-CABRAL, J., 1986. A discussion of the taxa to be used in a zoogeographical
analysis as illustrated in Angolan Muroidea. - Cimbebasia A 8(19): 161-166.
8-3
VIII-5
CRAWFORD-CABRAL, J., 1998. The Angolan Rodents of the Superfamily Muroidea. IICT 161,
22pp.
CRONQUIST, A. The Evolution and Classification of Flowering Plants. The New York
Botanical Garden, Bronx, USA, 1988. 2ed. 555p.
CUARON, A. D., 2000. Global Perspective on Habitat Disturbance and Tropical Rainforest
Mammals Conservation Biology, Vol. 14, No. 6, pp. 1574-1579.
DE VOS, L. 1995. A Systematic Revision of the African Schilbeidae (Teleostei, Siluriformes,
With an Annotated Bibliography. Ann. Sci. Zool. 271: 1-450.
DE WEIRDT, D, GETAHUN, A, TCHIBWABWA, S & TEUGELS, GG. 2007. Cyprinidae. Pp: 467572. Em: The Fresh and Brackish Water Fishes of Lower Guinea, West-Central Africa.
STIASSNY, MLJ, TEUGELS, GG & HOPKINS, CD (eds.). Paris: IRD Éditions.
DEPARTAMENTO NACIONAL DE RECURSOS HUMANOS, 2005.
DILOLWA, C. R. Contribuição à História Económica de Angola, 2000, p. 18 e p. 25
DINIZ, A. C. Características Mesológicas de Angola: Descrição e Correlação dos Aspectos
Fisiográficos, dos Solos e da Vegetação das Zonas Agrícolas Angolanas. Nova Lisboa: Missão
de Inquéritos Agrícolas de Angola, 1973. 482p. (Série Estudos n.2).
DUMNICKA, E.H, KASSIA, H., KOVNACK, A. & KUFLIKOWSIK,T. Effects of Regulated Stream of
the Hidrochemistry and Zoobenthos in Differents Polluted Points of the Upper Vistula River
(Southern Poland). Hidrobiology, 169: 138-191
ENCICLOPÉDIA DO MUNDO CONTEMPORÂNEO - Estatísticas e Informações Completas de
Todos os Países do Planeta. São Paulo: Editora Terceiro Milênio – Publifolha, 2002.
8-4
VIII-6
ENCICLOPÉDIA GEOGRÁFICA UNIVERSAL – Volume 1. Rio de Janeiro: Editora Globo, 1995.
ESTEVES, F.A. Fundamentos da Limnologia. Interciências – FINEP. 575p.
EXELL, A.W.; FERNANDES, A. Conspectus Florae Angolensis, Leguminosae-Papilionoideae,
v.3. Lisboa: Junta de Investigações do Ultramar, 1962-1966. 187p. il.
EXELL, A.W.; FERNANDES, A. Conspectus Florae Angolensis, v.2. Lisboa: Junta de
Investigações do Ultramar, 1956. 322p. il.
EXELL, A.W.; FERNANDES, A.; MENDES, E.J. Conspectus Florae Angolensis, RosaceaeAlangiaceae, v.4. Lisboa: Junta de Investigações do Ultramar e Instituto de Investigação
Científica de Angola, 1970. 401p. il.
FEILER, A. 1990. Distribution of mammals in Angola and notes on biogeography. in
Vertebrates in the Tropics. edit. G. Peters & R. Hutter.
FERREIRA, M. E. Angola: da Política Económica às Relações Económicas com Portugal. In:
Cadernos Econômicos Portugal Angola n° 7. Edição da Câmara de Comércio e Indústria
Portugal-Angola1995.
FIDALGO, O.; BONONI, V. L. R. (Ed.). Técnicas de Coleta, Preservação e Herborização de
Material Botânico. São Paulo: Instituto de Botânica, 1989. 62p. il. (Série documentos).
FISHER, S.G. & LIHENS, G.E. 1973. Energy Flow in Bear Brook, New Hampshine: an
Integrative Approach to Stearm Ecosystem Metabolism. Ecological Monografhs 43: 421439.
8-5
VIII-7
FURNAS & SERRA DA MESA ENERGIA, 1999. Workshop: A Fauna do AHE Serra da Mesa
(resumos). Universidade Católica de Goiás. 42p.
FURNAS, 1996. Projeto Básico Ambiental do Aproveitamento Hidrelétrico Corumbá:
Implantação dos Programas Ambientais. Furnas Centrais Elétricas S.A. 116p.
FURNAS, 1996. Projeto Básico Ambiental do Aproveitamento Hidrelétrico de Serra da
Mesa: Implantação dos Programas Ambientais. Furnas Centrais Elétricas S.A. 159p.
GABRIEL, M. N. Diocese de Malange. Edição: Diocese de Malange (Angola) – Distribuidora:
Livraria Editora Pax, Lda. – Braga (Portugal), 1982, p.21.
GONÇALVES, A. C. Tradição e Modernidade na (Re)Construção de Angola. Porto: Edições
Afrontamento, 2003.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (1994a). Decreto sobre Segurança, Saúde e Higiene no Trabalho
(Decreto n.º 31/94 de 5 de Agosto). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (1994b). Lei Constitucional da República de Angola (Lei n.º 23/92 de
16 de Setembro). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (1994c). Decreto Executivo sobre o Regulamento Geral da
Sinalização de Segurança e Saúde no Trabalho (Decreto Executivo n.º 128/04 de 23 de
Novembro). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (1996). Decreto Executivo sobre o Regulamento Geral dos Serviços
de Segurança e Higiene no Trabalho nas Empresas (Decreto Executivo n.º 6/96 de 2 de
Fevereiro). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
8-6
VIII-8
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (1998). Lei de Bases do Ambiente (Lei n.º 5/98 de 19 de Junho).
Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2002). Lei de Águas (Lei n.º 6/02 de 21 de Junho). Governo de
Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2004a). Decreto sobre a Avaliação de Impacte Ambiental (Decreto
n.º 51/04 de 23 de Julho). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2004b). Lei das Actividades Industriais (Lei n.° 5/04 de 7 de
Setembro). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2005). Decreto sobre o Licenciamento das Actividades Industriais
(Decreto n.° 44/05 de 6 de Julho). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2007). Decreto sobre o Licenciamento Ambiental (Decreto n.º
59/07 de 13 de Julho). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2009). Decreto-Lei que aprova o Estatuto Orgânico do Ministério
do Ambiente (Decreto-Lei n.º 4/09 de 18 de Maio). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2012a). Decreto Presidencial que aprova o Estatuto Orgânico do
Ministério das Pescas (Decreto n.º 226/12 de 4 de Dezembro). Governo de Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2012b). Decreto Presidencial que aprova o Estatuto Orgânico do
Ministério da Agricultura (Decreto n.º 228/12 de 4 de Dezembro). Governo de Angola.
Luanda.
8-7
VIII-9
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2012c). Decreto Presidencial que aprova o Estatuto Orgânico do
Ministério da Urbanização e Habitação (Decreto n.º 232/12 de 4 de Dezembro). Governo de
Angola. Luanda.
GOVERNO DE ANGOLA. (2012d). Decreto Presidencial que aprova o Estatuto Orgânico do
Ministério da Construção (Decreto n.º 241/12 de 4 de Dezembro). Governo de Angola.
Luanda.
GOSSWEILER, J. & MENDONÇA, F.A. Carta fitogeográfica de Angola. Luanda: Governo Geral
de Angola, 1939.
GOSSWEILER, J. Nomes Indígenas de plantas de Angola. Luanda: Agronomia Angolana, n.7,
1953.
GOVERNO PROVINCIAL DO KWANZA SUL. Estimativas apresentadas ao registro eleitoral
GOVERNO PROVINCIAL. Plano Provincial do Kwanza-Sul 1994
GRANDVAUX-BARBOSA, L. A. Carta fitogeográfica de Angola. Luanda: Instituto de
Investigação Científica de Angola, 1970. 323p.
GRISEBACH, A. Die Vegetation der Erde Nach Ihrer Klimatischen Anordnung. Leipzig, 1872.
1335p.
GUERRA, H. Angola: Estrutura Económica e Classes Sociais – os últimos anos do
colonialismo português em Angola. Lisboa: Edições 70, 1979.
HANDLY, C.O. JR & KALKO, E.K.V. 1993. A Short History of Small Mammal Pitfall Trapping.
Virginia J.sci., 44:19-26
8-8
VIII-10
HAYMAN, R.W., 1963. Mammals from Angola, Mainly from the Luanda District. Publ. Cult.
Co. Diam. Angola 66: 81-140.
HEINTZE, BEATRIX. Angola nos séculos XVI e XVII, Kilombelombe- Ministério da Cultura,
Governo de Angola, 2007.
HENRIQUES, I. C. Território e Identidade – A Construção da Angola Colonial (c.1872- c.
1926). Lisboa: Edição patrocinada pela FCT – Fundação para a Ciência e a Tecnologia e
Distribuída pela DINAPRESs – Martim e Coimbra, Lda., 2004.
HEYER, W.R.; DONNELEY, M.A; McDIARMID; HAYEK, L.A.C & FOSTER, M.S (EDS). 1994.
Measuring and Monitoring Biological Diversity. Standard Methods for Amphibians.
Smithsoniam Institution Press. Washington. 364p.
HILL, J. & CARTER, D. 1941. The Mammals of Angola, Africa. Bulletin of The American
Museum of Natural History vol. lxxviii, 1941: 1-165.
HILTY, J. & MERENLENDER, A., 2000. Faunal Indicator Taxa Selection for Monitoring
Ecosystem Health. Biological Conservation 92:185-197.
HOPKINS, CD, LAVOUÉ, S & SULLIVAN, JP. 2007. Mormyridae. Pp: 219-334. Em: The Fresh
and Brackish Water Fishes of Lower Guinea, West-Central Africa. STIASSNY, MLJ, TEUGELS,
GG & HOPKINS, CD (eds.). Paris: IRD Éditions.
HOSMER, D.W. & LEMESHOW. 1989. Applied logistic regression. John Wiley and Sons. New
York.
IICT (Instituto de Investigação Científica Tropical). Jardim Botânico Tropical, 2007. Lisboa.
Disponível em: http://www2.iict.pt/jbt/?idc=207&idi=11904. Acesso em 04/05/2008.
8-9
VIII-11
INFO-ANGOLA. Disponível em: http://www.info-angola.ao/governo/. Actualizado em
12.03.2008. Acesso em Setembro 2008
INFO-ANGOLA. Disponível em: http://www.info-angola.ao/governo/. Actualizado em
14.03.08, acesso em Setembro2008.
INTERNATIONAL FINANCE CORPORATION – IFC. Environmental Health and Safety General
Guidelines. World Bank Group.99 p. 2007.
INSTITUTO NACIONAL DE ESTATÍSTICA; UNICEF. Inquérito de Múltiplos Indicadores MICS.
2001
JAMES, F.C 7 SHUGART, H.H. 1970. A quantitative method of habitat description. Aud. Field
24: 726-736
KINGDON, J. 1997. The Kingdon Field Guide to African Mammals. 465 pp. Academic Press.
KRANTZBERG, T & STOKES, S. 1989. Metal Regulation Tolerance and Body Burdens in the
Larvae of the Genus Chiromonus. Can.J.Fish Aquat.Sci: 46: 389-398
LIGON, FK, DIETRICH, WE & TRUSH, WJ. 1995. Downstream Ecological Effects of Dams.
BioScience, 45: 183-192.
LOT, A.; CHIANG, F. Manual de herbário: administración y manejo de colecciones, técnicas
de recolección y Preparación de Ejemplares Botánicos. México: Consejo Nacional de la flora
de Mexico, 1986. 142p. il.
MACHADO, A. B., 1969. Mamíferos de Angola Ainda não Citados ou Pouco Conhecidos.
Publ. Cult. Co. Diam. Angola 46: 93-232.
8-10
VIII-12
MACHADO, F.G. Contribuição para o Estudo Plantas Ictiotóxicas de Angola. Nova Lisboa:
Instituto de Investigação Agronômica de Angola, 1970. 6p. (Série Técnica, n.20).
MELO, N. 1987. Impactos Ecológicos das Represas Hidrelétricas na bacia Amazônica
Brasileira. Tubinger Geographische Studien 95: 367-385.
MENEZES, NA. 1994. Importância da conservação da ictiofauna dos ecossistemas aquáticos
brasileiros. Em: Seminário Sobre a Fauna Aquática e o Setor Elétrico Brasileiro. Conservação
da fauna aquática, 3, Rio de Janeiro, 13-17.
MENEZES, S. Mamma Angola – Sociedade e Economia de um País Nascente. São Paulo:
Edusp, 2000.
MENGAK, M.T & GUYNN, D.C. 1987. Pitfalls and snap traps for sampling small mammals and
herpetofauna. The American Midland naturalist, 118 (2): 284-288.
MINISTÉRIO DA ADMINISTRAÇÃO DO TERRITÓRIO. Província de Malange. Disponível em:
http://www.mat.gv.ao/portalmat/default.aspx?s=53. Acesso em novembro/2007.
MINISTÉRIO DA ADMINISTRAÇÃO DO TERRITÓRIO. Província do Kwanza Norte. Disponível
em: http://www.mat.gv.ao/portalmat/default.aspx?s=45. Acesso em Novembro/2007
MINISTÉRIO DA ENERGIA E ÁGUAS,2009. Programa De Investimentos Dos Sectores Eléctrico
e Águas, Até 2016, Luanda, 2009.
MINISTÉRIO DA SAÚDE. Gabinete de Estudos, Planeamento e Estatística, 2002
MINISTÉRIO DA SAÚDE. Gabinete de Estudos, Planeamento e Estatística. Anuário Estatístico
2003.
8-11
VIII-13
MINISTÉRIO DA SAÚDE. Plano Estratégico para a Redução Acelerada da Mortalidade
Materno
Infantil
em
Angola,
2004.
Disponível
em:
http://www.angola-
portal.ao/MINSA/Default.aspx. Acesso em Setembro de 2008.
MINISTÉRIO DE URBANISMO E ARQUITECTURA. Site. Perfil Urbano em Angola, 2005. Acesso
em out.2008.
MINISTÉRIO DO PLANEAMENTO. Estratégia de Combate à Pobreza – Versão Sumária.
Luanda, Setembro/2003.
MINISTÉRIO DO URBANISMO E AMBIENTE. Programa de Investimento Ambiental. Relatório
do Estado Geral do Ambiente de Angola. Disponível em: http://www.angolaportal.ao/MINUA/Default.aspx. Acesso em 30/09/2008, 2006
MISTRY, J. World Savannas: Ecology and Human Use. Great Britain: Pearson Education
Limited, Prentice Hall, 2000. 344p. il.
MONTEIRO, R.F.R. Essências Florestais de Angola: Estudo das suas Madeiras, Espécies do
Maiombe. Luanda: Instituto de Investigação Científica de Angola, 1967. 74p.
MONTEIRO, R.F.R. Estudo da flora e da Vegetação das Florestas Abertas do Planalto do Bié.
Luanda: Instituto de Investigação Científica de Angola, 1970. 352p.
MORAIS, M.; VELASCO; L.; CARVALHO, E. Avaliação da Condição e Distribuição do Manatirm
Africano (Trichechus senegalensis) ao Longo do Rio Kwnaza. Luanda: MINUA, 2006.
MOREIRA, I. (Org.). Angola – Agricultura, Recursos Naturais e Desenvolvimento Rural.
Lisboa: Edição ISAPress, 2006.
8-12
VIII-14
MOREIRA, I.; COSTA, E.; DUARTE, M.C. A riqueza florística de Angola: aproveitamento e
conservação. In: MOREIRA, I. (ed.). Angola. agricultura, recursos naturais, desenvolvimento
rural. Lisboa: ISAPress, 2006. p. 171-195. v.l.
MOREIRA, I.; PINTO-BASTO, M.F.; DUARTE, M.C. Flora das culturas agrícolas em Angola.
Revista de Ciências Agrárias. v.28, n.1, p. 76-88, 2005
MORI, S.A.; SILVA, L.A.M.; LISBOA, G.; CORADIN, L. Manual de Manejo do herbário
fanerogâmico. Ilhéus, BA: Centro de Pesquisas do Cacau (CEPLAC), 1989. 2ed. 104p. il.
MORRISSON, M.L.; NARCOT, B.G. & MANNAN, R.W. 1992. Wildlife-habitat Relationship.
Concepts and Applications. The University of Wisconsin Press. 343p.
MORTON, S.R & JAMES.C.D., 1998. The Diversity and Abundance of Lizards in Arid
Austrália: a New Hypothesis. American naturalist 132: 237-256.
MUELLER-DOMBOIS, D. & ELLEMBERG, H. 1974. Aims and Methods of Vegetation Ecology.
John Wiley & Sons. New York. 547p.
NATURAE, 1996. Inventário da Fauna da Área de Influência da UHE Serra da Mesa:
Relatório Final. Goiânia. 156p.
NELSON, J. 2006. Fishes of the World. John Wiley & Sons. Nova Iorque.
NETO, G.; DUARTE, M.C.; COSTA E.; MOREIRA, I.; CORREIA, A.M. Gramíneas de Angola. In:
MOREIRA, I. (ed.). Angola. agricultura, recursos naturais, desenvolvimento rural. Lisboa:
ISAPress, 2006. p. 233-260. v.l.
8-13
VIII-15
NORTHCOTE, TC, ARCIFA, MS & FROELICH, O. 1985. Effects of Impoundment and Drawdown
on the Fish Community of a South American River. Verh. Intern. Verein. Limnol., 22: 27042715.
NOWAK, R.M. 1999. Walker's Mammals of the World. 6a Ed. Baltimore, The John Hopkins
University Press. Vol 1 e 2. 1629 pp.
O´FARRELL, M.J; KAUFMAN, D.W. & LUNDAHL, D.V. 1977. Use of live-trapping with the
Assessment Line Method for Density Estimations. J. Mammal. 58: 575-582.
ODEBRECHT; MINADER, Plano de Desenvolvimento do Pólo Agro-industrial de Capanda,
s/d.
PALGRAVE, K.C. Trees of Southern Africa. Cape Town, South Africa: Struik Publishers, 2002.
1212p. 3ed. (revised and updated by Meg Coates Palgrave).
Parques e Reservas Naturais. Disponível em: http://www.cpires.com/angola_parques.html.
Acesso em 29/09/2008.
PAUGY, D, LÉVÊQUE, C & TEUGELS, GG (eds.). 2003. Faune des Poissons d’eau Douce et
Saumâtre d’Afrique de l´Oeste. 2 volumes. Paris: IRD Éditions.
PAUGY, D. 2007. Hepsetidae. Pp: 343-346. Em: The Fresh and Brackish Water Fishes of
Lower Guinea, West-Central Africa. STIASSNY, MLJ, TEUGELS, GG & HOPKINS, CD (eds.).
Paris: IRD Éditions.
PETERSEN, R.L; CUMMINS, K.W & WARD, G.M. 1989. Microbial and Animal Processing of
Detritus in a Woodland Stream. Ecological Monographs 59:21-39
8-14
VIII-16
PHILIPPI JR., A. (Ed.) (2005). Saneamento, Saúde e Ambiente: Fundamentos para um
Desenvolvimento Sustentável. Editora Manole Ltda. São Paulo.
PIANKA, E.R. 1973. The Structure of Lizard Communities. Ann. Rev. Eco. Syst., 4: 53-74.
PIERCE, R.J. 1989. Foraging Responses of Sites (Himantopus spp: Aves) to Changes in
Behaviour and Abundance of Riverbed Prey. New Zeland Journal of Marine and Freshwater
Research 20:17-28.
PINTO, A. (2005). Sistemas de Gestão Ambiental: Guia para a sua Implementação. Edições
Sílabo. Lisboa.
PNUD. Ranking dos Países. Disponível em: http://www.pnud.org.br/home/. Acesso em Julho
de 2008.
POLL, M. 1967. Contribution à la Faune Ichthyologique de l'Angola. Publicações. Culturais
da Companhia de Diamantes Angola, No. 75: 1-381, Pls. 1-20.
POOLEY, E. A Field Guide to Wild Flowers Kwazulu-Natal and the Eastern Region. Durban,
South Africa. Natal Flora Publications Trust, 1998. 630p. il.
PORTAL OFICIAL DO TURISMO DE ANGOLA. Disponível em: http://www.minhotur.gv.ao/.
Acesso em 30/09/2008.
PRANCE, G.T. Floristic Inventory of the Tropics: Where do We Stand? Annals of the Missouri
Botanical Garden. v.64, p.659-684, 1977.
PROJETO LNG ANGOLA. Avaliação de Impacto Ambiental, Socioeconómico e de Saúde
(ESHIA). Fase de Definição do Âmbito – Documento de Suporte, Março/ 2005. Acesso em
Agosto de 2007.
8-15
VIII-17
PROVÍNCIA DO KUANZA SUL. Grupo Provincial de Análise de Vulnerabilidade, Avaliação de
Vulnerabilidade da População à Insegurança Alimentar. Novembro 2003/Abril 2004.
REPÚBLICA DE ANGOLA. Perfil Socioeconómico de Malange. Abril/1995; Ministério da
Administração
do
Território.
Província
de
Malange.
Disponível
em:
http://www.mat.gv.ao/portalmat/default.aspx?s=53. Acesso em Novembro/2007.
REPÚBLICA DE ANGOLA. Perfil socioeconómico do Kwanza Norte, Abril/1995; Ministério da
Administração
do
Território.
Província
do
Kwanza
Norte.
Disponível
em:
REPÚBLICA DE ANGOLA. Perfil socioeconómico do Kwanza Sul. Abril/1995; Ministério da
Administração
do
Território.
Província
do
Kwanza
Sul.
Disponível
em:
REVISTA ON-LINE Valor Acrescentado, n° 4, jun./jul. de 2006
RIBEIRO, J. F.; WALTER, B.M.T. Fitofisionomias do Bioma Cerrado In: SANO, S. M.; ALMEIDA,
S.P. (eds.) Cerrado: ambiente e flora. Brasília, Embrapa Cerrados, 1998. p. 87-166.
RIOZOO, 1997. Estudos de Inventário e Dinâmica Populacional da Fauna Silvestre na Área
de Influência do AHE Corumbá: Relatório final. Rio de Janeiro, 120 p.
RIVM. (1995). A General Strategy for Integrated Environmental Assessment at the
European Environment Agency. RIVM, Bilthoven.
ROCHA, A. da. Economia e Sociedade em Angola. Luanda: LAC – Luanda Antena Comercial,
1996.
8-16
VIII-18
SAGAR, P.M. & ELDON, G.A. 1983. Food and Feeding of Small Fish in the Rakaia River, New
Zeland. New Zeland Journal os Marine Freshwater Research 17: 213-226.
SANTOS, H.G.P. & SILVA Jr. N.J. 1999. Resgate da Fauna do AHE Serra da Mesa. In XV
seminário Nacional de Produção e Transmissão de Energia Elétrica. Informes Técnicos.
Itaipu.
SANTOS, H.G.P. 2002. Aproveitamento Hidreléctrico de Capanda: Relatório Técnico das
actividades desenvolvidas. FURNAS: 156p.
SANTOS, H.G.P.2000. Hidrelétricas e a Conservação da Diversidade Biológica. In Tópicos
atuais em botânica. Brasília: Embrapa Recursos Genéticos e Biotecnologia.
SHAW, H.K.A. The Vegetation of Angola. The Journal of Ecology. v.34, n.1/2, p.23-48, 1947.
SILVA, H.L.R. 1997. Relatório Final do Resgate da Fauna da UHE Corumbá, Município de
Caldas Novas, Estado de Goiás. Universidade Católica de Goiás. Goiânia, 117p.
SILVA, S.N. 1970. A Grande Fauna Selvagem de Angola. Edição da Direcção Provincial dos
serviços de veterinária. 151p.
SILVA, S.P.C; CAVALCANTI, T.B.;SILVA, G.P.; SANTOS, H.G.P; SILVA, M.C. & BUENO, P.C. 1997.
Conservação da Flora do UHE Corumbá. In: Seminário Nacional de Produção e Transmissão
de Energia Elétrica. Informes Técnicos
SINCLAIR, I., RYAN, P. Birds of Africa, South of the Sahara, 2ª edição, Editora Chamberlian,
2010.
SKELTON, P. 2001. Freshwater Fishes of Southern Africa. Cape Town: Struik.
8-17
VIII-19
SMITH, M.H.; GARNER, R.H.; GENTRY, J.B., KAUFMAN, D.W. & O´FARRELL. 1975. Density
Estimators of Small Mammal Populations. In: Goelly, F.B, K. Petrusewicz & L. Ryszkowski.
(eds) Small mammals: their productivity and population dynamics. Cambridge University
Press. Pp.25-53.
SOUSA-COSTA, N.M. de. Revisão do género Stylosanthes Sw. Lisboa: Universidade Técnica
de Lisboa, Instituto Superior de Agronomia. 2006. 470p. (Tese de Doutorado).
STIASSNY, MLJ, TEUGELS, GG & HOPKINS, CD (eds.). 2007. The Fresh and Brackish Water
Fishes of Lower Guinea, West-Central Africa. 2 volumes. Paris: IRD Éditions.
TCHIBWABWA, S. 2007. Labeo. Pp: 549-562. Em: The Fresh and Brackish Water Fishes of
Lower Guinea, West-Central Africa. STIASSNY, MLJ, TEUGELS, GG & HOPKINS, CD (eds.).
Paris: IRD Éditions.
TEUGELS, GG. 1986. A Systematic Revision of the African Species of the Genus Clarias
(Pisces; Clariidae). Ann. Sci. Zool. 247: 1-199
UNICEF. Disponível em: http://www.unicef.org/. Acesso em julho de 2008.
United Nations (UN). Texto of CBD. Convention on Biological Diversity (1992). Disponível em:
<www.cdb.int>. Acesso em fev/2013.
United Nations (UN). Convention Text. Elaboration of an international convention to
cambat desertification in countries experiencing serious drought and/or desertification,
particularly in Africa - Final text of convention. Disponível em: <www.unccd.int>. Acesso
em fev/2013.
VEITENHEIMER-MENDES et al. 1990. Zoobentos Litorâneos de um Açude Sul Brasileiro.
Ver.Bras.Biol. 50 (1):714
8-18
VIII-20
WALTER, B.M.T. Técnicas de Coleta de Material Botânico Arbóreo. Brasília, DF: EMBRAPA CENARGEN, 1993. 53p. il. (EMBRAPA - CENARGEN. Documentos, 15).
WALTER, B.M.T.; CAVALCANTI, T.B. Resgate e Conservação da Flora em Aproveitamentos
Hidrelétricos: Exemplos na Região do Cerrado. In: WALTER, B.M.T.;
WEIMER, G. Arquitetura popular brasileira. São Paulo: Martins Fontes, 2005
WILSON, D. E. & REEDER, D. M. 2005. Mammals Species of the World: a Taxonomic and
Geographic Reference. Vol. I e Vol. II, 2885pp. Johns Hopkins.
8-19
VIII-21
ATTACHMENT 1
REGISTER CERTIFICATE
A-1
Register No. 1
Page 01
Book No. A-1
Republic of Angola
Ministry of the Environment
CERTIFICATE
a)
Holísticos – Serviços e Consultoria, Ltda.
Pursuant the terms of Decree no. 59/07 of July 13th, having being accomplished all the formalities provided in Articles 29th, 30th and 31st of the
mentioned Decree, provided there is no legal impediment, the present Register Certificate is issued in behalf of:
b) Issued on 05/22/2012
Valid until 05/22/2013
Signature
(signed)
Director of the Legal Office
a) Board, Office, Department or Institute
b) Consultant, Consulting Society or Consortium
Register Certificate of Environmental Consultant
A-2
ATTACHMENT II
ATTENDANCE LIST OF THE VILLAGES IN
HEARINGS
A-3
ATTACHMENT III
INFORMATION BOOKLET
A-19
GAMEK – Office of the Medium Kwanza Power Plant
Rua do Massangano, s/n no., Bairro Operário
Sambizanga – Luanda
Telephone: +244 222-445 072/222-675 801
Fax: +244 222-447 973
http://www.gamek.com
Holísticos – Consultoria Ambiental
Urbanização Harmonia, Rua 60, Casa 559
Benfica – Luanda
Telephone: +244 222 006 938
Fax: +244 222 006 435
Email: holísticos@holísticos.co.ao
Project of the Laúca Hydroelectric Power Plant in the Medium
Kwanza
Preliminary Information for the Environmental Impact Study’s Public
Hearing Process
Odebrecht Angola – Construção e Projectos de Energia SA
Avenida Talatona, s/n, Belas Business Park II
Torre Cabinda – 8º andar
Luanda Sul – Luanda
Telephone: +244 222 675 811
www.odebrecht.com
A-20
Project’s History
Among the 48 hydrographic basins of Angola, the Kwanza River basin has the highest power generation
capacity. Presently, 700 MW are generated in the two power plants that supply the North System,
specifically Capanda and Cambambe. Considering the high power generation capacity of the Kwanza River
and the need to increase the country’s energy offer, the Laúca dam will be built for future power generation
use.
The project for the Laúca dam construction requires environmental licenses pursuant the national legislation.
Therefore, an Environmental Impact Study (EIA) must be carried out according to the social-environmental
legislation (Decree no. 51/04) that recommends the execution of the EIA for projects that may affect the
environmental balance and harmony.
The purpose of the EIA is the identification and previous analysis of how the project activities will result in
potential impacts on the environmental components (air, water, soil, flora, fauna, ecosystems, etc.) and the
quality of life of the people, workers and local communities. The EIA also intends to suggest measures to
avoid, minimize or compensate the environment and the communities for identified environmental impacts.
A preliminary study was carried out in 2009 covering the region of Caculo-Cabaça and Capanda, in the
Laúca region. An EIA for the construction of the Kwanza River deviation was carried out in 2012, in
Odebrecht’s behalf, by the Holísticos company in partnership with InterTechne, and was submitted to the
appropriate authorities for environmental licensing purposes. The social and environmental characterization
of the project’s influence area was carried out through documentation analysis, field surveys and specialized
basic studies for the following components:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hydraulic resources;
Climate;
Geology and soils;
Fauna and flora;
Landscape;
Social-economic aspects.
The preparation of the EIA for the dam has the purpose of:
• Inform and hear the stakeholders;
• Elaborate the social and environmental diagnoses;
• Improve the assessment of the social and environmental impacts;
• Prepare adequate mitigation measures.
Stakeholders’ Hearings
As a complement to the Environmental Impact Study process, public hearings of the interested population
are being held. For the execution of the river deviation EIA, hearing meetings were held in the villages of
Dumbo Ya Pepe, Kibenda, Nhangue Ya Pepe, and Ngola Ndala, when the respective population conveyed
their concerns and expectations with respect to the works.
A-21
The public hearing phase is of extreme importance for the EIA process, since the meeting of the stakeholders
allows the joint and participative performance of a fair and complete assessment of the potential project’s
impacts, as well as the definition of the adequate mitigation measures. In this stage, such meetings are
foreseen in the villages of Dumbo Ya Pepe, Kibenda, Nhangue Ya Pepe, Ngola Ndala, Muta, Quirinji and
Kassule.
Additional information, comments and suggestions can be sent to the available contacts by using the
comment’s form handed out together with this booklet.
Next Steps
Additional environmental and social-economic surveys are being carried out in areas and infrastructures
close to the Laúca works, which shall be concluded until April 2013. These additional surveys will allow a
better knowledge of the project insertion area.
The Environmental Impact Study will be submitted to the government authorities responsible for the project
activities (Ministry of Energy and Water) and for the environmental activities (Ministry of the Environment)
for environmental licensing purposes.
A-22
Localization Map
Legend:
National Capital
Province Capital
Cities
Province border
Rivers
Laúca Power Plant
Capanda Power Plant
(illegible)
The construction will be carried out in the Province of Malanje in the Kwanza River’s medium section
(Km 307.5) and around 47 km downstream of the Capanda dam and close to the locality of Nhangue
Ya Pepe.
Environmental Characterization
The Medium Kwanza climate is tropical with the dry season in winter with temperatures of 30 to 37°C,
registered in September, and the coldest months are between June and August. The relative humidity is
around 55 and 80%.
The enterprise is inserted in an area where savannas prevail, but forests and fields are also present. The tree
and bush vegetation with thick trunks are characteristic of the region. The herbaceous and sub-bush
vegetation is formed mainly by permanent species with resistant underground organs that allow it to survive
droughts and fire.
The first studies carried out in the region led to the conclusion that there is a large variety of mammals,
although in small numbers. Large animals were not seen in the visited places. Birds are frequently seen in
this region, and 91 species were identified in preliminary studies.
In field surveys, few of the species included in the UICN’s red list of endangered species were
identified. Those identified were classified as of “Low Extinction Risk”, with wide geographically
distributed habitats. However, it is worth pointing out the leopard that is classified as “Vulnerable” to
extinction and the “Vulnerable” hippopotamus. Additional surveys are being carried out.
A-23
Social Characterization
The social survey has placed greater focus on the villages that can suffer the greater impact with respect to
employment and income. The number of inhabitants per village is far lower than average that can be found in
other regions of the country. Only two (2) villages have more than 100 inhabitants. According to the
population reports the younger people is returning to the villages due to the employment offer in the Laúca
works.
The river deviation EIA has ascertained that the population’s living conditions is very precarious as a result
of the absence of basic infrastructure, as water supply, basic sanitation, and electric power, as well as the
rarity and precariousness of the health care and education equipment, the absence of transport systems and
the absolute lack of employment and production activities.
The production system in the studied villages consists exclusively of the subsistence farming, with the
eventual sale of the surplus, and fruit collection. In addition of the raising of goat and swine cattle by some
families and some poultry as chicken and duck, hunting and fishing provides a food supplement to the
families.
The Project
Several project phases will be necessary for the Laúca dam construction until the work is fully completed.
These phases include:
•
•
•
•
•
Kwanza River deviation and the building of two tunnels;
Residual water treatment station (ETAR);
Sanitary landfill;
Building of the dam and the associated infrastructure;
Reservoir filling.
A-24
Open air and underground interventions will be necessary for the execution of the works. The valley will be
closed by a concrete dam approximately 132 m-high and with a crest extension of approximately 1,100 m.
The future power generation will be carried out in the power house with 6 turbine sets with 2,070 MW of
installed power. The Laúca dam reservoir will operate with flow reduction in order to regularize the flows
and will have the following main characteristics:
•
•
•
•
Total area: 188 km2;
Total volume: 5,729 Hm3;
Maximum WL: El. 850 m;
Minimum WL: El. 800 m;
Work Force
The Laúca dam construction is foreseen to be carried out in 5 years and will employ around 3,700 workers
during the so-called “work peak.”
A-25
A-26
ATTACHMENT IV
REGISTER FORM AND
COMMENTS
A-27
Project Dam Construction Lauca
Registration Form and Comments
Name (optional):
Contact (optional):
Community / Organization:
Comments on the proposed construction of the dam (expectations and concerns):
Please send this form to:
Alice Ponciano (Environmental Engineer)
Odebrecht Angola
Av. Talatona s/n; Belas Business
Park II, Torre Cabinda - 8° Andar
Luanda Sul – Luanda
Phone: 222675811
Fax: 244 26 75000
www.odebrecht.com
Joana Huongo
Holísticos - Serviços, Estudos e Consultoria
Rua 60, Casa 559, Urbanização
Harmonia, Benfica, Luanda.
Mobile: 927442844
Phone: 222 006938;
Fax: 222 006435
www.holisticos.co.ao
A-28
ATTACHMENT V
SOLID RESIDUE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A-29
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
LAÚCA AH – RIVER DEVIATION
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CORPORATE ENTERPRISE- SPECIFIC
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
Gamek – Office for the
00
Medium Kwanza Power Plant
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
RESIDUE MANAGEMENT PLAN
1. PURPOSE
The Residue Management Plan (PGR) consists of the detailed planning of the direct and indirect
actions that involve the phases of collection, transport, treatment and the environmentally correct
final destination of the solid residues and waste. It seeks the minimization of residue generation at
the source, adequate the segregation at the origin, control and reduce risks to the environment and
ensure correct handling in compliance with the legislation in force.
The Residue Management Plan shall fulfill the following requirements:
 Type and quantity of the generated residues;
 Definition of the operation flow and the handling standards for each type of residue;
 Residue treatment forms;
 Residue’s final destination;
 Residue transport waybill;
 Monthly report model.
1.1 SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES
 Ensure the prevention of the pollution associated to the significant environmental aspect of solid
residue generation;
 Ensure the fulfillment of legal requirements and the local good environmental practices;
 Prevent corporate and civil liability risks arising from the treatment and final disposal of solid
residues;
 Implement the “Selective Residue Collection” and the “Solid Residue Handling” concepts in the
Work Quarters of the Laúca AH project works – River deviation.
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS




Residue Management Regulation – Presidential Decree no. 190 of 07/18/2012;
Environment Basis Act of 05/98;
Decree no. 59/07 of 2006 on Environmental Licensing;
Executive Decree no. 17/2013 of January 22, 2013, on the Management of Construction and
Demolition Residues.
3. COVERAGE
This procedure applies to contracts that perform their activities within the facilities of the Laúca AH
Project – River Deviation work quarters, or that are directly associated to the same.
INTERNAL USE DOCUMENT – REPRODUCTION FORBIDDEN – COPIES MUST BE REQUESTED TO THE SUSTAINABILITY TECHNICAL ARCHIVE.
A-30
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
4. DEFINITIONS
ABNT: Brazilian Technical Standards Association
Temporary Storage: The temporary storage of solid residues for further destination to
management alternatives as: recycling, recovery, reuse, treatment or adequate final disposal in
compliance with the legal SUSTAINABILITY requirements.
Residue classification: The classification of solid residues involves the identification of the
original Process/Activity, their composition, their main characteristics, as well as the comparison of
the components with the residue lists of Technical Standards and/or Good Environmental Practices.
The environment quality degradation resulting from activities that, either directly or in directly:
 Harm the population’s health, safety and well-being;
 Create adverse conditions for the social and economic activities;
 Affect the biota unfavorably;
 Affect the environment’s esthetic or sanitary conditions;
 Dispose matter or energy in disagreement with the established environmental standards;
Solid residues can be classified according to the Standard ABNT No. 10.004/04, following the
requirements below:
CLASS I – Hazardous Solid Residues: Are those presenting hazards or at least one of the
following characteristics: flammability, corrosiveness, reactivity, pathogenesis or toxicity.
CLASS II – Non-Hazardous Solid Residues:
CLASS IIA - Non-Hazardous – Non-Inert: Are those not classified either in Class I – Hazardous
or in Class II B – Inert. Class II A residues may have properties such as: being subject to
combustion, to biodegradation or solubility in water.
CLASS IIB - Non-Hazardous –Inert: Any residue that, when sampled according to the Standard
ABNT NBR 10007 and submitted to a Solubility Test (dynamic and static contact with distilled or
deionized water at ambient temperature) according to the Standard ABNT NBR 10006, presents
none of its components solved at concentrations higher than the water drinkability standards, except
for appearance, color, turbidity, hardness and flavor.
CGR – Residue Management Center
Selective Collection – A planned process for separation, packing, collection, temporary storage,
transport and reuse or recycling of the solid residues generated at the Laúca AH – River Deviation
work quarters (DRL).
Final Residue Disposal – Disposal or definitive destination of the solid residues in an
environmentally adequate manner in compliance with the local legislation and specific standards.
Generator – Contract’s process/activity that generates solid residues.
Incineration: Incineration is a thermal destruction process carried out in high temperatures and
under controlled residence time and that is used for the treatment of highly hazardous residues, or
those needing complete and safe destruction.
A-31
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
NBR: Brazilian Regulating Standard
Recycling: A prevention process where the solid residues are treated with the generation of new
products or raw materials, through separation, segregation, collection, transport, reprocessing or
remanufacturing.
5. RESPONSIBILITIES
5.1 Contract Director
 Ensure the human, financial and material resources necessary for the implementation of
these processes.
5.2 Management Team
 Provide support and act as facilitators in these processes within its competence area;
 Learn, comply with and ensure compliance with the applicable local legislation with respect to
transport, temporary storage, treatment and final disposal of solid residues, with the help of the
SUSTAINABILITY area.
5.3 SUSTAINABILITY Team
 Be responsible for the temporary storage and final disposal of solid residues and help the work
fronts with cleaning orientation and organization, together with the adequate segregation of the
residues;
 Identify, make available and enforce compliance with the local legislation applicable to the
management of the solid residues generated by the Laúca AH – River Deviation work quarters;
 Provide when necessary the execution of the necessary trials and tests of the characterization of
solid residues to verify their pollution potential defines control actions;
 Define, together with the Supervisors and Leaders of each Process / Activity, the internal and
temporary storage places for the solid residues to be collected;
 Develop and select solid residue management alternatives covering all the sustainable handling
phases;
 Make available in the work fronts the adequate Selective Collection service kits for each type
of residue generated on the site;
 Provide the final destination according to the class of each residue;
 Supervise the solid residue temporary storage places, called “Solid Residue Management
Centers - CGR”;
 Provide specific authorizations and prepare Bills of Lading for the external transport of
hazardous solid residues;
A-32
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:




Develop and support the process managers in the definition of options for no generation,
reduction, reutilization, recovery and recycling of solid residues;
Carry out training with the purpose of making aware and recycling the participants;
Inspect and apply Checklists periodically in the solid residue temporary storage places and in
the residue generation points in the work fronts;
 Monitor the Residue Management and Selective Collection processes keeping the registers of
the solid residue shipping for recycling, recovery, reutilization and final disposal;
 Approve, keep and review this procedure whenever necessary.
5.4. Contractual / Commercial Administration Area:
 Provide support and act as facilitators in this process within its area of competence, by
enforcing compliance with the local legal requirements applicable in the hiring of the services
of transport, treatment and final disposal of solid residues.
 Provide support, giving preference for the hiring of manufacturers and/or suppliers that collect
and recycle their own products used in the contract.
5.5. Administrative Area:
 Be responsible for the collection and transport of the residues generated in the work fronts and
carry them to the solid residue temporary storage place, called “Solid Residue Management
Centers - CGR”.
 Act in the systematic cleaning of the administrative areas and other work fronts, in the adequate
segregation and packing the generated solid residues;
 Guarantee that people involved will be skilled in the application of this procedure.
5.6. Supervisors and Leaders:
 Guarantee the primary selection and disposal in the places defined and identified (selective
collection recipients) of all the residues generated by the Processes / Activities under his
responsibility, including in the work fronts;
 Guarantee the cleaning, disposal, collection and transport of the specific solid residues from his
work front to the solid residue temporary storage places, called “Solid Residue Management
Centers - CGR”.
 Appoint the responsible person in each work front for cleaning, collecting, identifying,
transporting and disposing the solid residues in the temporary storage areas as defined and
identified;
 Keep his work areas clean and organized;
 Guarantee that people involved will be skilled in the application of this procedure;
A-33
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
5.7. Occupational Doctor:
Act as facilitator and provide support on the implantation of this procedure, especially in the
interface with the Solid Residue Management Programs of the Health Service.
5.8. Participants, Subcontractors and Service Providers:
 Carry out the primary selection of the solid residues for collection and temporary storage in the
places defined and identified.
 Keep the work environment (Works) always clean and unobstructed, separate and discard
adequately and daily all the residues generated in the construction as consequence of the works.
 Act as disseminators of the residue Selective Collection process.
5.9. Supply, Procurement and Warehouse:
 Keep, store and send the products out of validity to be returned to the respective
manufacturers and/or suppliers.
6. PLANNING
The Residue Management Plan of the Laúca AH – River Deviation was planned according to the
mapping of the activities and processes developed in the works. The management comprises the
following phases:
1. Identification of the generating units;
2. Inventory of the generated residues;
3. Residue segregation in loco;
4. Residue collection;
5. Temporary storage of the residues in the Residue Management Centers – CGR;
6. Final destination by the recycling companies capable of receiving and recycling the
residues, registered in the Ministry of the Environment of Angola.
7. TYPES OF RESIDUES GENERATED
The residues to be generated will be identified and registered in the spreadsheet called “Solid
Residue Inventory”, included in the ATTACHMENT OF THE INTEGRATED PROCEDURE
FOR SOLID RESIDUE MANAGEMENT (PI DRL 25 – Execution Plan).
The solid residue inventory comprises the following fields:
 Generating process / activity;
A-34
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
 Type of residue;
 Generated quantity;
 Classification;
 Type of packing;
 Type of collection;
 Internal transport means;
 Temporary storage area;
 Authorization of the local Environmental Agency (certificates, bills of lading, etc);
 External transport means;
 Type of treatment recommended;
 Final disposal.
All the paths / types of solid residues generated in the Work Quarters, regardless of their reuse,
reprocessing, recovery, or recycling, will be included in the Solid Residue Inventory;
The Management Inventory will be updated once a year, under the responsibility of the
SUSTENTAINABILITY area, with the support of the Process Managers;
Such updating will take into account changes in the quantity and types of the generated solid
residues, requirements and changes in the applicable legislation, as well as corporate risks and the
costs involved.
Residue Classification
The residue characterization will follow the classification into one of the Classes:
I – Hazardous or II – Not hazardous, IIA – Not inert or IIB – Inert, in the terms of the ABNT
Brazilian Technical Standards NBR 10004 / 10005 / 10006 and 10007:04.
A characterization / classification is decisive for a definition of the methods for temporary storage,
transport and of treatment / final disposal of the solid residues as described in ATTACHMENT OF
THE PI DRL 25/2 Flowchart of the Solid Residue Management Process.
The Laúca AH Project – River deviation will use the Brazilian Technical Standards and the
Presidential Decree of Angola no.190/12 – Regulation on Residue Management as good
environmental practices.
As an orientation guide for the accomplishment of this process phase – Identification and
Classification, Table 01 presented below, provides a list of the main solid residues generated in the
work quarters and their respective classification, in a generic and illustrative way, in the Classes of
Hazardous and Not Hazardous.
A-35
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
Table 01
Class
Hazardous
1. Domestic residues from offices
2. Civil construction waste
3. Used PPEs – Personal Protection Equipment
4. Used lubricating oil and contaminated oil
5. Empty paint cans
6. Empty solvent cans
7. Mercury vapor lamps
8. Incandescent lamps
9. Sodium vapor lamps
10. Slurry from Water Treatment Stations – organic ETA
11. Sweeping residues
12. Slurry from Sanitary Effluent Treatment Stations
13. Slurry from water reservoir cleaning – organic ETA
14. Lead electric batteries and their residues
15. Other batteries – depending on the composition
16. Thermal insulation oil
17. Used cutting and machining oil
18. Residues from food waste
19. Not contaminated metallic scrap
20. Paper, cardboard and plastic
21. Not contaminated rubber
22. Healthcare service residues
23. Stubs of welding electrodes
24. Wood waste
25. Soil waste / surplus rock / aggregate production
26. Residues of asphalt production
27. Empty packing of chemical products
28. Vegetation waste (branches and leaves)
29. Printing and tonner cartridges
30. Scrapped straps, belts, steel ropes
31. Thermal insulation – silicate
32. Glass wool
33. Asbestos tiles
34. Fat from ETE
X
X
Not Hazardous
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A-36
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
8. PACKING / SEGREGATION OF SOLID RESIDUES
The solid residues produced in the work quarters will be packed in a safe way and protected against
contra risks during handling and transport, in alternatives such as: drum, buckets, dumpsters, in
bulk and large bottles, among other types according to the specific need and as a prevention
mechanism against leaks, spills or water infiltration.
The recipients used in this residue packing shall be made of material compatible with the residues to
be received and be in perfect conservation state. The reutilization of recipients from raw materials
or chemical products will be conditioned to their decontamination and identification.
Sharp-edged and pointed residues shall be packed in water-tight recipients, sealed and identified by
the symbol “Infecting Residues” according to the procedure PI DRL 18 - Management Program
for Healthcare Service Residues – PGRSS;
Other infecting residues will be packed in white and translucent plastic bags and transported with
the symbol infecting residues, in compliance with the legal requirements;
The hazardous oily residues and other hazardous residues will be packed in drums or buckets
identified by the symbol “Hazardous Residues” and the non-recyclable symbol in an orange-colored
recipient;
Hazardous residues as lamps shall be stored in boxes with protection against breaking, and broken
lamps shall be stored with the corresponding label (for example: “Broken fluorescent lamps contain mercury”);
The storage of batteries shall be made in duly sealed containers, to prevent the release of any of
their components.
Residues classified in the Selective Collection system will be packed in recipients with the defined
colors, as described in item 7.1;
Solid residues packed in open containers will be disposed in a way that prevents water build-up and
the consequent proliferation of potential disease vectors such as: dengue, yellow fever and malaria;
Participants involved in the handling and internal transport of solid residues, particularly the
hazardous ones, shall wear the following PPEs – Personal Protection Equipment: rubber gloves,
safety boots, protective glasses against spills and, when applicable, breathing protection.
A-37
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
The solid residue packing recipients, as a means of awareness and communication, will be
identified by the use of Labels / Tags containing information as the name of the Solid Residue and
its Class.
With the same awareness purpose and also to control costs, the solid residues will be packed in a
segregated way, being the mixture of residues of different classes not allowed, as for example,
mixing hazardous residues with other types. In case such mixture takes place accidentally, the
mixed residues shall be treated as hazardous.
8.1. Residue Collection
Residue collection in the Laúca AH – River deviation work quarters will be divided in three
types, as described below:
o Selective;
o Differentiated;
o Especial
a- Selective collection:
The Selective Collection process handles solid residues classified in the Not-Hazardous
category, which is usually composed by:
Canteen residues (food waste), not contaminated scrap of ferrous and non-ferrous metals,
plastic, paper, wood and rubber;
The Selective Collection process will be conducted by the Laúca AH Project – River
deviation, based on the following phases:
o Packing of the residues by making the recipients available in the work fronts in order to
fulfill the generation point needs;
o Awareness of the participants of the Selective Collection process;
o Definition of places for recycling, reutilization or recovery;
Packing of solid residues for the Selective Collection
The identification and sizing of the recipients destined to suit the Selective Collection of Residues
in the work fronts shall be carried out based on information from the “Solid Residue Inventory”,
found in Attachment 1 – Execution Plan.
The Selective Collection process will use recipients, drums and buckets identified by specific colors
for the packing of each type of residue, as shown in the table below:
A-38
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
RECIPIENT COLOR
BLUE
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
WHITE
ORANGE
GRAY
BROWN
BLACK
RESIDUE TYPE
PAPER
GLASS
METAL
PLASTIC
HEALTHCARE SERVICE
HAZARDOUS
NON-RECYCLABLE
ORGANIC
WOOD
The definition of the recipient colors shall follow the legal requirements and / or the good practices
applied in Angola.
Awareness of the Participants for the Selective Collection
Practice has shown that the success of Selective Collection initiatives is directly associated to the
awareness level / motivation of participants, subcontractors and the involved service providers.
Therefore, the Laúca AH Project – River deviation will support the implementation of the Selective
Collection in awareness / motivation actions about:
o The significant environmental aspects associated to solid residue generation, as a result of the
waste of Processes / Activities;
o The colors of the adequate recipients for each type of residue;
o Labels on the recipients containing information about the separation of residues;
o The benefits of the Selective Collection as environmental, economic and social advantages.
 These actions can be conducted through mechanisms such as: lectures, campaigns, daily task
training – TDT, etc.
Definition of the places for recycling, reutilization and recovery
This phase of the Selective Collection process will be developed under the responsibility of the
SUSTAINABILITY area, through the selection of alternatives for the sending of solid residues for
recycling, reutilization or reduction.
The selection of these alternatives may consider, among others, the following requirements:
 Give privilege to local options;
 Partnership with the customer, when applicable;
 Partnership with suppliers of materials, raw materials or services that generate solid residues;
 Partnership with institutions / companies dedicated to selective collection.
A-39
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
Reutilization
The Laúca AH Project – River deviation shall give priority to reuse, seeking a lower production of
residues:
 Reuse as notepads, the paper sheets printed on only one side;
 Use of recyclable cartridges in printers and photocopiers;
 Repair and reuse office furniture, as well as electric and electronic equipment;
 Replace residue collection companies for suppliers that accept retaking;
 Selective collection of residues to send for recycling or landfills.
b- Differentiated Collection:
Differentiated collection is the one in which other means than the selective collection shall be used,
due to the physical characteristics of the residue, as volume and weight.
It comprises for example: the collection service of tires, concrete waste and metallic scrap, which
are in general materials that require buckets instead of drums for packing.
c- Special Collection:
Special collection applies to the residues of healthcare services and other hazardous residues (Class
I).
The collection of these residues cannot be carried out together with others and require special
transport conditions.
8.2. Temporary Storage
All residues collected in the Work Quarters, Work Fronts and administrative areas will be sent to
the previously defined temporary residue storage areas for further treatment or final destination.
In this phase of the solid residue temporary storage, the following requirements are considered:
Selection criteria of the area(s) associated to layout, accessibility, quantity to be stored, distances
from the Work Fronts, etc;
 Segregation and compatibility among the residues to be stored, etc.
Since the temporary storage areas and the final destination of the solid residues is a process
belonging to Environment - Sustainability, the Laúca AH Project – River deviation will deal with
them under the denomination of “Residue Management Center” that has its plan view attached.
In the special case of the temporary storage of out of validity products, the storage place is the “Bay
for Out of Validity Products” located in the warehouse, from where they will be returned to the
respective manufacturers.
A-40
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
8.3. Good Environmental Practices
The good practices are associated to the ABNT Technical Standards – NBR 11174:90 for solid
residues classified as non-hazardous, NBR 12235:92 applicable to hazardous residues and the
Presidential Decree of Angola no. 190/12 regarding the Regulation on Residue Management.
The above practices define that the non-hazardous residues shall not be stored together with
hazardous residues, because the resulting mixture will characterize all the residues as hazardous.
When non-hazardous residues are stored, they shall be labeled according to the type of residue.
The access to the disposal place and the collection must allow their utilization under any climate
conditions. Non-hazardous residues cannot be disposed directly on the soil, being necessary either
some type of impermeable protection or that they be deposited in recipients (buckets, containers,
tanks and/or drums) with measures for the containment of accidental leaks.
Provided it is feasible, places or recipients will be defined in the storage areas, as defined in each
Process /Activity for the local and temporary storage of the generated residues, where they will
remain until the shipment to the Residue Management Center or to treatment / final destination.
According to the standard, the area must be inspected for the identification and correction of
eventual problems that may favor the occurrence of accidents capable of harming the environment.
For this purpose there are CHECKLISTS to be used in the storage place.
9. COLLECTION AND TRANSPORT
The collection of residues in the work quarters area will be carried out by trucks and the own
support team of the Laúca AH Project – River deviation.
The SUSTAINABILITY team is responsible for providing the final destination or the temporary
storage.
The phase of the solid residue External Transport, when necessary, will be carried out in
compliance with the local environmental legislation requirements for hazardous and non-hazardous
residues.
The transport of solid residues shall only be conducted after adequate packing conditions are
guaranteed.
The external transport of hazardous residues will only be conducted after filling out the document
included in the PI DRL 25/4 ATTACHMENT – Bill of Lading or through Collection
Certificates, based on the ABNT Technical Standard no. NBR 13221. The hiring of companies for
solid residue collection and transport comply with the local legislation in force, and such companies
A-41
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
shall be duly licensed by the Ministry of the Environment of Angola. The collection companies
shall be requested to ensure the packing conditions, the shipment and the final destination of the
residues.
10. TREATMENT AND FINAL DISPOSAL
The definition phase of methods / alternatives for solid residue treatment / final disposal shall be
conducted to prevent potential corporate risks.
As part of the implementation of the pollution prevention and continuous improvement processes, a
hierarchical classification is defined for the techniques associated to recovery, reutilization, reuse or
recycling, provided they are technically / economically feasible with respect to the alternatives of
treatment and final destination on the soil (sanitary landfill).
The “Residue Management Center” installed on the right bank, will include the following
structures:
o Sanitary landfill for non-recyclable residues with impermeable bays;
o Composing of organic residues;
o Incinerator;
o Treatment of contaminated soil through the bio-remediation process.
o Sorting yard for recyclable, hazardous and healthcare residues with selective bays.
o
Within the set of the technical alternatives available for solid residue treatment / final disposal, the
SUSTAINABILITY team will analyze and select the recommendations considered more
appropriate for the several phases of the works, taking in consideration the following parameters:
 Legal requirements and other applicable requirements;
 Class of the solid residue;
 Volumes involved;
 Continuous generation or not;
 Associated civil liability risks;
 Costs involved.
Regarding the final destination to the recycling companies, the Laúca AH Project – River deviation
will wait for the publication of the Recycling Companies accredited with the Ministry of the
Environment of Angola, as capable of receiving and recycling the residues, providing for each one
its environmentally correct treatment.
For each destined residue, the attached Bill of Lading will be filled out, so the accomplishment of
the established objectives and targets, the implemented actions, as well as the type and quantity of
residues sent to recycling may be verified, and a documental or electronic register of the whole
information can be kept.
A-42
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
10.1. SANITARY LANDFILL
The Laúca AH sanitary landfill consists of a technique for solid residue disposal on the soil, without
the risk of damages to the health and the safety of the participants, thus minimizing the
environmental impacts. It is located in the Residue Management Center – CGR – distant about
1,300 meters from the lodging, in an area of approximately 0.5 ha.
Ten cells coated with a protective canvas are foreseen to prevent any type of contact of the fluids
with the soil, and a fluid collection network as well, directed to collection tanks and later to the
Effluent Treatment Station – ETE. The cells will receive the non-recyclable residues characterized
by residues from bathrooms, sweeping, napkins, organic residues not used in composing and those
not suitable for recycling. The sanitary landfill will have its cells filled in layers, covered by clayrich material, where the last layer will have a thickness of 70 cm upon the closing of the cell. After
being used, the site will undergo a landscape recovery process by re-vegetation.
10.2. STANDARD OF THE LAÚCA AH – RIVER DEVIATION INCINERATOR
In order to fulfill the necessary demand of the Laúca Hydroelectric Power Plant Project, the
incinerator to be purchased will be similar to the one described below:
MODEL: RGL 200SE with Self-Combustion
DESCRIPTION: Luftech multi-chamber gasification reactor for the incineration of organic
residues, with incineration capacity of 50 Kg/h of residue, generating around 200 Kw of power;
semi-automatic batch feed with pneumatic drive; 220V 3-phase electric command panel; two
(02)temperature sensors being one (01) in the reactor (first combustion chamber) and one (01) in
the cyclone combustor (fourth and last combustion chamber); two (02) temperature indicators for
the reactor and cyclone sensors, where the last one is equipped with a temperature controller; one
(01) pressure sensor for the gasification chamber; one (01) gasification air fan with a 2 cv,
220/380V 3-phase motor; one (01) air-cooled grill; one (01) combustion cyclone with metallic
piping internally coated with insulating refractory concrete to convey the gases and the heat
released by the incineration process to the gas washer.
Energy Usage:
The Luftech incinerators release a large quantity of heat, without using auxiliary fuel, only garbage.
This heat shall be not lost. There are two possible ways of using this energy that Luftech offers
together with its partner companies:
1. Steam or hot water production, by means of a boiler;
A-43
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
2. Refrigerated water production, through a chiller system.
11. MONITORING AND CRITICAL ANALYSIS
In order to verify the efficacy of the Solid Residue Management Plan, the Laúca AH Project – River
deviation will carry out a process monitoring, under the responsibility of the SUSTAINABILITY
area, through:
 The periodic measurement of the generated solid residue quantity and its forms of treatment and
final disposal;
 Inspections in the field and in the Residue Management Center, using specific Checklists and the
general list of the Environmental Management system.
The consolidated result of such measurements will be treated as an entry item of the Critical
Analyses of the Contract’s Integrated SUSTAINABILITY Program, under the responsibility of the
Contract Director and its Managing Team.
12. PREVENTION AND MINIMIZATION OF RESIDUE PRODUCTION
In order to minimize residue production, the Laúca AH Project – River deviation shall adopt some
criteria:
 Incorporation of environmental criteria in the public contracting process for the acquisition
of goods and the rendering of services and contractor works, in order to encourage an
increase in reused and recycled materials in the public contracts covering the construction;
 Selection in an adequate way of all the equipment to be purchased, taking into account the
energy efficiency criteria, specifically regarding Energy-Star computers, monitors and
printers (with energy consumption inhibitors in the off mode), air-conditioning equipment
with “inverter” system and high performance coefficient (COP), purchase of class A electric
appliances (frigorific) among others;
 Execution of contracts with specific provisions for retaking the product, upon the respective
supply;
 Performance of regular maintenance in office equipment, so they will be kept in good
condition and have their service life extended;
A-44
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
 Provision of alternate internal communications circulation/distribution means (using
electronic means), adoption of electronic publication practices in the inquiry of documents
and reports and the creation of electronic document centers, consisting of a common
database.
13. ATTACHMENTS
1. Execution Plan;
2. Flowchart of the Solid Residue Management Process;
3. Monthly Management Report – Residue control in the Work Quarters area;
4. Bill of Lading;
5. Plan view of the Residue Management Center;
6. Work Quarters layout;
7. Layout of the sanitary landfill sorting structure.
A-45
SUSTAINABILITY
INTEGRATED PROGRAM
TYPE:
PROCEDURE
CODE:
PI DRL 25
LEVEL:
CUSTOMER:
REVISION:
00
ACCESS:
UNRESTRICTED
CONTRACT:
Laúca AH – River
Deviation
TITLE:
SOLID RESIDUE GENERATION
YES The residues are hazardous / contaminated? NO
Segregate per type of residue:
Segregate per type of residue:
paper, plastic, glass, metal, etc.
soil, lamps w/mercury, etc.
Store in an adequate place and
Store adequately in identified
quantify at the final destination.
buckets or drums.
Define the final destination
Quantify and ship to final
according to the residue
destination and/or recycling
characteristics.
Obtain approvals and ship to the
Evidence the destination according
licensed sites.
to the local legal documents.
Evidence the destination according
to the local legal documents.
Inform the customer with measurement data and residue monitoring – if a
contractual requirement.
END
A-46
ATTACHMENT VI
BIRD FAUNA IDENTIFIED IN THE FIELD SURVEY
A-47
Male Cardeal tecelão vermelho (Euplectes
Orix)
Male Macarachão de asa laranja
Perdiz de gola vermelha (Pternistes Afer)
Rola preta
Noitibó sardento (Caprimulgus Tristigma)
Tchagra de coroa castanha (Tchagra
australis)
A-48
Male and female Macarachão de asa verde
Perdiz de gola vermelha (Pternistes Afer)
Female Viúvinha do paraíso
Male Viúvinha do paraíso
Escrevedeira das pedras
Alvéola preta e branca (Motacilla aguimp)
A-49
Asa de bronze (Phaps chalcoptera)
Peito de fogo de landanae (Lagonosticta
landanae) Dead male on the road
Male Bico de prata (Ramphocelus carbo)
Noitibó de welwitsch (Caprimulgus fossii)
A-50
ATTACHMENT VII
MAPS AND LAYOUTS
A-51
Legend of drawing:
ESCRITÓRIO DE CAMPO = FIELD OFFICE
REFEITÓRIO AVANÇADO = ADVANCED CANTEEN
SANITÁRIO COLETIVO = COLLECTIVE TOILETS
CENTRAL DE GERADORES = GENERATOR STATION
CENTRAL DE BRITAGEM = CRUSHING STATION
CENTRAL DE GELO = ICE STATION
LABORATÓRIO DE CONCRETO = CONCRETE LABORATORY
CENTRAL DE CONCRETO = CONCRETE STATION
CENTRAL PREMOLDADOS = PRECAST STATION
CENTRAL CARPINTARIA E ARMAÇÃO = FRAMEWORK BUILDING AND ERECTION STATION
CENTRAL DE AR COMPRIMIDO = COMPRESSED AIR STATION
CAIXA SEPARADORA DE ÁGUA E ÓLEO = WATER/OIL SEPARATION BOX
TANQUE DE DECANTAÇÃO = SEDIMENTATION TANK
PLATAFORMA DE LAVAGEM DE VEÍCULOS = VEHICLE WASHING PAD
ESTALEIRO = WORKSHOP
PAIOL DE EXPLOSIVOS = EXPLOSIVE STORAGE
LAYOUT GERAL = GENERAL LAYOUT
ESTALEIRO AVANÇADO = ADVANCED WORK SITE
A-52
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
NOTES:
THE STUDIES PRESENTED HERE ARE PRELIMINARY AND MAY BE SUBJECT TO CHANGES DURING
THE EXECUTION PROJECT
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
GENERAL LAYOUT
ADVANCED WORK QUARTERS
PLAN VIEW
A-53
Legend of drawing:
CENTRAL ECOLÓGICA = ECOLOGIC POWER PLANT
TÚNEL DE ACESSO = ACCESS TUNNEL
DESCARREGADOR DE FUNDO = BOTTOM DISCHARGER
BARRAGEM = DAM
DESCARREGADOR DE CHEIAS = SPILLWAY
TÚNEIS DE DESVIO = DEVIATION TUNNELS
CENTRAL PRINCIPAL = MAIN POWER PLANT
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS IN METERS
LAÚCA HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT
BASIC PROJECT
GENERAL
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
PLAN VIEW
A-54
Legend of drawing:
TÚNEL DE ACESSO = ACCESS TUNNEL
DESCARREGADOR DE FUNDO = BOTTOM DISCHARGER
BARRAGEM = DAM
DESCARREGADOR DE CHEIAS = SPILLWAY
TÚNEIS DE DESVIO = DEVIATION TUNNELS
CENTRAL PRINCIPAL = MAIN POWER PLANT
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
ENSECADEIRA = COFFERDAM
MARGEM DIREITA E ESQUERDA = RIGHT AND LEFT BANK
BACIA DE DISSIPAÇÃO = DISSIPATION BASIN
GALERIA DE DRENAGEM = DRAINAGE TUNNEL
N.A. MIN = MINIMUM WATER LEVEL
BETÃO DE BASE = BASE CONCRETE
CORTE = SECTION
TOMADA CENTRAL ECOLÓGICA = ECOLOGIC POWER PLANT INTAKE
A-55
LAJE DE INJEÇÃO = INJECTION SLAB
DETALHE = DETAIL
DETALHE TÍPICO = TYPICAL DETAIL
BETÃO CONVENCIONAL = CONVENTIONAL CONCRETE
BETÃO COMPACTADO COM CILINDRO = CONCRETE COMPACTED WITH CYLINDER
ESCALA GRÁFICA = GRAPHIC SCALE
REVISÃO GERAL = OVERALL REVISION
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS IN METERS
BASIC PROJECT
TITLE:
BCC DAMS
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
PLAN VIEW AND SECTIONS
Scale INDICATED
Sheet
Intertechne Code 1208-LA-4-GE-G00-00-C-00-DE-0015
Revision BA
Customer Code AHL- DE2-02B01-0001
Revision 0BA
A-56
Legend of drawing:
BARRAGEM = DAM
ESCADAS = STAIRWAYS
ELEVADOR = ELEVATOR
POÇO DE VENTILAÇÃO E ACESSO = VENTILATION SHAFT AND ACCESS
CENTRAL OLEODINÂMICA = OIL-DYNAMIC UNIT
MONOVIA = MONORAIL
SERVOMOTOR = SERVOMOTOR
N.A. MAX. MAX. = MAXIMUM OF MAXIMUMS WATER LEVEL
N.A. NOR. = NORMAL WATER LEVEL
FLUXO = FLOW
HASTE = ROD
GALERIA DE DRENAGEM = DRAINAGE TUNNEL
COMPORTA VAGÃO = WAGON GATE
N.A. MIN. = MINIMUM WATER LEVEL
GRADE = GRATING
GALERIA DE ACESSO = ACCESS TUNNEL
A-57
CORTE = SECTION
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
AERAÇÃO = VENTILATION
ABERTURA DA COMPORTA = GATE OPENING
CONDUTO FORÇADO = PENSTOCK
JUNTA DE DILATAÇÃO = EXPANSION JOINT
APOIO DESLIZANTE = SLIDING SUPPORT
MURO = WALL
COBERTURA METÁLICA (TERMOACÚSTICA) = METALLIC ROOF (THERMOACUSTIC)
PONTE ROLANTE = OVERHEAD CRANE
TRANSFORMADOR = TRANSFORMER
DISTRIBUIDOR = DISTRIBUTER
PROJEÇÃO POÇO DE ESGOTAMENTO = DRAINAGE WELL PROJECTION
UNIDADE = UNIT
DESVIO DO RIO = RIVER DEVIATION
TOMADA DE ÁGUA = WATER INTAKE
PLANTA CHAVE = KEY PLAN VIEW
SEM ESCALA = WITHOUT SCALE
BETÃO CONVENCIONAL = CONVENTIONAL CONCRETE
BETÃO COMPACTADO COM CILINDRO = CONCRETE COMPACTED WITH CYLINDER
REVISÃO GERAL = OVERALL REVISION
NOTE:
ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS IN METERS
BASIC PROJECT
TITLE:
ECOLOGIC POWER PLANT GENERATION CIRCUIT
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
Scale INDICATED
Sheet
Intertechne Code 1208-LA-4-GE-G00-00-C-00-DE-0019
Revision B
Customer Code AHL- DE2-09B01-0001
Revision 0B
A-58
Map Legend:
ENTRADA AH-LAÚCA = LAÚCA AH ENTRANCE
Projeção de albufeira = Reservoir projection
NOTE:
1. Dimensions are indicated in kilometers or otherwise
LAÚCA AH RIVER DEVIATION
GENERAL
RESERVOIR PROJECTION
PLAN VIEW
DRAWING NO. LAU-DR-DE-36D-39-003
DATE 03/07/2012
SHEET 01
SCALE 1:125
REVISION 00
A-59
Legend of drawing:
BOTA-FOR A = DISPOSAL AREA
ACESSO A DESMBOQUE = ACCESS TO DISCHARGE
SEÇÃO = SECTION
TABELA DE COORDENADAS DE BOTA FOR A = DISPOSAL AREA COORDINATES TABLE
PONTO = POINT
NORTE = NORTH
ESTE = EAST
ELEVAÇÃO = ELEVATION
NOTE:
1. DISPOSAL AREA 1 WILL BE USED FOR CONTAMINATED MATERIAL
2. DISPOSAL AREA 2 WILL BE USED FOR THE STORAGE OF MATERIAL PRODUCED BY
THE OPEN AIR EXCAVATION OF THE DOWNWARD DISCHARGE STEP OF EL.: 800.00
3. THE DISPOSAL AREAS WILL BE USED AS WORK PLATFORMS FOR THE RIVER
DEVIATION TEAMS
DISPOSAL AREA
DISPOSAL AREA ACCESS ZONE TO DISCHARGE
PLAN VIEW, SECTIONS
DRAWING NO. LAU-DR-DE-300-91-001
DATE 10/25/2012
SHEET 01
SCALE 1:1000
REVISION 00
A-60
Legend of the drawing:
ÁREA DE ESTOQUE CÉU ABERTO = OPEN AIR STORAGE AREA
VAI PARA A REDIDÊNCIA ... = GOES TO PLANT OWNER’S RESIDENCE
VAGAS = PARKING PLACES
EXISTENTE = EXISTING
VAI PARA OS ESCRITÓRIOS = GOES TO OFFICES
VAI PARA PAIOL DE EXPLOSIVOS … = GOES TO THE WAREHOUSE OF EXPLOSIVES, ACCESSORIES
AND SANITARY LANDFILL
CERCA DO ESTALEIRO = WORK QUARTERS FENCE
COORDENADAS = COORDINATES
PTO = PONIT
E = EAST
N = NORTH
DISCRIMINATION:
1. RAW WATER TANK
2. WATER TREATMENT STATION
3. DRINKING WATER TANK
4. TIRE STORAGE
A-61
5. GAS STORAGE
6. OIL STORAGE
7. TRAINING AREA
8. IT ROOM
9. GENERATOR
10. GENERAL SERVICES
11. PRODUCTION
12. PRODUCTION
13. CONTRACTOR’S OFFICE – PLANNED
14. ANTENNA
15. CONTRACTOR’S OFFICE
16. CONTAINER
17. VEHICLE WASHING PLATFORM – MECHANICAL WORKSHOP
18. LUBRICATION AND TIRE REPAIR WORKSHOP
19. MEDIUM VEHICLE MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP
20. SECURITY’S PAINTING SHOP
21. SUSTAINABILITY
22. MAIN PARKING LOT
23. WAREHOUSE
24. DECANTING TANK
25. HEAVY VEHICLE MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP
26. MEDIUM VEHICLE MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP
27. AUDITORIUM
28. WATER / OIL SEPARATION TANK
29. HEALTHCARE FACILITY
30. GAMEK’S OFFICE
31. CONTRACTOR’S OFFICE – HR
32. PLANT OWNER’S OFICE
33. LIGHT VEHICLE MAINTENANCE WORKSHOP
34. CONTRACTOR’S OFFICE TRANSIT AND SUBCONTRACTING
35. CONTRACTOR’S OFFICE ENGINEERING
36. LOCKER ROOM
37. ROOM FOR INTRODUCTION INTO THE WORKS
38. MOTORCYCLE PARKING LOT
39. MAIN GATE
40. VEHICLE SCALE
41. BUS PARKING LOT
42. GENERATOR ROOM
43. MAIN CANTEEN
44. MAIN CANTEEN PARKING LOT
45. LEISURE AREA AND CORPORATE EVENTS
46. FUEL STORAGE
47. BUS PARKING LOT
A-62
48. BUS DRIVER ROOM
49. BUS DRIVER TOILET
50. BUS PARKING LOT
51. COOKING GAS BOTTLE STORAGE
52. COOKING GAS TANK STORAGE
53. BUS PARKING LOT
54. LEADER’S LODGING
55. SOCIAL SOCCER
56. MULTISPORT COURT
57. OPERATIONAL LODGING
58. TENNIS COURT
59. SEWAGE TREATMENT STATION
60. OPEN AIR ACADEMY
61. TECHNICIAN’S LODGING
62. SOCCER FIELD
63. OPERATIONAL LODGING
64. FEMALE OPERATIONAL LODGING
65. INDUSTRIAL LAUNDRY
66. MANUAL LAUNDRY TANKS
67. DRYING CORD
68. SUSTAINABILITY
69. SUSTAINABILITY
70. CARPENTRY CENTER
71. STEELWORK CENTER
72. CARPENTRY AND STEELWORK TOILET
73. CARPENTRY AND STEELWORK DEPOSIT
74. PROVISORY SOIL LABORATORY
77. SEEDLING BED - SUSTAINABILITY
78. LEISURE AREA COURTS
79. EMPLOYEE’S PARKING PLACES
80. CONTRACTOR’S RESIDENCE
81. PLANT OWNER’S RESIDENCE
82. UNITEL ANTENNA
83. WATER RESERVOIR
84. REST ROOMS
85. PLANT OWNER’S RESIDENCE COURTS
86. SEPTIC TANK
87. FOUNDATION STONE AND FLAGS
88. EMPLOYEE LEISURE AREA
89. PROVISORY SEEDLING BED - SUSTAINABILITY
WORK QUARTERS
A-63
ADVANCED / INDUSTRIAL WORK QUARTERS
GENERAL LAYOUT
PLAN VIEW
DESIGNED BY J.A.
CHECKED BY INDICATED
DATE 04/22/2013
SCALE INDICATED
ODEBRECT NO. LAU-OC-DE-360-39-010_R00
SHEET 00/00
A-64
ESTALEIRO – WORK QUARTERS
DISCRIMINATION:
1. FIELD OFFICE
2. ADVANCED CANTEEN
3. COLLECTIVE TOILET
4. GENERATOR CENTER
5. CRUSHING CENTER
6. ICE CENTER
7. CONCRETE CENTER
8. CONCRETE LABORATORY
9. VEHICLE WASHING PLATFORM
10. DECANTING TANKS
11. WATER / OIL SEPARATION TANKS
12. PRE-MOLDED CENTER
13. CARPENTRY AND STEELWORK CENTER
14. COMPRESSED AIR CENTER
A-65
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
ADVANCED CANTEEN
SANITARY LANDFILL
ACCESSORIES WAREHOUSE
EXPLOSIVES WAREHOUSE
PLANT OWNER’S AND CONTRACTOR’S RESIDENCE
LAYOUT
ADMINISTRATIVE WORK QUARTERS
PLAN VIEW
A-66
MANTA PEAD = PEAD CANVAS
DIQUE = DYKE
DRENO CANAFLEX …. = CANAFLEX DRAIN WITH CRUSHED STONE
NA = WATER LEVEL
EXTENSÃO DA VALA = TRENCH LENGTH
CAIXA DE PASSAGEM = CONNECTION BOX
MANILHA = PIPE
DEPÓSITO =DEPOSIT
TUBO = PIPE
JÁ EXECUTADOS = ALREADY BUILT
ÁREA RESERVADA = RESERVED AREA
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
CORTE = SECTION
VALA EM UTILIZAÇÃO = TRENCH IN USE
VALA PREPARADA = PREPARED TRENCH
A-67
PAIOL DE EXPLOSIVOS = EXPLOSIVES WAREHOUSE
DOCUMENTOS DE REFERÊNCIA = REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
NOTES:
1. OPEN AREA IN USE
2. AREA RESERVED FOR EXPANSION
3. COVERED AREA
4. KEEP ONE TRENCH IN USE AND ONLY ONE SECOND TRENCH PREPARED FOR THE
CONTINUATION OF THE LANDFILL
THE STUDIES PRESENTED HERE ARE PRELIMINARY AND CAN UNDERGO CHANGES DURING THE
EXECUTION PROCESS
ADMINISTRATIVE WORK QUARTERS
SANITARY LANDFILL
SCALE INDICATED
CONTRACTOR NO.
ODEBRECHT NO. (ILLEGIBLE)
SHEET
A-68
ENTRADA = ENTRANCE
Caixa de Betão = Concrete Tank
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
CAIXA = TANK
EIXO = AXIS
VEJA DETALHE = SEE DETAIL
SEÇÃO = SECTION
CAPACIDADE POR CADA ... = CAPACITY PER LANDFILL
ÁREA VERDE =GARDEN
CERRAMENTO = FENCE
Brita = Crushed Stone
SIN ESCALA = WITHOUT SCALE
MALHA = MESH
POSTE DE CONCRETO = CONCRETE POST
DETALHE = DETAIL
POSTE = POST
A-69
CONCRETO = CONCRETE
NOTE:
1. Dimensions in meters unless indicated otherwise
Cambio de desenho = Drawing change
REV. = REVISION
NATUREZA DA REVISÃO = NATURE OF THE REVISION
ELABORADO = PREPARED BY
VERIFICADO = CHECKED BY
APROVADO = APPROVED BY
DATA = DATE
TABELA DE QUANTIDADES DE …. = MATERIAL QUANTITY TABLE
DESCRIPÇÃO = DESCRIPTION
QUANT. = QUANTITY
UNIDADE = UNIT
Postes de betão = Concrete posts
Área da malha = Mesh area
Dreno CANNAFLEX = CANNAFLEX Drain
Tubulação = Piping
Betão para caixas = Concrete for boxes
Volume concreto para piso caixa = Concrete volume for box bottom
Volume concreto para piso aterro = Concrete volume for landfill bottom
Volume concreto para colocar …. = Concrete volume for placing posts
Volume de brita = Crushed stone volume
TABLE OF SANITARY LANDFILL COORDINATES
PONTO = POINT
NORTE = NORTH
ESTE = EAST
LAÚCA AH RIVER DEVIATION
TITLE:
DEFINITIVE WORK QUARTERS
SANITARY LANDFILL
PLAN VIEW, SECTIONS AND DETAILS
DRAWING NO. LAU-LA-DE-134-03-002
DATE 05/16/2012
SHEET 01
SCALE VAR.
REV. 02
A-70
NOTES:
1- ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS IN METERS
2- CARTOGRAPHY BASED ON THE DRAWINGS OF THE NATIONAL GEOLOGY INSTITUTE
REGARDING THE GEOLOCICAL CHART OF ANGOLA OF 1988 AND THE SONOFE REFERRED
TO THE GENERAL MEDIUM KWANZA PLAN OF 1966.
LEGEND:
QUATERNARY: ALLUVIAL DEPOSITS
GRAVEL, SAND AND CLAY
QUATERNARY: ALLUVIAL-PROLUVIAL DEPOSITS
ANGLED BOULDERS, SAND AND CLAY
UPPER PROTEROZOIC – UPPER RIFTEAN / VENDIAN
NON-DIFFERENTIATED GRESOUS SCHIST, META-ARENITE WITH THICK STRATIFICATION, METASILTITE; CEMENTED GRAVEL AND META-CONGLOMERATES ON THE BASE
UPPER PROTEROZOIC – MEDIUM-UPPER RIFTEAN
CALCAREOUS SCHIST GROUP, ALTERNATING META-ARENITE, ARGILITE, DOLOMITE, LIMESTONE,
CEMENTED GRAVEL AND META-CONGLOMERATES ON THE BASE
LOWER PROTEROZOIC – OENDOLONGO GROUP
A-71
META-CONGLOMERATES, QUARTZITE, META-ARENITE, META-SILTITE, GREYWACKE, MICACEOUS
SCHIST, QUARTZITE
UPPER ARCHEAN/LOWER PROTEROZOIC
GNEISS, AMPHIBOLITE SCHIST, QUARTZITE, CHARNOCKITE, ITABIRITE LENSES
LOWER PROTEROZOIC INTRUSIONS
BIOTITIC GRANITE AND SYONITE-DIORITE OF THE QUIBALA COMPLEX
UPPER ARCHEAN INTRUSIONS
COMPLEX OF BIOTITIC GRANITE AND REGIONAL GRANODIORITE
STRUCTURES:
- FAILURE CHECKED (a) AND INFERRED (b)
- CONTACT CHECKED (a) AND INFERRED (b)
- VERTICAL FOLIATION DIRECTION
- LAYER DIRECTION AND DROP
- DAM AXIS
- TUNNEL AXIS
- RESERVOIR
CORTE = SECTION
PLANTA = PLAN VIEW
TROCA DE CARIMBO = LEGEND CHANGE
title:
GENERAL - GEOLOGY
REGIONAL GEOLOGICAL MAPPING
PLAN VIEW
Scale INDICATED
Sheet
Document code 0704-MK-DE-110-12-101
Revision B
A-72
ALTIMETRIC SCALE (METERS):
acima de = above
abaixo de = below
LEGEND:
BORDER OF THE DIRECT INFLUENCE AREA
MEDIUM QWANZA BORDER
URBAN AREA
PROVINCE BORDER
A-73
LAÚCA AHE
CAPANDA AHE
WATER SPRINGS
RAILWAYS
CART TRAILS
ROADS
LEVELED ROADS
NOTES:
1- SRTM3 ALTIMETRIC DATA WITH 90 M-RESOLUTION
2- DATA SOURCE: MAP SCALE 1:500,000, PUBLISHING YEAR: 1991
(SHEET 4 – UIGE, SHEET 7 – LUANDA, SHEET 8 – MALANGE, SHEET 11 – SUMBE, SHEET 12 –
ANDULO)
3- WGS PROJECTION 1984, FUSE 33 S
title:
GENERAL
ALTIMETRY OF THE MEDIUM KWANZA BASIN
MAP
Scale INDICATED
Sheet
Document code 0704-LA-DE-140-15-002
Revision A
A-74
TYPES OF SOIL:
1. FLIVIAL ALLUVIAL SOILS
2. HYDROMORPHIC ORGANIC SOILS
3. MUD
4. OXY-SIALITIC SOILS
5. ARENOUS BROWN SOILS
6. FERRALITIC SOILS
a.
b.
Typical ferralitic
Poorly ferralitic (of consolidated sedimentary rock)
A-75
c.
d.
e.
Poorly ferralitic (of crystalline rock)
Ferralitic with laterite
Arenous ferralitic
7. PARAFERRALITIC SOILS
1. Paraferralitic
2. Paraferralitic associated to lithosols
8.
PSAMITIC SOILS
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Psamitic of humid regions
Psamitic and Psamoferralic
Psamo-fersialic
Psamoferralic
TROPICAL ARIDIC SOILS
BROWN CALCAREOUS SOILS
CALCIALITIC SOILS OF SUB-HUMID REGIONS
TROPICAL FERSIALITIC
SOILS WITH LATERITIC MATERIALS CLOSE TO THE SURFACE
LITHOSOLS AND ROCK UPCROPS
ROCKY TERRAIN AND ROCK OUTCROPS
LEGEND:
SOIL CODE
PROVINCE BORDER
URBAN AREA
BORDER OF THE DIRECT INFLUENCE AREA
MEDIUM QWANZA BORDER
RAILWAYS
CART TRAILS
ROADS
LEVELED ROADS
WATER SPRINGS
LAÚCA AHE
CAPANDA AHE
NOTES:
1- SOURCE: CASTANHEIRA DINIZ, A. GRANDES BACIAS HIDROGRÁFICAS DE ANGOLA,
RECURSOS EM TERRAS COM APTIDÃO PARA O REGADIO. PORTUGUESE AGENCY FOR
SUPPORT TO DEVELOPMENT AND THE PORTUGUESE COOPERATION INSTITUTE, LISBON,
2002.
A-76
2- DATA SOURCE: MAP SCALE 1:500,000
(SHEET 4 – UIGE, SHEET 7 – LUANDA, SHEET 8 – MALANGE, SHEET 11 – SUMBE, SHEET 12 –
ANDULO)
3- WGS PROJECTION 1984, FUSE 33 S
title:
GENERAL
ISODECLIVITY OF THE MEDIUM KWANZA BASIN
MAP
Scale INDICATED
Sheet
Document code 0704-LA-DE-140-16-001
Revision A
A-77

Final Report (May 2013

Transcription

Similar documents

0859 SKY 11 BB H - Sky Lake Sions Loft

Dam water Intake

Chesaning

Num. 23, December 2010 (pdf 3.6 MB)

From: Lee Sexsmith [mailto:hecubuspg@telus

Milltown Dam Removal - Association of Conservation Engineers

Módulo 5 4: Deslizamientos, flujos de escombro (huaycos), aluviones

Wild Capeb.indd - World Wide Creative

alex jimmy mila jonas charlie